Yokogawa Centum VP Combined Volumes [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

Reference Function Block Details Vol.2 IM 33M01A30-40E

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition

TocD-1

CENTUM VP Reference Function Block Details Vol.2 IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition

CONTENTS PART-D D2.

Function Block Details

Arithmetic Calculation, Logic Operation............................................................D2-1 D2.1

Common Functions of Calculation Blocks.................................................. D2-2

D2.2

Data Handled by Calculation Blocks............................................................ D2-5

D2.3

Types of Calculation Blocks.......................................................................... D2-7 D2.3.1

Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block.............................................. D2-10

D2.3.2

Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block.............................. D2-18

D2.4

Addition Block (ADD)................................................................................... D2-21

D2.5

Multiplication Block (MUL)........................................................................... D2-24

D2.6

Division Block (DIV)...................................................................................... D2-27

D2.7

Averaging Block (AVE)................................................................................. D2-30

D2.8

Square Root Block (SQRT).......................................................................... D2-36

D2.9

Exponential Block (EXP).............................................................................. D2-39

D2.10

First-Order Lag Block (LAG)........................................................................ D2-42

D2.11

Integration Block (INTEG)............................................................................ D2-46

D2.12

Derivative Block (LD).................................................................................... D2-51

D2.13

Ramp Block (RAMP)..................................................................................... D2-55

D2.14

Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)............................................................................. D2-59

D2.15

Dead-Time Block (DLAY).............................................................................. D2-63

D2.16

Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)................................................ D2-68

D2.17

Moving-Average Block (AVE-M).................................................................. D2-72

D2.18

Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C)............................................................ D2-76

D2.19

Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR)............................... D2-81

D2.20

Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL)............................. D2-85

D2.21

ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1)................................................ D2-91

D2.22

ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2)............................................... D2-95

D2.23

Logical AND Block (AND), Logical OR Block (OR).................................... D2-99

D2.24

Logical NOT Block (NOT)........................................................................... D2-102

D2.25

Flip-Flop Blocks (SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R)........................... D2-104

D2.26

Wipeout Block (WOUT) ............................................................................. D2-108

D2.27

ON-Delay Timer Block (OND)......................................................................D2-111

D2.28

OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD) ................................................................ D2-115

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocD-2 D2.29

One-Shot Blocks Rise Trigger (TON), Fall Trigger (TOFF)..................... D2-119

D2.30

Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ)............................................... D2-122

D2.31

Bitwise AND Block (BAND), Bitwise OR Block (BOR) ........................... D2-125

D2.32

Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT)........................................................................ D2-128

D2.33

General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C).................... D2-131

D2.34

Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33)................... D2-139

D2.35

One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91)........................ D2-142

D2.36

Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16)........................................... D2-145

D2.37

Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C)............................. D2-148

D2.38

Data Set Block (DSET)................................................................................ D2-151

D2.39

Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI)...................................... D2-154

D2.40

One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L).................................................... D2-158

D2.41

One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C)........................................ D2-162

D2.42

Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L).................................................... D2-165

D2.43

Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C)........................................ D2-169

D2.44

Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L)..................................................... D2-172

D2.45

Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C)......................................... D2-175

D2.46

Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL).......................................................... D2-178

D2.47

General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions............................................... D2-183 D2.47.1 Basic Items of the General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions...... D2-184 D2.47.2 Constants in General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions.............. D2-188 D2.47.3 Variables...................................................................................... D2-190 D2.47.4 Operators..................................................................................... D2-197 D2.47.5 Arithmetic Expressions................................................................ D2-200 D2.47.6 Control Statements...................................................................... D2-204 D2.47.7 Error Handling.............................................................................. D2-209 D2.47.8 Built-In Functions......................................................................... D2-213 D2.47.9 Reserved Words for Numerical and Logical Arithmetic Expressions................................................................................. D2-219

D3.

Sequence Control....................................................................................D3-1 D3.1

D3.2

Types of Sequence Control Blocks.............................................................. D3-3 D3.1.1

Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks............................... D3-6

D3.1.2

Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks........................................ D3-7

Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)........................................................... D3-8 D3.2.1

Sequence Table Configuration.......................................................D3-11

D3.2.2

Creating a Sequence Table........................................................... D3-16

D3.2.3

Sequence Table Processing Flow................................................. D3-19

D3.2.4

Input Processing of Sequence Table............................................. D3-28

D3.2.5

Condition Rule Processing of Sequence Table............................. D3-30

D3.2.6

Action Rule Processing of Sequence Table................................... D3-31

D3.2.7

Output Processing of Sequence Table.......................................... D3-32

D3.2.8

Number of Condition Signals and Action Signals.......................... D3-33

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocD-3 D3.2.9

Rule Extension............................................................................... D3-34

D3.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data .................................................................................. D3-36 D3.2.11 Control Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table ........... D3-57 D3.2.12 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Logic Chart Reference in Sequence Table.................................... D3-67 D3.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and I/O Data........................................................ D3-68 D3.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table....................................... D3-88 D3.2.15 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for a Logic Chart from a Sequence Table..... D3-97 D3.2.16 Data Items of the Sequence Table Block (ST16)........................... D3-98 D3.3

Logic Chart Block (LC64)............................................................................. D3-99 D3.3.1

Configuration of a Logic Chart..................................................... D3-101

D3.3.2

Creating a Logic Chart Block....................................................... D3-104

D3.3.3

Logic Chart Processing Flow....................................................... D3-106

D3.3.4

Input Processing of Logic Chart................................................... D3-107

D3.3.5

Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart............................... D3-108

D3.3.6

Output Processing of Logic Chart.................................................D3-114

D3.3.7

Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data........................D3-115

D3.3.8

Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Referencing Logic Chart.............................................................. D3-136

D3.3.9

Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table in a Logic Chart............................ D3-137

D3.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and I/O Data...... D3-140 D3.3.11 Syntax for Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation of Logic Chart . ........................................... D3-158 D3.3.12 Syntax for Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation of Sequence Table from Logic Chart.......... D3-159 D3.3.13 Behavior of Logic Chart Internal Timer........................................ D3-162 D3.3.14 Data Items of Logic Chart Block - LC64...................................... D3-163

D4.

D3.4

Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block...... D3-164

D3.5

Timer Block (TM)......................................................................................... D3-190

D3.6

Software Counter Block (CTS).................................................................. D3-201

D3.7

Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP).................................................... D3-205

D3.8

Code Input Block (CI).................................................................................. D3-213

D3.9

Code Output Block (CO)............................................................................. D3-219

D3.10

Relational Expression Block (RL)............................................................. D3-224

D3.11

Resource Scheduler Block (RS)................................................................ D3-229

D3.12

Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)................................................................. D3-239

Faceplate Blocks.....................................................................................D4-1 D4.1

Types of Faceplate Blocks............................................................................. D4-2

D4.2

Push Button Operation of Faceplate Blocks............................................... D4-4 IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocD-4 D4.3

D5.

Block Mode and Status of Faceplate Blocks............................................... D4-6 D4.3.1

Block Mode of Faceplate Blocks...................................................... D4-7

D4.3.2

Block Status of Faceplate Blocks.................................................. D4-10

D4.3.3

Alarm Status of Faceplate Blocks.................................................. D4-12

D4.3.4

Data Status of Faceplate Blocks.................................................... D4-14

D4.4

Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2)........................................ D4-15

D4.5

Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S).......................................... D4-19

D4.6

Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3)........................................... D4-23

D4.7

Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)............................................................. D4-27

D4.8

Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C)......................................................D4-34

D4.9

Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C).................................. D4-41

D4.10

Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C)...................................... D4-49

Sequential Function Chart.....................................................................D5-1 D5.1

D5.2

D5.3

D5.4

SFC Elements.................................................................................................. D5-5 D5.1.1

Step.................................................................................................. D5-6

D5.1.2

Transition....................................................................................... D5-10

D5.1.3

Links............................................................................................... D5-12

D5.1.4

Step & Selective Sequences......................................................... D5-14

Action Description Using SEBOL............................................................... D5-16 D5.2.1

Step Common Items...................................................................... D5-17

D5.2.2

Initial Step...................................................................................... D5-21

D5.2.3

SEBOL Steps................................................................................. D5-23

D5.2.4

SEBOL One-Shot Steps................................................................ D5-24

Action Description Using Sequence Table................................................ D5-26 D5.3.1

Step Common Item Description Using the Sequence Table......... D5-27

D5.3.2

Sequence Table Steps................................................................... D5-30

D5.3.3

Sequence Table One-Shot Steps.................................................. D5-31

Action Description Using Logic Chart........................................................ D5-32 D5.4.1

Step Common Item Description Using Logic Chart....................... D5-33

D5.4.2

Logic Chart Steps.......................................................................... D5-35

D5.4.3

Logic Chart One-Shot Steps.......................................................... D5-36

D5.5

Transition Conditions................................................................................... D5-37

D5.6

SFC Block Action.......................................................................................... D5-38 D5.6.1

Queue Signal Processing.............................................................. D5-42

D5.6.2

Status Change Processing............................................................ D5-48

D5.6.3

Interrupt Signal Processing............................................................ D5-53

D5.6.4

Error Processing............................................................................ D5-56

D5.6.5

Terminating SFC Block Execution................................................. D5-57

D5.6.6

Pausing SFC Block Execution....................................................... D5-58

D5.6.7

Referencing Current Step.............................................................. D5-62

D5.6.8

Changing Current Step ................................................................ D5-63

D5.6.9

SFC Block Alarm Processing......................................................... D5-64 IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocD-5 D5.6.10 SFC Online Maintenance.............................................................. D5-66 D5.6.11 SFC Block Execution..................................................................... D5-67 D5.6.12 Data Items - SFC........................................................................... D5-68 D5.6.13 SFC Block Mode & Status............................................................. D5-76 D5.7

Manipulating Unit Instrument from SFC Block.......................................... D5-79

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page



D2-1

D2. Arithmetic Calculation, Logic Operation The arithmetic calculation and logic operation function blocks perform general-purpose calculation processing, such as arithmetic calculation, analog calculation and logic operation. The arithmetic calculation and logic operation blocks include numeric calculation blocks, analog calculation blocks, general-purpose calculation blocks, calculation auxiliary blocks and logic operation blocks. This chapter explains each model of calculation and logic operation function blocks.

n Arithmetic Calculation and Logic Operation The general-purpose calculation processing such as arithmetic calculation, analog calculation and logic operation (*1) are performed to input signals to improve the regulatory control and sequence control. The function block that executes arithmetic calculation is referred as the calculation block. The following figure shows the calculation blocks in basic control architecture. *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

FCS Basic control

Software I/O

Regulatory control blocks

Internal switch

Calculation blocks

Annunciator message

Sequence control blocks

Sequence control message

Faceplate blocks SFC blocks Unit instrument blocks

Options Valve pattern monitoring (*1) Off-site blocks (*1)

FCS I/O Interfaces Process I/O

Communication I/O

Fieldbus I/O D020001E.ai

*1:

This option can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Figure Calculation Blocks in Basic Control Architecture

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-2

D2.1 Common Functions of Calculation Blocks Calculation blocks provide calculation functions for analog signals and contact signals. Calculation blocks convert the calculation results into the signals that can be used by other function blocks.

n Calculation Blocks Calculation blocks receive analog signals (analog values) or contact signals (digital values) as input values, and perform calculation according to the set parameters. The result of calculation is outputted as the calculated output value (CPV). Following diagram shows the architecture of calculation blocks. P1

IN

Input processing

Pn

RV

Q01

RV1

Qn

RVn

CPV

Calculation processing

Output processing

OUT

CPV1

J01

CPVn

Jn

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D020101E.ai

IN Qn RV RVn Pn OUT Jn CPV CPVn SUB

: : : : : : : : : :

Input terminal (main input) Input terminal (subsidiary input) Calculated input value Calculated input value Set parameter Output terminal (main output) Output terminal (subsidiary output) Calculated output value Calculated output value Auxiliary output

Figure Architecture of Calculation Blocks

All calculation blocks are provided with the following three processing functions. • Input processing: Receive the signal from the input terminal and convert the signal into the calculation input value (RV). • Calculation processing: Read the calculation input value (RV) and perform calculation processing then output the result as calculated output value (CPV). • Output processing: Read the calculated output value (CPV) and output the calculation result as an output signal to the connected destination of the output terminal.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-3

Furthermore, to perform calculation with data of other function blocks via data setting or data reference functions may bypass the input processing and output processing.

SEE

ALSO

• For details on input processing common to calculation blocks, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on output processing common to calculation blocks, see the following: C4, “Output Processing”

n Logic Operation Blocks Logic operation blocks (*1) receive analog signals (analog values) or contact signals (digital values) as input values, and perform calculation according to the set parameters. The result of calculation is outputted as the calculated output value (CPV). *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

The following diagram shows the architecture of the Logic Operation Block.

IN

Q01

RV

Input processing

Qn

RV1

RVn

CPV

Calculation processing

CPV1

CPVn

OUT

Output processing

J01

Jn

Logic operation blocks (*1) D020102E.ai

IN Qn RV RVn OUT Jn CPV CPVn

: : : : : : : :

Input terminal (main input) Input terminal (subsidiary input) Calculated input value Calculated input value Output terminal (main output) Output terminal (subsidiary output) Calculated output value Calculated output value

Figure Architecture of Logic Operation Blocks

All calculation blocks are provided with the following three processing functions. • Input processing: Receive the signal from the input terminal and convert the signal into the calculation input value (RV). • Calculation processing: Read the calculation input value (RV) and perform calculation processing then output the result as calculated output value (CPV). • Output processing: Read the calculated output value (CPV) and output the calculation result as an output signal to the connected destination of the output terminal.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-4

Furthermore, to perform calculation with data of other function blocks via data setting or data reference functions may bypass the input processing and output processing.

SEE

ALSO

• For details on input processing common to calculation blocks, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on output processing common to calculation blocks, see the following: C4, “Output Processing”

n Calculation Output Operation The calculation output operation is a function that converts the operation results of a calculation block into actual calculated output values (CPV). There are two types of calculation output operations: velocity type and positional type.

l Positional type Changes the calculated output value (CPVn) for the present calculation result to the actual calculated output value (CPVn).

l Velocity type Adds the difference (CPVn) between the calculated output value for the present calculation result (CPVn) and that for the previous calculation result (CPVn-1) to the value read back (CPVrb) from the output destination, and determines the actual calculated output value (CPVn). The arithmetic calculation block and analog calculation block are the only calculation blocks that can use the velocity type.

l Setting the Calculation Output Operation In the case of an arithmetic calculation block or an analog calculation block, the calculation output operation is set using the Function Block Detail Builder. Calculation blocks that are neither an arithmetic calculation block nor an analog calculation block only have the “Positional Output Action” calculation output operation, so no setting is necessary. • Control Calculation Output Type: Select from either “Velocity Output Action” or “Positional Output Action” The default is “Positional Output Action.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-5

D2.2 Data Handled by Calculation Blocks The calculation blocks can handle both the external data related to outside and the internal data related only to inside calculation processing.

n I/O Data Handled by Calculation Blocks The I/O data handled by calculation blocks consists of data values and data statuses.

l Data Value The calculation blocks can handle the following types of data: floating-point, double-precision floating-point, integer and character string. When exchange data with other function blocks, if the data are in different type, the calculation block executes the following processing. • When refer data from a function block The calculation block converts the data into the type suitable itself. • When set data to a function block The calculation block converts the data suitable to the objective function block. Because of the above processing, the engineer need not worry about the data type difference when generate and connect calculation blocks in the Function Block Detail Builder. The I/O data types and set parameters applied to each type of calculation block are shown below. Table

I/O data types and set parameters

Block type

Input data

Output data

Set parameter

Arithmetic calculation

Double-precision floating-point

Double-precision floating-point

Not specified

Analog calculation

Single-precision floating-point

Single-precision floating-point

Single-precision floating-point, integer

Logic operation (*1)

integer (logical value)

integer (logical value)

Not specified

Double-precision floating-point, character string

integer (logical value)

Not specified

integer

Not specified

Relational operation

Bitwise logic operation integer General-purpose calculation

Double-precision floating-point, character string

Double-precision floating-point, character string

Double-precision floating-point, character string

Calculation auxiliary

Double-precision floating-point

Double-precision floating-point

Double-precision floating-point, integer

Calculation auxiliary (for character strings only)

Character string

Character string

Character string, integer D020201E.ai

Note: The analog calculation blocks handle data in engineering unit so that the internal data is floating type. The general-purpose calculation blocks and calculation auxiliary blocks can pre-determine each individual data item type in each function block. *1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-6

l Data Status The calculated output value (CPV) data status varies depending on whether the builder-specified item “Output Value Tracking,” is enabled or disabled. • When output value tracking is “No” The calculated output value (CPV) is the result of calculation. It does not track to the data of the output connected destination. Therefore, data statuses for the calculated output value (CPV) are BAD (invalid), QST (questionable data value) and CAL (calibration). • When output value tracking is “Yes” The calculated output value (CPV) is the result of calculation. It tracks to the output connected destination’s data under the certain status. Therefore, the data status, those often used for other function blocks but seldom for calculation blocks such as CND (conditional) or NFP (non process origin), may occur to the calculated output value (CPV). The status of output value tracking can be indicated from the data status of the calculated output value (CPV). When CPV data status is BAD, QST, CAL, NEFV, (IOP+, IOP-, OOP, NRDY, PEAL, LPFL), the CPV Output value tracking is disabled. When CPV data status is BAD, QST, CAL, NEFV, CND, NFP, (IOP+, IOP-, OOP, NRDY, PEAL, LPFL), the CPV Output value tracking is enabled. Note: The data status in parentheses is only for CPV of the addition, multiplication, division, analog calculation or general-purpose calculation blocks.

When a process I/O-related data status (IOP+, IOP-, OOP, NRDY) occurs to the calculated input value (RV), the analog calculation blocks pass the data status to the calculated output value (CPV), regardless of whether output tracking is enabled or disabled. Thus, the data status occurred on the input side, such as IOP+ (input open high), is passed to the function block connected to it. The calculation block will set the status of calculated data as a bad data (BAD) when an error occurs in the course of calculation. Calculation error may be generated in the following cases. •  When the calculation result overflows. •  When the divisor of the calculation is zero, the calculation is zero divided. •  When calculate the square root of a negative number in the calculation.

SEE

ALSO

For the details of data status, see the following: C6.4, “Data Status”

n Calculation Precision In a calculation block, all numeric values are calculated as double-precision floating-point numbers. Numeric value data other than double-precision floating-point data are converted to double-precision floating-point data inside the calculation block prior to the execution of calculation processing. Therefore, calculation precision up to the double-precision floating point is ensured.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-7

D2.3 Types of Calculation Blocks According to the data type and calculation processing capability, the calculation function blocks are classified into arithmetic calculation blocks, analog calculation blocks, general-purpose calculation blocks and calculation auxiliary blocks.

n Arithmetic Calculation Blocks Table

Arithmetic Calculation Blocks Block type

Arithmetic calculation blocks

Code

Name

ADD

Addition Block

MUL

Multiplication Block

DIV

Division Block

AVE

Averaging Block

Input terminals

Output terminals

2

2

8

2 D020301E.ai

Note: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals.

n Analog Calculation Blocks Table

Analog Calculation Blocks Block type

Code SQRT

Square Root Block

EXP

Exponential Block

LAG

First-Order Lag Block

INTEG

Integration Block

LD

Derivative Block

RAMP

Ramp Block

LDLAG

Lead/Lag Block

Analog calculation blocks DLAY

Input terminals

Name

Output terminals

1

2

3

2

2

2

Dead-Time Block

DLAY-C

Dead-Time Compensation Block

AVE-M

Moving-Average Block

AVE-C

Cumulative-Average Block

FUNC-VAR

Variable Line-Segment Function Block

TPCFL

Temperature and Pressure Correction Block

ASTM1

ASTM Correction Block: Old JIS

ASTM2

ASTM Correction Block: New JIS

D020302E.ai

Note: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-8

n Logic Operation Blocks Table

Logic Operation Blocks Block type

Logic Operation blocks (*1)

Code

Name

AND

Logical AND Block

OR

Logical OR Block

NOT

Logical NOT Block

SRS1-S

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

SRS1-R

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

SRS2-S

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

SRS2-R

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

WOUT

Wipeout Block

OND

ON-Delay Timer Block

OFFD

OFF-Delay Timer Block

TON

One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge Trigger)

TOFF

One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge Trigger)

GT

Comparator Block (Greater Than)

GE

Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)

EQ

Equal Operator Block

BAND

Bitwise AND Block

BOR

Bitwise OR Block

BNOT

Bitwise NOT Block

Input terminals

Output terminals

2

1

1

1

2

1

2

2

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

1 D020303E.ai

Note: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals. *1 : Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n General-Purpose Calculation Blocks Table

General-Purpose Calculation Blocks Block type

General-purpose calculation blocks

Code

Name

CALCU

General-Purpose Calculation Block

CALCU-C

General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O

Input terminals

Output terminals

32

17 D020304E.ai

Note: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-9

n Calculation Auxiliary Blocks Table

Calculation Auxiliary Blocks Block type

Calculation auxiliary blocks

Code

Name

Input terminals

Output terminals

SW-33

Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block

9 (3) (*1)

3 (9) (*1)

SW-91

One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block

9 (1) (*2)

1 (9) (*2)

DSW-16

Selector Switch Block for 16 Data

DSW-16C

Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data

0

1

DSET

Data Set Block

DSET-PVI

Data Set Block with Input Indicator

1

2

BDSET-1L

One-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-1C

One-Batch String Data Set Block

0

16

BDSET-2L

Two-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-2C

Two-Batch String Data Set Block

0

16

BDA-L

Batch Data Acquisition Block

BDA-C

Batch String Data Acquisition Block

16

0

ADL

Inter-Station Data Link Block

0

0 D020306E.ai

Note: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals. *1: 3 input terminals and 9 output terminals can be used. *2: One input terminal and 9 output terminals can be used.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-10

D2.3.1

Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block

A list of the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing that can be performed for each calculation block is shown below.

n Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block Table

Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (1/3) Model

Input signal conversion

Digital filter

Totalizer

PV overshoot

CAL

ADD

BARPPqSb

x

x

MUL

BARPPqSb

x

x

DIV

BARPPqSb

x

x

AVE

B

x

SQRT

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

EXP

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

LAG

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

INTEG

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

LD

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

RAMP

BARPPqSb

x

x

LDLAG

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

DLAY

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

DLAY-C

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

AVE-M

BARPPqSb

x

x

AVE-C

BARPPqSb

x

x

BARPPqSb (*1)

(*1)

x

TPCFL

BARPPqSb

x

x

ASTM1

BARPPqSb

x

x

ASTM2

BARPPqSb

x

x

FUNC-VAR

D020307E.ai

B: No conversion (function block) A: No conversion (analog input) R: Square root conversion (analog input) P: Control priority type pulse-train input conversion Pq: Exact totalization pulse-train input conversion Sb: Subsystem input x: Exists Blank: Not exist *1: The input processing other than the calibration function will not function when data setting is performed to the PV by cascade connection.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-11

Table

Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (2/3) – Logic Operation Block (*1) Model

Input signal conversion

Digital filter

Totalizer

PV overshoot

CAL

AND

x

OR

x

NOT

x

SRS1-S

x

SRS1-R

x

SRS2-S

x

SRS2-R

x

WOUT

x

OND

x

OFFD

x

TON

x

TOFF

x

GT

x

GE

x

EQ

x

BAND

x

BOR

x

BNOT

x D020308E.ai

x: Exists Blank: Not exist *1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-12

Table

Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (3/3) Input signal conversion

Digital filter

Totalizer

PV overshoot

CAL

CALCU

BARPPqSbL

x

x

x

x

CALCU-C

BARPPqSbL

x

x

x

x

Model

SW-33

x

SW-91

x

DSW-16

x

DSW-16C

x

DSET DSET-PVI

x BARPSbL

x

x

x

x

BDSET-1L BDSET-1C BDSET-2L BDSET-2C BDA-L BDA-C D020309E.ai

B: No conversion (function block) A: No conversion (analog input) R: Square root conversion (analog input) P: Control priority type pulse-train input conversion Pq: Exact totalization type pulse-train input conversion Sb: Subsystem input L: PV limit x: Exists Blank: Not exist

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-13

n Output Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block Table

Output Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (1/2)

Type

Output limit

Velocity limit

Clamped output

PMV

Output track

Range track

Auxiliary output

Output signal conversion

ADD

(*2)

CCd

BASb

MUL

(*2)

CCd

BASb

DIV

(*2)

CCd

BASb

AVE

(*2)

CCd

BASb

AQRT

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

EXP

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

LAG

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

INTEG

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

LD

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

(*2)

CCd

BASb

RAMP LDLAG

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

DLAY

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

DLAY-C

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

AVE-M

(*2)

CCd

BASb

AVE-C

(*2)

CCd

BASb

FUNC-VAR

(*2)

CCd

BASb

TPCFL

(*1)

(*2)

CCd

BASb

ASTM1

(*2)

CCd

BASb

ASTM2

(*2)

CCd

BASb

Logic Operation Blocks (*3) D020310E.ai

C: Cd: B: A: Sb: *1: *2: *3:

CPV ∆CPV Unconverted output (function block) Analog output Subsystem output Only tracking of the CLP ± status of the output destination is performed. Selectable by builder setting. Logic Operation Blocks contain the following models. The Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS. If the connection method of an output terminal is “status manipulation,” the operation specification defined for the output terminal is executed. AND, OR, NOT, SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R, WOUT, OND, OFFD, TON, TOFF, GT, GE, EQ, BAND, BOR, BNOT

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-14

Table Type

Output Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (2/2) Output limit

Velocity limit

Clamped output

PMV

Output track

Range track

Auxiliary output

Output signal conversion

CALCU

(*1)

CCd

BASb

CALCU-C

(*1)

CCd

BASb

SW-33 SW-91 x

BASb

DSET

x

BASb

DSET-PVI

x

DSW-16 DSW-16C

CCdSSd

BASb

DSET-1L DSET-1C DSET-2L DSET-2C BDA-L BDA-C D020311E.ai

C: Cd: S: Sd: B: A: Sb: *1:

CPV ∆CPV SV ∆SV Unconverted output (function block) Analog output Subsystem output Possible if explicitly input using computational expression

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-15

n Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block Table

Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (1/3) Common process alarms

Code

N R

O O P

I O P

I O P -

x

x

H H

L L

H I

L O

D V +

D V -

V E L +

V E L -

M H I

M L O

C N F

Other alarms

ADD MUL DIV AVE SQRT EXP LAG INTEG LD RAMP LDLAG

x

x

DLAY DLAY-C AVE-M AVE-C FUNC FUNC-VAR TPCFL ASTM1 ASTM2 D020312E.ai

x: Available Blank: Not available

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-16

Table

Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (2/3) – Logic Operation Block (*1) Common process alarms

Code

N R

O O P

I O P

I O P -

x

x

H H

L L

H I

L O

D V +

D V -

V E L +

V E L -

M H I

M L O

C N F

Other alarms

AND OR NOT SRS1-S SRS1-R SRS2-S SRS2-R WOUT OND OFFD

x

x

TON TOFF GT GE EQ BAND BOR BNOT D020313E.ai

x: Available Blank: Not available *1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-17

Table

Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (3/3) Common process alarms

Code

CALCU CALCU-C

N R

x

O O P

I O P

I O P -

x

x

H H

L L

H I

L O

D V +

D V -

V E L +

V E L -

M H I

M L O

C N F

Other alarms

x

CERR

SW-33 SW-91 DSW-16 DSW-16C

x

x

DSET DSET-PVI

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

BDSET-1L BDSET-1C BDSET-2L BDSET-2C

x

x

BDA-L BDA-C D020314E.ai

x: Available Blank: Not available

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-18

D2.3.2

Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block

A list of valid block modes for each calculation block is shown below.

n Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block Table

Valid Basic Block Modes for Calculation Blocks (1/3) Valid basic block modes

Type

Name

ADD

Addition Block

MUL

Multiplication Block

DIV

Division Block

AVE

Averaging Block

SQRT

Square Root Block

EXP

Exponential Block

LAG

First-order Lag Block

INTEG

Integration Block

LD

Derivative Block

RAMP

Ramp Block

LDLAG

Lead/Lag Block

DLAY

Dead-Time Block

DLAY-C

Dead-Time Compensation Block

AVE-M

Moving-Average Block

AVE-C

Cumulative-Average Block

FUNC-VAR

Variable Line-Segment Function Block

TPCFL

Temperature and Pressure Correction Block

ASTM1

ASTM Correction Block:Old JIS

ASTM2

ASTM Correction Block:New JIS

O I T M A C P R R / M R A U A R C O S A K N T S D A U N S T

x

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

D020315E.ai

x: -:

Valid Invalid

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-19

Table

Valid Basic Block Modes for Calculation Blocks (2/3) Valid basic block modes

Type

Name

AND (*1)

Logical AND Block

OR (*1)

Logical OR Block

NOT (*1)

Logical NOT Block

SRS1-S (*1)

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

SRS1-R (*1)

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

SRS2-S (*1)

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

SRS2-R (*1)

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

WOUT (*1)

Wipeout Block

OND (*1)

ON-Delay Timer Block

OFFD (*1)

OFF-Delay Timer Block

TON (*1)

One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge Trigger)

TOFF (*1)

One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge Trigger)

GT (*1)

Comparator Block (Greater Than)

GE (*1)

Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)

EQ (*1)

Equal Operator Block

BAND (*1)

Bitwise AND Block

BOR (*1)

Bitwise OR Block

BNOT (*1)

Bitwise NOT Block

CALCU

General-Purpose Calculation Block

CALCU-C

General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O

O I T M A C P R R / M R A U A R C O S A K N T S D A U N S T

x

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

D020316E.ai

x: -: *1:

Valid Invalid Logic Operation Blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-20

Table

Valid Basic Block Modes for Calculation Blocks (3/3) Valid basic block modes

Type

Name

SW-33

Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block

SW-91

One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block

DSW-16

Selector Switch Block for 16 Data

DSW-16C

Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data

DSET

Data Set Block

DSET-PVI

Data Set Block with Input Indicator

BDSET-1L

One-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-1C

One-Batch String Data Set Block

BDSET-2L

Two-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-2C

Two-Batch String Data Set Block

BDA-L

Batch Data Acquisition Block

BDA-C

Batch String Data Acquisition Block

O I T M A C P R R / M R A U A R C O S A K N T S D A U N S T -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

D020317E.ai

x: -:

Valid Invalid

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-21

D2.4 Addition Block (ADD) The Addition Block (ADD) is used when performing addition processing or subtraction processing.

n Addition Block (ADD) ▼ Connection

The Addition Block (ADD) is a function block that executes addition or subtraction of input data. Here is the diagram of the Addition Block (ADD). IN

Input processing

RV Gain (GAIN), bias (BIAS)

Addition

Q01

RV1 gain (GN1), RV1 bias (BS1)

RV1

(CPV, ∆CPV)

OUT

CPV

SUB D020401E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Addition Block (ADD)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Addition Block (ADD). Table I/O terminal

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Addition Block (ADD) Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

Status Terminal manipulation connection

IN

Main input

x

Δ

x

x

Q01

Sub input

x

Δ

x

x

OUT

Calculation output

x

x

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x D020402E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-22

n Function of Addition Block (ADD) The ADD block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The processing timings available for the ADD block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the ADD block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Input Processing of Addition Block (ADD) When a Calculation Input Value Error is Detected The ADD block performs special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected.

SEE

ALSO

For the input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected, see the following: “l Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Arithmetic Calculation” in “n Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection” in chapter C3.6.2, “Input Processing of the Calculation Block in Unsteady State”

l Calculation Processing of Addition Block (ADD) The ADD block performs addition and subtraction using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

n Calculation Algorithm The Addition Block (ADD) executes the following calculation processing for addition or subtraction of the input data. CPV=GAIN • (RV+ ( (GN1 • RV1) +BS1) ) +BIAS To perform addition processing of input data, set a positive numeric value for the RV1 gain. To perform subtraction processing of input data, set a negative numeric value for the RV1 gain.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-23

n Set Parameters The set parameters of the Addition Block (ADD) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00 • Bias (BIAS): An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 0.00 • RV1 gain (GN1): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00 • RV1 bias (BS1): An engineering unit data of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 0.00

n Data Items – ADD Table Data Item

Data Items of Addition Block (ADD) Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

RV1

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW1

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

CPV engineering unit value

SL

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

BIAS

Bias

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

0.00

GN1

RV1 gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

BS1

RV1 bias

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

0.00

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

Δ (*1)

D020403E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For the information about valid block mode for ADD block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-24

D2.5 Multiplication Block (MUL) The Multiplication Block (MUL) is used when performing multiplication processing.

n Multiplication Block (MUL) ▼ Connection

The Multiplication Block (MUL) is a function block that performs multiplication of input data. Here is a function block diagram of the Multiplication Block (MUL). IN

Input processing

RV Gain (GAIN), bias (BIAS)

Multiplication

Q01

RV1 gain (GN1), RV1 bias (BS1)

RV1

(CPV, ∆CPV)

OUT

CPV

SUB D020501E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Multiplication Block (MUL)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Multiplication Block (MUL). Table

I/O terminal

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Multiplication Block (MUL) Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

Status Terminal manipulation connection

IN

Main input

x

Δ

x

x

Q01

Sub input

x

Δ

x

x

OUT

Calculation output

x

x

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x D020502E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-25

n Function of Multiplication Block (MUL) The MUL block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The processing timings available for the MUL block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the MUL block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Input Processing of Multiplication Block (MUL) When a Calculation Input Value Error is Detected The MUL block performs special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected.

SEE

ALSO

For the input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected, see the following: “l Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Arithmetic Calculation” in “n Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection” in chapter C3.6.2, “Input Processing of the Calculation Block in Unsteady State”

l Calculation Processing of Multiplication Block (MUL) The MUL block performs multiplication using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

n Calculation Algorithm The Multiplication Block (MUL) executes the following calculation processing to perform multiplication of input data. CPV=GAIN • (RV • ( (GN1 • RV1) + BS1) ) +BIAS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-26

n Set Parameters The set parameters of the Multiplication Block (MUL) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00 • Bias (BIAS): An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 0.00 • RV1 gain (GN1): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00 • RV1 bias (BS1): An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 0.00

n Data Items – MUL Table Data Item

Data Items of Multiplication Block (MUL) Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

RV1

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW1

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

CPV engineering unit value

SL

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

BIAS

Bias

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

0.00

GN1

RV1 gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

BS1

RV1 bias

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

0.00

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

Δ (*1)

D020503E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for MUL block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-27

D2.6 Division Block (DIV) The Division Block (DIV) is used when performing division processing.

n Division Block (DIV) ▼ Connection

The Division Block (DIV) is a function block that performs division of input data. Here is a function block diagram of the Division Block (DIV). IN

Input processing

RV Gain (GAIN), bias (BIAS)

Division

Q01

RV1 gain (GN1), RV1 bias (BS1)

RV1

(CPV, ∆CPV)

OUT

CPV

SUB D020601E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Division Block (DIV)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Division Block (DIV). Table I/O terminal

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Division Block (DIV) Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

Status Terminal manipulation connection

IN

Main input

x

Δ

x

x

Q01

Sub input

x

Δ

x

x

OUT

Calculation output

x

x

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x D020602E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-28

n Function of Division Block (DIV) The DIV block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The processing timings available for the DIV block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the DIV block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Input Processing of Division Block (DIV) When a Calculation Input Value Error is Detected The DIV block performs special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected.

SEE

ALSO

For the input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected, see the following: “l Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Arithmetic Calculation” in “n Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection” in chapter C3.6.2, “Input Processing of the Calculation Block in Unsteady State”

l Calculation Processing of Division Block (DIV) The DIV block performs division using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

n Calculation Algorithm The Division Block (DIV) executes the following calculation processing for performing division of input data. CPV=GAIN • (RV/ ( (GN1 • RV1) +BS1) ) +BIAS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-29

n Set Parameters The set parameters of the Division Block (DIV) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00 • Bias (BIAS): An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 0.00 • RV1 gain (GN1): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00 • RV1 bias (BS1): An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 0.00

n Data Items – DIV Table Data Item

Data Items of Division Block (DIV) Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

RV1

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW1

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

CPV engineering unit value

SL

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

BIAS

Bias

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

0.00

GN1

RV1 gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

BS1

RV1 bias

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

0.00

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

Δ (*1)

D020603E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for DIV block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-30

D2.7 Averaging Block (AVE) The Averaging Block (AVE) is used when calculate the average value of input data.

n Averaging Block (AVE) ▼ Connection

The Averaging Block (AVE) is a function block that obtains the average value of input data. Here is a function block diagram of the Averaging Block (AVE). Q01

RV1

Q02

RV2

Q03

RV3

Q04

RV4

Q05

RV5

Q06

RV6

Q07

RV7

Q08

RV8

Averaging processing

CPV

OUT

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D020701E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Averaging Block (AVE)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-31

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Averaging Block (AVE). Table I/O terminal

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Averaging Block (AVE) Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

Status Terminal manipulation connection

Q01

First calculation input

x

Δ

x

x

Q02

Second calculation input

x

Δ

x

x

Q03

Third calculation input

x

Δ

x

x

Q04

Fourth calculation input

x

Δ

x

x

Q05

Fifth calculation input

x

Δ

x

x

Q06

Sixth calculation input

x

Δ

x

x

Q07

Seventh calculation input

x

Δ

x

x

Q08

Eighth calculation input

x

Δ

x

x

OUT

Calculation output

x

x

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x D020702E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-32

n Function of Average Block (AVE) The AVE block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The processing timings available for the AVE block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the AVE block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Input Processing of Average Block (AVE) When a Calculation Input Value Error is Detected The AVE block performs special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected.

l Calculation Processing of Average Block (AVE) The AVE block returns the average value of input data using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-33

n Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection ▼ Calculated Input Value Error Detected

In the Average block (AVE), the detection of calculated input value error is executed for every input terminal. For each input terminal, when the data status of the connection destination is invalid (BAD), that of corresponding calculated input value (RVn) becomes invalid (BAD), and the previous calculated input value is held. The data status of the calculated output value (CPV) becomes invalid (BAD) or questionable (QST) at calculated input value error detection. The settings of the detection conditions for calculated input value error detection in the Average block (AVE) and the data status of the calculated output value (CPV) at calculated input value error detection are executed with “Calculated input value error detected” on the Function Block Detail Builder. The method to transfer the data status (IOP, IOP-, OOp, NRDY) of the process I/O relations, which is generated with the calculated input value (RVn) in connection with the above settings, to the calculated output value (CPV) is specified. The table below lists the ranges of the calculated input value error detection. The default value is “1.” Table

Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Average Block (AVE)

Calculated input value error detection specification 0

1

2

Error detection conditions (Data status of the calculated input value)

CPV data status

Data status transmission origin input value

-

NR (*1)

RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) are all NR (*1).

NR (*1)

At least one of RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) is BAD.

QST

RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) are all BAD.

BAD

RV1 to RVn (*2)

RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) are all NR (*1).

NR (*1)

No transmission

At least one of RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) is BAD.

BAD

RV1 to RVn (*2)

No transmission

D020703E.ai

*1: *2:

NR in the table indicates the state in which the data status is neither BAD nor QST. The priority of input values is in the order of RV1 to RVn. IOP and IOP- precede in the transfer status. IOP is transferred when NRDY is generated in the input values of higher priority and IOP is generated in the input values of lower priority.

When the calculated input value error which causes the invalid (BAD) data status of calculated output value (CPV) occurs, the calculation processing is halted, and the previous calculated output value (CPV) is held. When the calculated input value error which causes the questionable (QST) data status of calculated output value (CPV) occurs, the previous calculated input value is held due to the current calculated input value error. The calculation processing is continued using the previous value (RV) held and the calculated output value (CPV) is updated.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-34

n Calculation Algorithm ▼ Number of Averaged, Sampling Candidate Specification

The Averaging Block (AVE) performs the following calculation processing for obtaining the average value of input data. CPV=GAIN •

RV1+RV2+RV3+...+RVN N D020704E.ai

“Number of averaged” and “sampling candidate specification” is set using the Function Block Detail Builder. • Number of Averaged (N): Any integer between 1 and 8. The default is 1. Set the number of data to be averaged. • Sampling Candidate Specification: Select from “Regardless of data status,” “other than BAD” or “other than BAD or QST.” If the data status of the calculated input value (RVn) changes to the status indicating the data is not good, this data can be excluded from the averaging calculation. The conditions to include or exclude the data for the averaging calculation can be defined on the builder under the following conditions. • Regardless of data status All input data (RVn) regardless of data status • Other than BAD All input data (RVn) except for BAD data • Other than BAD and QST All input data (RVn) except for BAD and QST data The calculation block’s behavior is restricted by the input error detection function. When the calculation input error detection is specified to “2,” only “Regardless of data status” is valid as averaging calculation condition. Or else, any input detected BAD makes the calculated output value (CPV) become BAD (invalid) and the averaging calculation stops. While, when the condition is specified as “other than BAD” or “other than BAD or QST,” the above described phenomena occur, i.e. the BAD input data stops the averaging calculation.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-35

n Set Parameter The parameters of the Averaging Block(AVE) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00

n Data Items – AVE Table

Data Items of Averaging Block (AVE)

Data Item

Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV1 to RV8

Calculated input value 1to 8

-----

0

RAW1 to RAW8

Raw input data 1to 8

CPV

Calculated output value

GAIN

Gain

OPMK

Value in the unit at the connection destination -----

Δ (*1)

CPV engineering unit value

SL

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

----D020705E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for AVE block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-36

D2.8 Square Root Block (SQRT) The Square Root Block (SQRT) is used when obtaining the square root of input data.

n Square Root Block (SQRT) ▼ Connection

The Square Root Block (SQRT) is a function block that obtains the square root of input data. Here is a function block diagram of the Square Root Block (SQRT).

Input processing

IN

RV

GAIN •

RV

CPV

OUT

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D020801E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Square Root Block (SQRT)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Square Root Block (SQRT). Table

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Square Root Block (SQRT)

I/O terminal IN

Calculation input

OUT

Calculation output

SUB

Auxiliary output

Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

Status Terminal manipulation connection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Δ

x

x

x

D020802E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-37

n Function of Square Root Block (SQRT) The SQRT block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the SQRT block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the SQRT block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Calculation Processing of Square Root Block (SQRT) The SQRT block calculates the square root of input data using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

l Output Processing Specific to Square Root Block (SQRT) In the output processing of the SQRT block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

n Calculation Algorithm The Square Root Block (SQRT) executes the following calculation processing to obtain the square root of input data. CPV=GAIN • RV D020803E.ai

n Set Parameter The parameters of the Square Root Block (SQRT) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-38

n CPV Pushback The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close. If the SQRT block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value. The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes]. The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the SQRT block. RV=

CPV

2

GAIN

D020804E.ai

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the previous value.

SEE

ALSO

For details on the CPV pushback, see the following: C4.11, “CPV Pushback”

n Data Items – SQRT Table Data Item

Data Items of Square Root Block (SQRT) Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

CPV engineering unit value

SL

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

Δ (*1)

D020805E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for SQRT block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-39

D2.9 Exponential Block (EXP) The Exponential Block (EXP) is used when obtaining the result of exponential value of the base of natural logarithms with the input data.

n Exponential Block (EXP) ▼ Connection

The Exponential Block (EXP) is a function block that obtains the result of exponential value of the base of natural logarithms with the input data. Here is a function block diagram of the Exponential Block (EXP).

Input processing

IN

GAIN • eRV

RV

CPV

OUT

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D020901E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Exponential Block (EXP)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Exponential Block (EXP). Table

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Exponential Block (EXP)

I/O terminal

IN

Calculation input

OUT

Calculation output

SUB

Auxiliary output

Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

x

Status Terminal manipulation connection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Δ

x

x D020902E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-40

n Function of Exponential Block (EXP) The EXP block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the EXP block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the mediumspeed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the EXP block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block”

ALSO

• For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Calculation Processing of Exponential Block (EXP) The EXP block calculates the value where the base of the natural logarithm is raised to a power given by the input data using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

l Output Processing Specific to Exponential Block (EXP) In the output processing of the EXP block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

n Calculation Algorithm The Exponential Block (EXP) executes the following calculation processing to the input data. CPV=GAIN • eRV

e: Base of a natural logarithm

n Set Parameter The parameters of the Exponential Block (EXP) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): ­A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-41

n CPV Pushback The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close. If the EXP block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value. The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes]. The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the EXP block. RV=ln

CPV GAIN

D020903E.ai

If (CPV/GAIN) ≤ 0, the calculation input value (RV) retains the previous value.

SEE

ALSO

For details on the CPV pushback, see the following: C4.11, “CPV Pushback”

n Data Items – EXP Table Data Item

Data Items of Exponential Block (EXP) Data Name

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

MODE

Block mode

-----

O/S (AUT)

ALRM

Alarm status

-----

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

CPV engineering unit value

SL

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

Δ (*1)

D020904E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for EXP block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-42

D2.10 First-Order Lag Block (LAG) The First-Order Lag Block (LAG) is used when performing filtering processing to the input signals or simulating process characteristics.

n First-Order Lag Block (LAG) ▼ Connection

The First-Order Lag Block (LAG) is a function block that outputs the first-order lag of input signals. The First-Order Lag Block (LAG) enables filtering processing of input signals as well as simulation of process characteristics. Here is a function block diagram of the First-Order Lag Block (LAG).

Input processing

IN

GAIN 1+Tis

RV

CPV

OUT

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D021001E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the First-Order Lag Block (LAG). Table

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

I/O terminal IN

Calculation input

OUT

Calculation output

SUB

Auxiliary output

Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

x

Status Terminal manipulation connection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Δ

x

x D021002E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-43

n Function of First-Order Lag Block (LAG) The LAG block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the LAG block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the mediumspeed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the LAG block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Calculation Processing of First-Order Lag Block (LAG) The LAG block performs a first-order lag calculation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

l Output Processing Specific to First-Order Lag Block (LAG) In the output processing of the LAG block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

n Calculation Algorithm The First-Order Lag Block (LAG) executes the following calculation processing to the input data. CPV=

GAIN 1+Tis Ti I s

• RV D021003E.ai

: : :

First-order lag time (Ti = I - Scan period) First-order lag time setpoint Laplace transform operator

When the block mode is switched from O/S (out of service) to AUT (automatic), or when the data status of the calculated output value (CPV) has returned to normal from CAL (calibration) or BAD (invalid), first-order lag calculation is initialized with the calculated input value (RV).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-44

n Set Parameters The parameters of the First-Order Lag Block (LAG) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00. • First-order lag time setpoint (I): A numeric value between 0.1 and 1000.0. Unit: sec. The default is 1. If a time shorter than the scan period is set as the first-order lag time (I), calculation processing is performed assuming that the first-order lag time setpoint (I) is the same as the scan period.

n Action Example The following figure shows an example of step response action of the First-Order Lag Block (LAG). Input signal

Output signal (When GAIN = 1.000)

Time t

Ti Ti: First-order lag time (Ti = I - Scan period)

D021004E.ai

Figure Example of the Step Response Action of First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

n CPV Pushback The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close. If the LAG block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value. The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes]. The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the LAG block. RV=

CPV GAIN

D021005E.ai

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the previous value.

SEE

ALSO

For details on the CPV pushback, see the following: C4.11, “CPV Pushback”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-45

n Data Items – LAG Table Data Item

Data Items of First-Order Lag Block (LAG) Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

CPV engineering unit value

SL

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

I

First - order lag time

x

0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds

1

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

Δ (*1)

D021006E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for LAG block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-46

D2.11 Integration Block (INTEG) The Integration Block (INTEG) is used when obtaining the integral value of input data.

n Integration Block (INTEG) ▼ Connection

The Integration Block (INTEG) is a function block that integrates input data. Here is a function block diagram of the Integration Block (INTEG).

Input processing

IN

GAIN Tis

RV

CPV

OUT

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D021101E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Integration Block (INTEG)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Integration Block (INTEG). Table

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Integration Block (INTEG)

I/O terminal IN

Calculation input

OUT

Calculation output

SUB

Auxiliary output

Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

x

Status Terminal manipulation connection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Δ

x

x D021102E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-47

n Function of Integration Block (INTEG) The INTEG block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the INTEG block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the INTEG block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Calculation Processing of Integration Block (INTEG) The INTEG block calculates the integrated value of input data using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

l Output Processing Specific to Integration Block (INTEG) In the output processing of the INTEG block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-48

n Calculation Algorithm The Integration Block (INTEG) executes the following calculation processing for integrating input data. CPV=

GAIN Tis

• RV D021103E.ai

Ti s

: :

Integral time (Ti = I) Laplace transform operator

The Integration Block (INTEG) starts calculation actions in accordance with the values of the manipulation switch (SW). If the integral value overflows, the previous maximum value used as the calculation result. When the integral value overflows, BAD (invalid) is set as the data status of the calculated output value (CPV). The following figure shows the manipulation switch values and the corresponding calculation actions as well as block status transitions. • When Manipulation switch (SW) is 0 Starts to initialize calculation block status, then the manipulation switch (SW) changes to 1 when initialization is completed. Block status is RUN. • When Manipulation switch (SW) is 1 Starts the integration calculation. The calculated output value (CPV) is updated by each scan period. Block status is RUN. • When Manipulation switch (SW) is 2 Holds the current calculated output value (CPV), the calculation stops. Block status is STOP.

n Set Parameters The parameters of the Integration Block (INTEG) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00. • Integral time setpoint (I): A numeric number between 0.1 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-49

n Action Example The following figure shows an action example of the Integration Block (INTEG). Input signal

GAIN

Ts RV I

Output signal

Time t Scan period (Ts) Hold

Integration calculation

Initialize SW

2

Hold

Calculation stop 1

SW(2→0→1)

2

SW(1→2) D021104E.ai

Figure Action Example of Integration Block (INTEG)

n CPV Pushback The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close. If the INTEG block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value. The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes]. The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the INTEG block. RV=

CPV GAIN

D021105E.ai

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the previous value.

SEE

ALSO

For details on the CPV pushback, see the following: C4.11, “CPV Pushback”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-50

n Data Items – INTEG Table Data Item

Data Items of Integration Block (INTEG) Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

BSTS

Block status

-----

RUN

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

Δ (*1)

CPV engineering unit value

SL

SW

Manipulation switch

x

0, 1, 2

-----

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

I

Integral time

x

0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds

1

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

----D021106E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for INTEG block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

n Block Status of Integration Block (INTEG) Table Level 1

Block Status of Integration Block (INTEG) Block Status Symbol

Name

Description

RUN

Integration Starts

Initialization or integration starts.

STOP

Integration Stops

Integration stopped, the output is held. D021107E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-51

D2.12 Derivative Block (LD) The Derivative Block (LD) is used when obtaining the derivative value of input data.

n Derivative Block (LD) ▼ Connection

The Derivative Block (LD) is a function block that differentiates input data. Here is a function block diagram of the Derivative Block (LD).

Input processing

IN

GAIN • Tds 1+Tds

RV

CPV

OUT

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D021201E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Derivative Block (LD)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Derivative Block (LD). Table

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Derivative Block (LD)

I/O terminal IN

Calculation input

OUT

Calculation output

SUB

Auxiliary output

Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

x

Status Terminal manipulation connection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Δ

x

x D021202E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-52

n Function of Derivative Block (LD) The LD block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the LD block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the mediumspeed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the LD block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Calculation Processing of Derivative Block (LD) The LD block calculates the derivative value of input data using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

l Output Processing Specific to Derivative Block (LD) In the output processing of the LD block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-53

n Calculation Algorithm The Derivative Block (LD) executes the following calculation processing to differentiate input data. CPV=GAIN • Td s

Tds 1+Tds : :

• RV D021203E.ai

Derivative time (Td = D) Laplace transform operator

When the block mode is switched from O/S (out of service) to AUT (automatic), or when the data status of the calculated input value (CPV) returns to normal from CAL (calibration) or BAD (invalid), derivation calculation is initialized with the calculated input value (RV).

n Set Parameters The parameters of the Derivative Block (LD) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00. • Derivative time setpoint (D): A numeric value between 0.1 and 1000.0. Unit: sec. If a time shorter than the scan period is set as the derivative time setpoint (D), calculation processing is performed assuming that the derivative time setpoint (D) is same as the scan period.

n Action Example The following figure shows an action example of the Derivative Block (LD). Input signal

Output signal (When GAIN = 1.000)

Td

Time t Td: Derivative time (D) 0.0 to 10000.0 seconds D021204E.ai

Figure Step Response of Derivative Block (LD)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-54

n CPV Pushback The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close. If the LD block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value. The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes]. The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the LD block. RV=

CPV GAIN

D021205E.ai

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the previous value.

SEE

ALSO

For details on the CPV pushback, see the following: C4.11, “CPV Pushback”

n Data Items – LD Table Data Item

Data Items of Derivative Block (LD) Data Name

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

MODE

Block mode

-----

O/S (AUT)

ALRM

Alarm status

-----

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

CPV engineering unit value

SL

Δ (*1)

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

D

Derivative time

x

0.0 to 10,000.0 seconds

0

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

----D021206E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for LD block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-55

D2.13 Ramp Block (RAMP) The Ramp Block (RAMP) is used to generate an output data to follow the step changes of the input data with the ramp characteristic (constant velocity).

n Ramp Block (RAMP) ▼ Connection

The Ramp Block (RAMP) is a function block that generates an output data to follow the step changes of the input data with the ramp characteristic (constant velocity). Here is a function block diagram of the Ramp Block (RAMP).

Input processing

IN

RV

CPV

GAIN • (Ramp characteristic)

OUT

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D021301E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Ramp Block (RAMP)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Ramp Block (RAMP). Table

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Ramp Block (RAMP)

I/O terminal IN

Calculation input

OUT

Calculation output

SUB

Auxiliary output

Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

Status Terminal manipulation connection

Δ

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Δ

x

x

x

D021302E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-56

n Function of Ramp Block (RAMP) The RAMP block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the RAMP block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the RAMP block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Calculation Processing of Ramp Block (RAMP) The RAMP block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-57

n Calculation Algorithm The Ramp Block (RAMP) executes the calculation processing that generates an output data to follow the step changes of the input data with the ramp characteristic (constant velocity). The calculated output value (CPV) is the Ramp characteristic output signal multiplied by the gain (GAIN). CPV = GAIN • (Ramp characteristic) The ramp characteristic is shown below. Input signal

(CPV span) • Scan period (sec.) STEP

Output signal (When GAIN = 1.00)

Scan period D021303E.ai

Figure Ramp Characteristic

The rate of the output data change is determined by the value of the step (STEP) parameter, scan period and span of the calculated output value (CPV).

Output data change per second =

CPV span STEP D021304E.ai

Output data change per scan =

CPV span • Scan period (seconds) STEP D021305E.ai

n Set Parameters The parameters of the Ramp Block (RAMP) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00. • Step (STEP): A numeric number between 0.1 and 10000.0. The step (STEP) defines in how many scans that the calculated output value (CPV) follows up the full-span of the input change, in one second scan period. When the scan period is not one second, the number of scans needed for the full-span input change can be calculated by dividing the step (STEP) by the scan period (second).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-58

n Data Items – RAMP Table Data Item

Data Items of Ramp Block (RAMP) Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

-----

AF

Alarm detection specificaton

-----

-----

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

-----

RV

Calculated input value

-----

0

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination

-----

CPV

Calculated output value

CPV engineering unit value

SL

GAIN

Gain

x

7 - digit real number including sign and decimal point

1.00

STEP

Step

x

0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds

1

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

CPV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

SL

CPV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as CPV

-----

Δ (*1)

D021306E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes for RAMP block, see the following: D2.3.2, “Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-59

D2.14 Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) The Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) is used for dynamic compensation in feedforward control.

n Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) ▼ Connection

The Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) is a function block that performs dynamic compensation in feedforward control. Normally, this block is used in combination with the controller block or Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM). Here is a function block diagram of the Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG).

Input processing

IN

GAIN • (1+Tds) 1+Tis

RV

CPV

OUT

(CPV, ∆CPV) SUB D021401E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG). Table

Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

I/O terminal

IN

Calculation input

OUT

Calculation output

SUB

Auxiliary output

Data reference

Connection type

Connection destination

Condition testing

Process Software Function I/O I/O block

Data setting

x

Status Terminal manipulation connection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Δ

x

x D021402E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-60

n Function of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) The LDLAG block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the LDLAG block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the LDLAG block, see the following: D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Calculation Processing of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) The LDLAG block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

l Output Processing Specific to Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) In the output processing of the LDLAG block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

n Calculation Algorithm The Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) executes the following calculation processing to perform dynamic compensation of the lead/lag element. CPV=

GAIN • (1+Tds) 1+Tis Td Ti s

: : :

• RV D021403E.ai

Lead time (Td = D) Lag time (Ti = I - Scan period) Laplace transform operator

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-61

n Set Parameters The parameters of the Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) are shown as follows. • Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. The default is 1.00. • Lead time setpoint (D): A numeric value between 0.0 and 10000.0. Unit: sec. • Lag time setpoint (I): A numeric value between 0.0 and 10000.0. Unit: sec. If a time shorter than the scan period is set as the lag time setpoint (I), calculation processing is performed assuming that the lag time (I) is same as the scan period.

n Action Example The following figure shows the action of the Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG). D/I>1

Input signal

Output signal (GAIN = 1.000)

D/I=

Left to right

Equality operator

==

Left to right

Logical operator

&

Left to right

Logical operator

^

Left to right

Logical operator

|

Left to right

Logical operator

and

Left to right

Logical operator

eor

Left to right

↓

Logical operator

or

Left to right

Lowest priority D024807E.ai

n Data Type Conversion When the operands on both sides of the operator that requires two operands have different data types, the data type of one operand is automatically converted to match the other data type which can handle larger data. The rules of data type conversion are shown in the following table. The table shows the data types of the operands and calculation results. Table

Data Type Conversion Rules

Left-hand side integer

Right-hand side

integer

long

float

double

I•I→I

L•L→L

D•D→D

D•D→D

long

L•L→L

L•L→L

D•D→D

D•D→D

float

D•D→D

D•D→D

D•D→D

D•D→D

double

D•D→D

D•D→D

D•D→D

D•D→D D024808E.ai

I: L: D: Note:

integer type long type double type Calculation is not allowed if the character string data and numerical data are mixed. Also, no data type conversion is executed between the character string type and numerical type. Note: The float type is converted to the double type unconditionally.

TIP

• If either operand is the double type, the other operand will also be converted to the double type. Accordingly, the calculation result becomes the double type. • If either operand is the long type and the other is integer, the other operand is converted to the long type. The calculation result becomes the long type. • If both operands are integer type, the calculation result remains integer type.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-202

n Comparison of Character Strings Character strings can be compared as a character string operation. The relational operator and equality operator can be used for character comparison. Character strings cannot be processed by the general-purpose arithmetic expression description.

l Character String Comparison Method The character string comparison method follows the rules below: • The comparison of characters is executed by comparing the internal codes of the characters. The internal codes are compared as unsigned 8-bit values. • Spaces is subject to comparison. • Comparison of character strings is executed character-by-character from the first character of the left-hand side and right-hand side.

l Test Conditions of the Character String Comparison Testing of large and small between character strings follows the rules below: • When both sides are exactly the same character strings, the two sides are evaluated as equal. • When at least one character is different, the comparison starts from the character closest to the beginning among the different characters. The character string with a character which has a larger internal code as a result of comparison is evaluated as the larger one. • When the lengths of the character strings are different, the longer character string is evaluated as the larger one.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-203

n Assignment Statement An assignment statement refers to a statement which has a variable on the left-hand side and an expression on the right-hand side, and they are connected by the “=” symbol. An assignment statement substitutes the left-hand side variable by the calculation result of the right-hand side expression. It is necessary in the assignment statement for both of the right side and left side to be the numerical type or character string type. The format of the assignment statement is as follows: = • : Variable to which the value of calculation should be assigned. • : Expression that calculates the substituting value for the .

l Numerical Value Substitution Two variables put on each side of “=” symbol forms a substitution formula. If the data types on each side of expression are different, the data type of the right-hand side expression is converted to the data type of the left-hand side variable. Combinations of the left hand and right hand which may cause an overflow or loss of digits are shown in the following table: Table

Combinations of the Left-hand Side and Right-hand Side which may Cause an Overflow or Loss of Digits

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

integer

integer

long

float

double

A

A

A

A

A

long float

B

A, B

double D024809E.ai

Blank: No problem A: An overflow may occur. B: Loss of digits may occur. Note: Extend the sign of the value before assigning a value of the integer type to a long-type variable. Note: An overflow error occurs when the substituting value exceeds the handling range for the integer type. Note: When a variable of the integer type is substituted by a value of the real type, round off the substituting value at the first digit after the decimal point prior to substitution. Use the “int” built-in function to truncate after the decimal point.

l Character String Substitution When the entered character string longer than the allowed size of the character string variable, the characters for the character string size are inserted from the beginning of the character string. Characters which cannot fit are discarded. When a character string shorter than the size of the character string variable is entered to a character string variable, a terminator is added to the end of the character string. The size of the substituted character string variable becomes the size of the character string before the terminator.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-204

D2.47.6 Control Statements The control statement is a statement for controlling the execution order of arithmetic expressions. There are four kinds of control statements for testing conditions and selections as follows: • if statement: Condition testing • switch statement: Multiple-branches processing • goto statement: Unconditional jump However, jump cannot be specified if the execution of the arithmetic expression goes backwards. • exit statement: Jumps to the “end” statement unconditionally.

n if ▼ Control Statements

The “if” statement is used to control the execution of arithmetic expressions by the condition(s) of the expression. The format of the “if” statement is shown below:

l Format 1 if () • : Give the expression to be evaluated in the numerical or character string format. • : A statement which will be executed when the expression is true. When the “if” statement above is executed, is calculated. is executed only when the result of the is true (0).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-205

l Format 2 if ()then .... [else .... ] .... end if .... When the “if” statement above is executed, is evaluated first. Further processing will be determined depending on the evaluation result. • When the result of is true (0), after executing the statements from the one after “then” to the one before “else”, the execution jumps to the statement after the “end if” statement. When the “else” statement does not exist, the statements after “then” will be executed. • When the result of is false (==0), if the “else” statement exists, the statements after “else” will be executed. When the “else” statement does not exist, the statements after “end if” statement will be executed.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-206

l Format 3 if ()then .... else if ()then ....

[else

....

]

.... end if .... When the “if” statement above is executed, the is evaluated first. Further processing will be determined depending on the evaluation result. • When the result of the in the “if” statement is true (0), after executing the statements starting from the statement after “then” which corresponds to , to the statement before the “else if” statement, the execution jumps to the statement after the “end if” statement. • When the result of the in the “if” statement is false (==0), the conditional expression in the next “else if” statement is evaluated. • When the result of the in the “if” statement is false (==0) and the result of the in the “else if” statement is true (0), if there is an “else if” statement after the “then” statement, the statements starting from the one after “then” statement to the one before “else if” statement will be executed, and the execution jumps to the statement after the “end if” statement. If there is no “else if” statement after “then” statement and an “else” statement exists, the statements starting from the one after the “then” statement to the one before the “else” statement will be executed, and the execution jumps to the statement after the “end if” statement. If there is no “else if” statement nor “else” statement after the “then” statement, the statements following the “then” statement will be executed. • When the result of the in the “if” statement is false (==0) and the result of the in the “else if” statement is false (==0), if an “else if” statement exists after the “then” statement, the “else if” statement will be executed in the same way as in the case described above. If there is no “else if” statement exists after the “then” statement but the “else” statement exists, the statements following the “else” statement will be executed. If there is no “else if” statement or “else” statement, the statements following the “end if” statement will be executed. While the processing can jump out of the “if” to “end if” statement range by a “goto” statement, the execution cannot jump to inside the “if” to “end if” statement range from outside of the “if” statement.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-207

n switch The switch statement is used to branch depending on the matching condition of expression with any of the multiple constant values. switch () case [,]...: ....

[case [,...]:

....

[otherwise:

....

]]

end switch • Give the expression to be evaluated in the integer or character string format. • A constant to be compared with the . Specify a value of the same data type as that of the in the “switch” statement. Multiple constants can be listed. When the switch statement above is executed, the value of the is calculated first. The processing will be branched depending on the result of the comparison between the value and the . The branch algorithm is shown below: • When a of the same value as that of the exists, the processing branches to the statement after the “case” statement which includes the of the same value. After executing to the statement before the next “case” statement, the processing jumps to the statement after the “end switch” statement. • When there is no that is the same as the value and there is an “otherwise” statement, the processing branches to the statement after the “otherwise” statement. • When there is no that is the same as the value and there are no “otherwise” statement, the processing branches to the statement after the “end switch” statement. While the processing can jump out of the “switch” to “end switch” statement range by a “goto” statement, the execution cannot jump to inside the “switch” to “end switch” statement range from outside of the “switch” statement. The statement following the “case” statement can be written in the same line as the “case” statement. Even though a line which only has a “case” statement is not counted as an execution statement, it will be counted as an execution statement if a statement is written in the same line as the “case” statement.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-208

n goto The “goto” statement unconditionally jumps to the line with the specified label. The “goto” statement, however, cannot specify a label before the “goto” statement itself. goto A compiler error will occur if the label specified by the “goto” statement is located prior to the “goto” statement, or if the specified label does not exist in the arithmetic expression.

n exit The “exit” statement unconditionally jumps to the “end” statement. The “exit” statement can be placed anywhere in the arithmetic expression.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-209

D2.47.7 Error Handling This section describes the causes of errors occurred during the execution of generalpurpose arithmetic expression and how to handle the errors as well as the details of error codes.

n Error in the Arithmetic Processing ▼ Error Handling

The cause of errors occurred during the execution of the assignment processing and calculation processing, as well as how to handle the errors will be explained.

l Causes of Computation Errors Causes of the computation errors are as follows: • When the computation result overflows. • When division by 0 is executed. • When a calculation is executed to an imaginary number. • When X ≤ 0 in log (X). • When X < 0 and Y is a decimal fraction in power (X, Y).

l Computation Error Handling The handling when a computation error occurs is as follows: • The calculation processing and the assignment processing are immediately stopped. The value in the variable does not change. • The following maintenance information is saved in the General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU, CALCU-C). Statement number where the error occurred. (ERR) Error code All local variables

n Error in Conditional Expression If an error occurs during the calculation of a conditional expression, the calculation is stopped due to a calculation error.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-210

n Arithmetic Expression Interpreter Error Code The arithmetic expression interpreter error codes, which occur when statements are executed, are as follows: • Category error code This error code indicates the cause of the error. • Detailed error code The contents are different depending on the category error code. The category error code and the detailed error code are output to the operation and monitoring functions output as a system alarm message. The output format of the error code is shown below. tag_name tag_comment CALCULATION ERROR LINE=nnnnnn CODE=xxxxxx-yyyy nnnnnn xxxxxx yyyy

: : :

Line number Category error code (decimal) Detailed error code (hex)

The category error codes include the calculation error, errors specific to the arithmetic expression, execution control error, general error of the built-in function, and other errors. The details of the category error and detailed error codes are shown below.

l Calculation Error Codes Table

Calculation Error Codes

Code

Description

1

Overflow caused by calculation

2

Overflow caused by data type conversion

3

Division by 0

4

Underflow (reserved)

5

Invalid calculation occurred.

10

Array index is out of range.

11

Attempted to set a value to a constant.

12

The character string type is specified to a part where only the numerical type is allowed.

13

The numerical type is specified to a part where only the character string type is allowed.

14

The numerical type and the character string type are mixed.

20020

Calculation stack overflow.

20021

Exceeded the range of character string area to be used by calculation.

Remark

Including a division by 0 for a real number.

D024810E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-211

l Error Codes Specific to the Arithmetic Expression The following table shows the error codes specific to the arithmetic expression. Table

List of Error Code Specific to the Arithmetic Expression

Code

Detailed error code

Description

70

Exceeded the maximum number of executable lines.

71

Attempted to execute a program which does not follow the grammar.

80 to 82

Reserved

83

Attempted to access the input variable whose number is out of range.

x

84

Attempted to access the output variable whose number is out of range.

x

85

Attempted to access the parameter variable whose number is out of range.

x

86

Attempted to set to the input variable.

x

87

Attempted to set to the pulse count value.

x D024811E.ai

x: Detailed error code exists Blank: Detailed error code does not exist

The detailed error code is a code that indicates the serial number of the data item name where the error occurred. The following table is a list of detailed error codes: Table

List of Detailed Error Codes

Code 0

Data item name RV of CALCU or CALCU-C, CPV

1 to 31

RVn, CPVn

0 to 7

P01 to P08 D024812E.ai

l Execution Control Error Codes Table

List of Execution Control Error Codes

Code

Description

20430

Attempted to execute an unsupported statement.

20431

Attempted to execute an unsupported built-in function.

20432

Attempted to access an unsupported variable.

20433

Attempted to use an unsupported operator. D024813E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-212

l Built-In Function Generic Error Codes Table

List of Built-In Function Generic Error Codes

Code

Description

800

Overflow was detected in the built-in function calculation.

801

Division by zero was detected in the built-in function calculation.

802

The square root of a negative value was calculated by a built-in function.

803

Error in the argument of power() or log().

804

The absolute value of an argument to a trigonometric function is too large to calculate.

805

An error occurred by the mathematical built-in function.

807

The low-limit value is larger than the high-limit value.

810

The number of arguments for a built-in function is incorrect.

811

The type of the argument for a built-in function is incorrect.

895

The first argument of stpvcalc is not between “00” and “99.”

896

The result of stpvcalc is out of the range “00” to “99.” D024814E.ai

l Other Errors Table

List of Other Error Codes

Code

Description

-1 to 32767 Internal error D024815E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-213

D2.47.8 Built-In Functions The built-in functions of the general-purpose arithmetic expression execute calculations according to the given arguments and return calculation results. The details of the built-in functions that can be used in the general-purpose arithmetic expression description language are described in this section.

n Built-In Functions ▼ Built-In Functions

The built-in functions are the applicable functions already built in the system. The built-in functions include general arithmetic functions, bit operation functions, trigonometric functions, natural logarithm, temperature and pressure correction functions and so on. Specify one variable or constant to the built-in function as a parameter. Expressions such as i+1 and d/10.0, or built-in function calls may not be specified as an argument.

n Arithmetic Functions These functions execute arithmetic calculations. The details of the arithmetic functions are as follows.

l Absolute Value – labs(arg) “labs” is a function that returns the absolute value of the argument. Both the argument and result are the long type.

l Absolute Value – dabs(arg) “dabs” is a function that returns the absolute value of the argument. Both the argument and result are the double type.

l Maximum Value – lmax(arg1,arg2,...) “lmax” is a function that returns the maximum value in an argument list. The maximum number of arguments is 32. The argument and result are both the long types.

l Maximum Value – dmax(arg1,arg2,...) “dmax” is a function that returns the maximum value in an argument list. The maximum number of arguments is 32. The argument and result are both the double types.

l Minimum Value – lmin(arg1,arg2,...) “lmin” is a function that returns the minimum value in an argument list. The maximum number of arguments is 32. Both the argument and result are the long type.

l Minimum Value – dmin(arg1,arg2,...) “dmin” is a function that returns the minimum value in an argument list. The maximum number of arguments is 32. Both the argument and result are the double type.

l Power – power(arg1, arg2) “power(arg1, arg2)” is a function that returns a value after multiplying arg1 for arg2 times. Both the argument and result are the double type. IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-214

l Truncation After Decimal Point – int(arg) “int” is a function that truncates after the decimal point. Both the argument and result are the double type.

n Bit Operation Function These functions execute bit operations. The details of bit operation functions are listed below.

l Bit Position Search Function – bitpstn(arg1,arg2) “bitpstn(arg1,arg2)” is a function that searches the bit position. The position of the bit whose value is 1 is searched in the integer variable specified by arg1. The result is the long type. “bitpstn” returns -1 as the return value when two or more bits are 1 in arg1.

l Bit Position Search Function – bitsrch(arg1,arg2) “bitsrch(arg1,arg2)” is a function that searches the bit position. The position of the bit whose value is 1 is searched in the integer variable specified by arg1. The result is the long type. “bitsrch” searches the value of each bit, starting start from the most significant bit. The search stops when a bit with a value of 1 is found, and the position of the bit whose value is 1 is returned. The return value of the normal end will be the bit position. The return value will be 0 when all bits are 0, and -1 when an error occurs. The “arg2,” an argument for “bitpstn” and “bitsrch,” is a variable prepared for the functional extension in the future. “arg2” is ignored even if it is specified.

n Trigonometric Functions These functions execute calculations related to the trigonometric functions. The details of the trigonometric functions are as follows:

l Sine – sin(arg) “sin” is a function that calculates the sine of the argument. The unit of the argument is in radian. Both the argument and result are the double type.

l Cosine – cos(arg) “cos” is a function that calculates the cosine of the argument. The unit of the argument is in radian. Both the argument and result are both double types.

l Tangent – tan(arg) “tan” is a function that calculates the tangent of the argument. The unit of the argument is in radian. Both the argument and result are the double type.

l Arctangent – atan(arg) “atan” is a function that calculates the arctangent of the argument. The unit of the argument is in radian. Both the argument and result are the double type.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-215

n Square Root – sqrt(arg) “sqrt” is a function that calculates the square root of the argument. Both the argument and result are the double type.

n Exponent – exp(arg) “exp(arg)” is a function that calculates the result of the exponential function (the value after multiplying e for arg times). Both the argument and result are the double type.

n Natural Logarithm – log(arg) “log” is a function that calculates the natural logarithm (logarithm of base e) of the argument. Both the argument and result are the double type.

n Temperature and Pressure Correction Function This function executes the correction calculation to the measured flowrate by the differentialpressure type flow gauge which employs the orifice. The correction calculation to the ideal gas is executed. The details of the temperature and pressure correction function are shown blow.

l Temperature Correction – TC(Fi,T,Tb) TC(Fi,T,Tb) is a function that only executes temperature correction to the measured flowrate Fi, measured temperature T and reference temperature Tb. Each input data and calculation result are the double type. The correction arithmetic formula is as follows: Tb+273.15

TC (Fi, T, Tb) = Fi T Tb

T+273.15 : : :

• Fi D024816E.ai

Measured flowrate Measured temperature (°C) Reference temperature (°C) Instead of TC (°C), TCF (°F) maybe used in the above formula.

l Pressure Correction – PCKP(Fi, P, Pb) PCKP(Fi,P,Pb) is a function that only executes the pressure correction to the measured flowrate Fi, measured pressure P and reference pressure Pb. Each input data and the calculation result are the double type. The correction arithmetic formula is as follows: PCKP (Fi, P, Pb) = Fi P Pb

: : :

P+1.01325 • 102 Pb+1.01325 • 102

• Fi D024817E.ai

Measured flowrate Measured pressure (kPa) Reference pressure (kPa)

Even though PCKP (pressure unit: kPa) is used in the description above, PCP (pressure unit: Pa) , PCMP (pressure unit: MPa) and PC (pressure unit:kgf/cm2) can alternatively be used. When Pa or MPa is used, the constant of the pressure correction term is 1.01325 • 105 and 1.01325 • 10-1 respectively. When PC is used, the constant of pressure term becomes 1.0332 • 102.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-216

l Temperature and Pressure Correction – TPCKP(Fi,T,P,Tb,Pb) TPCKP(Fi,T,P,Tb,Pb) is a function that executes the correction of both temperature and pressure for the measured flowrate Fi, measured temperature T, measured pressure P, reference temperature Tb and reference pressure Pb. Each input data and the calculation results are the double type. The correction arithmetic expression is as follows: TPCKP (Fi, T, P, Tb, Pb) =

P+1.01325 • 102 Pb+1.01325 • 102

Tb+273.15

•

T+273.15

• Fi D024818E.ai

Fi P T Pb Tb

: : : : :

Measured flowrate Measured pressure (kPa) Measured temperature (°C) Reference pressure (kPa) Reference temperature (°C)

Even though the TPCKP(pressure unit: kPa) is used in the description above, TPCP(pressure unit: Pa), TPCMP(pressure unit: MPa) and PC (pressure unit :kgf/cm2) can alternatively be used. When Pa or MPa is used as the pressure unit, the constant of the pressure correction term is 1.01325 • 105 and 1.01325 • 10-1 respectively. When PC is used, the constant of pressure term becomes 1.0332 • 102.

n ASTM Correction Function This function executes the correction calculation of the liquid flow. The details of the ASTM correction function are as follows:

l ASTM Correction (Old JIS) – ASTM1(t,F,C1) ASTM1(t,F,C1) calculates the correction flowrate of flowrate F based on the ASTM correction (old JIS) for the measured temperature t (°C) and the specific gravity (15/4 °C specific gravity) C1. The argument and result are both the double types. The correction arithmetic expression is shown below: F0 = Cf • Fi Cf = 1 + α (t - 15) + β (t - 15)2 α=

-P1(t) C1

+P2(t)

Fi t C1 F0 P1(t) to P4(t)

: : : : :

β=

-P3(t) C1

+P4(t) D024819E.ai

Measured flowrate Measured temperature 15/4 °C specific gravity Corrected flow Temperature-dependent parameters

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-217

l ASTM Correction (New JIS) – ASTM2, ASTM3, ASTM4 ASTMn(t,F,ρ) calculates the correction flowrate of flowrate F based on the ASTM correction (new JIS) for the measure temperature t(°C) and the density ρ(kg/m3). “n” of ASTMn can be 2, 3 or 4. ASTM2 is used for the crude oil, ASTM3 for the fuel oil, and ASTM4 for the lubricating oil. The argument and result are both the double types. The correction arithmetic expression is shown below: F0 = Cf • F1 Cf=exp

- α (t-15) - 0.8 α2 (t-15)2 D024820E.ai

α=

K0 ρ

2

+ F0 t ρ Fi K0, K1

K1 ρ

D024823E.ai

: : : : :

Corrected flowrate Measured temperature Density at 15 °C (kg/m3) Measured flowrate Oil type specific constants

n High and Low Limit – llimit, dlimit This function is used to limit the input data value within the limit value range. The details of the high and low limit function are shown below.

l High and Low Limit llimit(arg1,arg2,arg3) and dlimit(arg1,arg2,arg3) are used to limit data within the specified high limit and low limit range. Specify data to arg1, low limit to arg2, and high limit to arg3. When data, min, and max are used as the arguments, the return value of the llimit(data,min,max) or dlimit(data,min,max) is shown as follows: Return value of the function =

min (when data < min) data (when min ≤ data ≤ max) max (when data > max) D024821E.ai

Because the arguments of “llimit” are converted to the long type, the result will be the long type. Because the arguments of “dlimit” are converted to the double type, the result will be the double type. An error occurs when arg2 (low limit value) is larger than arg3 (high limit value). In this case, the return value of the function will be the data value.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-218

n Step Name Calculation – stpvcalc(arg1,arg2) stpvcalc(arg1,arg2) is a function that calculates the step name of the sequence table. “arg1” is converted to a numerical value and the increment of arg2 is added, then the value is returned after converting to a character string (“00” to “99”). • arg1: Current step name (char*2 type) Specify a 2-digit decimal number between “00” and “99” by a character string constant or a character string variable. If the value is between 0 and 9, add a 0 to make it a two-digit number. • arg2: increment (integer type) Specify the increment by a numeric variable or constant. The result of “stpvcalc” is always 2-digit decimal number between “00” and “99” (char*2 type). If the value is between 0 and 9, 0 is added. An error occurs if the result of the addition becomes negative or exceeds 99. An example of changing PV (step name) of the sequence table SEQ001 is shown below: program ..... !Assume SEQ001.PV as “03”. SEQ001.PV=stpvcalc(SEQ001.PV,1) *

SEQ001.PV becomes “04” after applying +1 to “03.”

...... SEQ001.PV=stpvcalc(SEQ001.PV,2) *

SEQ001.PV becomes “06” after applying +2 to “04.”

...... SEQ001.PV=stpvcalc(SEQ001.PV,-4) *

SEQ001.PV becomes “02” after applying -4 to “06.”

...... end If “00” is specified to arg1, a character string value converted from the arg2 number can be obtained. An example of setting a step name to PV of the sequence table SEQ002 is shown below: program ...... SEQ002.PV=stpvcalc(“00”,8) *

SEQ002.PV becomes “08.”

...... SEQ002.PV=stpvcalc(“00”,12) *

SEQ002.PV becomes “12.

...... end

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D2-219

D2.47.9 Reserved Words for Numerical and Logical Arithmetic Expressions The reserved words for the numerical and logical arithmetic expression are the identifiers that are used as reserved words by the numerical and logical arithmetic expression compliers.

n Reserved Words for Numerical and Logical Arithmetic Expressions ▼ Reserved Words

The following table shows the list of reserved words for numerical and logical arithmetic expression: Table

Reserved Word List

ALIAS (D)

DMAX (B)

P04 (V)

RV02 (V)

AND (O)

DMIN (B)

P05 (V)

RV03 (V)

ASTM1 (B)

DOUBLE (D)

P05C (R)

RV04 (V)

ASTM2 (B)

ELSE (S)

P06 (V)

RV05 (V)

ASTM3 (B)

ELSE IF (S)

P06C (R)

RV06 (V)

ASTM4 (B)

END (S)

P07 (V)

RV07 (V)

ATAN (B)

ENDIF (S)

P07C (R)

RV1 (V)

BITPSTN (B)

END SWITCH (S)

P08 (V)

RV2 (V)

BITSRCH (B)

EOR (O)

P08C (R)

RV3 (V)

CASE (S)

EXIT (S)

P1 (V)

RV4 (V)

CHAR (D)

EXP (B)

P2 (V)

RV5 (V)

COS (B)

FLOAT (D)

P3 (V)

RV6 (V)

CPV (V)

GOTO (S)

P4 (V)

RV7 (V)

CPV01 (V)

IF (S)

P5 (V)

SIN (B)

CPV02 (V)

INT (B)

P5C (R)

SQRT (B)

CPV03 (V)

INTEGER (D)

P6 (V)

STPVCALC (B)

CPV04 (V)

LABS (B)

P6C (R)

SWITCH (S)

CPV05 (V)

LLIMIT (B)

P7 (V)

TAN (B)

CPV06 (V)

LMAX (B)

P7C (R)

TC (B)

CPV07 (V)

LMIN (B)

P8 (V)

TCF (B)

CPV1 (V)

LOG (B)

P8C (R)

THEN (S)

CPV2 (V)

LONG (D)

PC (B)

TPC (B)

CPV3 (V)

MOD (O)

PCKP (B)

TPCF (B)

CPV4 (V)

NOT (O)

PCMP (B)

TPCFP (B)

CPV5 (V)

OR (O)

PCP (B)

TPCKP (B)

CPV6 (V)

OTHERWISE (S)

POWER (B)

TPCMP (B)

CPV7 (V)

P01 (V)

PROGRAM (S)

TPCP (B)

DABS (B)

P02 (V)

RV (V)

DLIMIT (B)

P03 (V)

RV01 (V) D024822E.ai

Note: The letter in parentheses ( ) indicates in which part of the program the reserved word is used. (D): Declaration statement (S): Statement (B): Built-in function (O): Operator (V): Variable name (R): Reserved

Even though the data item name such as PV and MV are not included in reserved words by the compiler, it takes greater program resource to find out when a data item name is used in the place beyond data item names. It is advised not to use the same character string of data item names in the program scripts. IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page



D3-1

D3. Sequence Control Sequence Control Blocks which execute the sequence control include Sequence Table Blocks, Logic Chart Blocks, SFC Blocks, Switch Instrument Blocks, Sequence Element Blocks, and Valve Monitoring Block. This chapter explains details of each type of sequence control block except SFC Blocks.

SEE

ALSO

For details of SFC functions, see the following: D5, “Sequencial Function Chart”

n Sequence Control The sequence control follows each control step in sequence according to predefined conditions and order. The function block that executes sequence control function is referred to as the sequence control block. The figure below describes the positioning of the sequence control in the basic control. FCS Basic control

Software I/O

Regulatory control blocks

Common switch

Calculation blocks

Annunciator message

Sequence control blocks

Sequence control message

Faceplate blocks SFC blocks Unit instruments blocks

Options Valve pattern monitoring (*1) Off-site blocks (*1)

FCS I/O Interfaces Process I/O

Communication I/O

Fieldbus I/O D030001E.ai

*1:

This option can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Figure Positioning of Sequence Control in Basic Control

With sequence control function blocks, the following types of sequence control can be applied. • Condition control (monitoring) Monitors process status and controls it according to pre-defined conditions. • Program control (phase steps) Controls according to pre-defined programs (phases). IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-2

n Sequence Control Description Method The description of the sequence control may be applied to the following function blocks.

l Sequence Table Block The conditions and operations are arranged in the table format and specifies which operation is performed by the combination of conditions. This is suitable for the description of all sequences such as the parallel operation, interlock operation and sequence operation.

l Logic Chart Block In a logic chart block, the conditions and operations are listed, and the combination of conditions with the logic operators corresponding to the logic requirement may manipulate the operation signals. This block can be used as the description of an interlock sequence control or a logic chart.

l SFC Block SFC (Sequential Function Chart) block is a function block using SFC for sequence control. The SFC (Sequential Function Chart) block is a graphical flow diagram suitable for describing a process control sequence. It is standardized by the international standard, IEC SC65A/WG6. The SFC block is used for relatively large-scaled sequence controls and for controlling devices. The flow of the entire sequence is defined by the SFC block. Each step in the SFC is described by the sequence table and SEBOL (SEquence and Batch Orientated Language).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-3

D3.1 Types of Sequence Control Blocks Sequence Control Blocks include Sequence Table Blocks, Logic Chart Blocks, SFC Blocks, Switch Instrument Blocks, Sequence Element Blocks and Valve Monitoring Block.

n Types of Sequence Control Blocks The table below lists various sequence control blocks.

l Sequence Table Block This function block realizes sequence control by operating other function blocks and/or process I/O or software I/O. The following two models of blocks are categorized as Sequence Table Block. • Sequence Table Block (ST16) • Rule Extension Block (ST16E)

TIP

In KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2, the following types of sequence table blocks are also available other than the above mentioned sequence table blocks. • Sequence Table Block (M_ST16) Capacity: Condition Signals: 32 to 64 / Action Signals: 32 to 64 / Total: 96 • Rule- Extension Sequence Table Block (M_ST16E) • Sequence Table Block (L_ST16) Capacity: Condition Signals: 64 / Action Signals: 64 / Total: 128 • Rule-Extension Sequence Table Block (L_ST16E)

l Logic Chart Block This function block performs interlock sequence control programmed in the expression of a logic chart diagram. The following model of block is categorized as Logic Chart Block. • Logic chart with 32 inputs, 32 outputs and 64 logic elements (LC64)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-4

l SFC Block This function block realizes sequence control by the program described in sequential function chart. The following three models of blocks are categorized as SFC Block. • Three-Position Switch SFC Block (_SFCSW) • Pushbutton SFC Block (_SFCPB) • Analog SFC Block (_SFCAS)

l Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block The switch instrument block monitors and operates devices such as opening/closing valves, start/stop motors or pumps, and final control elements for contacts. 10 types of blocks are available with various I/O points and output methods, usually used in combination with a sequence table. The following ten models of blocks are categorized as Switch Instrument Block. • Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input (SI-1) • Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs (SI-2) • Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output (SO-1) • Switch Instrument Block with 2 Outputs (SO-2) • Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 1 Output (SIO-11) • Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input , 2 Outputs (SIO-12) • Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 1 Output (SIO-21) • Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs , 2 Outputs (SIO-22) • Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input , 2 One-Shot Outputs (SIO-12P) • Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs , 2 One-Shot Outputs (SIO-22P) Enhanced switch instrument block (*1) is a switch instrument block with enhanced capabilities for connecting to FF faceplate blocks and fieldbus function blocks and for connecting to the I/O terminals not next to each other. *1:

Enhanced switch instrument block can be applied to all Field control stations except standard PFCS. When using enhanced switch instrument block, it is necessary to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.

The following ten models of blocks are categorized as Enhanced Switch Instrument Block. • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input (SI-1E) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs (SI-2E) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output (SO-1E) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Outputs (SO-2E) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 1 Output (SIO-11E) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 Outputs (SIO-12E) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 1 Output (SIO-21E) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 Outputs (SIO-22E) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 One-Shot Outputs (SIO-12PE) • Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 One-Shot Outputs (SIO-22PE)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-5

l Sequence Element Blocks This function block assists with sequence control. It is activated by the sequence table. The following seven models of blocks are categorized as Sequence Element Block. • Timer Block (TM) • Software Counter Block (CTS) • Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) • Code Input Block (CI) • Code Output Clock (CO) • Relational Expression Block (RL) • Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

l Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) This function block monitors valve opening and closing, and starts an alarm when abnormal conditions are detected.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-6

D3.1.1

Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks

Various alarm processing type of sequence control blocks are listed in the following table.

n Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks Table

Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks

Model

ST16

N R

O O P

I O P

I O P –

x

x

H H

Process alarms L H L D D L I O V V + –

V E L +

V E L –

M H I

M L O

C N F

Other alarms

x

ST16E LC64 SI-1 SI-2 SO-1 SO-2

x x x

x

x

x

x x

SIO-11 SIO-12 SIO-21 SIO-22

x

x

x

x

x

x

PERR ANS+ ANS-

SIO-12P SIO-22P SI-1E SI-2E SO-1E SO-2E

x x

x

x

x

x

SIO-11E SIO-12E SIO-21E SIO-22E

x

x

x

x

x

x

PERR ANS+ ANS-

SIO-12PE SIO-22PE TM

x

CTS CTP

x

CI CO RL RS VLVM

x D030002E.ai

x: available Blank: Not available

The alarm status of ST16, LC64, TM and VLVM blocks are always indicated as NR (stands for Normal status).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-7

D3.1.2

Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks

Various modes of sequence control blocks are listed in the following table.

n Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks Table

Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks Valid basic block modes

Model

Name of function block

ST16

Sequence table (basic section) block

ST16E

Rule extension block

LC64

Logic chart block

SI-1

Switch instrument block with 1 input

SI-2

Switch instrument block with 2 inputs

SO-1

Switch instrument block with 1 output

SO-2

Switch instrument block with 2 outputs

SIO-11

Switch instrument block with 1 input and 1 output

SIO-12

Switch instrument block with 1 input and 2 outputs

SIO-21

Switch instrument block with 2 inputs and 1 output

SIO-22

Switch instrument block with 2 inputs and 2 outputs

SIO-12P

Pulse type switch instrument block with 1 input and 2 outputs

SIO-22P

Pulse type switch instrument block with 2 inputs and 2 outputs

SI-1E

Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 input

SI-2E

Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 inputs

SO-1E

Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 output

SO-2E

Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 outputs

SIO-11E

Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 input and 1 output

SIO-12E

Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 input and 2 outputs

SIO-21E

Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 inputs and 1 output

SIO-22E

Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 inputs and 2 outputs

SIO-12PE

Enhanced pulse type switch instrument block with 1 input and 2 outputs

SIO-22PE

Enhanced pulse type switch instrument block with 2 inputs and 2 outputs

TM

Timer block

CTS

Software counter block

CTP

Pulse train input counter block

CI

Code input block

CO

Code output block

RL

Relational expression block

RS

Resource scheduler block

VLVM

16-valve monitor block

O I T M A C P R R / M R A U A R C O S A K N T S D A U N S T x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

D030003E.ai

x: valid Blank: Invalid

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-8

D3.2 Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) controls the monitoring of processing and the phase step sequences by connecting with other function blocks, process I/O, and software I/O.

n Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) is a decision table type function block that describes the relationship between input signal and output signal in a Y/N (yes/no) fashion. By making sequence connection with other function blocks, they control the monitoring of processing and phase step sequences. Sequence Table Blocks include the basic ST16, and ST16E that is only used for rule extension. The figure below shows the function block diagram of Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E). Q01

Rule

Q02 Q03

1 ...... 32 Y N YN

Input processing

J01 J02 J03

Output processing

Y NY

Q56

J56

Logic operation

D030201E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)

The table below lists connection methods and destinations for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) I/O terminals. Table

Connection Methods and Destinations for Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) I/O Terminals Connection type

I/O terminal

Data reference

Q01 to Q56 J01 to J56

Data setting

Connection destination

Status Terminal Condition manipula- connectitesting tion on

x x

Process I/O

Software I/O

Function block

x

x

x

x

x

x D030202E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-9

I/O connection is set by describing connection information and data in the input connection information setting area, condition specification setting area, output connection information setting area, and operation specification setting area of the sequence table displayed in the sequence table edit window of the Function Block Detail Builder. Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 No. Tag name Data item

32

Step label

Data Comment

Input Condition connection specification information setting area setting area

Condition rule setting area

Output Operation connection specification information setting area setting area Action rule setting area

D030203E.ai

Figure Conceptual Diagram of Sequence Table

Two types of blocks are available in the Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E). • ST16: Sequence Table Block • ST16E: Rule Extension Block

l Sequence Table Block (ST16) The Sequence Table Block (ST16) has a sequence control function that handles a total of 64 I/O signals, 32 rules. It can also change distribution of the 64 I/O signals and output signals in the 8-signal unit. The total number of I/O signals is fixed to 64. Thus, a sequence table with only eight inputs and eight outputs cannot be created.

l Rule Extension Block (ST16E) This function block is used for rule extensions of the Sequence Table Block (ST16). It connects to an extending Sequence Table Block (ST16) as an extended sequence table to form a sequence table group. Because the Rule Extension Block (ST16E) is managed by the Sequence Table Block (ST16) that is an extending sequence table, it cannot be activated independently. The Rule Extension Block (ST16E) only allows connection to a step-type extending Sequence Table Block (ST16) on which step labels is described. Nonstep-type Sequence Table Blocks (ST16) cannot be connected.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-10

n Rule Expansion When the phase step sequence table is used, the number of processes (number of steps) may be insufficient depending on the process that is being performed. At this time, use the rule expansion format Sequence Table Block (ST16E) which enables the number of rules to be expanded. The following figure shows when the rule expansion of sequence tables. ST16 Rule Symbol Step C01 • • • C32 A01 • • • A32

E1

H1

ST16E

01 ... ... ... ... ... ... 32 01 ... ... ... ... ... ... 15

Rule Symbol Step

01 ... ... ... ... ... 3132 16 ... ... ... ... ... ... 35

G1

C01 • • • C32

E1

G2

J1

A01 • • • A32

H1

J2

THEN ELSE

THEN ELSE

NEXT Expansion destination sequence table name Expansion source sequence table

Expansion destination sequence table D030204E.ai

Figure Example of Sequence Table Expansion

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3.2.1

D3-11

Sequence Table Configuration

Sequence tables consist of condition signals, action signals, rule numbers, condition rules, action rules and step labels.

n Complete Sequence Table Configuration ▼ Sequence Table Configuration

The figure below shows the complete sequence table. Processing timing

Condition signal

No.

Tag name Data item

C01 TM14.BSTS

Scan period Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Data

32

Step label Comment

RUN

C02 FC001.ALRM HI

Condition rule

C03 %SW0201.PV ON C03 C04

Action signal A01 ST90.MODE

AUT

A02 %AN0010.PV H A03

Action rule

A04 A05

THEN label

Extension rule tag name NEXT

ELSE label Next step label D030205E.ai

Figure Conceptual Diagram of Complete Sequence Table

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-12

n Outline of Sequence Table Elements The following describes various sequence table elements.

l Condition Signal Enter the element symbol and data item into the Tag name. Data item column as the input connection information, then enter the condition specification to Data column.

l Action Signal Enter the element symbol and data item into the Tag name. Data item column as the input connection information then enter the action specification to Data column.

l Rule Number Up to 32 rules per block may be used. The output is based on each rule condition and condition testing result.

l Condition Rule Describe the Y/N (Y: true, N: false) pattern (combination) to condition rule. If the testing result of condition signal corresponds with the Y/N pattern, the condition of the rule is satisfied.

l Action Rule Describe the Y/N ( Y: Positive action; N: Negative action) pattern (combinations) to action rule. Perform manipulated output according to the Y/N pattern of the action rule for the rule number whose condition is satisfied.

l Step Label ▼ Step

These labels are attached for phase identification purposes when performing step sequence control using a sequence table. Step labels are character strings that combine two or less alphanumeric characters (A to Z, 0 to 9). If two characters are combined while one is not alphanumeric and the other is alphanumeric, the label is managed as the same step name, even if the order of characters is reversed (e.g., “_A” and “A_”). Up to 100 steps can be described in one sequence table group. However, same step labels cannot be described at multiple locations inside the sequence table group. The step labeled 00 is activated every scan cycle.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-13

l Next Step Label ▼ THEN, ELSE

Describe the step label that is to be executed in the next scan. Next step labels include THEN and ELSE labels according to case conditions being true or false. If both labels are blank, the step does not transfer. • THEN label Describe the next step label when the corresponding rule condition status is true. Transition to the step described in the THEN label is executed after the manipulated output is completed. • ELSE labels Describe the next step label when the corresponding rule status is false. The described step labels must exist in the same sequence table group. To execute a step from another sequence table group at the next scan, it must be described as an action signal.

l Tag Name.Data Item Describe the input connection information of the condition signal or the output connection information of the action signal.

l Data Describe the condition specification of the condition signal or the operation specification of the action signal.

l Comment Comments are defined by users for the condition and action signals. The meaning of symbols and the contents of status manipulation may be put in these texts, by using up to 24 single-byte alphanumeric characters, or 12 double-byte characters. By clicking the task [Referencing Signal Comment] from the [Tool] menu, the user-defined comment text may be displayed at the right area of signals. By this Referencing Signal Comment operation, the comment texts defined by users for the condition signals and action signals and the tag comments are all displayed. The comment text for the referenced signals can not be edited on the sequence table editing window.

IMPORTANT Specify an element number with the number of digits specified for each element to a condition or action signal. If the number without the highest digit’s “0” is specified to a condition or action signal, a reference signal comment is not displayed.

TIP

A referenced signal comment is not stored in a builder file. To reference a comment, select [Referencing Signal Comment] from the [Tool] menu.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-14

l Processing Timing The processing timing of a sequence table consists of start timing and output timing. Start timing refers to the timing at which control algorithms of the sequence table are executed upon receipt of input signals. Output timing indicates the conditions under which action signals are output at the time a periodic start type or one-shot start type sequence table is executed. “Start Timing” and “Output Timing” are set for each sequence table. • Start Timing: Select either “Periodic Execution Type (T),” “One-shot Processing Type (O),” “Startup at Initial Cold Start/Restart (I)” or “Restricted Initial Execution Type (B).” • Output Timing: Select either “Output Only When Conditions Change (C)” or “Output Each Time Conditions are Satisfied (E).”

l Scan Period Periodic start sequence tables are activated at defined scan period. Among the periodic started sequence tables, the sequence tables activated in the basic period have the items “Control Period” and “Control Phase” to be defined in addition to scan period. “Scan Period,” “Control Period,” and “Control phase” can be defined for each sequence table. • Scan Period: Select from “Basic Scan”, “Medium-speed Scan” (*1) or “High-speed Scan.” • Control Period: 1 to 16 seconds. • Control Phase: 0 to 15 seconds. *1:

“Medium-speed Scan” is only supported by KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

l Extension Rule Tag Name ▼ NEXT

Described by 16 or less alphanumeric characters.

SEE

ALSO

• For sequence block processing timing, see the following: C7.3, “Process Timing for Sequence Control Block” • For details on scan period, see the following: C7.1.1, “Scan Period” • For details on control period and control phase, see the following: C7.3.5, “Control Period and Control Phase for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-15

n Sequence Description Example The basic logical circuit figure for the AND and OR commands is described in the sequence table as shown in the following figure. 01 02 03

%SW0200 ON %SW0201 ON

%Z011101 ON AND

No Tag Name and Data Item C01 %SW0200.PV Condition C02 %SW0201.PV C03 A01 %Z011101.PV Action A02 A03

Data ON Y N ON Y N H

Y N N D030206E.ai

Figure AND Circuit Example

In the example in this figure, for AND operator, only when two condition signals are satisfied, the operation may be performed. 01 02 03

%SW0200 ON %SW0201 ON

%Z011101 ON OR

No Tag Name and Data Item C01 %SW0200.PV Condition C02 %SW0201.PV C03 A01 %Z011101.PV Action A02 A03

Data ON Y N ON Y N H

Y Y N D030207E.ai

Figure OR Circuit Example

In the example in this figure, for OR operator, any one of the two conditions is established, the operation may be performed.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-16

D3.2.2

Creating a Sequence Table

To create a sequence table, enter the input information for sequence control in each setting area of the sequence table edit window of the Function Block Detail Builder.

n Configuration of Sequence Table Edit Window The figure below shows the configuration of the sequence table edit window. Process timing setting area

Step label setting area

Signal setting column heading

Condition signal number display area

Action signal number display area

Rule number display area

STEP

Condition signal setting area

Condition rule setting area

Action signal setting area

Action rule setting area

NEXT

Extension table setting area

Next step label setting area Next step label setting area

THEN ELSE D030208E.ai

Figure Configuration of Sequence Table Edit Window

To create a sequence table, the information (condition signals, action signals, condition rule and action rules) for sequence connection and the information (condition rule and action rules) for logic calculation should be entered to each setting area of the sequence table edit window. The setting area are listed below. • Processing timing setting area • Step label setting area • Condition signal setting and action signal setting area • Condition rule setting and action rule setting area • Extension table setting area • Next step label setting area (THEN, ELSE)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-17

n Processing Timing Setting Area Processing timing and scan period are displayed in the processing timing setting area. Processing timing and scan period may be defined on the processing timing setting dialog box. A display example of processing timing setting dialog is shown below. Processing timing Processing timing Execution timing Periodic execution Output timing

Output only at condition change

Scan period Scan period

Basic scan

Control period Control phase OK

Cancel D030209E.ai

Figure Processing Timing Setting Dialog

SEE

ALSO

For details of processing timing, see the following: C7.3, “Process Timing for Sequence Control Block”

n Step Label Setting Area Enter the step label in the step label setting area using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

n Condition Signal Setting Area and Action Signal Setting Area Enter the condition signal and action signal into each line that displays the signal number in the condition signal setting area and action signal setting area.

n Condition Rule Setting Area and Action Rule Setting Area Enter Y/N pattern condition rule and action rule respectively, in the condition rule setting area and the action rule setting area. To enter the condition rule and action rule, click on the input location. The display alternates between “Y,” “N” and “.” as it is clicked. When a “.” is displayed, it means that no Y/N pattern has been entered yet.

SEE

ALSO

• For details of condition rules, see the following: D3.2.5, “Condition Rule Processing of Sequence Table” • For details of action rules, see the following: D3.2.6, “Action Rule Processing of Sequence Table”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-18

n Extension Table Setting Area Enter the tag name of the extended sequence table in the extended sequence table setting area. The rules of the extending and extended sequence tables are connected and the rule numbers that can be used in the sequence table are then extended, if the tag name of the extended sequence table is entered.

SEE

ALSO

For details of rule extension, see the following: D3.2.9, “Rule Extension”

n Next Step Label Setting Area (THEN, ELSE) Enter a 2 digits alphanumeric number directly to the next step label setting area.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3.2.3

D3-19

Sequence Table Processing Flow

In the sequence table, condition rule processing and action rule processing are performed based on the results of input processing. Output processing is then performed for the action target.

n Sequence Table Processing Flow ▼ Sequence Table Processing Flow

The figure below shows the sequence table processing flow. Input processing (condition testing) Condition rule processing ....... ....... ....... .......

Y N

Y Y

Action rule processing

Output processing (status manipulation) D030210E.ai

Figure Sequence Table Processing Flow

l Input Processing The true/false status of the condition signal is determined by performing condition testing based on the input signal.

l Condition Rule Processing The true/false status of the rule condition is determined by comparing the true/false status of the condition signal with the Y/N pattern of the condition rule described in the sequence table.

l Action Rule Processing The action signal output is determined by the Y/N pattern of the action rule when the status of condition is true.

l Output Processing Status manipulation of the action target is performed based on the description of the action signal. The status manipulation, start command transmission, data setting, and status change can be performed to the contact outputs and other function blocks. There are two types of sequence tables: step and nonstep. Rule processing differs by the type of sequence table.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-20

n Operations of Non-Step Sequence In a non-step sequence table, all 32 rules are subject to condition testing, and the operation is performed according to the conditions. The following shows the operation of a non-step sequence table. Rule Step C01 . . .

01 … … … … … … 32 All rule numbers are subject to condition testing.

Condition signal

C32 A01 . . .

Only the rules whose conditions are satisfied are executed.

Operation signal

A32 THEN ELSE D030211E.ai

Figure Operation of NonStep Sequence Table

• As for condition testing, a condition is satisfied when all conditions (Y or N) for the same rule number are true. A sequence table whose rule columns are all blank is considered true unconditionally. • Operations are executed according to the operation contents of Y or N described for the rule number whose conditions are satisfied. • When the output timing is specified as “Output Only When Conditions Change,” the operation is executed only once when the condition is switched from false to true. However, if non-latched output is specified for the operation signal, the operation changes when the condition is switched from true to false. • When the output timing is specified as “Output Each Time Conditions are Satisfied,” the operation is executed during each period as long as the condition remains true. • When the conditions of multiple rules are satisfied simultaneously with respect to the same operation signal, if requests for both Y and N are detected as the resultant operations, the request for Y takes precedence, and the operation for N will not be executed. 01 02 03 No C01 Conditions C02 C03

Tag Name.Data Item %SW0100.PV %SW0101.PV

A01 Operations A02 A03

%SW0200.PV

Data ON ON H

Y

Y

When %SW0100 and %SW0101 turn on simultaneously, %SW0200 turns on. The Y operation takes precedence.

Y N

D030212E.ai

Figure Example of Operation for Simultaneous Requests

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-21

n Example of the Non-Step Format Sequence Using the Sequence Table An example of the sequence that normally monitors operations to prevent the buffer tank in the processing piping system from overflow is shown in the following figure. In this sequence, LI100 (indication block) alarm status is used. VALVE-A open command FCS

Limit switch (LS-A, Open)

LI Inflow valve VALVE-A Differential Pressure transmitter

100 PVI

HH H L LL

LT100

Limit switch (LS-B, open) Outflow valve VALVE-B

VALVE-B open command Next process D030213E.ai

Figure Example of Process Flow Figure Inflow valve - Open Level High - High limit alarm Level - High limit alarm

AND

Outflow valve - Open Inflow valve - Closed %AN0001 %AN0002

Level - Low limit alarm

%AN0003

Level Low - Low limit alarm

Inflow valve - Open Outflow valve - Closed %AN0004

Outflow valve - Open AND

D030214E.ai

Figure Example of Condition Logic Diagram

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-22

The condition logic diagram of the previous page is described as below used the sequence table. Processing Timing TC .... Scan Period No

Tag Name - Data Item

Basic Scan Comment

Data

C01 LS-A.PV

ON

Inflow valve limit switch

C02 LS-B.PV

ON

Outflow valve limit switch

C03 LI100.ALRM

HH

Rule Number 01 02 03 04 Y Y Y Y

C04 LI100.ALRM

HI

C05 LI100.ALRM

LO

C06 LI100.ALRM

LL

A01 VALVE-A.PV

H

Inflow valve open command

N

Y

A02 VALVE-B.PV

H

Outflow valve open command

Y

N

A03 %AN0001

L

Upper level, high-limit alarm

Y

A04 %AN0002

L

Level, high-limit alarm

A05 %AN0003

L

Level, low-limit alarm

A06 %AN0004

L

Lower level, low-limit alarm

Y Y

Y Y Y D030215E.ai

Figure Non-step Sequence Table Example

The sequence table in the figure shown above monitors the conditions in rule numbers 01 to 04 simultaneously. Any condition in one of the 4 rules becomes true, the operation in the same rule will be executed again. The monitoring continues after the execution.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-23

n Action of Step Sequence ▼ Sequence Table Algorithm

In a step sequence table, the process control sequence of a phase-step process is divided into the smallest phase units (steps) of the condition monitoring and operation, then these steps are executed one by one. In a step sequence table, only step label 00 and the rule corresponding to the current step number are subject to condition testing and operation. The following shows the action of a step sequence table. Rule Step C01 . . .

01 … … … … … … 32 01 02 03 04 Only the step currently being executed is subject to condition testing.

Condition signal

C32 A01 . . .

Operation signal

Only the operations for the rules whose conditions are satisfied in the step currently being executed, are executed.

A32 THEN ELSE D030216E.ai

Figure Action of Step Sequence Table

• Step label 00 is executed during each period. Step 00 may only be described at the head of a sequence table group. Step 00 cannot be described as a next step label. • When the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Sequence Table Algorithm] setting area of [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked (*1), if the step00 exists in the same table of the execution step, both the step00 and the execution step will be activated at the same time after the condition testing. If the table is expanded to another table and the execution step is on the expansion table, the condition of the step00 will be tested first and then the action of the step00 will be activated before testing and activating the execution step. However, if the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, the condition of the step00 will be tested first and then the action of the stepp00 will be activated before testing and activating the execution step even when the sequence table is not expanded. By default, this check box is not checked. • For step sequences, the next execution step label must be described in THEN/ELSE in order to advance the steps. The step will not be advanced if both next step labels in THEN/ ELSE are blank. If there is no description for the next step label, the same step is executed each time, the sequence does not move step. • The next step specified in THEN is the step to advance when the condition test result in positive. When all operations for the corresponding rules are completed, the step proceeds to the next step. • The next step specified in ELSE is the step to advance when the condition test result in negative. When conditions for the corresponding rules are established, the step proceeds to the next step without executing the operation rules.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-24

• When the check box of [THEN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] in the [Sequence Table Algorithm] setting area of [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked (*1), if the next step is directed by THEN/ELSE, the next step directed in the action rule with the script of .PV will be ignored. However, if the next step is not directed by THEN/ELSE, the next step directed in the action rule will be activated. If the next step is directed by THEN/ELSE, and the next step is also directed in the action rule with the script of .SA, the step designated by .SA will be executed first, and the step directed by THEN/ELSE will be executed after even the option of [THEN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] is checked. Vice versa, when the check box of [THEN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] is not checked, the next step directed in the action rule will be activated and the next step directed by THEN/ ELSE will be ignored. By default, this check box is not checked. • If there are multiple requests for step transition in the same step, the step advances to the next step label that is described for the smallest rule number. • When a step is advanced, the conditions for the rules are initialized once. In other words, all the conditions become false with respect to the previous execution. • The timing in which the next step is actually executed after a step is advanced, is the next scan period. • The same step label can be assigned to multiple rules. In this case, branched operations can be performed according to the condition.

No C01 Condition C02 C03

Tag Name.Data Item %SW0100.PV

A01 Operation A02 A03

%SW0200.PV

Data ON

H

THEN

01 02 03 04 05 A A A 1 2 3 Y N

Y N

If %SW0100 is on at step label A1, it turns on %SW0200 and advances the step. If %SW0100 is off, it turns off %SW0200 and advances the step.

A A 2 3

ELSE D030217E.ai

Figure Example of Conditional Branch *1:

The check boxes of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] and [THEN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] are available in the [Sequence Table Algorithm] setting area of Constant tab on FCS Properties sheet of KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2 only.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-25

n Example of a Step Sequence that Uses the Sequence Table This figure shows an example of the phase step sequence that combines the water injection processing and drain processing. Sequence Specifications Push the start button, valve A opens to fill water to the tank. When the tank is full, switch A becomes ON, the valve is closed. Push the start button again when the tank is full, then the valve B opens. When the drain process ends, switch B becomes ON, the valve B closes.

FCS Start button (PB001)

Valve A (VLVA) Switch A (SWA)

Switch B (SWB) Valve B (VLVB) To the next process D030218E.ai

Figure Example of Process Flow

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-26

Sequence start

Start button (PB001)

No

Yes Valve A: Open (VLVA) Water injection processing (Step label A1) Switch A level Hi (SWA)

No

Yes Valve A: Close (VLVA)

Start button PB001

No

Yes Valve B: Open (VLVB) Water drain processing (Step label A2) Switch B level Lo (SWB)

No

Yes Valve B: Close (VLVB)

D030219E.ai

Figure Example of Sequence Flow Chart

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-27

The sequence flow chart of the previous page is described as below used the sequence table. Rule Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 Process Timing TC .... No

Scan Period

Tag Name.Data Item

Basic Scan

Data

STEP

Comment

A

A

1

2

C01 PB001.PV

ON

Start Button

Y

C02 SWA.PV

ON

Switch A (Level HI)

N

C03 SWB.PV

ON

Switch A (Level LO)

Y Y

Y Y

C04 C05 C06 A01 VLVA.PV

H

Valve A

A02 VLVB.PV

H

Valve B

Y

N Y

N

A03 A04 A05 A06 THEN

Destination Step Label

A 2

A 1

ELSE

D030220E.ai

Figure Example of Step Sequence Table

In the above sequence table, rule numbers 01 and 02 are step A1. Rule numbers 03 and up are step A2. Rule numbers 05 and beyond do not have any description for the condition rule, operation rule or move-destination step label, so they are not subject to condition testing nor operation. Step A1 monitors the conditions for rule numbers 01 and 02 simultaneously. Of rule numbers 01 and 02, whichever the condition is satisfied will be executed. Executing the operation of rule 01 does not advance the step, since there is no designation in the move-destination step label. After executing the operation, A1 resumes monitoring rule numbers 01 and 02 again. On the other hand, if the condition for rule number 02 becomes true, the operation of rule 02 will be executed, and the step advances to A2 because the move-destination step label has a designation.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-28

D3.2.4

Input Processing of Sequence Table

In input processing, the true/false status of a condition signal is determined by performing condition testing on each of the multiple input terminals.

n Input Processing of Sequence Table In input processing, condition testing is performed on the condition signal of the rules subject to execution, in order to retain the true/false status of the condition signal in the form of a logical value. The label of a step that is to be executed is described on the rule subject to execution. When the step label is not described in the step column of the sequence table, all rules are subject to the execution rule. For all rule conditions except those subject to execution, the status of the condition signal is considered “false” regardless of the status of the connection destination. The table below lists the results of condition testing when error occurs during input processing. Table

Descriptions of Input Processing Errors and Condition Testing Results Error Descriptions

Input processing results and effect on condition signal processing

• When the condition signal is not described • The status of the condition signal is set “true” • When there is an error in the testing condition • The result of the condition signal processing is set of the condition signal unconditionally “true” regardless of the Y/N pattern • When the necessary input signal for condition • Maintain the state of previous input processing testing was unavailable (*1) • Condition signal processing is performed based on the previous test result • When one-shot execution was not available D030221E.ai

*1:

The following describes factors that do not allow input signals. • When the database of the connection destination or element is abnormal. • When the connection destination or process I/O is undergoing online maintenance.

A system alarm occurs when referencing the result of one-shot execution at the connection destination fails due to the following: • When the nest referring from a referenced sequence table to other sequence table exceeds seven levels including the referencing sequence table; • When the connection destination block mode is out of service (O/S); or • When the connection destination is undergoing maintenance.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-29

IMPORTANT When a function block of the connection destination and/or a process I/O is undergoing maintenance, input signals cannot be obtained. When performing maintenance, and before performing online loading, be sure to set related function blocks to manual (MAN) mode or perform any processing that stops executions in order to execute an online load. The true/false status of the condition signal is maintained as the previous input value within the sequence table. However, when the necessary input signal for condition testing is unavailable, or when one-shot execution of the connection destination function block is unavailable, the previous input value used in condition testing as in the case shown below will not be the expected value. • When the sequence table itself is a one-shot execution type, or when the function block of the connection destination is a one-shot execution type while the block mode is out of service (O/S), it might have been long since the previous input value was obtained. If so, the value obtained from the previous one-shot execution remains to be the previous input value. • When the sequence table itself is a one-shot execution type, or when the function block of the connection destination is a one-shot execution type while the block mode is out of service (O/S), if no one-shot execution was performed, the previous input value is 0. • Immediately after a step is changed in the step-type sequence table, always set the previous input value to 0 (false) before performing the condition testing.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-30

D3.2.5

Condition Rule Processing of Sequence Table

In the condition rule processing, the true/false status of each rule condition is determined by comparing for each rule the true/false status of condition signals and the condition rules.

n Condition Rule Processing of Sequence Table An example of condition rule processing is shown below. True/false status of condition signal...condition testing result: Rule number True/false status 01 02 03 04 true (1). false (0) of condition signal True/false status of condition.....True/false status of conditionsignal Y Y 1 Condition signal 1 in one rule corresponds with the Y/N pattern in the same rule. 0 Y Y Condition signal 2 Condition signal 3

1

True/false condition status

0

0

Action signal 1

Y

N

Action signal 2 Action signal 3

Y

N

1

0

Y

As shown in the figure left, the true/false status of the condition signal corresponds with the Y/N pattern in Rule 03 only. The Y operation in action signal 2 is, therefore, performed.

N D030222E.ai

Figure Example of Condition Rule Processing

l Comparing the True/False Status of Condition Signals and Condition Rules The comparison content differs by the Y/N pattern of the condition signal described in the condition rule. • When Y is described in the condition signal. If the status of the condition signal obtained by input processing is true (1), the condition is satisfied. • When N is described in the condition signal. If the status of the condition signal obtained by input processing is false (0), the condition is satisfied.

l Determining the True/False Status of Conditions Only rules with satisfied conditions are subject to action rule processing. When all Y/Ns of a condition described in the rule of the same number are satisfied, the status of the rule condition is true (1). If even one of them is not satisfied, the status is false (0).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3.2.6

D3-31

Action Rule Processing of Sequence Table

For each rule number for which the condition part is true (satisfied), the corresponding output signals are decided by the Y/N pattern in the action part of the rule.

n Action Rule Processing of Sequence Table - ST16, ST16E The output action signal based on the Y/N pattern is determined in the action rule processing. True/false status of condition signal...condition testing result: Rule number True/false status 01 02 03 04 true (1). false (0) of condition signal True/false status of condition.....True/false status of conditionsignal Y Y 1 Condition signal 1 in one rule corresponds with the Y/N pattern in the same rule. 0 Y Y Condition signal 2 Condition signal 3

1

True/false condition status

0

0

Action signal 1

Y

N

Action signal 2 Action signal 3

Y

N

1

0

Y

As shown in the figure left, the true/false status of the condition signal corresponds with the Y/N pattern in Rule 03 only. The Y operation in action signal 2 is, therefore, performed.

N D030223E.ai

Figure Example of Condition Rule Processing

Of the rules with true status of condition, only action signals described with Y or N in action rules will be output targets. When “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for output timing, rules whose true/ false status of condition is changed can be action targets. The content of status manipulation in the sequence table is decided by the Y/N pattern, while those of status manipulation in other sequence control blocks differ by the true/false logical calculation result.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-32

D3.2.7

Output Processing of Sequence Table

In output processing, the action target is manipulated by outputting the action signal obtained by action rule processing.

n Output Processing of Sequence Table In output processing, by outputting action signals, the action target is manipulated based on the action target and action specifications described in the action signal column. The manipulation for the action target is called status manipulation. When errors occur in output processing while performing operations such as changing the block mode of a function block for which a block mode change interlock is specified, status manipulations to the target blocks are not performed. If one action signal is tested by multiple rules, and both Y and N actions are requested, Y has higher priority. In this case, Y is executed but N is ignored. Also, a system alarm occurs when one-shot execution fails due to the reasons indicated below: • When the nest executing from an executed sequence table to other sequence table exceeds seven levels including the executing sequence table; • When the connection destination block mode is out of service (O/S); or • When the connection destination is undergoing maintenance.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-33

D3.2.8

Number of Condition Signals and Action Signals

Up to 32 condition signals and 32 action signals for a total of 64 signals can be described in one Sequence Table Block (ST16). When more than 32 condition signals or 32 action signals must be described, the allocation of the number of condition signals and action signals totaling 64 can be changed in units of eight signals.

n Number of Condition Signals and Action Signals ▼ Number of Signals

There are 32 action signals and 32 condition signals in each Sequence Table Block (ST16). However, allocation of the number of signals can be changed in the 8-signal unit using the signal selection dialog which is called from the Function Block Detail Builder. • Select Number of Signals: Sets allocation of the number of I/O signals in the 8-signal unit. Table

Combination of Condition Signal and Action Signal Counts

Condition signal count

Action signal count

8

56

16

48

24

40

32 (default)

32 (default)

40

24

48

16

56

8 D030224E.ai

The signal count selection dialog box is displayed by selecting [Change Number of Signal Lines] from the [View] menu in the Function Block Detail Builder. A display example of the signal line selection dialog box is shown below. Select Number of Signal Lines Condition signal = 32, Operation signal = 32 OK

Cancel D030225E.ai

Figure Example of Signal Line Selection Dialog Box

IMPORTANT Condition signal and action signal information may be lost if the signal count is decreased by changing signal count allocation. The message shown below is displayed when information may be lost. • Type: warning • Description: “Some of the existing definition information will be lost by changing this setting. Is it OK to change?”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3.2.9

D3-34

Rule Extension

In the sequence table, up to 32 rules can be set to test condition signals and action signals. When describing information in the sequence table, if more than 32 rules are required in one phase of a sequence control that is being described in the sequence table, the number of rules can be extended.

n Rule Extension The number of rules in one sequence table is fixed at 32 and cannot be modified. However, if the number of rules in a sequence table is not enough to describe one phase unit, it can be extended in the 32-rule unit by connecting to another sequence table. The number of rules can be extended for a step-type sequence table.

l Method of Rule Extension To extend the number of rules, specify a tag name for the rule extension block (ST16E) in the sequence table setting area of the extending sequence table (ST16). It does not matter if the number of signals and signal contents are different between the extending sequence table (ST16) and extended sequence table (ST16E). The number of rules can be extended in the 32-rule unit per block. An example of the number of rules extended to 64 is shown below. Extending table

Extending table

Extended table

ST16 condition side

ST16 condition side

ST16E condition side

ST16 operation side

ST16 operation side

ST16E operation side D030226E.ai

Figure Examples of Rule Extension

l Sequence Table Group Multiple sequence tables connected for rule extension are referred to as a sequence table group. Up to 100 steps can be described in one sequence table group. The number of rules cannot be extended over 100 steps. A step name cannot be described more than once in a sequence table group (not in both extending table and extended table).

l Editing an Extended Sequence Table An extended sequence table (ST16E) can be opened by selecting [Open the next extension table] from the [display] menu in the Function Block Detail Builder. To enter information for sequence connection, the method used in an extended sequence table (ST16E) can also be used in the extending sequence table (ST16).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-35

n Restrictions on Rule Extension This section explains the restrictions on rule extension.

l Restrictions on the Number of Steps Rule extension is required in the step-type sequence tables. Up to 100 steps can be described in the step-type sequence table. Even when the step-type sequence table is extended for rule extension, the maximum number of describable steps is limited to 100 within a sequence table group. If it is necessary to describe over 100 steps in a step-type sequence table, create another steptype sequence table to allow execution of the second table continued from the first table. There are no restrictions on the number of tables. However, in consideration of the performance of sequence table execution, the number of connected tables in the sequence table group should be as small as possible.

l Restrictions on Step Label The same step label cannot be described in more than one step label setting area within a sequence table group. The step executed over two sequence tables or more cannot be described, either. If a step cannot be described within one sequence table, decrease processing to be executed in a step and describe a step label indicating that the next step starts from a newly extended sequence table.

l Restrictions on Rule Extension Table The rule extension sequence table block should be created in the same control drawing with the original sequence table block. If the rule extension sequence block is created in a drawing different from the original sequence block, on the sequence table view of HIS, the status display of the original sequence block can not be extended to the rule extension sequence block.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about control drawings, see the following: F4. “Control Drawing Builder”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-36

D3.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data In the condition testing in which other function blocks are referenced, various data, block mode and status can be referenced. I/O data such as process I/O, software I/O, communication I/O can also be referenced.

n Function Blocks and I/O Data that can be Referenced from a Sequence Table ▼ Conditional Signal Description

Function blocks that can be referenced from a sequence table are shown below. • Switch Instrument Blocks • Timer Block (TM) • Software Counter Block (CTS) • Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) • Code Input Block (CI) • Code Output Block (CO) • Relational Expression Block (RL) • Resource Scheduler Block (RS) • Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) • Regulatory Control Blocks • Calculation Blocks • Faceplate Blocks • SFC Blocks • Unit Instrument Blocks • Sequence Table Blocks • Logic Chart Blocks In addition, the following I/O data can be referenced from the sequence table. • Processing I/O (contact I/O) • Software I/O (internal switch, annunciator message) • Communication I/O The following should be taken into account when referencing a sequence table block mode. • When O/S is specified in the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will be unsatisfied in the compound block mode in which O/S and another basic block mode are satisfied simultaneously. • When MAN or AUT is specified in the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result is satisfied even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode is established. • The status of pulse width output cannot be referenced.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-37

n Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of switch instrument block and enhanced switch instrument block as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule (1/2)

Condition signal description column Condition specification

Input signal Element symbol.PV

0, 1, 2

Element symbol.PV

=Data status

Element symbol.MV

0, 1, 2

Element symbol.MV

=Data status

Element symbol.TSW

0, 1

Element symbol.TSW

=Data status

Element symbol.BSW

0, 1

Element symbol.MODE

AUT, MAN, CAS, ROUT, TRK, O/S BUM

Element symbol.XMODE BUA BUC Element symbol.BSTS

NR, SIM, ANCK

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Answerback value coincides with specification.

N

Answerback value does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Output value coincides with specification.

N

Output value does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Tracking switch is in specified state.

N

Tracking switch is not in specified state.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Backup switch is in specified state.

N

Backup switch is not in specified state.

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Block is in ROUT (MAN) mode.

N

Block is not in ROUT (MAN) mode.

Y

Block is in ROUT (AUT) mode.

N

Block is not in ROUT (AUT) mode.

Y

Block is in ROUT (CAS) mode.

N

Block is not in ROUT (CAS) mode.

Y

Block status coincides with specification.

N

Block status does not coincide with specification. D030227E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-38

Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule (2/2)

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.ALRM

NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, ANS-, PERR, CNF

Element symbol.XALRM IOP Element symbol.AFLS

PERR, AFL (*1), NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, ANS-, CNF

Element symbol.AF

NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, ANS-, PERR, CNF

Element symbol.XAF

IOP

Element symbol.AOFS

NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, CNF, ANS-, PERR, AOF (*2)

Element symbol.CSV

0, 1, 2

Element symbol.CSV

=Data status

Element symbol.RMV

0, 1, 2

Element symbol.RMV

=Data status

Element symbol.BPSW

0, 1

Element symbol.BPSW

=Data status

Condition rule Condition

Conditions for true status

Y

Specified alarm is activated.

N

Specified alarm is not activated.

Y

Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.

N

Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.

N

IOP or IOP- detection is enabled.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked.

Y

Sequence setting value coincides with specification.

N

Sequence setting value does not coincides with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincides with specification.

Y

Remote manipulated output value coincides with specification.

N

Remote manipulated output value does not coincides with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincides with specification.

Y

Bypass switch is in specified state.

N

Bypass switch is not in specified state.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincides with specification. D030228E.ai

*1: *2:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-39

n Timer Block Reference (TM) The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the Timer Block (TM) and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.MODE

AUT, O/S

Element symbol.BSTS

STOP, RUN, PAUS, NR, PALM, CTUP

Element symbol.ALRM

NR

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL (*1), NR

Element symbol.AF

NR

Element symbol.AOFS

NR,AOF?(*2)

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Block status is in specified state.

N

Block status is not in specified state.

Y

Alarm status is in specified state.

N

Alarm status is not in specified state.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked. D030229E.ai

*1: *2:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

n Software Counter Block Reference (CTS) The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the Software Counter Block (CTS) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule is shown below. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.MODE

AUT, O/S

Element symbol.BSTS

STOP, RUN, NR, PALM, CTUP

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Block status is in specified state.

N

Block status is not in specified state. D030230E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-40

n Pulse Train Input Counter Block Reference (CTP) The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.MODE

AUT, O/S

Element symbol.BSTS

STOP, RUN, PAUS, NR, PALM, CTUP

Element symbol.ALRM

CNF, NR, IOP

Element symbol.XALRM

IOP

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL (*1), CNF, NR, IOP

Element symbol.AF

CNF, NR, IOP

Element symbol.XAF

IOP

Element symbol.AOFS

CNF, NR, IOP, AOF (*2)

Element symbol.PV

=Data status

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Block status is in specified state.

N

Block status is not in specified state.

Y

Alarm status is in specified state.

N

Alarm status is not in specified state.

Y

Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.

N

Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.

N

IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification. D030231E.ai

*1: *2:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-41

n Code Input Block Reference (CI) The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the Code Input Block (CI) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.MODE

AUT, O/S

Element symbol.BSTS

NR, LO, HI, ERR

Element symbol.PV

=Data status

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Block status coincides with specification.

N

Block status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification. D030232E.ai

n Code Output Block Reference (CO) The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the Code Output Block (CO) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.MODE

Condition specification AUT, O/S

Element symbol.BSTS

NR, LO, HI

Element symbol.PV

=Data status

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Block status coincides with specification.

N

Block status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification. D030233E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-42

n Relational Expression Block Reference (RL) The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the Relational Expression Block (RL) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule Condition rule column Condition specification

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.X01 to 16

EQ, GT, GE, LT, LE, AND

Conditions for true status

Y

Relationship between two data is in specified state.

N

Relationship between two data is not in specified state. D030234E.ai

The table below lists the description of condition specifications. Table

Description of Condition Specifications

Symbol

Name

Description

EQ (*1)

equal

data 1 = data 2

GT

greater than

data 1 > data 2

GE

great than or equal to

data 1 ≥ data 2

LT

less than

data 1 < data 2

LE

less than or equal to

data 1 ≤ data 2

AND

logical product

bitwise logical product of data 1 and 2 D030235E.ai

*1:

When using EQ relation by comparing the two variables with real numbers, the condition may not be established because of a trivia difference. It is better to use GT, GE, LT and LE instead of EQ when comparing the two variables with real numbers.

n Resource Scheduler Block Reference (RS) The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the Resource Scheduler Block (RS) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.MODE

Condition specification AUT, O/S

Element symbol.RQ01 to 32 0, 1

Element symbol.PM01 to 32 0, 1

Element symbol.RMH

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Usage request status coincides with specification. (0: Not requested, 1: Requesting)

N

Usage request status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Permission status coincides with specification. (0: Not permitted, 1: Permitted)

N

Permission status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Maximum permissible number coincides with specification.

N

Maximum permissible number does not coincide with specification.

0 to 32

D030236E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-43

n Valve Monitoring Block Reference (VLVM) The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.MODE

AUT, O/S

Element symbol.ALRM

NR

Element symbol.AFLS

NR, AFL (*1)

Element symbol.AF

NR

Element symbol.AOFS

NR, AOF (*2)

Element symbol.PV01 to 16

Element symbol.PVR

Element symbol.MCSW

Condition rule column Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Specified alarm is activated.

N

Specified alarm is not activated.

Y

Alarm is flashing.

N

Alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked.

Y

Valve normal/abnormal state coincides with specification. (0: Normal, 1: Abnormal)

N

Valve normal/abnormal state does not coincide with specification.

Y

Representative valve normal/abnormal state coincides with specification. (0: All valves are normal, 1: At least one of the alarms is abnormal)

N

Representative valve normal/abnormal state does not coincide with specification.

Y

Message suppression coincides with specification. (0: Not suppressed, 1:Suppressed)

N

Message suppression does not coincide with specification.

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

Conditions for true status

D030237E.ai

*1: *2:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-44

n Regulatory Control Block Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the block mode, block status, alarm status, and data status of the regulatory control block as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.MODE

Condition specification Block mode BUM

Element symbol.XMODE

BUA BUC

Element symbol.BSTS Element symbol.ALRM

Block status Alarm status IOP

Element symbol.XALRM VEL Element symbol.AFLS

Alarm status, AFL (*1)

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status

Element symbol.XAF

IOP

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status, AOF (*2)

Element symbol.Data item

Data value

Element symbol.Data item

=Data status

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode is in specified state.

N

Block mode is not in specified state.

Y

Block is in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS (MAN) mode

N

Block is not in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS (MAN) mode

Y

Block is in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS (AUT) mode

N

Block is not in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS (AUT) mode

Y

Block is in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS) mode

N

Block is not in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS) mode

Y

Block status is in specified state.

N

Block status is not in specified state.

Y

Specified alarm is activated.

N

Specified alarm is not activated.

Y

Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.

N

Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.

Y

Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.

N

Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL- status.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.

N

IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked.

Y

Data value coincides with specification.

N

Data value does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification. D030238E.ai

*1: *2:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-45

l Regulatory Control Block that can Describe Data Values in Condition Specifications The table below lists the regulatory control blocks that can describe data values in condition specifications and the setting ranges of data items. Table

Regulatory Control Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition Specifications and the Setting Ranges of Data Items (1/3)

Block code

PID

PID-HLD

PID-BSW

PID-TP

ONOFF

Name

PID Controller Block

Sampling PI Controller Block

PID Controller Block with Batch Switch

Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block

2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

ONOFF-E

Enhanced 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

ONOFF-G

3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

ONOFF-GE

PD-MR

PI-BLEND

Block code

Enhanced 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

PD Controller Block with Manual Reset

Blending PI Controller Block

Name

Data item

Setting range

TSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

RST

0, 1

Data item

Setting range D030239E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-46

Table

Regulatory Control Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition Specifications and the Setting Ranges of Data Items (2/3)

Block code

PID-STC

Name

Self-Tuning PID Controller Block

MLD

Manual Loader Block

MLD-PVI

Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator

MLD-SW

MC-2

MC-2E

MC-3

MC-3E

Block code

Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW

2-Position Motor Control Block

Enhanced 2-Position Motor Control Block

3-Position Motor Control Block

Enhanced 3-Position Motor Control Block

Name

Data item

Setting range

TSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

STC

-1 to 3

TSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0 to 4

SIMM

0 to 1

CSV

0 to 2

PV

0 to 2

MV

0 to 2

TSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0 to 4

SIMM

0 to 1

CSV

0 to 2

PV

0 to 2

MV

0 to 2

TSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0 to 4

SIMM

0 to 1

CSV

0 to 2

PV

0 to 2

MV

0 to 2

TSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0 to 4

SIMM

0 to 1

CSV

0 to 2

PV

0 to 2

MV

0 to 2 Data item

Setting range D030240E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-47

Table

Regulatory Control Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition Specifications and the Setting Ranges of Data Items (3/3)

Block code

RATIO

PG-L13

BSETU-2

BSETU-3

VELLIM

SS-H/M/L

AS-H/M/L

SS-DUAL

FFSUM

XCPL

Name

Ratio Set Block

13-Zone Program Set Block

Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block

Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block

Velocity Limiter Block

Signal Selectors

Auto Selectors

Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block

Feedforward Signal Summing Block

Non-Interference Control Output Block

Data item

Setting range

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

ZONE

1 to 13

ZSTR

1 to 13

ZEND

1 to 13

SW

0 to 4

EMSW

0, 1

ZONE

0 to 11

SW

0 to 4

EMSW

0, 1

ZONE

0 to 11

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0, 1

SW

0 to 4

SEL

0 to 3

PSW

0 to 3

SW

0 to 4

SEL

0 to 3

SW

1 to 3

SEL

1 to 2

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

FSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

SW

0 to 3

SW

0 to 5

SPLIT

Control Signal Splitter Block

ALM-R

Representative Alarm Block

SV

0 to 15

SBSD

Ys Instrument Batch Set Station Block

SV

0 to 8

SLBC

Ys Instrument Batch Set Controller Block

SV

0 to 8

Block code

Name

Data item

Setting range D030241E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-48

n Calculation Block Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the block mode of calculation block, block status, alarm status, and data status, as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule is shown below. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.MODE

AUT, O/S

Element symbol.BSTS

RUN, STOP

Element symbol.ALRM

Alarm status IOP

Element symbol.XALRM VEL Element symbol.AFLS

Alarm status, AFL (*1)

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status

Element symbol.XAF

IOP

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status, AOFS (*2)

Element symbol.ACT

ON

Element symbol.data item

Data value (*3)

Element symbol.data item

=Data status

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Block status coincides with specification.

N

Block status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Alarm status is in specified state.

N

Alarm status is not in specified state.

Y

Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.

N

Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.

Y

Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.

N

Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL- status.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.

N

IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked.

Y

Calculation result is not 0.

N

Calculation result is 0.

Y

Data value coincides with specification.

N

Data value does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with the status of specified data.

N

Data status does not coincide with the status of specified data. D030242E.ai

*1: *2: *3:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status. Only integers can be a data value. If the data item is a floating decimal point, the value is rounded off for comparison.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-49

l Calculation Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition Specifications The table below lists the data items of Calculation Blocks that can describe data values in condition specifications and their setting ranges. Table

Calculation Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition Specifications and Setting Range of Data Items (1/2)

Block code

Name

DLAY

Dead-Time Block

DLAY-C

Dead-Time Compensation Block

AVE-M

Moving-Average Block

INTEG

Integration Block

AVE-C

Cumulative-Average Block

SW-33

Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block

BDSET-1L

One-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-1C

One-Batch String Data Set Block

BDSET-2L

Two-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-2C

Two-Batch String Data Set Block

SW-91

One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block

DSW-16

Selector Switch Block for 16 Data

DSW-16C

Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data

BDA-L

Batch Data Acquisition Block

BDA-C

Batch String Data Acquisition Block

Data item

Setting range

RST

0, 1

SW

0, 1, 2

SW

0 to 3

SW

0 to 3

SW

0 to 9

SW

0 to 16

SW

0 to 17 D030243E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-50

Table

Calculation Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition Specifications and Setting Range of Data Items (2/2)

Block code AND (*1)

OR (*1)

NOT (*1) SRS1-S (*1)

SRS1-R (*1)

SRS2-S (*1)

SRS2-R (*1)

WOUT (*1)

Name Logical AND Block

Logical OR Block

Logical NOT Block Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

Wipeout Block

OND (*1)

ON-Delay Timer Block

OFFD (*1)

OFF-Delay Timer Block

TON (*1)

One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge Trigger)

TOFF (*1)

One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge Trigger)

Data item

Setting range

RV1

0, 1

RV2

0, 1

CPV

0, 1

RV1

0, 1

RV2

0, 1

CPV

0, 1

RV

0, 1

CPV

0, 1

RV1

0, 1

RV2

0, 1

CPV1

0, 1

RV1

0, 1

RV2

0, 1

CPV1

0, 1

RV1

0, 1

RV2

0, 1

CPV1

0, 1

CPV2

0, 1

RV1

0, 1

RV2

0, 1

CPV1

0, 1

CPV2

0, 1

RV1

0, 1

RV2

0, 1

CPV

0, 1

RV

0, 1

CPV

0, 1

RV

0, 1

CPV

0, 1

RV

0, 1

CPV

0, 1

RV

0, 1

CPV

0, 1

GT (*1)

Comparator Block (Greater Than)

CPV

0, 1

GE (*1)

Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)

CPV

0, 1

EQ (*1)

Equal Operator Block

CPV

0, 1

Block code

Name

Data item

Setting range D030244E.ai

*1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-51

l Calculation Blocks that can Reference Calculation Results by One-Shot Execution The table below lists Calculation Blocks that can reference calculation results by one-shot execution of the condition signal, “element symbol. ACT.ON.” Table

One-Shot Executable Blocks for Condition Testing Block type

Arithmetic calculation

Logic Calculation (*1)

General-Purpose Calculations

Code

Name

ADD

Addition Block

MUL

Multiplication Block

DIV

Division Block

AVE

Averaging Block

AND

Logical AND Block

OR

Logical OR Block

NOT

Logical NOT Block

SRS1-S

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop with 1 Output

SRS1-R

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop 1 Output

SRS2-S

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop with 2 Outputs

SRS2-R

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop 2 Outputs

WOUT

Wipeout Block

GT

Comparator Block (Greater Than)

GE

Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)

EQ

Equal Operator Block

BAND

Bitwise AND Block

BOR

Bitwise OR Block

BNOT

Bitwise NOT Block

CALCU

General-Purpose Calculation Block

CALCU-C

General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O D030245E.ai

*1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-52

n Faceplate Block Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the faceplate block, as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule Condition rule Condition specification column

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.MODE

Block mode BUM

Element symbol.XMODE

BUA BUC

Element symbol.BSTS Element symbol.ALRM

Block status Alarm status IOP

Element symbol.XALRM VEL Element symbol.AFLS

Alarm status, AFL (*1)

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status, AOF (*2)

Element symbol.SV

1 to 99 (Only BSI block is valid)

Element symbol.PV01 to 10

0, 1

Element symbol.Data item

=Data status

Element symbol. SWCR[n] (*3)

0 to 15

Element symbol. SWST[n] (*3)

0, 1

Element symbol. SWOP[n] (*3)

-15 to 15

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode coincides with specification.

N

Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Y

Block is in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS (MAN) mode.

N

Block is not in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS (MAN) mode.

Y

Block is in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS (AUT) mode.

N

Block is not in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS (AUT) mode.

Y

Block is in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS) mode.

N

Block is not in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS) mode.

Y

Block status coincides with specification.

N

Block status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Specified alarm is on.

N

Specified alarm is not on.

Y

Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.

N

Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.

Y

Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.

N

Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL- status.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked.

Y

Phase step number coincides with specification.

N

Phase step number does not coincide with specification.

Y

Operation command coincides with specification.

N

Operation command does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Switch display color coincides with specification.

N

Switch display color does not coincide with specification.

Y

Switch flashing status coincides with specification.

N

Switch flashing status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Switch operation disabled status coincides with specification.

N

Switch operation disabled status does not coincide with specification. D030246E.ai

*1: *2: *3:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status. n is the subscript of the 1 dimensional array. This subscript is the number of the push button switches on a faceplate block. This number varies with the type of faceplate block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-53

n SFC Block Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the SFC block as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.MODE

MAN, SEMI, AUT, O/S

Element symbol.BSTS

RUN, PAUS, STOP, ABRT

Element symbol.ALRM

Alarm status

Element symbol.AFLS

Alarm status, AFL (*1)

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status, AOF (*2)

Element symbol.Data item

Data value

Element symbol.Data item

=Data status

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode is in specified state.

N

Block mode is not in specified state.

Y

Block status is in specified state.

N

Block status is not in specified state.

Y

Specified alarm is activated.

N

Specified alarm is not activated.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked.

Y

Data value coincides with specification.

N

Data value does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status coincides with specification.

N

Data status does not coincide with specification. D030247E.ai

*1: *2:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

l Setting Range of Data Item When Describing Data Value in Condition Specification The table below lists the data items of SFC block that can describe data values in condition specifications and their setting ranges. • STEPNO:

1 to 99

• SWCR[5]:

0 to 15

• SWST[5]:

0, 1

• SWOP[5]:

-15 to 15

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-54

n Unit Supervision Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the unit instrument block as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.MODE

MAN, SEMI, AUT, O/S

Element symbol.BSTS

Unit status

Element symbol.ALRM

Alarm status

Element symbol.AFLS

Alarm status, AFL (*1)

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status

Element symbol.AOFS Element symbol.STEPNO

Alarm status, AOF (*2) 1 to 99

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Unit mode is in specified state.

N

Unit mode is not in specified state.

Y

Unit status is in specified state.

N

Unit status is not in specified state.

Y

Specified alarm is activated.

N

Specified alarm is not activated.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is off.

N

Specified alarm detection is on.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked.

Y

SFC step number coincides with specification.

N

SFC step number does not coincide with specification. D030248E.ai

*1: *2:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-55

n Processing I/O Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the processing I/O block as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Element symbol.PV

Element symbol.PV

Condition specification

Condition rule column Y

ON/OFF status of contact I/O coincides with specification.

N

ON/OFF status of contact I/O does not coincide with specification.

Y

Data status of contact I/O coincides with specification.

N

Data status of contact I/O does not coincide with specification.

ON, OFF

=Data status

Conditions for true status

D030249E.ai

n Global Switch Reference The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a global switch as condition test reference signal in a sequence table and the True/False representation of Y/N in the condition rule columns of the sequence table are shown as follows. Table

Syntax for condition signal description and True/False representation of Y/N in condition rule columns

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.PV

ON, OFF

Element symbol.PV

=BAD

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Specified global switch status is True.

N

Specified global switch status is False.

Y

Data status of global switch is BAD.

N

Data status of global switch is not BAD. D030250E.ai

n Common Switch Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the common switch as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Element symbol.PV

Condition specification

ON, OFF

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

ON/OFF status of common switch coincides with specification.

N

ON/OFF status of common switch does not coincide with specification. D030251E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-56

n Annunciator Message Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of the annunciator message as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Element symbol.PV

Condition specification

AFL

element symbol.AOFS

AOF

Conditions for true status

Y

Annunciator occurrence status coincides with specification. (ON: Occurred, OFF: Not occurred)

N

Annunciator occurrence status does not coincide with specification.

Y

Flashing status

N

Normal status (not flashing)

ON, OFF

element symbol.AFLS

element symbol.RP

Condition rule column

Y

Alarm masking status

N

Normal status (no alarm masking status)

Y

Repeated warning status coincides with specification. (ON: Waiting for repeated warning, OFF: NR)

N

Repeated warning status does not coincide with specification.

ON, OFF

D030252E.ai

n Communication I/O Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and status of communication I/O as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal

Condition specification

Element symbol.PV (*1)

ON, OFF

Element symbol.PV

=Data status

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

All relevant bits are in the same ON/OFF status.

N

Relevant bits are not in the same ON/OFF status.

Y

All relevant bits are in the same data status.

N

Relevant bits are not in the same data status. D030253E.ai

*1:

Only discrete type element may be referred.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-57

D3.2.11 Control Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table In a condition testing referencing a sequence table, in addition to the sequence table block mode and status, the true/false status of condition can also be referenced by performing one-shot execution of the referenced sequence table. To reference a sequence table whose number of rules is extended over multiple sequence tables, specify a tag name for the extending sequence table.

n Referencing an Entire Sequence Table ▼ Conditional Signal Description - Sequence Table

The true/false status of condition for the entire sequence table specified is referenced. The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the entire sequence table and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule Condition rule Condition specification column

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol. SD

R

Conditions for true status

Y

At least one target condition rule is satisfied.

N

None of the target condition rules is satisfied. D030254E.ai

The condition rule subject to referencing varies by the type of sequence tables at reference source and destination (step type/nonstep type) as shown below. Table

Reference Target Rules by Sequence Table Type Reference source

Nonstep type

Step type

Reference destination

Reference target rule

Nonstep type

All rules

Step type

Rule of Step 00

Nonstep type

All rules

Step type

Rule of Step 00 and that of the same step name as reference source D030255E.ai

The following should be taken into account when referencing the entire sequence table. • When referencing the entire sequence table, only condition signal descriptions of the referenced sequence table are valid. Ignore any action signal description. • If no Y/N pattern exists in the condition rule of referenced sequence table, the status of rule condition is false. If the Y/N pattern of such condition rule is unspecified, the status becomes unconditionally true in the periodic processing of the above sequence table. • When there exist no steps to be executed in the referenced sequence table, the previous true/false status of condition is maintained as a current reference result. • When Step 00 exists in the reference destination, rules that belong to Step 00 will also be executed. However, when no steps exist as an execution target, the reference result of Step 00 is ignored. • Other sequence tables can be referenced in the referenced sequence table condition column. In this case, up to seven levels of nests (including the first sequence table) are possible.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-58

l When the Referenced Sequence Table is a Nonstep Type A description example of the nonstep-type referenced sequence table is shown below. ST 003

ST 010 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05

Tag name Data item

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05

Tag name Data item

Data

DI0010.PV

ON

................................

Y

DI0030.PV

ON

DI0015.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

DI0031.PV

ST010.SD

R

................................

Y

N

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

DO0001.PV H

................................

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

Step label

Data

ON

Step label Comment ............................. Y ............................. Y

Y

DI0036.PV

ON

.............................

Y

N

%SW0201.PV

ON

.............................

Y

N

Comment Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N N

N

Y Y

N Y

N

D030256E.ai

Figure Description Example of Referencing the Entire Nonstep-Type Sequence Table

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example. • When “Y” is described in the condition rule of the condition signal ST010.SD.R. In the description of the condition signal of the referenced sequence table, if there exists at least one rule with a true status, the status of condition signal is true. If no such rules exist, the condition of the referencing sequence table is false. As for Rule 01 in Table ST003 listed above, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and one of the conditions at rules 01 to 32 of Table ST010 is true. • When “N” is described in the condition rule of the condition signal ST010.SD.R. In the description of the condition signal of the referenced sequence table, if there exists no rule with a true status, the status of condition signal is true. If there exists at least one rule with a true status, the condition of the referencing sequence table is false. As for Rule 03 in Table ST003 listed above, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and none of the conditions at rules 01 to 32 of Table ST010 is true. • The condition of rules that has no Y/N patterns in Table ST010 is false.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-59

l When the Referenced Sequence Table is a Step Type A description example of the step-type referenced sequence table is shown below. When both sequence tables at reference source and destination are a step type, the true/false status of Step 00 rule condition and that of the rule with the same step name as the reference source is referenced. ST 003

ST 010 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05

Tag name Data item

Data

DI0010.PV

ON

DI0015.PV

ON

ST010.SD DI0018.PV

Step label

1

2

................................

Y

Y

................................

Y

N

DI0031.PV

R

................................

Y

N

DI0036.PV

ON

................................

N

DO0001.PV H

................................

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

Comment

3

4

Y

N

Tag name Data item

Y

Y

DI0030.PV

%SW0201.PV

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data

Step label 1 Comment

1

ON ............................. ON .............................

Y Y

Y

ON ............................. ON .............................

Y

N

Y

N

2

3

Y

N N

N

Y Y

N Y

N

D030257E.ai

Figure Description Example of Referencing the Entire Nonstep-Type Sequence Table

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example. • As for Rule 01 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and one of the conditions at Rule 01 or 02 of Table ST010 is true. • As for Rule 03 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and the condition at Rule 04, Step 3 of Table ST010 is false.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-60

l When Step 00 and Step n Exist in a Referenced Sequence Table A description example of when Step 00 and Step n exist in a referenced sequence table is shown below. ST 003

Tag name Data item

ST 010 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data

DI0010.PV

ON

DI0015.PV

ON

Step label 1 Comment ................................ Y ................................ Y

ST010.SD

R

................................

Y

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

DO0001.PV H

................................

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

2 Y

3

4

Y

N

Tag name Data item

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data

Step label

0 0

0 0

DI0030.PV.ON

ON

Comment .............................

N

DI0031.PV.ON

ON

.............................

Y

Y

N

DI0036.PV.ON

ON

.............................

Y

N

%SW0201.PV

ON

.............................

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

1

2

3

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N Y

N

D030258E.ai

Figure Description Example of Referencing the Entire Step-Type Sequence Table

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example. • The reference range of the referenced table at Rule 01, Table ST003 is steps 00 and 1 of Table ST010. As for Rule 01 in Table ST003 listed above, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and one of the conditions at Step 00 Rule 01/02 or Step 1 Rule 03 of Table ST010 are true. • The reference range of the referenced table at Rule 03 of Table ST003 are steps 00 and 3 of Table ST010. As for Rule 03 in Table ST003 listed above, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and the condition at Step 00 Rule 01/02 or Step 3 Rule 05 of Table ST010 are false.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-61

n Referencing Sequence Table Corresponding Rule Number The true/false status of condition for the same rule number as the current rule number in the referencing sequence table is referenced. Use this to extend the number of condition signals beyond 64 in a nonstep-type sequence table. The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the true/false status of the conditions for the corresponding rule number and the conditions for true Y/N status described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule Condition rule Condition specification column

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol. SD

C

Conditions for true status

Y

Condition for the same rule number is satisfied.

N

Condition for the same rule number is not satisfied. D030259E.ai

• When the referenced sequence table is a nonstep type and the referencing sequence table is a step type. Although referencing a corresponding rule number is meaningless, condition reference to the corresponding rule is executed. • When the referenced sequence table is a step type. Referencing the same rule is meaningless and therefore causes an error. However, the status of condition signal is true. The following should be taken into account when referencing a corresponding rule number. • When referencing the entire sequence table, only condition signal descriptions of the referenced sequence table are valid. Ignore any action signal description. • If no Y/N pattern exists in the condition rule of referenced sequence table, the status of rule condition is false. If the Y/N pattern of such a condition rule is unspecified, the status becomes unconditionally true in the periodic processing of the above sequence table. • Other sequence tables can be referenced in the referenced sequence table condition column. In this case, up to seven levels of nests (including the first sequence table) are possible.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-62

A description example of when referencing the true/false status of conditions for a corresponding rule number is shown below. ST 003

ST 010

Tag name Data item Data

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Comment

Step label 1

2

3

4

Y

N

Tag name Data item

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data

Step label Comment

DI0010.PV

ON

................................

Y

DI0030.PV

ON

.............................

Y

DI0015.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

DI0031.PV

ON

.............................

Y

Y

ST010.SD

C

................................

Y

N

DI0036.PV

ON

.............................

Y

N

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

%SW0201.PV ON

.............................

Y

N

DO0001.PV H

................................

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

Y

Y

Y

Y

N N

N

Y Y

N Y

N

D030260E.ai

Figure Description Example of Referencing the Corresponding Rule Number

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example. • As for Rule 01 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and the conditions at Rule 01 of Table ST010 are true. • As for Rule 03 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and the conditions at Rule 03 of Table ST010 are false.

IMPORTANT When referencing a corresponding rule number, do not describe the step number on the step label of the referenced sequence table. When referencing a corresponding rule number, referencing cannot be properly performed if the step number is described on the step label of the referenced sequence table.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-63

n Referencing a Particular Step in a Sequence Table The true/false status of conditions for a particular step of a specified sequence table is referenced. The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the true/false status of conditions for a particular step, and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. The step label is specified in the condition specification. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule Condition rule Condition specification column

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol. SA

xx

Conditions for true status

Y

At least one of the conditions for steps 00 and xx is satisfied.

N

None of the conditions for steps 00 and xx is satisfied. D030261E.ai

xx:

Specify a step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

The condition rule subject to referencing varies by the type of sequence table at reference source and destination (step-type/nonstep type) as shown below. Table

Reference Target Rules by Sequence Table Type Reference source

Nonstep type Step type

Reference destination

Reference target condition rule

Nonstep type

All rules

Step type

Rules of a specified step

Nonstep type

All rules

Step type

Rules of a specified step D030262E.ai

• When the specified step does not exist in the referenced sequence table, the reference result will be the previous true/false condition status that has been latched. • When Step 00 exists in the reference destination, the rules belonging to Step 00 will also be executed. However, when the specified step does not exist in the referenced sequence table, the reference result of Step 00 is ignored. The following should be taken into account when referencing a particular step. • When referencing a particular step in the sequence table, only condition signal descriptions of the referenced sequence table are valid. Ignore any action signal description. • If no Y/N pattern exists in the condition rule of referenced sequence table, the status of rule condition is false. If the Y/N pattern of such a condition rule is unspecified, the status becomes unconditionally true in the periodic processing of the above sequence table. • Other sequence tables can be referenced in the referenced sequence table condition column. In this case, up to seven levels of nests (including the first sequence table) are possible.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-64

A description example of referencing the true/false status of conditions for a particular step number is shown below. ST 003

ST 010 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data

DI0010.PV

ON

................................

Y

DI0030.PV

ON

..............................

Y

DI0015.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

DI0031.PV

ON

..............................

Y

Y

ST010.SA

2

................................

Y

N

DI0036.PV

ON

..............................

Y

N

N

Y

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

%SW0201.PV

ON

..............................

Y

N

N

Y

DO0001.PV H

................................

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

Comment

Step label 1

2 Y

3

4

Y

N

Y

Y

Tag name Data item

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05

Tag name Data item

Data

Step label 1 Comment

1

2

3

Y

N N

N Y

N

D030263E.ai

Figure Description Example of Referencing a Particular Step Number

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example. • As for Rule 01 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and the conditions for Step 2, or Rule 03 of Table ST010 are true. • As for Rule 03 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and the conditions for Step 2, or Rule 03 of Table ST010 are false.

l When Steps 00 and n Exist in the Referenced Sequence Table A description example of the sequence table when steps 00 and n exist in the referenced sequence table are shown below. ST 003

Tag name Data item

ST 010 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data Comment

Step label 1

2

3

4

Y

N

Tag name Data item

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data

DI0010.PV

ON

................................

DI0030.PV

ON

DI0015.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

DI0031.PV

ON

ST010.SA

2

................................

Y

N

DI0036.PV

ON

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

%SW0201.PV

ON

DO0001.PV H

................................

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

Y

Y

Y

Y

Step label 0 0 Comment ............................... Y ............................... Y ............................... Y ............................... Y

0 0

1

2

3

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y N N

N

N Y

N

D030264E.ai

Figure Description Example of Referencing a Particular Step Number

The table reference range for the rule number 01 of Table ST003 are steps 00 and 2 of Table ST010 in the above example.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-65

n Sequence Table Step Label Reference The progress status of a sequence phase can be confirmed by referencing the sequence table step label. However, such confirmation does not involve the true/false status of step conditions since it only determines whether or not a specified step processing is being performed in the referenced sequence table. The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the step label and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule Condition rule Condition specification column

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.PV

xx

Conditions for true status

Y

Current execution step label is xx.

N

Current execution step label is other than xx. D030265E.ai

xx:

Specify a step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

A description example of referencing the execution status of Step 1 processing in Table ST010 is shown below. ST 003

Tag name Data item SW0110.PV ST010.PV

Rule number Data

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

Step label Comment

ON ................................ ................................ 1

ST010.SA

1

................................

SW0110.PV

H

................................

Y

Y

Y

N Y

N

Condition Operation D030266E.ai

Figure Description Example of Step Label Reference

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-66

n Sequence Table Block Mode Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the sequence table block mode, and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule Condition rule Condition specification column

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.MODE

O/S, MAN, AUT

Conditions for true status

Y

Block mode is in the specified state.

N

Block mode is not in the specified state. D030267E.ai

A description example of restarting Table ST005 from the stop status is shown below. Tag name Data item

Rule number Data

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

Step label Comment

ST005.MODE MAN

..............................

Y

%SW0201.PV ON

..............................

Y

ST005.MODE AUT

..............................

Y

Condition

Operation

D030268E.ai

Figure Description Example of Block Mode Reference

The following should be taken into account when referencing a sequence table block mode. • When O/S is specified in the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will be unsatisfied in the compound block mode in which O/S and another basic block mode are satisfied simultaneously. • When MAN or AUT is specified in the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result is satisfied even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode is satisfied.

n Sequence Table Alarm Status Reference The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the sequence table alarm status and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. Table

Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.ALRM

Condition specification NR

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL (*1), NR

Element symbol.AF

NR

Element symbol.AOFS

NR, AOF (*2)

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Alarm status is in the specified state.

N

Alarm status is not in the specified state.

Y

Specified alarm is flashing.

N

Specified alarm is not flashing.

Y

Specified alarm detection is canceled.

N

Specified alarm is being detected.

Y

Specified alarm is masked.

N

Specified alarm is unmasked. D030269E.ai

*1: *2:

Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status. Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status. IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-67

D3.2.12 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Logic Chart Reference in Sequence Table When using logic chart for condition test, a block mode of a logic chart and an alarm status of a logic chart can be used as a reference signal in a sequence table.

n Logic Chart Block Mode Reference ▼ Conditional Signal Description - Logic Chart

The specified logic chart block mode can be used as reference signal in a sequence table. The syntax for applying the logic chart block mode as condition test reference signal in a sequence table and the True/False representation of Y/N in the condition rule columns of the sequence table are shown as follows. Table

Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation of Y/N in Condition Rule Columns

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.MODE

Condition specification O/S, MAN, AUT

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Specified Block mode is True.

N

Specified Block mode is False. D030270E.ai

The following points should be taken into consideration when referencing a logic chart block mode. • When O/S is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will be False when the block is in the compound block mode, i.e., O/S and another basic block mode exist simultaneously. • When MAN or AUT is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will be True even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode exists.

n Logic Chart Alarm Status Reference The specified alarm status of logic chart can be used as reference signal in a sequence table. The syntax for applying the alarm status of logic chart as condition test reference signal in a sequence table and the True/False representation of Y/N in the condition rule columns of the sequence table are shown as follows. Table

Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation of Y/N in Condition Rule Columns

Condition signal description column Input signal Element symbol.ALM

Condition specification NR

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL (*1), NR

Element symbol.AF

NR

Element symbol.AOFS

NR, AOF (*2)

Condition rule column

Conditions for true status

Y

Specified Alarm Status is True.

N

Specified Alarm Status is False.

Y

Specified Alarm symbol is flashing.

N

Specified Alarm symbol is not flashing.

Y

Alarm Detection Disabled is True.

N

Alarm Detection Disabled is False.

Y

Alarm Inhibition is True.

N

Alarm Inhibition is False. D030271E.ai

*1: *2:

The condition test for Alarm Symbol Flashing can only test the flashing status of each block or symbol, can not test the flashing status of each alarming item. The condition test for Alarm Inhibition can only test the inhibition status of each block or symbol, can not test the inhibition status of each alarming item. IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-68

D3.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Sequence Table Block may manipulate the mode or status change of other function blocks. In addition, it can also manipulate the status change of process I/O, software I/O and communication I/O.

n Function Blocks and I/O Data for Which Status Manipulation can be Performed from Sequence Table ▼ Action Signal Description

Function blocks for which status manipulation can be performed from the sequence table are: • Switch Instrument Blocks • Timer Block (TM) • Software Counter Block (CTS) • Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) • Code Input Block (CI) • Code Output Block (CO) • Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) • Regulatory Control Blocks • Calculation Blocks • Faceplate Blocks • SFC Blocks • Unit Instrument Blocks • Sequence Table Blocks • Logic Chart Blocks I/O data for which status manipulation can be performed from the sequence table are: • Process I/O • Software I/O (internal switch, annunciator message, sequence message output) • Communication I/O

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-69

n Status Manipulation of Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block The table below lists the symbolic convention of action signal and action description for executing status manipulation on various functions of switch instrument block and enhanced switch instrument block. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Element symbol.MODE

MAN, AUT, CAS, ROUT, O/S

Y

Block mode change command

N

–

Element symbol.AF

ANS+, ANS-, IOP, PERR, OOP, CNF

Y

Cancel specified alarm detection

N

Execute specified alarm detection

Element symbol.XAF

IOP

Y

Disables IOP and IOP- detection

N

Enables IOP and IOP- detection

Y

Mask specified alarm

N

Unmask specified alarm

Element symbol.AOFS

Element symbol.AFLS

ANS+, ANS-, PERR, CNF, IOP, AOF (*1), OOP AFL 0, 1, 2 P0

Element symbol.CSV P1 P2 Element symbol.TSW

0, 1

Element symbol.BPSW

0, 1

Element symbol.BSW

0, 1

Element symbol.PV

=XCAL (*3)

Y

Perform alarm group confirmation

N

–

Y

Set the sequence setpoint (CSV) (*2)

N

–

Y

Set CSV to 0

N

Set CSV to 2

Y

Set CSV to 1

N

–

Y

Set CSV to 2

N

Set CSV to 0

Y

Tracking switch (0: OFF, 1: ON)

N

–

Y

Bypass switch (0: OFF, 1: ON)

N

–

Y

Backup switch (0: OFF, 1: ON)

N

–

Y

Switch to CAL or release CAL

N

– D030272E.ai

*1: *2: *3:

AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This action performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR. To set a manipulated output value for the switch instrument from other function block, write data to the sequence setpoint (CSV). If the switch instrument block or enhanced switch instrument block is either in AUT or CAS state, the output will be performed after the value of CSV is written to the manipulated output value (MV). The Output Timing of the sequence table that =XCAL is applied should be set to [Output Only When Condition Changes (C)].

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-70

n Status Manipulation of Timer Block (TM) The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the Timer Block (TM). Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification STOP START

Element symbol.OP RSTR WAIT

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Timer stop command

N

–

Y

Timer start command

N

Timer stop command

Y

Restart command

N

–

Y

Pause command

N

Restart command D030273E.ai

n Status Manipulation of Software Counter Block (CTS) The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the Software Counter Block (CTS). Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification ON

Element symbol.ACT OFF Element symbol.XACT

ON

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Software counter operation command

N

–

Y

Software counter stop command

N

–

Y

Trigger software counter (One Count)

N

Stop software counter D030274E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-71

n Status Manipulation of Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP). Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification STOP START

Element symbol.OP RSTR WAIT Element symbol.AF

IOP, CNF

Element symbol.XAF

IOP

Element symbol.AOFS

IP, CNF, AOF (*1)

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Pulse input counter stop command

N

–

Y

Pulse input counter start command

N

Pulse input counter stop command

Y

Restart command

N

–

Y

Pause command

N

Restart command

Y

Cancel specified alarm detection

N

Execute specified alarm detection

Y

Disables IOP and IOP- detection

N

Enables IOP and IOP- detection

Y

Mask specified alarm

N

Unmask specified alarm

Y

Perform alarm group confirmation

N

– D030275E.ai

*1:

AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This action operates alarm masking on all alarms except NR.

n Status Manipulation of Code Input Block (CI) The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the Code Input Block (CI). Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal Element symbol.ACT

Action specification ON

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Code input read command

N

– D030276E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-72

n Status Manipulation of Code Output Block (CO) The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the Code Output Block (CO). Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal Element symbol.ACT

Action specification ON

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Code output command to contact output signal or internal status switch

N

Disable D030277E.ai

n Status Manipulation of Resource Scheduler Block (RS) The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the Resource Scheduler Block (RS). Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Element symbol.RQ01 to 32 0, 1

Element symbol.PMH

0 to 32

Element symbol.ACT

ON, OFF

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Specified number usage cancel/request command (1: Request, 0: Cancel)

N

Disable

Y

Set the maximum allowable number (m≤32)

N

Disable

Y

Entire resource group request/cancel (ON: Request, OFF: Cancel)

N

Disable D030278E.ai

n Status Manipulation of Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM). Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal Element symbol.MCSW

Action specification 0, 1

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Message suppression (1: Suppress, 0: Cancel)

N

Disable D030279E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-73

n Status Manipulation of Regulatory Control Block The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the regulatory control block. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Element symbol.MODE

MAN, AUT, CAS, RCAS, ROUT, PRD, O/S

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status except NR

Element symbol.XAF

IOP

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status except NR, AOF (*1)

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL

Element symbol.data item

Data value

Element symbol.PV

=CAL

Element symbol.PV

=XCAL (*2)

Element symbol.SUM0

=XCAL (*2)

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Block mode change command

N

Disable

Y

Cancel specified alarm detection

N

Execute specified alarm detection

Y

Disables IOP and IOP- detection

N

Enables IOP and IOP- detection

Y

Mask specified alarm

N

Unmask specified alarm

Y

Perform alarm group confirmation

N

Disable

Y

Set data

N

Disable

Y

Switch PV to CAL status

N

Release PV from CAL status

Y

Switch to CAL or release CAL

N

–

Y

Switch to CAL or release CAL

N

– D030280E.ai

*1: *2:

AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This action performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR. The Output Timing of the sequence table that =XCAL is applied should be set to [Output Only When Condition Changes (C)].

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-74

l Regulatory Control Block that can Describe Data Values in Action Specifications The table below lists the regulatory control blocks that can describe data values in action specifications and the setting ranges of data items. Table

Regulatory Control Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Action Specifications and the Setting Ranges of Data Items (1/3)

Block code

PID

PI-HLD

PID-BSW

PID-TP

ONOFF

Name

PID Controller Block

Sampling PI Controller Block

PID Controller Block with Batch Switch

Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block

2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

ONOFF-E

Enhanced 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

ONOFF-G

3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

ONOFF-GE

PD-MR

PI-BLEND

Block code

Enhanced 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

PD Controller Block with Manual Reset

Blending PI Controller Block

Name

Data item

Setting range

TSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

RST

0, 1

Data item

Setting range D030281E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-75

Table

Regulatory Control Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Action Specifications and the Setting Ranges of Data Items (2/3)

Block code

PID-STC

Name

Self-Tuning PID Controller Block

MLD

Manual Loader Block

MLD-PVI

Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator

MLD-SW

MC-2

MC-2E

MC- 3

MC- 3E

Block code

Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW

2-Position Motor Control Block

Enhanced 2-Position Motor Control Block

3-Position Motor Control Block

Enhanced 3-Position Motor Control Block

Name

Data item

Setting range

TSW

0, 1

CSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

STC

-1 to 3

TSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0 to 4

SIMM

0 to 1

CSV

0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)

TSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0 to 4

SIMM

0 to 1

CSV

0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)

TSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0 to 4

SIMM

0 to 1

CSV

0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)

TSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0 to 4

SIMM

0 to 1

CSV

0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)

Data item

Setting range D030282E.ai

*1:

The value set for the CSV varies depending on the values of action rules and setting range. 0: CSV = 0 when the action rule is [Y], Disable when [N] 1: CSV = 1 when the action rule is [Y], Disable when [N] 2: CSV = 2 when the action rule is [Y], Disable when [N] P0: CSV = 0 when the action rule is [Y], CSV = 2 when [N] P1: CSV = 1 when the action rule is [Y], Disable when [N] P2: CSV = 2 when the action rule is [Y], CSV = 0 when [N]

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-76

Table

Regulatory Control Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Action Specifications and the Setting Ranges of Data Items (3/3)

Block code

RATIO

PG-L13

BSETU-2

BSETU-3

VELLIM

Name

Ratio Set Block

13-Zone Program Set Block

Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block

Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block

Velocity Limiter Block

SS-H/M/L

Signal Selectors

AS-H/M/L

Auto Selectors

SS-DUAL

Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block

FFSUM

XCPL

Feedforward Signal Summing Block

Non-Interference Control Output Block

Data item

Setting range

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

ZONE

1 to 13

ZSTR

1 to 13

ZEND

1 to 13

SW

0 to 4

EMSW

0, 1

ZONE

0 to 11

SW

0 to 4

EMSW

0, 1

ZONE

0 to 11

PSW

0 to 3

BSW

0, 1

BPSW

0, 1

SW

0 to 4

PSW

0 to 3

SW

0 to 4

SW

1 to 3

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

FSW

0, 1

RSW

0, 1

TSW

0, 1

PSW

0 to 3

RSW

0, 1

BSW

0, 1

SW

0 to 3

RST

0, 1

HSW

0, 1

SW

0 to 5

SV

0 to 15

SPLIT

Control Signal Splitter Block

PTC

Pulse Count Input Block

ALM-R

Representative Alarm Block

SBSD

YS Instrument Batch Set Station Block

SV

0 to 8

SLBC

YS Instrument Batch Controller Block

SV

0 to 8 D030283E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-77

n Status Manipulation of Calculation Block The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the calculation block. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification mm (*1)

Element symbol.ACT ON Element symbol.AF

Alarm status except NR

Element symbol.XAF

IOP

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status except NR, AOF (*2)

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL

Element symbol. data item

Data value

Element symbol.CPV

=CAL

Element symbol.CPV

=XCAL (*3)

Element symbol.CPV1

=XCAL (*3)

Element symbol.CPV2

=XCAL (*3)

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

One-shot execution (with parameter)

N

Disable

Y

One-shot execution (without parameter)

N

Disable

Y

Cancel specified alarm detection

N

Execute specified alarm detection

Y

Disables IOP and IOP- detection

N

Enables IOP and IOP- detection

Y

Mask specified alarm

N

Unmask specified alarm

Y

Perform alarm group confirmation

N

Disable

Y

Set data

N

Disable

Y

Change CPV's data status to CAL

N

Cancel CPV's CAL data status

Y

Switch to CAL or release CAL

N

–

Y

Switch to CAL or release CAL

N

–

Y

Switch to CAL or release CAL

N

– D030284E.ai

*1:

mm is a parameter required for one-shot execution of the batch data setting block and the batch data acquisition block. The data set at the one-shot execution varies depending on the mm value. mm=0: Set 0 to all data. mm=1 to 16: Set specified data only (DTn). mm=17: Set all data. *2: AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This operation performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR. *3: The Output Timing of the sequence table that =XCAL is applied should be set to [Output Only When Condition Changes (C)].

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-78

l Calculation Blocks That Can Describe Data Values In Condition Specifications The table below lists the data items of regulatory control blocks that can describe data values in condition specifications and their setting ranges. Table

Calculation Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Action Specifications and Setting Range of Data Items

Block code

Name

DLAY

Dead-Time Block

DLAY-C

Dead-Time Compensation Block

AVE-M

Moving-Average Block

Data item

Setting range

RST

0, 1

SW

0, 1, 2

AVE-C

Cumulative Average Block

INTEG

Integration Block

SW-33

Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch

SW

0 to 3

SW-91

One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch

SW

0 to 9

DSW-16

Selector Switch Block for 16 Data

DSW-16C

Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data

SW

0 to 16

BDSET-1L

One Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-1C

One-Batch String Data Set Block

BDSET-2L

Two Batch Data Set Block

SW

0 to 3

BDSET-2C

Two-Batch String Data Set Block

BDA-L

Batch Data Acquisition Block

BDA-C

Batch String Data Acquisition Block

SW

0 to 17

ADL

Inter-Station Data Link Block

SIMM

0, 1 D030285E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-79

l Executable Calculation Block for One-Shot Execution The table below lists the calculation blocks that can specify one-shot execution as an action specification. Table

One-Shot Executable Calculation Block Block type

Arithmetic Calculation

Logic Operation (*1)

General-Purpose Calculations

Calculation auxiliary

Code

Name

ADD

Addition Block

MUL

Multiplication Block

DIV

Division Block

AVE

Averaging Block

AND

Logical AND Block

OR

Logical OR Block

NOT

Logical NOT Block

SRS1-S

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

SRS1-R

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

SRS2-S

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

SRS2-R

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

WOUT

Wipeout Block

GT

Comparator Block (Greater Than)

GE

Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)

EQ

Equal Operator Block

BAND

Bitwise AND Block

BOR

Bitwise OR Block

BNOT

Bitwise NOT Block

CALCU

General-Purpose Calculation Block

CALCU-C

General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O

BDSET-1L

One-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-1C

One-Batch String Data Set Block

BDSET-2L

Two-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-2C

Two-Batch String Data Set Block

BDA-L

Batch Data Acquisition Block

BDA-C

Batch String Data Acquisition Block D030286E.ai

*1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-80

l Calculation Block that Requires mm Parameter for One-Shot Execution The table below lists the calculation blocks that are required to specify one-shot execution parameter mm as an action specification. Table

Calculation Blocks That is Required to Specify Parameter mm in the Action Specification

Block code

Name

BDSET-1L

One-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-1C

One-Batch String Data Set Block

BDSET-2L

Two-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-2C

Two-Batch String Data Set Block

BDA-L

Batch Data Acquisition Block

BDA-C

Batch String Data Acquisition Block

Parameter setting range (mm)

Remarks

0 to 17

Set individual data

0 to 17

Acquire individual data D030287E.ai

Note:

Parameter mm is defined as follows. mm=0: Set 0 to all data. mm=1 to 16: Set specified data only (DTn). mm=17: Set all data.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-81

n Status Manipulation of Faceplate Block The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the faceplate block. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Element symbol.MODE

Block mode

Element symbol.BSTS

Block status

Element symbol.ALRM

Alarm status except NR

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status except NR

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status except NR, AOF (*1)

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL

Element symbol.SV

1 to 99

Element symbol. PV01 to 10

0, 1

Element symbol.SWCR[n] (*2) 0 to 15 Element symbol.SWST[n] (*2)

0, 1

Element symbol.SWOP[n] (*2) -15 to 15

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Change block mode

N

Disable

Y

Change block status

N

Cancel block status

Y

Change alarm status

N

Cancel alarm status

Y

Cancel the specified alarm detection.

N

Execute the specified alarm detection.

Y

Mask the specified alarm.

N

Unmask the specified alarm.

Y

Perform alarm group confirmation.

N

Disable

Y

Set batch step number (Effective only for BSI block)

N

Disable

Y

Set action command

N

Disable

Y

Change switch display color

N

Disable

Y

Switch flashing status ON/OFF

N

Disable

Y

Change the switch operation disable status

N

Disable D030288E.ai

*1: *2:

AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This operation performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR. n is the subscript of the 1 dimensional array. This subscript is the number of the push button switches on a faceplate block. This number varies with the type of faceplate block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-82

n Status Manipulation of Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Block The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the sequential function chart (SFC) block. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Element symbol.MODE

MAN, AUT

Element symbol.BSTS

RUN, PAUS, STOP, ABRT

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status except NR

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status except NR, AOF (*1)

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL

Element symbol.data item

Data value

Element symbol.PV

=CAL

Element symbol.PV

=XCAL (*2)

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Block mode change command

N

Disable

Y

Block status change command

N

Disable

Y

Cancel the specified alarm detection

N

Execute the specified alarm detection

Y

Mask the specified alarm

N

Unmask specified alarm

Y

Perform alarm group confirmation

N

Disable

Y

Set data

N

Disable

Y

Change PV's data status to CAL

N

Cancel PV's CAL data status

Y

Switch to CAL or release CAL

N

– D030289E.ai

*1: *2:

AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This operation performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR. The Output Timing of the sequence table that =XCAL is applied should be set to [Output Only When Condition Changes (C)].

l Sequential Function Chart Block Data Item that can be Described as a Data Value in the Action Specification The following table lists the sequential function chart block data item which can be described as a data value in the action specification, and their setting ranges. • STEPNO: 1 to 99 • SWCR[5]: 0 to 15 • SWST[5]: 0, 1 • SWOP[5]: -15 to 15

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-83

n Status Manipulation of Unit Instrument The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the unit instrument. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Element symbol.MODE

MAN, SEMI, AUT

Element symbol.UBSC

Unit status change command name

Element symbol.AF

Alarm status except NR

Element symbol.AOFS

Alarm status except NR, AOF (*1)

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL

Element symbol.STEPNO

1 to 99

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Unit mode change command

N

Disable

Y

Unit status change command

N

Disable

Y

Cancel the specified alarm detection.

N

Execute the specified alarm detection.

Y

Mask the specified alarm.

N

Unmask specified alarm.

Y

Perform alarm group confirmation.

N

Disable

Y

Change SFC step number.

N

Disable D030290E.ai

*1:

AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This operation performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-84

n Status Manipulation of Process I/O The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the process I/O. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification H

L Element symbol.PV F

P

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Contact output ON (Latched output)

N

Contact output OFF (Latched output)

Y

Contact output ON (Unlatched output) (*1)

N

Disable Contact output OFF (*2)

Y

Cause flashing state.

N

Stop the flashing state (*3)

Y

Output one-second pulse to the relevant bit (*4)

N

Disable The pulse output being turned on is turned off. (*5) D030291E.ai

*1:

*2:

*3: *4: *5:

SEE

ALSO

On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution and Output only when conditions change) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output when conditions are satisfied), the contact output scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off upon condition changes from true to false even if the step has moved to another. However, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, the contact output will not be turned off when the step has moved to another upon the condition changes from true to false. By default, this check box is not checked. On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, the contact output scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off when condition becomes true. However, when condition becomes false, N means no action. Nevertheless, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, N means no action even when condition is true. By default, this check box is not checked. Even though the flashing state stops, the contact output itself remains ON. Turn off the contact output using a different action signal with a latched contact output. Not available in LFCS2 or LFCS. For LFCS2 or LFCS to give a pulse output, first to set the point mode of the output terminal on IOM into Pulse Output (PO), then put a latched type symbol (H) or none latched type symbol (L) in the action columns of sequence table. On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, the pulse output scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off when condition becomes true. Nevertheless, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, N means no action. However, in LFCS2, N means no action regardless if the checked box is checked or not. By default, this check box is not checked.

For more information about pulse output, see the following: “l Pulse Contact Output : PFCS/KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS/SFCS” in section “n Manipulating Status Output of I/O Module” of chapter A3.2.2, “Contact Output.” “l Pulse Contact Output : LFCS2/LFCS” in section “n Manipulating Status Output of I/O Module” of chapter A3.2.2, “Contact Output.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-85

n Status Manipulation of Global Switch The syntax in action signal description for manipulating the global switch to perform its various functions and the output actions corresponding to Y/N in the action rule columns of the sequence table are shown as follows. Table

Syntax in Action Signal Description and Output Actions Corresponding to Y/N in Action Rule Columns

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification H

Element symbol.PV L

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Global switch output ON (Latched)

N

Global switch output OFF (Latched)

Y

Global switch output ON (Unlatched) (*1)

N

Disable Global Switch output OFF (*2) D030292E.ai

*1:

*2:

On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution and Output only when conditions change) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output when conditions are satisfied), the global switch scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off upon condition changes from true to false even if the step has moved to another. However, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, the global switch will not be turned off when the step has moved to another upon the condition changes from true to false. By default, this check box is not checked. On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, the global switch scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off when condition becomes true. However, when condition becomes false, N means no action. Nevertheless, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, N means no action even when condition is true. By default, this check box is not checked.

n Status Manipulation of Common Switch The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the common switch. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification H

Element symbol.PV L

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Common switch output ON (Latched output)

N

Common switch output OFF (Latched output)

Y

Common switch output ON (Unlatched output) (*1)

N

Disable Common Switch output OFF (*2) D030293E.ai

*1:

*2:

On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution and Output only when conditions change) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output when conditions are satisfied), the common switch scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off upon condition changes from true to false even if the step has moved to another. However, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, the common switch will not be turned off when the step has moved to another upon the condition changes from true to false. By default, this check box is not checked. On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, the common switch scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off when condition becomes true. However, when condition becomes false, N means no action. Nevertheless, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, N means no action even when condition is true. By default, this check box is not checked.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-86

n Status Manipulation of Annunciator Message The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the annunciator message. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Action rule column (Y/N)

H Element symbol.PV L

Element symbol.RP

ON, OFF

Element symbol.AOFS

AOF

Element symbol.AFLS

AFL

Action description

Y

Annunciator output (Latched output)

N

Cancel the annunciator output (Latched output)

Y

Annunciator output (Unlatched output) (*1)

N

Disable Cancel the annunciator output (*2)

Y

Repeated warning specification (ON: Repeated warning, OFF: Cancel)

N

Disable

Y

Mask the specified alarm.

N

Unmask the specified alarm.

Y

Perform alarm group confirmation.

N

Disable D030294E.ai

*1:

*2:

On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution and Output only when conditions change) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output when conditions are satisfied), the annunciator scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off upon condition changes from true to false even if the step has moved to another. However, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, the annunciator will not be turned off when the step has moved to another upon the condition changes from true to false. By default, this check box is not checked. On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, the annunciator scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off when condition becomes true. However, when condition becomes false, N means no action. Nevertheless, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, N means no action even when condition is true. By default, this check box is not checked.

n Status Manipulation of Sequence Message Output The manipulation contents and description symbolic convention of the action signals when performing status manipulation for the various message functions for sequence control are indicated below. The messages used in sequence controls include the messages attached with parameters (constants) and the messages without parameters. Usage of the sequence control messages for manipulating sequence signals varies with the messages with or without parameters. The sequence control messages without parameters consist of the following types of messages: • Print message output (%PR) • Operator guide message output (%OG) • Multimedia function message output (%VM) • Sequence message request (%RQ) • Event message output for supervisory computer (%CP) • PICOT supervisory computer event message output (%M3)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-87

The sequence control messages attached with parameters consist of the following types of messages: • Print message attached with parameters (%PR) • Signal event message output (%EV) • SFC/SEBOL return event message output (%RE) Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification NON

Element symbol.PV mm (*1)

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Sequence message output without parameter

N

Disable

Y

Sequence message output with parameter

N

Disable D030295E.ai

*1

Integer type data (2-byte unsigned integer type data) can be specified for mm. Range: Integer from 0 to 65535

n Status Manipulation of Communication I/O The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to manipulate the status of various functions of the communication I/O. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification H

Element symbol.PV L

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Relevant bit ON (Latched output)

N

Relevant bit OFF (Latched output)

Y

Relevant bit ON (Unlatched output) (*1)

N

Disable Relevant bit OFF (*2) D030296E.ai

*1:

*2:

On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution and Output only when conditions change) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output when conditions are satisfied), the relevant bit scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off upon condition changes from true to false even if the step has moved to another. However, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, the relevant bit will not be turned off when the step has moved to another upon the condition changes from true to false. By default, this check box is not checked. On KFCS2, FFCS and LFCS2, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked, the relevant bit scripted in the action part of a rule will be turned off when condition becomes true. However, when condition becomes false, N means no action. Nevertheless, when the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, N means no action even when condition is true. By default, this check box is not checked.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-88

D3.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table In the status manipulation for sequence table, in addition to data setting and status change, a series of processing from condition testing to status manipulation can be performed by one-shot execution of the sequence table. For status manipulation of a sequence table with rules extended to multiple sequence tables, a tag name for the extending sequence table must be specified. There exist several types of status manipulations for sequence table as shown below. • Execution of the entire sequence table • Execution of the corresponding rule number in sequence table • Execution of a particular step(s) • Setting of a sequence table execution step label • Change of the sequence table block mode

n Execution of the Entire Sequence Table ▼ Action Signal Description - Sequence Table

The sequence table indicated by an element symbol of the action signal from the referencing sequence table (branched sequence table) is activated to perform one-shot execution. If the branched sequence table is a nonstep type, the entire table is subject to execution. If the branched sequence table is a step type, the relevant steps according to the step processing in the branched sequence table are subject to execution. It is possible to further branch from a branched sequence table to other sequence table to perform condition testing and actions for the first branched sequence table. Nesting is available up to seven levels including the first sequence table.

l When the Branched Sequence Table is a Nonstep Type The entire branched sequence table is executed. The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description for the action signal used to execute the entire branched sequence table. Table

Symbolic Convention and Action Description for Action Signal

Action signal description Output signal Element symbol.ACT

Action specification ON

Action rule

Action description

Y

Execute the specified table

N

Disable D030297E.ai

When the conditions described in the condition rule are satisfied, the sequence table number listed in the action signal symbol column will be one-shot executed to branch to the activated sequence table. After executing all condition testing and actions, it returns to the action rule processing in the branching sequence table.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-89

l When the Branched Sequence Table is a Nonstep Type Description examples for the nonstep-type branched sequence tables are shown below. Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing. ST 005

Tag name Data item

ST 015 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data Comment

Step label

DI0010.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0015.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

N

DI0016.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

Y

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

N

DI0020.PV

ON

................................

Y

DI0021.PV

ON

................................

DO0001.PV

H

DO0011.PV

H

................................

ST015.ACT

ON

................................

Y

DO0014.PV

H

................................

Y

DO0035.PV

H

................................

Y

Tag name Data item

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data Comment

Step label

DI0030.PV

ON

................................

Y

DI0031.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0036.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

Y

DI0038.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

Y

DI0125.PV

ON

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

DO0050.PV H

................................

Y

DO0052.PV H

................................

Y

Y

DO0053.PV H

................................

Y

DO0054.PV H

................................

Y

DO0066.PV H

................................

N

Y

Y

Y

N N Y Y

Y

Y N

Y N

N

N

Y N

Y Y

Y

Y

D030298E.ai

Figure Description Examples of Nonstep-Type Sequence Table Execution

The following explains the details of action rule processing in the description examples shown above. • If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=Y operation will be executed and all the conditions from rules 01 to 32 will then be tested after branching to Table ST015. If conditions are satisfied at Table ST015, operations will be executed for the rules whose conditions have been satisfied. It will then return to Table ST005 action rule processing to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y operation. • Neither Rule 02 nor 03 on table ST005 is associated with the action rule processing because no action descriptions for Table ST015 are listed in either rule. • If the conditions in Rule 04 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=N operation will be executed and all the conditions from rules 01 to 32 will then be tested after branching to Table ST015. If conditions are satisfied at Table ST015, operations will be executed for the rules whose conditions have been satisfied. It will then return to Table ST005 action rule processing to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y and DO0035.PV.H=Y operations. • If the periodic execution is specified for the processing timing of Table ST015, in addition to one-shot execution caused by status manipulation, periodic execution will also be performed at Table ST015.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-90

l When the Branched Sequence Table is a Step Type Description examples for the step-type branched sequence table is shown below. Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing. If the branched sequence table is a step type, steps will be executed under the step management of the branched sequence table. ST 005

Tag name Data item

ST 015 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data Comment

Step label 1

2

3

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05

4

Tag name Data item

N

DI0030.PV

ON

................................

Y

DI0031.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0036.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

................................

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Data Comment

DI0010.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0015.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

N

DI0016.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

Y

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

N

Y

DI0038.PV

ON

DI0020.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0125.PV

ON

DI0021.PV

ON

................................

DO0001.PV H

Y

N

DO0050.PV H

................................

Y

Y

N

DO0052.PV H

................................

Y

Y

Y

DO0053.PV H

................................

Y

Y

DO0054.PV H

................................

Y

DO0061.PV H

................................

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

ST015.ACT ON

................................

DO0014.PV H

................................

DO0035.PV H

................................

Y

Step label 1

Y

THEN

2

2

3

Y

N N

N Y Y

Y

N Y

N

2

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

3

1

ELSE D030299E.ai

Figure Description Examples of Step-Type Sequence Table Execution

The following explains the details of action rule processing in the description examples shown above. • If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=Y operation will be executed to branch to Table ST015. If the execution step label (PV) is Step 2, the condition testing for rules 02 and 03 of Step 2 will be performed. If conditions are satisfied, operations for the rules whose conditions have been satisfied will be executed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y operation. • If the step label is described on the branched sequence table, a processing will be executed according to the step management of the branched sequence table, regardless of the step label on the branching sequence table.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-91

l When There Exist Steps 00 and n in the Branched Sequence Table Description examples of the branched sequence table with steps 00 and n are shown below. Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing. ST 005

Tag name Data item

ST 015 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data Comment

Step label 1

2

3

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05

4

Tag name Data item

N

DI0030.PV

ON

................................

Y

DI0031.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0036.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

................................

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Data Comment

DI0010.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0015.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

N

DI0016.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

Y

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

N

Y

DI0038.PV

ON

DI0020.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0125.PV

ON

DI0021.PV

ON

................................

DO0001.PV H

Y

N

DO0050.PV H

................................

Y

Y

N

DO0052.PV H

................................

Y

Y

Y

DO0053.PV H

................................

Y

Y

DO0054.PV H

................................

Y

DO0061.PV H

................................

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

ST015.ACT ON

................................

DO0014.PV H

................................

DO0035.PV H

................................

Y

Step label 0

Y

1

Y N

THEN

1

2

Y

N N

N Y Y

Y

N

Y

Y N

Y Y

Y

2

1

ELSE D0302A0E.ai

Figure Description Examples of Step-Type Sequence Table Execution

The following explains the details of the action rule processing in the description examples shown above. If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the D000001.PV.H=Y operation will be executed to branch to Table ST015. If the execution step label (PV) at Table ST015 is Step 2 at the time, the condition testing for Rule 01 of Step 00 and Rule 04 of Step 2 will be performed. If conditions are satisfied at Table ST015, operations for the rules whose conditions are satisfied, will be executed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y operation.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-92

n Execution of the Corresponding Rule Number in the Sequence Table One-shot execution of the sequence table is performed, with the same rule number as the current rule at the branch source as an execution target. This is used to expand the condition signal and action signal over 64 signals in the nonstep type sequence table. The table below lists the symbolic convention and description of action signal to execute the corresponding rule numbers. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal Element symbol.SD

Action specification C

Action rule column

Action description

Y

Execute the same table

N

Disable D0302A1E.ai

• When the branch source is a step type and the branch destination is a nonstep type: Although execution of the corresponding rule number is meaningless, the corresponding rules will be executed. • When the branched table is a step type: Because execution of the same rules will be meaningless, the system will halt without executing any actions. It is possible to branch further from the branched sequence table to other sequence table, and perform condition testing and operation for the first branched sequence table. Nesting is available up to seven levels, including the first sequence table. Description examples of the status manipulation of corresponding rule numbers are shown below. Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing. ST 005

Tag name Data item

ST 015 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data Comment

Step label

DI0010.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0015.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

N

DI0016.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

Y

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

N

DI0020.PV

ON

................................

Y

DI0021.PV

ON

................................

DO0001.PV H

................................

DO0011.PV H

................................

ST015.SD

Y

Tag name Data item

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05 Data Comment

Step label

DI0030.PV

ON

................................

DI0031.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0036.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

Y

DI0038.PV

ON

................................

Y

N

Y

DI0125.PV

ON

Y

Y

N

N Y

Y

Y

N

DO0050.PV H

................................

Y

Y

N

DO0052.PV H

................................

Y

C

................................

Y

Y

DO0053.PV H

................................

DO0014.PV H

................................

Y

Y

DO0054.PV H

................................

DO0035.PV H

................................

Y

DO0061.PV H

................................

Y

Y

N N Y N

Y

Y N

Y N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

D0302A2E.ai

Figure Description Examples of Corresponding Rule Number Execution

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-93

The following explains the details of the action rule processing in the description examples shown above. • If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=Y operation will be executed, and the condition testing of Rule 01 will be conducted after branching to Table ST015. If conditions are satisfied, DO0050.PV.H=Y, DO0052.PV.H=Y, and DO0054.PV.H=N operations will be executed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the DO0014. PV.H=Y operation. • Neither rule 02 nor 03 of Table ST005 is associated with Table ST015. • If the conditions in Rule 04 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO0001.PV.H=N and DO0011. PV.H=N operations will be executed to branch to Table ST015. Condition testing will then be performed for Rule 04. If conditions are satisfied, operations for the rules whose conditions have been satisfied will be executed. DO0053.PV.H=Y, DO0054.PV.H=Y, and DO0061. PV.H=Y operations will be executed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y and DO0035.PV.H=Y operations.

n Executing a Particular Step in the Sequence Table The following describes the action signal’s symbolic convention and the action description for executing a particular step in the specified sequence table. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Element symbol.SA

Action rule column (Y/N)

xx

Action description

Y

Execute steps xx and 00

N

Disable D0302A3E.ai

xx:

Specify the step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

It is possible to further branch from the branched sequence table to other sequence table, and perform condition testing and operation for that branched sequence table. Up to seven levels of nesting are possible including the first sequence table. The action rule subject to execution varies by the type of sequence table (nonstep, step) at the execution source and execution destination. Table

Execution Target Rules by Sequence Table Type Branch source

Nonstep type Step type

Branch destination

Action rule subject to execution

Nonstep type

All rules

Step type

Rules in specified step and step 00

Nonstep type

All rules

Step type

Rules in specified step and step 00 D0302A4E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-94

When the conditions described in the condition rule are satisfied, the sequence table number listed in the action signal symbol column will be one-shot executed to branch to the destination sequence table. After executing condition testing and actions for rules in Step 00 and steps specified by the branched sequence table, it returns to the action rule processing in the branching sequence table. If the specified step does not exist in the branched sequence table, an error will occur and the step will not be executed. However, in spite of the error, if Step 00 exists in the branched sequence table, only that step will be executed. If “execution of a particular step” is performed for the nonstep-type sequence table, all rules will be subject to execution. A description example of executing a particular step is shown below. Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing. ST 005

ST 015 Rule number 01 02 03 04 05

Rule number 01 02 03 04 05

Step label A1 A2 A3 A4

ON

Comment ................................

Tag name Data item

Y

Y

DI0030.PV

ON

ON

................................

Y

N

N

DI0031.PV

ON

DI0016.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

Y

DI0036.PV

ON

Step label A1 A2 A2 A3 Comment ................................ Y Y N ................................ Y Y N ................................ Y N N

DI0018.PV

ON

................................

N

N

Y

DI0038.PV

ON

................................

DI0020.PV

ON

................................

Y

Y

DI0125.PV

ON

DI0021.PV

ON

................................

Tag name Data item

Data

DI0010.PV DI0015.PV

DO0001.PV H

Y

DO0011.PV H

................................

ST015.SA.

N Y

Data

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

DO0050.PV H

................................

Y

Y

N

DO0052.PV H

................................

Y

................................

Y

Y

DO0053.PV H

................................

DO0014.PV H

................................

Y

Y

DO0054.PV H

................................

DO0035.PV H

................................

Y

DO0061.PV H

................................

A2

Y

Y

Description is not required.

Y

Y N

Y N

Y Y

N

Y N

Y Y

Y

Y

THEN ELSE D0302A5E.ai

Figure Description Example of Executing Action Rule Processing

The following describes the action rule processing for the above example. • If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are newly satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=Y operation will be performed to branch to Table ST015. Following the condition testing conducted for rules 02 and 03 of Step A2 in the branched sequence table, if the conditions are newly satisfied, relevant operations will be performed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y operation. • Neither Rule 02 nor 03 in Table ST005 is associated with Table ST015. • If the conditions in Rule 04 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO0001.PV.H=N and DO0011. PV.H=N operations will be performed to branch to Table ST015. Following the condition testing for rules 02 and 03 of Step A2 in the branched sequence table, if the conditions are newly satisfied, relevant operations will be performed. It will then return to table ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y and DO0035.PV.H=Y operations.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-95

n Setting Execution Step Label in the Sequence Table Execution step label (PV) of the sequence table is set. Unlike “executing a particular step,” this operation merely sets a step label for the execution step label (PV) of a specified sequence table. This setup operation alone will not execute the step. It is not until the execution step label (PV) is activated after the setup that the step is executed. The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal for setting the execution step label. Table

Symbolic Convention and Action Description of the Action Signal Action rule column (Y/N)

Action signal description column Output signal

Action specification

Element symbol.PV

xx

Action description

Y

Set the step name xx

N

Disable D0302A6E.ai

xx:

Specify the step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

A description example of specifying the execution step label of a specified sequence table is shown below. Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing. ST 005

Tag name Data item DI0013.PV

Rule number Data

01

02

N

Y

03

04

05

06

07

Step label Comment

ON Auto/manual

Condition ST010.PV

A1

Y

ST011.PV

A1

Y

ST012.PV

A1

Y

ST013.PV

A1

Operation Y D0302A7E.ai

Figure Description Example of Setting Execution Step Label

The following describes the action rule processing for the above description example. • When DI0013 becomes “OFF,” “A1” will be set on the execution step label in sequence tables ST010, ST011 and ST012. • When DI0013 becomes “ON,” “A1” will be set on the execution step label in the ST013 sequence table.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-96

n Block Mode Change in Sequence Table By describing the block mode change of the other sequence table in the sequence table action signal, halt (change to MAN mode)/restart (change to AUT mode) of the other specified sequence table is manipulated. The sequence table changed to the manual (MAN) mode will retain the status at the time of block mode change. When “changed output” is specified for the output timing, the states of halt and restart are compared upon restarting the processing to execute the status manipulation for the changed condition rules. The table below lists the symbolic convention of the action signal and action description for changing the block mode. Table

Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal Element symbol.MODE

Action specification AUT, MAN, O/S

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Table mode change command

N

Disable D0302A8E.ai

n Pause and Restart a Sequence Table Some sequence tables are running in a fixed scan cycle while some others are staring, pausing or restarting in accordance with process procedures. To pause a running sequence table, and to restart a paused sequence table is possible. The scripts may be described in a sequence table for a sequence table’s Pause and Restart are shown as follows. Table

Syntax for Output Signal Scripts and Action Description

Action signal description column Output signal Element symbol.XS

Action specification ON

Action rule column (Y/N)

Action description

Y

Starts or restarts sequence table

N

Pause Sequence table D0302B2E.ai

When Y is scripted in an action rule, if the condition of that rule establishes, the sequence table scripted in the Element symbol column will be started or restarted. When the restarted sequence table is running in the [Output Only When Condition Changes (C)] timing, the restarted will compare the current conditions with the conditions before it was paused, only the rules that the conditions have been changed will perform the output actions. If the sequence table is a [Periodic Execution Type], the sequence table will continue to run until it receives another pause command. When N is scripted in an action rule, if the condition of that rule establishes, the sequence table scripted in the Element symbol column will be paused.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-97

D3.2.15 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for a Logic Chart from a Sequence Table In the status manipulation for a logic chart, a logic chart block mode can be changed. In addition, the specified logic chart can be one-shot executed.

n One-Shot Execution of a Logic Chart from a Sequence Table ▼ Action Signal Description - Logic Chart

The syntax in action signal description for one-shot executing a logic chart and the output actions corresponding to Y/N in the action rule columns of the sequence table are shown as follows. Table

Syntax in Action Signal Description and Output Actions Corresponding to Y/N in Action Rule Columns

Action signal description Output signal Element symbol.ACT

Action specification ON

Action rule

Action description

Y

Execute a logic chart

N

Disable D0302A9E.ai

• The output of an executed logic chart can execute another logic chart. The output signal can be nested up to seven times, including the branching sequence table. • If one-shot execution of a logic chart fails for one of the following reasons, a system alarm will be triggered. • The output of an executed logic chart to execute another logic chart is nested over seven times, including the branching sequence table. • The function block connected to the input terminal is in O/S mode. • The function block connected to the input terminal is udder online maintenance.

n Changing the Block Mode of a Logic Chart from a Sequence Table The block mode of the specified logic chart may be changed. Changing the block mode allows the logic chart to be paused (with the MAN mode specified) or resumed (with the AUT mode specified). The syntax in action signal description for changing a block mode and the output actions corresponding to Y/N in the action rule columns of the sequence table are shown as follows. Table

Syntax in Action Signal Description and Output Actions Corresponding to Y/N in Action Rule Columns

Action signal description Output signal Element symbol.MODE

Action specification AUT, MAN, O/S

Action rule

Action description

Y

Change a block mode

N

Disable D0302B0E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-98

D3.2.16 Data Items of the Sequence Table Block (ST16) The data items of the ST16 block is shown below.

n Data Item Table Data Items of the Sequence Table Block (ST16) Symbol

Data Name

Entry Permitted or Not

Range

Default

PV

Executing step name

x

100 steps

Start step name

MODE

Mode

x

----

O/S (MAN)

ALRM

Alarm status

----

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing status

----

0

AF

Alarm detection

----

0

AOFS

Alarm in hibition

----

0

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

----

0 D0302B1E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally. Blank: Entry is not permitted.

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block mode of the ST16, see the following: D3.1.2, “Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-99

D3.3 Logic Chart Block (LC64) Logic Chart Block (LC64) may combine or arrange the signals of other function blocks, process I/O and software I/O into an application for interlock sequence control.

n Logic Chart Block (LC64) ▼ Logic Chart

Logic Chart Block is the function block that describes the relations of the input signals, the output signals and the logic calculation operators in the interlock diagram form, so that it can perform its main function, the interlock sequence control using the same expressions as those used on the logic chart blue prints. An architecture of LC64 Logic Chart Block is shown as follows. Q01

J01

Q02

J02

Q03

Input processing

J03

Output processing Logic operation

Q56

J56 D030301E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Logic Chart Block (LC64)

The connection methods and destinations for I/O terminals of Logic Chart Block (LC64) are shown below. Table

Connection Methods and Destinations for I/O Terminals of Logic Chart Block (LC64) Connection type

I/O terminal

Data reference

Q01 to Q56 J01 to J56

Data setting

Connection destination

Status Terminal Condition manipula- connectitesting tion on

x x

Process I/O

Software I/O

Function block

x

x

x

x

x

x D030302E.ai

x: Connection available Blank: Connection not available

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D3-100

The input and output connections can be set by entering the connection information and data description on the client area of the logic chart editing window. Stop→Cool %SW0500.PV.ON Level 1

%SW0100.PV.ON

Level 2

%SW0150.PV.ON

Mooving into %SW0200.PV.L cooling phase

WO TM100

%SW0140.ON Cooling printout

Cool→Stop %SW0120.PV.ON Auto

%SW0101.PV.ON TM100

Open shutoff valve 1 TV100.PV.2

TCV full close command

%SW0160.PV.L

Open shutoff valve

TV100.CSV.2

Shutoff valve 1 open output

TV101.CSV.2

Shutoff valve 2 open output

%SW0201.PV.L Cool command

Open shutoff valve 2 TV101.PV.2 No.1 temperature RL001.X01.LT SUM (the totalized flow is less than the initial totalized flow setpoint) If the above conditions are not met while setting up toward SVL, SET-UP toward SVH is started immediately. After SET-UP is completed, if the above conditions are met, then the step proceeds to initial flow rate control (ZONE 2); if they are not, it proceeds to STEADY (ZONE 3).

l ZONE 2: Initial Flow Rate Control Initial flow rate control is carried out. If the initial flow rate setpoint (SVL) is updated, control proceeds to ZONE 1, making the SVL the target value. When initial flow rate control is released or when the totalized flow reaches the initial totalized flow setpoint, the final flow rate setpoint (SVH) is used as the target value and the control proceeds to ZONE 1. In this step, emergency stop processing, batch-end detection processing, early-point detection processing and SV distribution processing are performed as common processing.

l ZONE 3 (Control Status: STEADY) In this step, the setpoint value (SV) is held at the final flow rate setpoint (SVH). If the SVH is updated, control proceeds to ZONE 1. In this step, emergency stop processing, batch-end detection processing, early-point detection processing and SV distribution processing are performed as common processing.

l ZONE 4 (Control Status: EARLY) The flow rate setpoint (SV) is decreased in steps by ∆S. The throttling calculation is shown below: SVn=SVn-1 - ∆S When SVn≤SVPR is reached, control proceeds to ZONE 5 with the setting of SV=SVPR. The figure below shows the throttling process until SVn≤SVPR is reached: Flow rate

SV

setpoint ∆S

(%)

∆T SVPR

Steady

Early

P.B.Ctrl

t

D080222E.ai

Figure Early-Point Detection Processing

In this step, emergency stop processing, batch-end detection processing and SV distribution processing are performed as common processing.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-87

l ZONE 5 (Control Status: PRE-BATCH-CONTROL) The SV is held at SVPR (flow rate setpoint for pre-batch) until the totalized value reaches the “pre-batch” totalized setting, then control proceeds to ZONE 6. In this step, emergency stop processing, batch-end detection processing and SV distribution processing are performed as common processing.

l ZONE 6 (Control Status: WAIT) ▼ Waiting Time during Batch End

During the waiting time for batch end, the BLEND master sets 0 for the SVs of component FSBSET blocks that are neither being released nor in the release end status and sends them an “Wait for END” command. Also, component FSBSET blocks operating in the MAN mode are forced to change to the CAS mode. Then, the BLEND master WAITs a certain predetermined time to allow for leakage. The totalized value is stored as the previous totalized value, and control proceeds to ZONE 7 after batch end processing. The time of WAIT processing is set in the builder. The “Waiting Time during Batch End” parameter of the Function Block Detail Builder is set as follows: • Waiting Time during Batch End: 0 to 10000 (unit: basic period). The default is “10.”

l ZONE 7 (Control Status: END) ▼ Waiting Time during End Process Completion, Configuring Devices Clear at Batch End

After again WAITing a certain predetermined time, the BLEND master performs the following processing: • It sends an END command to component FSBSET blocks that are neither being released nor in the release end status. Component FSBSET blocks operating in the MAN mode are forced to change to the CAS mode. • If the BLEND master is set in the builder to clear configuration data at batch end, this sequence clears the port and component tag names from the control buffer. The block mode then changes to MAN and control returns to ZONE 0. The time of WAIT processing is set in the Function Block Detail Builder. The “Waiting Time during End Process Completion” parameter of the builder is set as follows: • Waiting Time during End Process Completion: 0 to 10000 (unit: basic scan period). The default is “10.” The “Configuring Devices Clear at Batch End” parameter of the Function Block Detail Builder is set as follows: • Configuring Devices Clear at Batch End: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default is “No.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-88

l ZONE 8 (Control Status: EMERGENCY STOP) ▼ Width of SV Drop in Emergency Shutdown Status

This step closes the control valve in steps, with control proceeding to ZONE 8 when an emergency stop alarm is generated or an emergency stop command is detected. The SV is decreased by ∆SE in steps until it reaches 0. SVn = SVn-1 - ∆SE where ∆SE

:

the decrement of SV in the EMST status

When SV≤0 is reached (note that PV≤0 is not monitored), the BLEND master performs the following processing: • It sends an EMST command to component FSBSET blocks that are neither being cut off nor in the release end status. Component FSBSET blocks operating in the MAN mode are forced to change to the CAS mode. • The BLEND master itself proceeds to ZONE 9. The figure below shows the throttling of SV during emergency stop processing: ∆T

∆SE

SV (%)

t ∆T D080223E.ai

Figure Throttling of SV During Emergency Stop Processing

The decrement of SV in the EMST status is specified in the builder. The “Width of SV Drop in Emergency Shutdown Status” parameter of the Function Block Detail Builder is set as follows: - Width of SV Drop in Emergency Shutdown Status: 0.001 to 100.000 %. The default is “1.000 %”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-89

l ZONE 9 (Control Status: EMST END) ▼ Batch End Detection during Emergency Shutdown

After the BLEND master sends an EMST command to component FSBSET blocks that are neither being cut-off nor in release end status, the BLEND block may continue to detect the batch end status if it is defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. Item to be defined. • Batch End Detection during Emergency Shutdown: “YES” or “NO” The default setting is “YES.”

l ZONE 10 (RESET START) The BLEND master sends a start command to component FSBSET blocks. The BLEND master proceeds to ZONE 1, changing its alarm status to NR.

l ZONE 11 (Control Status: RESTART FROM EMST) The BLEND master sends a restart command to component FSBSET blocks that are neither being cut off nor in the release end status. For the component FSBSET blocks that have not been started, it sends a start command. The BLEND master proceeds to ZONE 1, changing its alarm status to NR.

l ZONE 31 (Control Status: BLEND CONTROL) Blending control is carried out. • End processing When all the FSBSET/BLEND blocks at the port are in the end status (ZONE 7) or initial status (ZONE 0), the BLEND master issues an END command to component FSBSET blocks that are neither being cut off nor in the release status. The BLEND master returns to the initial status (ZONE 0) after changing its block mode to MAN. • Emergency stop processing When all the FSBSET blocks/BLENDs at the port are in the emergency stop status (ZONE 9), the BLEND master issues an EMST command to component FSBSET blocks that are neither being cut off nor in the release status. The BLEND master changes its status to emergency stop processing (ZONE 32). • SV distribution processing If the conditions for end processing or emergency stop processing are not met, the total of the defined flow rate (kl/h) or instantaneous flow rate (specified on the Function Block Detail Builder) of the port FSBSET/BLEND blocks is calculated as an SV of the BLEND block. And after multiplying its SV by each blending ratio, the value is set to the SV of component FSBSET block that is neither released nor completed to release. However, this setpoint for each component must not exceed the range of the component’s SV. A start command is sent to all component FSBSET blocks that are in the initial status (ZONE 0).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-90

l ZONE 32 (Control Status: EMST) The BLEND master is in the emergency stop status. The BLEND master sends an EMST command to all component FSBSET blocks that are neither being cur off nor in the release end status. However, if even one of the FSBSET blocks/BLENDs at the port is not in the emergency stop status, the BLEND master returns to ZONE 31 and performs SV distribution processing. If all the FSBSET/BLEND blocks at the port are in the end status (ZONE 7) or initial status (ZONE 0), the BLEND master issues an END command to component FSBSET blocks that are neither being cut off nor in the release status. The BLEND master returns to the initial status (ZONE 0) after changing its block mode to MAN.

l ZONE 30 (Control Status: START) ▼ COMP Start Delay Time

The BLEND master sets the start delay timer, then performs the following processing after WAITing for a preset period of time (set by the start delay timer): • The BLEND master sends a start command to component FSBSET blocks and proceeds to ZONE 31. • It uses a start delay timer to adjust the times between when port FSBSET blocks are started and when component FSBSET blocks are started, and reduces or eliminates pressurerelated interference between components. The figure below shows the start delay processing by the BLEND master:

Port FSBSET

SV (%) t t6

BLEND component SV FSBSET (%) t t6: Start delay timer (set in the builder; normally, 1 sec) D080224E.ai

Figure Start Delay for Port FSBSET Blocks and Component FSBSET Blocks

The start delay timer setting is specified in the builder. The “COMP Start Delay Time” parameter of the Function Block Detail Builder is set as follows: - COMP Start Delay Time: 0 to 10000 (unit: basic scan period). The default is “1.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-91

n Control Step Transition Diagram - BLEND The figure below shows the control step transition diagram: (f)

(o)

(e)

(c)

(b) 1

2

SET UP

3

4

5

6

Steady

Early

P.B. Ctrl

Wait

(d)

11

(k)

9

(n)

(j)

End

8

EMST end

Restart

Emergency Stop

10

(a)

7

(l)

(i)

Initial flow rate control

(g)

(m)

(o) Step

0

(h)

Control status

NONCtrl

Start

D080225E.ai

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o)

Batch start completed SET-UP ready (in initial flow rate control) SET-UP end Initial flow rate control end (command released, or setting to release reached) Early-point detection (SUM > BSET-QE-VL) Batch end detection (SUM > BSET-VL) WAIT end (batch end processing completed) Batch end Emergency stop command (EMSW=1 or CMND=4) Emergency stop end RESTART end Batch end detection during emergency stop START command (CMND=1) RESTART command (CMND=2) ABORT command (CMND=3)

Figure Control Step Transition Diagram of Blending Master Control Block (BLEND)

n Commands - BLEND Table

Table of Commands Available with BLEND

CMND

Zone (Step)

Status

Description of Command

0 1

10

Supervisory setting Batch controller - start

2

11

Supervisory setting Batch controller - restart

3

6

Start mode

Batch controller - abort

4

8

Start mode

Batch controller - EMST D080226E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-92

D8.2.10 Block Modes of Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) The block modes of the BLEND include out of service, initialization manual, manual, automatic and cascade.

n Block Modes of Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) Table

Table of Block Modes for Blending Master Control Block (BLEND)

Abbreviation

Service

Description

O/S

Out of Service

All functions are stopped.

MAN

MANual

Control calculation is stopped.

AUT

AUTomatic

Control calculation is performed and the results are output.

CAS

CAScade

When used in direct blending shipment, a control computation is performed using the setpoint input from the supervisory block and the results are output. When used in tank blending, the action is the same as AUT above. D080227E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-93

D8.2.11 Data Items of Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) There are 147 data items that can be set with the BLEND. Multiple settings are available for port tags, component tags, blending ratios, totalized values of components and component status flags.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-94

n Data Items of the Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) Table

Table of Data Items Set with Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) (1/4)

Abbreviation

Service

Entry

Range/Unit

Default

MODE

Block mode

x

-----

O/S (MAN)

BSTS

Block status

N/A

-----

0

ALRM

Alarm status

N/A

-----

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing status

N/A

-----

0

AF

Alarm detection specification

N/A

-----

0

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

N/A

-----

0

PV

Instantaneous flow rate

Cond.

Industrial scale unit used for PV

SL

SV

Setpoint of flow rate

x

Industrial scale unit used for PV

SL

SVPR

Flow rate setpoint for pre-batch

x

SL to SH

SL

SVH

Final flow rate setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

SVL

Initial flow rate setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

ILST

Setting to release initial flow rate control

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

VL

Predicted leakage value

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SUM

Totalized corrected value

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

BSET

Batch setpoint

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

CMND

Command switch

x

0-63

0

N/A

ZONE

Control step

0-63

0

EMSW

Emergency-stop command switch

x

0 or 1

0

NONB

Endless-batch command switch

x

0 or 1

0

ILSW

Command switch for initial flow rate control

x

0 or 1

0

EMCD

EMST factor code

N/A

0-32, 767

0

EMCP[16]

EMST factor tag

N/A

-----

NULL

STUP

SV set-up increment

x

0.00-100.00 %

1.00

STDN

SV set-down decrement

x

0.00-100.00 %

2.00

MS01[16]

Port tag 1 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

MS02[16]

Port tag 2 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

MS03[16]

Port tag 3 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

MS04[16]

Port tag 4 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

MS05[16]

Port tag 5 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

MS06[16]

Port tag 6 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP01[16]

Component tag 01 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP02[16]

Component tag 02 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

Component tag 03 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP04[16]

Component tag 04 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP05[16]

Component tag 05 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

Component tag 06 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP07[16]

Component tag 07 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP08[16]

Component tag 08 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP03[16]

CP06[16]

Abbreviation

Service

Entry

Range/Unit

Default D080228E.ai

x: entry possible Cond.: entry possible under certain conditions N/A: entry not possible

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Table Abbreviation

D8-95

Table of Data Items Set with Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) (2/4) Service

Entry

Range/Unit

Default

CP09[16]

Component tag 09 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP10[16]

Component tag 10 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP11[16]

Component tag 11 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP12[16]

Component tag 12 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP13[16]

Component tag 13 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CP14[16]

Component tag 14 (for execution)

N/A

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

CR01

Blending ratio 01 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR02

Blending ratio 02 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR03

Blending ratio 03 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR04

Blending ratio 04 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR05

Blending ratio 05 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR06

Blending ratio 06 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR07

Blending ratio 07 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR08

Blending ratio 08 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR09

Blending ratio 09 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR10

Blending ratio 10 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR11

Blending ratio 11 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR12

Blending ratio 12 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR13

Blending ratio 13 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

CR14

Blending ratio 14 (for execution)

N/A

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

SM01

Totalized value of component 01

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM02

Totalized value of component 02

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM03

Totalized value of component 03

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM04

Totalized value of component 04

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM05

Totalized value of component 05

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM06

Totalized value of component 06

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM07

Totalized value of component 07

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM08

Totalized value of component 08

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM09

Totalized value of component 09

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM10

Totalized value of component 10

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM11

Totalized value of component 11

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM12

Totalized value of component 12

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM13

Totalized value of component 13

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

SM14

Totalized value of component 14

x

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

LC01

Component 01 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC02

Component 02 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC03

Component 03 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC04

Component 04 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

Abbreviation

Service

Entry

Range/Unit

Default D080229E.ai

x: entry possible Cond.: entry possible under certain conditions N/A: entry not possible

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Table Abbreviation

D8-96

Table of Data Items Set with Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) (3/4) Service

Entry

Range/Unit

Default

LC05

Component 05 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC06

Component 06 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC07

Component 07 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC08

Component 08 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC09

Component 09 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC10

Component 10 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC11

Component 11 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC12

Component 12 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC13

Component 13 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

LC14

Component 14 status flag (for execution)

N/A

0-3

0

WP01[16]

Component tag 01 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP02[16]

Component tag 02 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP03[16]

Component tag 03 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP04[16]

Component tag 04 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP05[16]

Component tag 05 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP06[16]

Component tag 06 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP07[16]

Component tag 07 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP08[16]

Component tag 08 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP09[16]

Component tag 09 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP10[16]

Component tag 10 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP11[16]

Component tag 11 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP12[16]

Component tag 12 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP13[16]

Component tag 13 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WP14[16]

Component tag 14 (for setting)

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

WR01

Blending ratio 01 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR02

Blending ratio 02 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR03

Blending ratio 03 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR04

Blending ratio 04 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR05

Blending ratio 05 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR06

Blending ratio 06 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR07

Blending ratio 07 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR08

Blending ratio 08 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR09

Blending ratio 09 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR10

Blending ratio 10 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR11

Blending ratio 11 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR12

Blending ratio 12 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR13

Blending ratio 13 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

WR14

Blending ratio 14 (for setting)

x

0.000-10,000.000

0.000

Abbreviation

Service

Entry

Range/Unit

Default D080230E.ai

x: entry possible Cond.: entry possible under certain conditions N/A: entry not possible

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D8-97

Table

Table of Data Items Set with Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) (4/4)

Abbreviation

Service

Entry

Range/Unit

Default

WL01

Component 01 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL02

Component 02 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL03

Component 03 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL04

Component 04 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL05

Component 05 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL06

Component 06 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL07

Component 07 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL08

Component 08 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL09

Component 09 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL10

Component 10 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL11

Component 11 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL12

Component 12 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL13

Component 13 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

WL14

Component 14 status flag (for setting)

x

0-3

0

MOD1

Component configuration change command

x

—-

0

MOD2

Port change switch

x

—-

0

MSMD[16]

Port tag to be changed

x

—-

NULL

CPLO

Throttling prevention coefficient

x

0.00-100.00 %

100.00

MPSV

Master pacing SV

x

Industrial scale unit used for PV

SL

MPSP

Master pacing factor

x

0.00-100.00 %

100.00

MPUP

Master pacing set-up increment

x

0.00-100.00 %

1.00

MPDN

Master pacing set-down decrement

x

0.00-100.00 %

2.00

DSM

Instantaneous flow after corrections

N/A

Industrial unit used for SUM

0

Y01-Y04

Optional buffer 1-4

x

-100.00000-100.00000

0

Y05-Y09

Optional buffer 5-9

x

-32,768-32,767

0

OT01[16]

Option tag 1

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

OT02[16]

Option tag 2

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

OT03[16]

Option tag 3

x

16 alphanumeric characters

NULL

OPMK

Operation mark

x

0-255

0

SH

Scale high limit

N/A

Industrial scale unit used for PV

0

SL

Scale low limit

N/A

Industrial scale unit used for PV

0

CRD

Ratio control designation

N/A

0 or 1

0

Abbreviation

Service

Entry

Range/Unit

Default D080231E.ai

x: entry possible Cond.: entry possible under certain conditions N/A: entry not possible

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page

Ind-1

CENTUM VP Reference Function Block Details IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition

INDEX Symbols 13-Zone Program Set Block 13-Zone Program Set Block................. Line-Segment Pattern Signal Generation.............................. Program End Action............................. Program Set Action..............................

D1-260 D1-262 D1-264 D1-263

A Action Signal Description in Logic Chart Changing Sequence Table Block Mode............................... Executing an Entire Sequence Table................................................... Executing a Particular Step in a Sequence Table........................... Logic Chart Block Mode Change......... Logic Chart One-Shot Execution......... Pause and Restart a Sequence Table................................................... Setting an Execution Label to a Step in a Sequence Table........................... Status Manipulation of Annunciator Message.................... Status Manipulation of Calculation Block............................ Status Manipulation of Code Input Block (CI)..................... Status Manipulation of Code Output Block (CO)................ Status Manipulation of Common Switch............................. Status Manipulation of Communication I/O........................ Status Manipulation of Faceplate Block.............................. Status Manipulation of Global Switch................................. Status Manipulation of Process I/O...... Status Manipulation of Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)................. Status Manipulation of Regulatory Control Block...............

D3-161 D3-159 D3-160 D3-158 D3-158 D3-161 D3-161 D3-156 D3-149 D3-143 D3-144 D3-156 D3-157 D3-153 D3-156 D3-155 D3-143 D3-145

Status Manipulation of Resource Scheduler Block (RS).... D3-144 Status Manipulation of Sequence Message Output........... D3-157 Status Manipulation of SFC Block........ D3-154 Status Manipulation of Software Counter Block (CTS)....... D3-142 Status Manipulation of Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block... D3-141 Status Manipulation of Timer Block (TM)............................ D3-142 Status Manipulation of Unit Instrument............................... D3-155 Status Manipulation of Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)...... D3-144 Action Signal Description in Sequence Table Block Mode Change in Sequence Table................................... D3-96 Changing the Block Mode of a Logic Chart from a Sequence Table.............. D3-97 Executing a Particular Step in the Sequence Table.......................... D3-93 Execution of the Corresponding Rule Number in the Sequence Table............ D3-92 Execution of the Entire Sequence Table..................................................... D3-88 One-Shot Execution of a Logic Chart from a Sequence Table........................ D3-97 Pause and Restart a Sequence Table.... D3-96 Setting Execution Step Label in the Sequence Table.......................... D3-95 Status Manipulation of Annunciator Message...................... D3-86 Status Manipulation of Calculation Block.............................. D3-77 Status Manipulation of Code Input Block (CI)....................... D3-71 Status Manipulation of Code Output Block (CO).................. D3-72 Status Manipulation of Common Switch............................... D3-85 Status Manipulation of Communication I/O.......................... D3-87

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-2 Status Manipulation of Faceplate Block................................ D3-81 Status Manipulation of Global Switch..... D3-85 Status Manipulation of Process I/O........ D3-84 Status Manipulation of Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP).................................................... D3-71 Status Manipulation of Regulatory Control Block................. D3-73 Status Manipulation of Resource Scheduler Block (RS)...... D3-72 Status Manipulation of Sequence Message Output............. D3-86 Status Manipulation of Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Block..................................................... D3-82 Status Manipulation of Software Counter Block (CTS)......... D3-70 Status Manipulation of Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block..... D3-69 Status Manipulation of Timer Block (TM).............................. D3-70 Status Manipulation of Unit Instrument................................. D3-83 Status Manipulation of Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)........ D3-72 ADD................................................................. D2-21 Addition Block................................................. D2-21 ADL............................................................... D2-178 Alarm and Notification Processing of Batch Set Control Block (FSBSET) Deviation Errors...................................... D8-26 External EMST Command..................... D8-27 Input Failure............................................ D8-26 Leakage Alarm....................................... D8-26 Loss-of-Pulse Error................................ D8-28 Output Failure......................................... D8-26 Output Stoppage Alarm.......................... D8-29 Alarm and Notification Processing of Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) Alarm Processing................................... D8-74 External EMST Command..................... D8-75 Alarm Block........................................................ D1-6 Alarm Detection................................................. C5-2 Alarm Detection Stop......................................... C5-5 Alarm Display Flashing Actions...................... C5-33 Alarm Inhibition...................................... C5-5, C5-30 Alarm Notification............................................... C5-5 Alarm Operation................................................. C5-5 Alarm Priority................................................... C5-32 Alarm Processing..................................... C1-3, C5-1 Alarm Processing Levels................................ C5-36 Alarm Status........................................... C6-1, C6-25

ALM-R........................................................... D1-415 AND................................................................. D2-99 Arithmetic Calculation........................................ D2-1 AS-H/M/L....................................................... D1-356 ASTM1............................................................ D2-91 ASTM2............................................................ D2-95 ASTM Correction Block : New JIS.................. D2-95 ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS.................... D2-91 AUT Fallback................................................... D1-51 Auto-Selector Blocks.................................... D1-356 Auxiliary Output............................................... C4-39 AVE................................................................. D2-30 AVE-C............................................................. D2-76 AVE-M............................................................. D2-72 Averaging Block.............................................. D2-30

B Bad Connection Status Alarm......................... C5-26 BAND............................................................ D2-125 Basic Type PID Control................................... D1-63 Batch Data Acquisition Block........................ D2-172 Batch Set Control Block Batch Blending Control........................... D8-10 Batch Loader Control................................ D8-8 Control Processing................................. D8-32 Simulation............................................... D8-22 X% Preset MV Control........................... D8-12 Batch Status Indicator Block........................... D4-27 Batch String Data Acquisition Block.............. D2-175 BDA-C........................................................... D2-175 BDA-L............................................................ D2-172 BDSET-1C.................................................... D2-162 BDSET-1L..................................................... D2-158 BDSET-2C.................................................... D2-169 BDSET-2L..................................................... D2-165 Bitwise AND Block........................................ D2-125 Bitwise NOT Block........................................ D2-128 Bitwise OR Block.......................................... D2-125 BLEND............................................................ D8-59 Blending Master Control Block Component Management...................... D8-66 Control Processing................................. D8-77 Direct Blending Shipment Control.......... D8-63 Port Management................................... D8-69 Tank Blending Control............................ D8-60 Blending PI Controller Block Blending PI Controller Block................. D1-120 Bumpless Switching............................. D1-125 Control Error Alarm............................... D1-128 Cumulative Deviation Alarm................. D1-126

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-3 PI Control Based on Cumulative Deviation.................... D1-123 Block Mode Basic Block Mode............................ C6-2, C6-4 Block Mode...................................... C6-1, C6-2 Change Command................................. C6-18 Change Commands................................ C6-11 Compound Block Mode................... C6-2, C6-5 Transition....................................... C6-2, C6-11 Transition Condition................................ C6-19 Transition Conditions............................... C6-11 Block Mode Change Interlock......................... D1-54 Block Status........................................... C6-1, C6-24 BNOT............................................................ D2-128 BOR.............................................................. D2-125 BSETU-2....................................................... D1-307 BSETU-3....................................................... D1-318 BSI................................................................... D4-27 Bumpless Switching........................................ D1-47

C CALCU.......................................................... D2-131 CALCU-C...................................................... D2-131 Calculation Blocks Calculation Blocks..................................... D2-2 Calculation Precision................................. D2-6 Logic Operation Blocks............................. D2-3 Calculation Processing...................................... C1-2 Calibration.............................................. C3-3, C3-27 Cascade Signal Distributor Block................. D1-372 CI................................................................... D3-213 CO................................................................. D3-219 Code Input Block Bit Inversion.......................................... D3-214 Code Input Block.................................. D3-213 Encoding............................................... D3-214 Code Output Block Bit Inversion.......................................... D3-221 Code Output Block............................... D3-219 Encoding............................................... D3-220 Communication Input Conversion.................. C3-17 Communication Output Conversion............... C4-37 Computer Fail................................................. D1-52 Condition Signal Description in Logic Chart Referencing Annunciator Message...... D3-135 Referencing a Particular Step in a Sequence Table........................... D3-138 Referencing Calculation Block............. D3-127 Referencing Code Input Block (CI)...... D3-120 Referencing Code Output Block (CO).................................................... D3-120

Referencing Common Switch.............. D3-134 Referencing Communication I/O.......... D3-135 Referencing Faceplate Block............... D3-131 Referencing Global Switch................... D3-134 Referencing Logic Chart Alarm Status....................................... D3-136 Referencing Logic Chart Block Mode.................................................. D3-136 Referencing Process I/O...................... D3-133 Referencing Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)........................... D3-119 Referencing Regulatory Control Block...................................... D3-123 Referencing Relational Expression Block (RL)........................................... D3-121 Referencing Resource Scheduler Block (RS).......................................... D3-121 Referencing Sequence Table Alarm Status................................................. D3-139 Referencing Sequence Table Block Mode.................................................. D3-139 Referencing Sequence Table Step Label................................................... D3-138 Referencing SFC Block........................ D3-132 Referencing Software Counter Block (CTS)................................................... D3-118 Referencing Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block.... D3-116 Referencing the Entire Sequence Table................................................... D3-137 Referencing Timer Block (TM).............. D3-118 Referencing Unit Instrument................ D3-133 Referencing Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)................................................ D3-122 Condition Signal Description in Sequence Table Annunciator Message Reference.......... D3-56 Calculation Block Reference.................. D3-48 Code Input Block Reference (CI)........... D3-41 Code Output Block Reference (CO)...... D3-41 Common Switch Reference................... D3-55 Communication I/O Reference............... D3-56 Faceplate Block Reference.................... D3-52 Global Switch Reference........................ D3-55 Logic Chart Alarm Status Reference...... D3-67 Logic Chart Block Mode Reference....... D3-67 Processing I/O Reference...................... D3-55 Pulse Train Input Counter Block Reference (CTP).................................. D3-40 Referencing an Entire Sequence Table..................................................... D3-57 Referencing a Particular Step in a Sequence Table............................. D3-63 Referencing Sequence Table Corresponding Rule Number............... D3-61 IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-4 Regulatory Control Block Reference...... D3-44 Relational Expression Block Reference (RL)..................................... D3-42 Resource Scheduler Block Reference (RS).................................... D3-42 Sequence Table Alarm Status Reference............................................. D3-66 Sequence Table Block Mode Reference............................................. D3-66 Sequence Table Step Label Reference............................................. D3-65 SFC Block Reference............................. D3-53 Software Counter Block Reference (CTS).................................. D3-39 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Reference..... D3-37 Timer Block Reference (TM).................. D3-39 Unit Supervision Reference................... D3-54 Valve Monitoring Block Reference (VLVM)................................ D3-43 Condition Testing............................................. C2-19 Connection between Control Stations............ C2-22 Control Action Bypass..................................... D1-65 Control Action Direction.................................. D1-35 Control Computation Processing.................... D1-28 Control Hold.................................................... D1-50 Controller Blocks.................................... D1-4, D1-28 Control Output Action...................................... D1-34 Control Period Controller Block...................................... C7-22 Logic Chart Block................................... C7-38 Sequence Table Blocks.......................... C7-36 Control Phase Logic Chart Block................................... C7-38 Sequence Table Blocks.......................... C7-36 Control Signal Splitter Block Control Action Direction........................ D1-407 Control Output Action........................... D1-406 Control Signal Splitter Block................. D1-403 Signal Distribution with Output Destination Switch.............................. D1-405 CPV Overshoot............................................... C3-26 CPV Pushback................................................ C4-45 CTP............................................................... D3-205 CTS............................................................... D3-201 Cumulative-Average Block............................. D2-76

D Data Connection...................................... C2-2, C2-3 Data Items.......................................................... C1-4 Data Reference Data Reference......................................... C2-3 Dual-Redundant Input............................... C2-8 Data Set Block.............................................. D2-151 Data Set Block with Input Indicator............... D2-154 Data Setting Data Setting............................................... C2-3 Dual-Redundant Output......................... C2-10 Data Status............................................ C6-1, C6-28 Deactivate Alarm Detection............................ C5-29 Dead-Time Block............................................ D2-63 Dead-Time Compensation Block.................... D2-68 Deadband Action............................................. D1-40 Derivative Block.............................................. D2-51 Deviation Alarm............................................... C5-17 Deviation Check Filter..................................... C5-18 Digital Filter............................................ C3-3, C3-20 DIV.................................................................. D2-27 Division Block.................................................. D2-27 DLAY............................................................... D2-63 DLAY-C............................................................ D2-68 DSET............................................................. D2-151 DSET-PVI...................................................... D2-154 DSW-16......................................................... D2-145 DSW-16C...................................................... D2-148 Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block............. D4-15 Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block................. D4-19 Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block Deviation Alarm.................................... D1-370 Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block................................................... D1-367 Signal Selection.................................... D1-369

E Element Numbers........................................... C2-26 Enhanced Switch Instrument Block.............. D3-164 Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block............................................. D1-94 Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block............................................. D1-86 EQ................................................................. D2-122 Execution Timing............................................. C7-30 EXP................................................................. D2-39 Exponential Block........................................... D2-39 Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block......... D4-41 Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block........... D4-34 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block.......... D4-49

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-5 F Faceplate Blocks Alarm Status........................................... D4-12 Block Mode................................................ D4-7 Block Status............................................ D4-10 Data Status............................................. D4-14 Faceplate Blocks....................................... D4-1 Push Button Operation.............................. D4-4 Feedback Input............................................... C4-34 Feedforward Signal Summing Block............ D1-379 FFSUM.......................................................... D1-379 First-Order Lag Block...................................... D2-42 Flip-Flop Blocks............................................ D2-104 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block........... D1-307 Flowrate Alarm..................................... D1-313 Missing Pulse Alarm.............................. D1-311 FOUT............................................................ D1-372 FSBSET............................................................. D8-7 FUNC-VAR...................................................... D2-81 FV Overshoot.................................................. C3-26

G Gap Action....................................................... D1-31 GE................................................................. D2-122 General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions Arithmetic Expressions......................... D2-200 Built-In Functions.................................. D2-213 Constants............................................. D2-188 Control Statements............................... D2-204 Error Handling...................................... D2-209 General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions........................................ D2-183 Operators.............................................. D2-197 Reserved Words................................... D2-219 Variables............................................... D2-190 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks............ D2-131 GT................................................................. D2-122

H HAS3C............................................................ D4-49

I

I/O Connection Methods.................................... C2-2 Idle Time in Processing at FCS.......................... C7-6 INDST2........................................................... D4-15 INDST2S......................................................... D4-19 INDST3........................................................... D4-23 Initialization Manual........................................ D1-49 Input/Output Terminals....................................... C1-2 Input Compensation........................................ D1-42 Input Error Alarm................................................ C5-9 Input High-High and Low-Low Limit Alarm..... C5-10 Input High and Low Limit Alarm...................... C5-12 Input Indicator Block....................................... D1-21 Input Indicator Blocks......................................... D1-4 Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm Deviation Alarm...................................... D1-25 Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm.................................................... D1-24 Setpoint Value Limiter............................ D1-26 Input Open Alarm............................................... C5-6 Input or Output Compensation........................ D1-41 Input Processing...................................... C1-2, C3-1 Input Processing for Sequence Connection.................................................... C3-37 Input Processing in the Unsteady State.......... C3-29 Input Processing of Batch Set Control Block (FSBSET) Correction after Temperature Compensation...................................... D8-21 Correction Before Temperature Compensation...................................... D8-18 Instantaneous Flow Computation.......... D8-21 Pulse Weight Normalization................... D8-18 Temperature Compensation................... D8-18 Totalizing Processing.............................. D8-21 Input Processing of Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) Component Alarm Acquisition................ D8-72 Component PV Acquisition..................... D8-71 SV Acquisition from FSBSET at Port..... D8-72 Input Signal Conversion........................... C3-3, C3-5 Input Velocity Alarm........................................ C5-14 INTEG............................................................. D2-46 Integration.............................................. C3-3, C3-22 Integration Block............................................. D2-46 Inter-Station Data Link Block........................ D2-178

I-PD................................................................. D1-64 I/O Connection................................................... C2-1 I/O Connection Information Data Connection........................................ C2-7 I/O Connection Information.................... C2-25 Sequence Connection............................ C2-20 Terminal Connection.............................. C2-13 IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-6 L LAG................................................................. D2-42 LC64................................................................ D3-99 LD.................................................................... D2-51 LDLAG............................................................ D2-59 Lead/Lag Block............................................... D2-59 Logical AND Block.......................................... D2-99 Logical NOT Block........................................ D2-102 Logical OR Block............................................ D2-99 Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart Execution Order of Logic Calculation.... D3-113 Logic Calculation Processing............... D3-108 Logic Operation Elements.................... D3-108 Logic Chart Block Input Processing................................... D3-107 Internal Timer........................................ D3-162 Logic Chart Block................................... D3-99 Logic Chart Edit Window...................... D3-104 Logic Operation.................................................. D2-1

M MAN Fallback.................................................. D1-50 Manipulated Output Index............................... C4-23 Manipulating Unit Instrument from SFC Block..................................................... D5-79 Manual Loader Block.................................... D1-177 Manual Loader Blocks....................................... D1-5 Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW Automatic Control Output Computation....................................... D1-185 Block Mode Change Interlock.............. D1-192 Bumpless Switching............................. D1-186 Control Output Action........................... D1-185 Initialization Manual.............................. D1-190 MAN Fallback....................................... D1-191 Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW..................................... D1-182 Setpoint Value Pushback..................... D1-186 Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator..... D1-179 MC-2............................................................. D1-194 MC-2E........................................................... D1-194 MC-3............................................................. D1-194 MC-3E........................................................... D1-194 Measurement Tracking................................... D1-44 MLD............................................................... D1-177 MLD-PVI........................................................ D1-179 MLD-SW....................................................... D1-182

Motor Control Blocks 2-Position Pulsive Output..................... D1-224 2-Position Status Output...................... D1-222 3-Position Pulsive Output..................... D1-225 3-Position Status Output...................... D1-223 Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm....... D1-240 Answerback Check.............................. D1-207 Answer Back Error Alarm..................... D1-240 Answerback Input Signal...................... D1-202 Answerback Tracking........................... D1-232 Block Mode Change Interlock.............. D1-214 Bypass Command Switch.................... D1-218 Computer Fail....................................... D1-212 Fallback................................................ D1-233 Feedback Input High Limit/Low Limit Alarm.................................................. D1-238 Feedback Input Signal.......................... D1-202 Inching Output...................................... D1-226 Initialization Manual.............................. D1-210 Input Signal Conversion of Answerback Input............................... D1-203 Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input.................................. D1-203 Interlock Alarm...................................... D1-239 Interlock Check..................................... D1-235 MAN Fallback........................................ D1-211 Motor Control Blocks............................ D1-194 MV Action on Setting CSV.................... D1-230 Off-Service............................................ D1-237 Operating Time..................................... D1-215 Output Tracking.................................... D1-237 Remote/Local Input.............................. D1-232 Serial Start............................................ D1-214 Simulation Function.............................. D1-216 Start Count........................................... D1-215 Status Change Message...................... D1-215 Thermal Trip Alarm............................... D1-239 Moving-Average Block.................................... D2-72 MUL................................................................. D2-24 Multiplication Block......................................... D2-24

N No-Conversion................................................ C4-27 No Conversion................................................... C3-7 Non-Interference Control Output Block........ D1-394 Non-Linear Gain.............................................. D1-30 NOT............................................................... D2-102

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-7 O OFF-Delay Timer Block................................. D2-115 OFFD............................................................. D2-115 Offsite Block JOB Controllers......................................... D8-2 Offsite Block............................................... D8-1 ON-Delay Timer Block................................... D2-111 OND............................................................... D2-111 One-Batch Data Set Block............................ D2-158 One-Batch String Data Set Block................. D2-162 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block................................................ D2-142 One-Shot Blocks............................................ D2-119 One-Shot Execution............................. C7-26, C7-31 ONOFF............................................................ D1-86 ONOFF-E........................................................ D1-86 ONOFF-G....................................................... D1-94 ONOFF-GE..................................................... D1-94 Operations Action Description Using Logic Charts........................................ D6-114 Action Description Using the Sequence Table.................................. D6-111 Action Scripts in SEBOL....................... D6-104 Alarm Processing................................. D6-127 Changing Current Step........................ D6-126 Compound Sequence............................ D6-91 Data Items.............................................. D6-82 Error Processing................................... D6-151 ID............................................................ D6-96 Initialization Operation.......................... D6-152 Interrupt Processing............................. D6-129 Interrupt Signal Processing.................. D6-148 Mode....................................................... D6-98 Mode Change Command..................... D6-100 Monitoring Operation............................ D6-153 Operations.............................................. D6-79 Pause.................................................... D6-119 Queue Signal Processing..................... D6-135 Referencing Current Step.................... D6-125 SFC........................................................ D6-85 Sharing................................................... D6-94 Start and End......................................... D6-117 Status..................................................... D6-99 Status Change Command.................... D6-100 Status Change Post-Process............... D6-144 Status Change Pre-Process................ D6-142 Status Change Processing................... D6-140 Status Transition................................... D6-101 Transition Conditions.............................. D6-92

OR................................................................... D2-99 Order of Process Execution............................... C7-5 Output Clamp.................................................. C4-10 Output Compensation..................................... D1-43 Output Fail Alarm............................................ C5-23 Output High and Low Limit Alarm................... C5-24 Output Limiter..................................................... C4-6 Output Open Alarm......................................... C5-21 Output Operation..................................... C4-2, C4-4 Output Processing................................... C1-3, C4-1 Output Processing in Sequence Connection.................................................... C4-48 Output Processing in Unsteady State............. C4-43 Output Processing of Batch Set Control Block (FSBSET) Output Tracking...................................... D8-23 Output Velocity Limiter........................... D8-24 Output Processing of Blending Master Control Block (BLEND) Component Command Setting.............. D8-73 Component SV Setting........................... D8-73 Output Range Tracking................................... C4-21 Output Signal Conversion............................... C4-24 Output Timing Logic Chart Block................................... C7-34 Sequence Table Blocks.......................... C7-33 Output Tracking............................................... C4-17 Output Velocity Limiter....................................... C4-9

P PBS10C.......................................................... D4-41 PBS5C............................................................ D4-34 PD-MR........................................................... D1-113 PD Controller Block with Manual Reset Bumpless Switching.............................. D1-117 PD Controller Block with Manual Reset...................................... D1-113 PD Control with Manual Reset.............. D1-116 Periodic Execution............................... C7-25, C7-30 PG-L13.......................................................... D1-260 PI-BLEND..................................................... D1-120 PI-D................................................................. D1-64 PI-HLD............................................................ D1-68 PID.................................................................. D1-57 PID-BSW......................................................... D1-78 PID Pulse Width Output.................................. C4-34 PID-STC........................................................ D1-132 PID-TP.......................................................... D1-104 PID Controller Block........................................ D1-57

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-8 PID Controller Block with Batch Switch PID Control Computation with Two-Level Output Swiitching................................. D1-81 PID Controller Block with Batch Switch......................................... D1-78 PRD................................................................. D1-55 Preset Manipulated Output............................. C4-15 Primary Direct................................................. D1-55 Process Alarm Message................................. C5-27 Process Timing Calculation Block.................................... C7-25 Process Timing.......................................... C7-1 Regulatory Control Block.......................... C7-2 Sequence Control Block......................... C7-29 Process Variable Tracking.............................. D1-44 PTC............................................................... D1-422 Pulse-Train Input Conversion Control Priority Type............................... C3-13 Exact Totalization.................................... C3-14 Pulse Count Input Block....................... D1-6, D1-422 Pulse Train Input Counter Block................... D3-205 Pulse Width Output Conversion..................... C4-31 PV/FV/CPV Overshoot................................... C3-25 PV/FV/CPV Scale out........................................ C3-3 PV Derivative Type PID Control...................... D1-64 PVI................................................................... D1-21 PVI-DV............................................................ D1-24 PV Overshoot.................................................. C3-25 PV Proportional and Derivative Type PID Control................................................... D1-64 PV Range Limit............................................... C3-18

R RAMP.............................................................. D2-55 Ramp Block..................................................... D2-55 RATIO........................................................... D1-241 Ratio Set Block AUT Fallback........................................ D1-254 Block Mode Change Interlock.............. D1-257 Bumpless Switching............................. D1-250 Computer Fail....................................... D1-255 Control Hold.......................................... D1-253 Control Output Action........................... D1-247 Initialization Manual.............................. D1-252 MAN Fallback....................................... D1-253 Ratio Computation................................ D1-245 Ratio Set Block..................................... D1-241 Setpoint Value Limiter.......................... D1-248 Setpoint Value Pushback..................... D1-249 Regulatory Control............................................. D1-1 Regulatory Control Blocks................................. D1-2

Relational Expression Block Relational Expression Block................. D3-224 Relational Expression Data.................. D3-226 Relational Operation Blocks......................... D2-122 Remote/Local Switch...................................... C4-33 Repeated Warning Alarm................................ C5-35 Representative Alarm Block.......................... D1-415 Reset Limit Function....................................... D1-35 Resource Scheduler Block........................... D3-229 RL.................................................................. D3-224 RS................................................................. D3-229

S Sampling PI Controller Block PI-HLD Action after Hold........................ D1-74 PI Control Computation with Hold.......... D1-72 Sampling PI Controller Block................. D1-68 SBSD............................................................ D1-467 Scan Coefficient................................................. C7-4 Scan Period........................................................ C7-3 Scan Phase........................................................ C7-4 SEBOL/User C Ratio......................................... C7-6 SEBOL Statements for Valve Pattern Monitor drive vpmoff Statement.......................... D7-28 drive vpmon Statement.......................... D7-23 vpmoff Statement................................... D7-36 vpmon Statement................................... D7-31 vpmreset Statement............................... D7-39 vpmstart Statement................................ D7-21 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data................. D2-145 Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data...... D2-148 Self-Tuning PID Controller Block CR......................................................... D1-164 DA......................................................... D1-164 DMAX................................................... D1-162 Execution of Auto-Startup.................... D1-149 Execution of Initializer Start.................. D1-148 Execution of On-Demand Tuning......... D1-154 GM........................................................ D1-164 IA........................................................... D1-164 IMAX..................................................... D1-162 IMIN...................................................... D1-162 IP........................................................... D1-165 LM......................................................... D1-164 MI.......................................................... D1-161 NB......................................................... D1-159 OS......................................................... D1-160 PA......................................................... D1-164 PIDC..................................................... D1-163 PMAX................................................... D1-162

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-9 PMIN..................................................... D1-162 Self-Tuning Function............................ D1-139 Self-Tuning Operating Modes and Block Status....................................... D1-141 Self-Tuning PID Controller Block.......... D1-132 STC...................................................... D1-157 STC Operating Mode........................... D1-141 TM......................................................... D1-164 TR......................................................... D1-158 Sequence Connection........................... C2-2, C2-19 Sequence Control.............................................. D3-1 Sequence Table Block Action Rule............................................. D3-31 Condition Rule........................................ D3-30 Input Processing..................................... D3-28 Non-Step Sequence............................... D3-20 Output Processing.................................. D3-32 Rule Extension....................................... D3-34 Rule Extension Block................................ D3-9 Sequence Table Block............................... D3-8 Sequence Table Edit Window................ D3-16 Step Sequence....................................... D3-23 Sequential Function Chart Action Description Using Logic Chart..... D5-32 Action Description Using SEBOL........... D5-16 Action Description Using Sequence Table..................................................... D5-26 SFC........................................................... D5-1 Transition Conditions.............................. D5-37 Setpoint Value Limiter..................................... D1-45 Setpoint Value Pushback................................ D1-46 SFC Block Alarm Processing................................... D5-64 Block Modes........................................... D5-76 Block Status............................................ D5-77 Changing Current Step.......................... D5-63 Data Items.............................................. D5-68 Error Processing..................................... D5-56 Interrupt Programs................................. D5-38 Interrupt Signal Processing.................... D5-53 Main Programs....................................... D5-38 Online Maintenance............................... D5-66 Pausing SFC Block Execution............... D5-58 Queue Signal Processing....................... D5-42 Referencing Current Step...................... D5-62 Status Change Processing..................... D5-48 Terminating SFC Block Execution.......... D5-57 Transition of SFC Block Status.............. D5-78 SFC Elements Links....................................................... D5-12 Step........................................................... D5-6

Transition................................................ D5-10 Signal Distributor Blocks.................................... D1-6 Signal Limiter Block........................................... D1-5 Signal Selector Blocks......................... D1-5, D1-349 Signal Setter Blocks........................................... D1-5 SLBC............................................................. D1-470 SLCC............................................................. D1-473 SLCD............................................................. D1-442 SLMC............................................................ D1-451 SLPC............................................................. D1-446 SMRT............................................................ D1-462 SMST-111...................................................... D1-456 SMST-121..................................................... D1-459 Software Counter Block Preset Counter..................................... D3-203 Software Counter Block....................... D3-201 SPLIT............................................................ D1-403 SQRT.............................................................. D2-36 Squared Deviation Action............................... D1-33 Square Root Block.......................................... D2-36 Square Root Extraction.................................... C3-11 SRS1-R......................................................... D2-104 SRS1-S......................................................... D2-104 SRS2-R......................................................... D2-104 SRS2-S......................................................... D2-104 SS-DUAL....................................................... D1-367 SS-H/M/L....................................................... D1-349 ST16................................................................... D3-8 ST16E................................................................ D3-8 Start Timing.......................................... C7-25, C7-29 Status Manipulation........................................ C2-19 STLD............................................................. D1-477 Structure of a Function Block............................. C1-1 SUM Value Entry............................................. C3-24 SW-33............................................... C2-16, D2-139 SW-91............................................... C2-16, D2-142 Switch Instrument Block Answerback Bypass............................. D3-180 Answerback Check.............................. D3-177 Answerback Input................................. D3-173 Answerback Tracking........................... D3-185 Mode Change Interlock........................ D3-187 MV Action on Setting CSV.................... D3-184 Output Signal Conversion.................... D3-181 Output Tracking : Enhanced Switch Instrument Block................................ D3-183 Remote/Local Input.............................. D3-176 Simulation............................................. D3-186 Switch Instrument Block....................... D3-164 System Alarm Message.................................. C5-28

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-10 T Temperature and Pressure Correction Block............................................ D2-85 Terminal Connection.............................. C2-2, C2-13 Terminal Numbers........................................... C2-26 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block................................................ D2-139 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block ON/OFF Three-Position Control Computation......................................... D1-99 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block..................................................... D1-94 Three-Position Status Output............... D1-101 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block........................................................... D1-104 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Output.............. D1-110 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Period.............. D1-110 Timer Block................................................... D3-190 Timing of Process I/O......................................... C7-7 TM................................................................. D3-190 TOFF.............................................................. D2-119 TON................................................................ D2-119 Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) 2-Position ON/OFF Output................... D1-294 3-Position ON/OFF Output................... D1-295 Batch End Alarm................................... D1-299 Batch Operation (2-Position ON/OFF Output).............. D1-283 Batch Operation (3-Position ON/OFF Output).............. D1-285 Batch Operation (Analog Output)......... D1-272 Compatibility between Totalizing Batch Set Block and CENTUM V, CENTUM-XL Totalizing Batch Set Unit.................... D1-302 Cumulative Deviation High and Low Limit Alarm.................................................. D1-300 Integration............................................. D1-271 Leak Alarm............................................ D1-301 Pre-Batch Alarm................................... D1-298 Totalizing Batch Set Blocks.................. D1-270 TPCFL............................................................. D2-85 Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block............... D4-23 Two-Batch Data Set Block Batch Status (NXBS)............................ D2-166 Two-Batch Data Set Block................... D2-165 Two-Batch String Data Set Block Batch Status (NXBS)............................ D2-170 Two-Batch String Data Set Block......... D2-169

Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block ON/OFF Two-Position Control Computation......................................... D1-91 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block..................................................... D1-86 Two-Position Status Output.................... D1-92

U Unit Instrument Accessing Unit Data............................... D6-28 Block Models.......................................... D6-15 Data Items.............................................. D6-18 Data Items for Process Management.... D6-26 Faceplate Data Items............................. D6-20 Mode....................................................... D6-47 Non-Resident Unit.................................. D6-15 Resident Unit.......................................... D6-14 Standard State Transition Matrix............ D6-58 State Transition Matrix............................ D6-57 Status..................................................... D6-48 Sub-Status.............................................. D6-49 System-Specific Data Items................... D6-19 Unit Instrument....................................... D6-14 Unit Mode Change Command............... D6-50 Unit Status Change Command.............. D6-50 User-Definable Data Items..................... D6-22 User Defined State Transition Matrix..... D6-69 Unit Procedure Compound Sequence............................ D6-37 Interrupt Processing............................... D6-43 SFC........................................................ D6-32 Sharing................................................... D6-44 Transition Conditions.............................. D6-40 Unit Procedure....................................... D6-31 Unit Supervision Application Capacity............................... D6-10 Batch Management and Unit Supervision.............................................. D6-9 Control Activity Model................................ D6-6 ISA S88.01 and Unit Supervision.............. D6-5 Messages............................................... D6-72 Outline....................................................... D6-2 Physical Model.......................................... D6-5 Procedural Control Model......................... D6-7 Process Alarm Messages....................... D6-73 Sequence Control Messages................. D6-77 System Alarm Messages........................ D6-78 Unit Mode Change Message................. D6-76 Unit Status Change Message................ D6-76 Unit Supervision........................................ D6-1 What is a Unit?.......................................... D6-3 IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Ind-11 V Valve Monitoring Block.................................. D3-239 Valve Pattern Monitors Alarms.................................................... D7-16 Block Mode............................................. D7-13 Block Status............................................ D7-14 Data Items................................................. D7-8 Number of Pieces of Data....................... D7-11 Signal Transmission............................... D7-15 Simulation............................................... D7-49 Type........................................................... D7-5 Valve Pattern Monitor................................ D7-1 Variable Line-Segment Function Block........... D2-81 VELLIM......................................................... D1-332 Velocity Limiter Block Deviation Alarm.................................... D1-346 Velocity Limiter Block........................... D1-332 Velocity Limiting Computation.............. D1-334 VLVM............................................................. D3-239

W Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block ∆SUM Conversion................................ Flowrate Alarm..................................... SUM Conversion.................................. Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block....... Weight-Totalizing Conversion.............. Wipeout Block............................................... WOUT...........................................................

D1-327 D1-328 D1-326 D1-318 D1-324 D2-108 D2-108

X XCPL............................................................. D1-394

Y YS Batch Controller Block............................. D1-470 YS Batch Set Station Block........................... D1-467 YS Blending Controller Block........................ D1-473 YS Blocks............................................. D1-6, D1-428 YS Controller Block....................................... D1-442 YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever............................................... D1-459 YS Manual Station Block with SV Output..... D1-456 YS Programmable Controller Block.............. D1-446 YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width................................................. D1-451 YS Ratio Set Station Block........................... D1-462 YS Totalizer Block......................................... D1-477

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page

Rev-1

Revision Information l Title : CENTUM VP Reference Function Block Details l Manual No. : IM 33M01A30-40E Mar. 2008/1st Edition/R4.01 or later*

* : Denotes the release number of the software corresponding to the contents of this user's manual. The revised contents are valid until the next edition is issued.

Newly published

n For Questions and More Information If you have any questions, you can send an E-mail to the following address. E-mail: [email protected] n If you want more information about Yokogawa products, you can visit Yokogawa’s homepage at the following web site. Homepage: http://www.yokogawa.com/ n Written by Process Automation Product Marketing Dept. Industrial Automation Systems Business Div. Yokogawa Electric Corporation n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN n Printed by KOHOKU PUBLISHING & PRINTING INC.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page

Reference Function Block Details Vol.1 IM 33M01A30-40E

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition

TocC-1

CENTUM VP Reference Function Block Details Vol.1 IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition

CONTENTS PART-C

Function Block Common

C1.

Structure of a Function Block................................................................C1-1

C2.

I/O Connection.........................................................................................C2-1

C3.

C2.1

Data Connection............................................................................................. C2-3

C2.2

Terminal Connection.................................................................................... C2-13 Connection Between Function Blocks........................................... C2-14

C2.2.2

Connection by a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91)............................ C2-16

C2.3

Sequence Connection.................................................................................. C2-19

C2.4

Connection between Control Stations....................................................... C2-22

C2.5

I/O Connection Information......................................................................... C2-25

Input Processing.....................................................................................C3-1 C3.1

Input Signal Conversion................................................................................ C3-5 C3.1.1

Input Signal Conversions Common to Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks.................................................................... C3-7

C3.1.2

Input Signal Conversion for Logic Operation Blocks..................... C3-19

C3.2

Digital Filter.................................................................................................... C3-20

C3.3

Integration...................................................................................................... C3-22

C3.4

PV/FV/CPV Overshoot.................................................................................. C3-25

C3.5

Calibration..................................................................................................... C3-27

C3.6

Input Processing in the Unsteady State..................................................... C3-29

C3.7

C4.

C2.2.1

C3.6.1

Input Processing of the Regulatory Control Block in Unsteady State.............................................................................. C3-30

C3.6.2

Input Processing of the Calculation Block in Unsteady State........ C3-32

Input Processing for Sequence Connection............................................. C3-37

Output Processing..................................................................................C4-1 C4.1

Output Limiter................................................................................................. C4-6

C4.2

Output Velocity Limiter................................................................................... C4-9

C4.3

Output Clamp................................................................................................ C4-10

C4.4

Preset Manipulated Output.......................................................................... C4-15

C4.5

Output Tracking............................................................................................ C4-17

C4.6

Output Range Tracking................................................................................ C4-21

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocC-2

C5.

C4.7

Manipulated Output Index............................................................................ C4-23

C4.8

Output Signal Conversion........................................................................... C4-24 C4.8.1

No-Conversion............................................................................... C4-27

C4.8.2

Pulse Width Output Conversion.................................................... C4-31

C4.8.3

Communication Output Conversion.............................................. C4-37

C4.8.4

Output Signal Conversion of Logic Operation Blocks................... C4-38

C4.9

Auxiliary Output............................................................................................ C4-39

C4.10

Output Processing in Unsteady State........................................................ C4-43

C4.11

CPV Pushback............................................................................................... C4-45

C4.12

Output Processing in Sequence Connection............................................ C4-48

Alarm Processing – FCS........................................................................C5-1 C5.1

Input Open Alarm Check................................................................................ C5-6

C5.2

Input Error Alarm Check................................................................................ C5-9

C5.3

Input High-High and Low-Low Limit Alarm Check.................................... C5-10

C5.4

Input High and Low Limit Alarm Check...................................................... C5-12

C5.5

Input Velocity Alarm Check . ....................................................................... C5-14

C5.6

Deviation Alarm Check ................................................................................ C5-17

C5.7

Output Open Alarm Check........................................................................... C5-21

C5.8

Output Fail Alarm Check.............................................................................. C5-23

C5.9

Output High and Low Limit Alarm Check................................................... C5-24

C5.10

Bad Connection Status Alarm Check......................................................... C5-26

C5.11

Process Alarm Message.............................................................................. C5-27

C5.12

System Alarm Message................................................................................ C5-28

C5.13

Deactivate Alarm Detection......................................................................... C5-29

C5.14

Alarm Inhibition (Alarm OFF)....................................................................... C5-30

C5.15

Classification of Alarm Actions Based on Alarm Priority........................ C5-32 C5.15.1 Alarm Display Flashing Actions..................................................... C5-33 C5.15.2 Repeated Warning Alarm............................................................... C5-35

C5.16

C6.

Alarm Processing Levels............................................................................. C5-36

Block Mode and Status...........................................................................C6-1 C6.1

Block Mode...................................................................................................... C6-2 C6.1.1

Basic Block Mode............................................................................ C6-4

C6.1.2

Compound Block Mode................................................................... C6-5

C6.1.3

Block Mode Transition....................................................................C6-11

C6.1.4

Block Mode Change Command.................................................... C6-18

C6.1.5

Block Mode Transition Condition................................................... C6-19

C6.2

Block Status.................................................................................................. C6-24

C6.3

Alarm Status.................................................................................................. C6-25

C6.4

Data Status.................................................................................................... C6-28

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocC-3 C7.

Process Timing........................................................................................C7-1 C7.1

Process Timing for Regulatory Control Block................................................C7-2 C7.1.1

Scan Period..................................................................................... C7-3

C7.1.2

Order of Process Execution............................................................. C7-5

C7.1.3

Timing of Process I/O....................................................................... C7-7

C7.1.4

Control Period for Controller Block................................................ C7-22

C7.2

Process Timing of Calculation Block......................................................... C7-25

C7.3

Process Timing for Sequence Control Block............................................ C7-29 C7.3.1

Execution Timing for Sequence Control Blocks............................ C7-30

C7.3.2

Output Timing of Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E)...............C7-33

C7.3.3

Output Timing of a LC64 Logic Chart Block................................... C7-34

C7.3.4

Combination of Execution Timing and Output Timing................... C7-35

C7.3.5

Control Period and Control Phase for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E)............................................................................... C7-36

C7.3.6

Control Period and Control Phase for Logic Chart Block (LC64)............................................................................................ C7-38

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page



C1-1

C1. Structure of a Function Block A function block consists of the following components: • Input and output terminals that exchange data with devices outside of the external function block • Four processing functions of input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing • Constants and variable data used to execute processing functions. Especially, an abbreviated name called “data item” is assigned to data that is referenced or set during the operation. The function block performs input processing, calculation processing, and output processing in sequence for an input signal read from the input terminal, and writes an output signal from the output terminal. This chapter describes an overview of each structural component of the function block as well as a basic structure of the function block.

n Basic Structure of the Function Block The figure below shows a basic structure of the function block. Other function block

Set input terminal SET Function block Alarm processing CSV, SV, etc.

Input terminal

Input module

IN

Input processing

PV, etc.

Output terminal

Calculation processing

Output processing

Data items

MV, etc.

OUT

Output module

Legend Flow of input/output signals and data Alarm processing flow C010001E.ai

Figure Basic Structure of the Function Block

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C1-2

l Input/Output Terminals A function block performs data input/output with the process control input/output and other function blocks via input/output terminals. An input terminal (IN), set input terminal (SET) and output terminal (OUT) are basic input/output terminals. The function block has some other input/output terminals according to the type of the function block used.

SEE

ALSO

• For the connection destinations of the input/output terminals, see the following: C2, “I/O Connection” • For specific input/output terminals of each function block, see the following: Part D, “Function Block Details”

l Input Processing Input processing changes an input signal read from the connection destination of the input terminal of the function block into data that is suitable for calculation processing (control calculation, numeric calculation, etc). Various types of input processing are performed according to the type of the function block and the input signal format.

SEE

ALSO

• For the basic input processing in the regulatory control block and calculation block, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For input processing specific to each function block, see the following: Part D, “Function Block Details”

l Calculation Processing Calculation processing reads data obtained by input processing, performs calculation processing according to the type of the function block, and outputs the processing result. For example, a regulatory control block reads a process variable (PV), performs computation for regulatory control, and outputs the computation result as a manipulated value (MV). Because the calculation processing determines the function of each function block, the processing contents vary depending on the type of the function block.

SEE

ALSO

For the calculation processing of each function block, see the following: Part D, “Function Block Details”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C1-3

l Output Processing Output processing outputs data obtained by calculation processing to the connection destination of the output terminal as an output signal. Various types of output processing are performed according to the type of the function block and the output signal format.

SEE

ALSO

• For the basic output processing in the regulatory control block and calculation block, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For output processing specific to each function block, see the following: Part D, “Function Block Details”

l Alarm Processing Alarm processing performs various types of alarm check during input processing, calculation processing and output processing in order to detect a process error. When an error is detected, the alarm processing reflects the detection of an alarm in the “alarm status” that is one of the data items of the function block, and also notifies a message indicating the detection result to the operation and monitoring.

SEE

ALSO

• For the basic alarm processing in the function block, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing - FCS” • For the alarm processing specific to each function block, see the following: Part D, “Function Block Details”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C1-4

l Data Items A function block retains various data according to the type of the function block in a database, which includes setup parameters and variable data that may be referenced or set during the operation. Abbreviated names that are assigned to these set parameters and variable data are generically called “data items.” For instance, the function block can perform calculation processing based on a specific data item value and can reflect that processing result in another data item. The controls of the function block, such as “MAN” (manual) and “AUT” (auto), and the “block mode” that indicates the output status are some of the data items. Main data items are as follows: • Block mode (MODE) • Block status (BSTS) • Alarm status (ALRM) • Process variable (PV) • Setpoint value (SV) • Manipulated output value (MV)

SEE

ALSO

• For details on the block mode, block status and alarm status, see the following: C6, “Block Mode and Status” • For data items that are retained by each function block, see the following: Part D, “Function Block Details”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-1

C2. I/O Connection By performing the I/O connection, data can be exchanged between a function block and the connection destination according to the connection method.

n Connection Destination of I/O Connection With I/O connection, the destination and method of connection for each I/O terminal of a function block is specified. When the I/O connection is performed, process I/O, software I/O, communication I/O, fieldbus I/O and other function blocks can be specified as the connection destination of the function block’s I/O terminal.

l Process I/O • Analog I/O • Contact I/O

l Software I/O • Internal switch (common switch) • Message output

l Communication I/O • Word data • Bit data

l Fieldbus I/O • Parameter of fieldbus block

l Other Function Blocks • Data items of other function blocks • I/O terminals of other function blocks

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-2

n I/O Connection Methods The I/O connection methods include data connection, terminal connection and sequence connection.

l Data Connection This is the I/O connection method used for reading and setting data with respect to the process I/O, software I/O, communication I/O, fieldbus I/O or other function blocks.

l Terminal Connection This is the I/O connection method used when connecting between cascade control function blocks or connecting function blocks via a selector switch block (SW-33, SW-91). Data is exchanged between the terminals of two function blocks.

l Sequence Connection This is the I/O connection method used for testing whether or not the connection destination data used by the sequence control satisfies the conditional expression, or for changing block mode, alarm status, data, etc. of the connection destination.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-3

C2.1 Data Connection Data connection is used when exchanging data values and data status between a function block and the data item of the element specified as the connection destination.

n Data Connection Data connection is a method in which the element symbol name and data item name of various elements containing data are specified as the I/O connection information to indicate the connection destination of the function block’s I/O terminal. Process I/O, software I/O, communication I/O, fieldbus I/O or other function blocks can be specified as an element which contains data. In data connection, data values and data status are directly exchanged with the data item of the element specified as the connection destination.

n Data Reference and Data Setting In data connection, reading data from the connection destination is called “data reference,” and writing data into the connection destination from the output terminal of the function block is called “data setting.”

l Data Reference Data reference is a type of data connection in which data is read from the connection destination of the function block’s input terminal. The data value of the connection destination is read as an input value of the function block in data reference. Also, the data status of the input data is modified depending upon the data status of the data from the connection destination. With data reference, data at the same connection destination can be referenced from I/O terminals of multiple function blocks. In this case, the same input data is read to each function block.

l Data Setting Data setting is a type of data connection in which data is written into the connection destination from the function block’s output terminal. The value of the function block’s output data is sent to the connection destination. Also, the data status of the connection destination’s data is modified depending upon the data status of the output data from the function block.

IMPORTANT When setting data for the process output, make sure that one output terminal corresponds to one process output. If data is set for the same process output from output terminals of multiple function blocks, conflict will result at the process output due to different data values set.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-4

n Destinations of Data Connection In data connection, process I/O, software I/O, communication I/O, fieldbus I/O or data items of other function blocks can be specified as the connection destination of the function block’s I/O terminal. Data reference and data setting can be performed with each of the connection destinations.

l Data Connection with Process I/O Data connection with process I/O is an I/O connection that connects the function block’s I/O terminal to the process I/Os such as analog I/O and contact I/O . Since process I/Os do not have I/O terminals, terminal connection cannot be performed. An example of data connection with process I/O is shown below: Data reference

Data setting PID

Process input

IN

Process output

OUT

Input module

Output module

C020101E.ai

Figure Data Connection with Process I/O

l Data Connection with Software I/O Data connection with software I/O is an I/O connection that connects an internal switch and the message outputs such as annunciator messages, messages for sequence control, etc. to the function block’s I/O terminal. An example of data connection with software I/O is shown below: Data setting PG-L13 SUB

%AN Annunciator message C020102E.ai

Figure Data Connection with Software I/O

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-5

l Data Connection with Communication I/O Data connection with communication I/O means that communication I/O word/bit data is connected to the I/O terminal of a function block. Its example is shown below. Data reference

Data setting CALCU IN

OUT

%WW, %WB Communication I/O data C020103E.ai

Figure Data Connection with Communication I/O

SEE

ALSO

For the details of communication I/O, see the following: Part J, “Subsystem Communication (Using RIO)” Part K, “Subsystem Communication (Using FIO)”

l Data Connection with Fieldbus I/O Data connection with fieldbus I/O means that fieldbus block parameters are connected to the I/O terminal of a function block. Its example is shown below. Data reference

Data setting CALCU IN

OUT

Fieldbus Communication Module C020104E.ai

Figure Data Connection with Fieldbus I/O

SEE

ALSO

• For more information about data connection with Fieldbus I/O, see the followings in regarding to KFCS2, KFCS or FFCS: A2.2, “Control Loop and Data Flow” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33M20T10-40E) • For more information about data connection with Fieldbus I/O, see A3.3, “Fieldbus Block Connection” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Tools (IM 33S05P10-01E) in regarding to PFCS, LFCS2, LFCS or SFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-6

l Data Connection with Other Function Blocks Data connection with other function blocks is an I/O connection that connects data items such as process variables (PV) and manipulated output values (MV) held in the other function blocks, to the function block’s I/O terminals. An example of data connection with other function blocks’ data items is shown below: Data reference

Data setting

PVI

PID

LDLAG PV

IN

OUT

VN

C020105E.ai

Figure Data Connection with Other Function Blocks’ Data Items

In data connection with other function blocks, data is directly exchanged with the data items of the connection destination. Therefore, there is no need to specify I/O connection information in the function blocks of the connection destination as long as the I/O connection information is specified in the function block of the connection source. When using calculated input values (RV, RVn) as constants in a calculation block, data can be set for the calculated input values (RV, RVn) of that calculation block. In such a case, however, if data reference or terminal connection (cascade input) is specified for the input terminal corresponding to these calculated input values (RV, RVn), the input action that uses the input terminal has precedence over the other. An example of data setting for the calculated input value (RV) is shown below: Data setting CALCU OUT Data setting for RV is invalid when the IN terminal is connected. CALCU IN

RV

Data reference connection or cascade input terminal connection C020106E.ai

Figure Data Setting for Calculated Input Value (RV)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-7

n I/O Connection Information for Data Connection ▼ Input Connection Information, Output Connection, Set Value Input Connection Information

Specify the I/O connection information to the I/O terminal of the function block as follows in order to perform data connection. Element symbol name.data item name • Element symbol name: A tag name, label name, element number or terminal number that identifies the connection destination. • Data item name: PV, RV, MV, etc. In data connection with a process I/O, a tag name, label name or terminal number is specified for the element symbol name, and PV is specified for the data item name. The terminal number is represented by the following symbols: %Znnusmm Terminal (01 to 32) Slot (1 to 4) Unit (1 to 5) Input module (fixed at 01) (*1) Node number (01 to 08) (*2) C020108E.ai

*1: *2:

Can only be used with SFCS or PFCS. Can only be used with LFCS2 or LFCS.

Figure

I/O Information Symbols : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS

%Znnusmm Terminal (01 to 64) (*1) Segment (1 to 4) (*2) Slot (1 to 8) Node number (01 to 10) (*3)(*4) C020111E.ai

*1: *2: *3: *4:

For fieldbus communication, terminal “mm” ranges between 01 to 48. For fieldbus communication, segment “s” ranges between 1 to 4. For process output “s” is fixed as 1. For Analog I/O (HART Compatible) modules, when “s” is set to 2, the terminal is used as a HART variable channel; when “s” is set to 1, the terminal is used as an analog input/output channel. If the database in KFCS2 is remote node expanded type, the range of node number becomes 01 to 15. The node for the I/O modules inserted in the slots of FCU is defined as a local node and the node number is 1. This is fixed and cannot be redefined. The extended node (either a local node or a remote node) should be numbered from 2.

Figure

I/O Information Symbols : KFCS2/KFCS

In data connection with software I/O, a tag name or element symbol number is specified for the element symbol name, and PV is specified for the data item name. In data connection with other function blocks, a tag name is specified for the element symbol name and a data item name that is the target of connection is specified for the data item name.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



SEE

ALSO

C2-8

For the element numbers, see the followings in C2.5, “I/O Connection Information”: “n Terminal Numbers, Element Numbers” For the data item names of each function block, see the description of corresponding function block in the following: D1, “Regulatory Control” D2, “Arithmetic Calculation, Logic Operation” D3, “Sequence Control” D4, “Faceplate Blocks”

TIP

The I/O terminal which performs input and output of character string data cannot be connected to a process I/O. The I/O terminals that perform input and output of the character string data are shown in the following: Table

I/O Terminals for Character Strings

Function block

Terminal

CALCU-C

Q04 to 07, J02, J03

DSW-16C

OUT

BDSET-1C/2C

J01 to J16

BDA-C

J01 to J16 C020109E.ai

n Data Reference with Respect to Dual-Redundant Input As indicated below, there are three methods of data reference with respect to dual-redundant input modules, depending on the type of input module.

l Dual-Redundant Analog Input : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS When reading data from dual-redundant analog input modules, a Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL) is used. Specify an input module for each of the connection destinations of the two input terminals (IN1, IN2) of the SS-DUAL block, respectively. An example of a dual-redundant input connection is illustrated below. Data reference Input module Input module

IN1 IN2

Data reference

SS-DUAL PV

IN

PID

Data reference C020110E.ai

Figure Dual-Redundant Input Connection : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-9

l Dual-Redundant Multi-Point Analog Input : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS To access the multi-point control analog input modules in dual-redundant configuration, the following settings are required. • On the IOM module property sheet, check the mark “Duplicate Next Card.” The setting is the same for either input modules or output modules. • For the function block input terminal, specify the terminal number of the module with slot number 1 of the two duplicate modules. The data reference method is the same as that for a non-dual-redundant module. Normally, the module with slot number 1 is the control side and the module with slot number 2 is the standby side. If the module on control side fails, the module that was on the standby side will take over the control. Function blocks will read data from the new control side module.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about multi-point control analog I/O module dual-redundant configuration, see the following: “n Dual-Multipoint Control Analog I/O : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS” in chapter A3.3.2, “Parameters for Multipoint Control Analog Input/Output”

l Dual-Redundant Multi-Point Analog Input : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS To access the multi-point analog input modules in dual-redundant configuration, the following settings are required. • On the IOM module property sheet, check the mark “Duplicate Next Card.” • For the function block input terminal, specify the terminal number of the module with the smaller slot number of the two duplicate modules. The data reference method is the same as that for a non-dual-redundant module. Normally, the module with the smaller slot number is the control side and the module with the larger slot number is the standby side. If the module on control side fails, the module that was on the standby side will take over the control. Function blocks will read data from the new control side module.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about multi-point analog I/O module dual-redundant configuration, see the following: “n Dual-FIO Analog Input/Output : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS” in chapter A3.4.1, “Parameters for FIO Analog Inputs/Outputs”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-10

l Dual-Redundant Contact Input When reading data from dual-redundant status input modules, it is necessary to perform the following operations. • On the IOM module property sheet, check the mark “Duplicate Next Card.” • For the function block input terminal, specify the terminal number of the module with the smaller slot number of the two duplicate modules. The method of setting data reference is the same as that for a non-dual-redundant module. Normally, the module with the smaller slot number is to be the control side and the module with the larger slot number is to be the standby side. If the module on control side faults, the module that was on the standby side will take over the control. Function blocks read data from the control side.

SEE

ALSO

• For more information about contact I/O module dual-redundant configuration in regarding to PFCS, LFCS 2, LFCS and SFCS, see the following: “n Dual-Relay, Contact Terminal, Contact Connector : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS” in chapter A3.3.4, “Parameters for Relay, Contact Terminal or Contact Connector” • For more information about contact I/O module dual-redundant configuration in regarding to KFCS2, KFCS and FFCS see the following: “n Dual-FIO Contact Input/Output : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS” in chapter A3.4.2, “Parameters for FIO Contact Inputs/Outputs”

n Data Setting with Respect to Dual-Redundant Output As indicated below, there are three methods of data setting with respect to dual-redundant output modules, depending on the type of output module.

l Dual-Redundant Analog Output : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS To write the same output value to dual-redundant analog output modules, the following operation is required: • Specify “Dual” for each terminal on the IOM definition builder. For redundancy, specify two successive output points (1-2, 3-4, ..., 15-16) to the output modules. • For output terminal of the function block, specify the output point with the younger number of the two output points. The method of setting data is the same as that for a non-dualredundant module.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-11

l Dual-Redundant Multi-Point Analog Output : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS To write data to the multi-point control analog output modules in dual-redundant configuration, the following settings are required. • On the IOM module property sheet, check the mark “Duplicate Next Card.” The setting is the same for either input modules or output modules. • For the function block input terminal, specify the terminal number of the module with slot number 1 of the two duplicate modules. The data reference method is the same as that for a non-dual-redundant module. Normally, the module with slot number 1 is the control side and the module with slot number 2 is the standby side. If the module on control side fails, the module that was on the standby side will take over the control. Function blocks will read data from the new control side module.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about multi-point control analog I/O module dual-redundant configuration, see the following: “n Dual-Multipoint Control Analog I/O : PFCS/LFCS/SFCS” in chapter A3.3.2, “Parameters for Multipoint Control Analog Input/Output”

l Dual-Redundant Multi-Point Analog Output : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS To write data to the multi-point analog output modules in dual-redundant configuration, the following settings are required. • On the IOM module property sheet, check the mark “Duplicate Next Card.” • For the function block input terminal, specify the terminal number of the module with the smaller slot number of the two duplicate modules. The data reference method is the same as that for a non-dual-redundant module. Normally, the module with the smaller slot number is the control side and the module with the larger slot number is the standby side. If the module on control side fails, the module that was on the standby side will take over the control. Function blocks will read data from the new control side module.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about multi-point analog I/O module dual-redundant configuration, see the following: “n Dual-FIO Analog Input/Output : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS” in chapter A3.4.1, “Parameters for FIO Analog Inputs/Outputs”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-12

l Dual-Redundant Contact Output When writing data to dual-redundant contact output modules, it is necessary to perform the following operations in order to write the same output value to the two output modules. • On the IOM module property sheet, check the mark “Duplicate Next Card.” • For output terminal of the function block, specify the terminal number of the module with the smaller slot number of the two duplicate modules. The method of setting data is the same as that for a non-dual-redundant module. Normally, the module with the smaller slot number is to be the control side and the module with the larger slot number to be on the standby side. If the module on control side faults, the module that was on the standby side will take over the control. Function blocks write data to the modules on both sides.

SEE

ALSO

• For more information about contact I/O module dual-redundant configuration in regarding to PFCS, LFCS2, LFCS and SFCS, see the following: “n Dual-Relay, Contact Terminal, Contact Connector : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS” in chapter A3.3.4, “Parameters for Relay, Contact Terminal or Contact Connector” • For more information about contact I/O module dual-redundant configuration in regarding to KFCS2, KFCS and FFCS see the following: “n Dual-FIO Contact Input/Output : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS” in chapter A3.4.2, “Parameters for FIO Contact Inputs/Outputs”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-13

C2.2 Terminal Connection Terminal connection is used when performing cascade control by connecting I/O terminal of a function block to that of another function block.

n Terminal Connection The terminal connection specifies the I/O terminal of a function block as the connection destination of the other function block’s I/O terminal. Data is exchanged between the I/O terminals of two function blocks in terminal connection. The connections between I/O terminals of function blocks are well applied to the cascade loops where the upper stream block’s output depends on the lower stream block’s status. The terminal connection is mainly used in the following instances:

l Connection Between Function Blocks The output terminal (OUT) of the upstream function block and the setting input terminal (SET) or input terminal (IN, INn) of the downstream function block are connected under the cascade control.

l Connection by Way of a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) Terminal connection must always be used as the I/O connection method at one or the other of the I/O terminals (input side or output side) of the SW-33 or SW-91 block. The other terminal uses the I/O connection method such as data reference, data setting or terminal connection that applies the case that SW-33 or SW-91 does not intervene.

n I/O Connection Information for Terminal Connection When the terminal connection with the I/O terminal of another function block is established, specify the I/O connection information to the I/O terminal of the function block as follows: Element symbol name.I/O terminal name • Element symbol name: A tag name identifies the connection destination. • I/O terminal name: IN, OUT, SET, etc. In terminal connection, I/O terminal of each other must be specified in the both of function blocks: connection source and connection destination. This is because data is exchanged with the I/O terminal of the function block of the connection destination.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-14

C2.2.1

Connection Between Function Blocks

This section explains the connection between the output terminal (OUT) of the upstream function block and the setting input terminal (SET) or input terminal (IN, INn) of the downstream function block under the cascade control.

n Terminal Connection between the Output Terminal (OUT) and Setting Input Terminal (SET) The following example shows connection between output terminal (OUT) of the upstream function block and the setting input terminal (SET) of the downstream function block under the cascade control. In this example, two I/O terminals are connected by the terminal connection. Terminal connection PID OUT SET PID CSV

C020201E.ai

Figure Terminal Connection between the Output Terminal and SET Terminal

In this example, data is sent from the output terminal (OUT) of the upstream function block by way of the setting input terminal (SET) of the downstream function block, then set as a cascade setting value (CSV) of the downstream function block at the end.

n Terminal Connection between the Output and Input Terminals The following example shows a connection between output terminal (OUT) of the upstream function block and the input terminal (IN, INn) of the downstream function block. In this example, two I/O terminals are connected by the terminal connection. Terminal connection PID

AS-H OUT

IN1

RV1

C020202E.ai

Figure Terminal Connection between the Output and Input Terminals

In this example, data is sent from the output terminal (OUT) of the upstream function block by way of the input terminal (IN1) of the downstream function block, then set as a calculated input value (RV1) of the downstream function block at the end.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-15

n Function Blocks and Their Target Terminals that Allow Terminal Connection The following table lists the function blocks that can be connected to the OUT terminal using a terminal connection and the I/O terminals for which terminal connections can be used. Table

List of Function Blocks which can be Connected by the Terminal Connection and Their Target Terminals Target terminal name

Corresponding input data

SET

CSV

IN

PV

SET

CSV

IN1

RV1

IN2

RV2

IN3

RV3

IN1

RV1

IN2

RV2

XCPL

IN

PV

SQRT EXP LAG INTEG LD LDLAG DLAY DLAY-C FUNC-VAR

IN

RV

Block type

Block model name

Regulatory control

PID PI-HLD PID-BSW ONOFF ONOFF-E ONOFF-G ONOFF-GE PID-TP PD-MR PI-BLEND PID-STC MILD-SW VELLIM FOUT SPLIT RATIO FFSUM SS-H/M/L AS-H/M/L

SS-DUAL

Calculation

C020203E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-16

C2.2.2

Connection by a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91)

This section explains the connections between I/O terminals of the function blocks by a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) as well as the connection to the process I/O or software I/O by the switch block. A terminal connection to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) of another control station or a sequence connection via the SW-33 or SW-91 block cannot be done.

n Connection Between Function Blocks by a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) A switch block (SW-33, SW-91) can be placed in the middle of the cascade control loop. In this case, the switch block and its upstream/downstream function blocks are connected by the terminal connection, respectively.

l Connection to a Setting Input Terminal (SET) by a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) The following example shows a connection between an output terminal (OUT) of the upstream function block and a setting input terminal (SET) of the downstream function block by a switch block (SW-33). Terminal connection

Terminal connection SW33

PID OUT

S11 S12 S13

S10 SET PID CSV

C020204E.ai

Figure Connection to a Setting Input Terminal (SET) by Way of a Switch Block (SW-33)

l Connection to an Input Terminal by a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) The following example shows a connection between an output terminal (OUT) of the upstream function block and an input terminal (IN) of the downstream function block by a switch block (SW-33). Terminal connection

Terminal connection SW33

PID OUT

S11 S12 S13

AS-H S10

IN1

RV1

C020205E.ai

Figure Connection to an Input Terminal by Way of a Switch Block (SW-33)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-17

n Connection to a Process I/O or Software I/O by a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) An I/O terminal of the function block and a process I/O or software I/O are connected by a switch block (SW-33, SW-91). In the SW-33, SW-91 block, however, there is no data item to be used for data connection from another function block. Therefore, the I/O terminal on the function block side is connected by the terminal connection and that on the process I/O or software I/O side is connected by data connection.

l Data Reference by a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) In order to input data from a process I/O by a switch block (SW-33, SW-91), one I/O terminal of the SW-33 or SW-91 block is connected by the terminal connection while the other is connected by data reference. The following example shows data reference by a SW-33 block. Data reference

Terminal connection SW33 S11 S12 S13

I/O module

PVI S10

IN

C020206E.ai

Figure Data Reference by a Switch Block (SW-33)

l Data Setting by a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) In order to output data to a process I/O by a switch block (SW-33, SW-91), one I/O terminal of the SW-33 or SW-91 block is connected by the terminal connection while the other is connected by data setting. The following example shows data setting by a SW-33 block. Terminal connection

Data setting SW-33

PID OUT

S11 S12 S13

S10

I/O module

C020207E.ai

Figure Data Setting by a Switch Block (SW-33)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-18

n Mixture of Terminal Connection and Data Connection In the SW-33 or SW-91 block, it is possible to mix two methods; reading data by the terminal connection and by data connection. These two methods can be switched depending on the situation. The following example shows a mixture of terminal connection and data connection by a SW-33 block. Terminal connection

Terminal connection SW-33

PID OUT

Input module

S11 S12 S13

AS-H S10

IN

RV1

Data reference C020208E.ai

Figure Mixture of Terminal Connection and Data Connection by a Switch Block (SW-33)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-19

C2.3 Sequence Connection Sequence connection is used when testing the conditions of input signals in the function block or manipulating the status of the elements at the output destination.

n Sequence Connection In this method, various elements that contain data are specified as the connection destination of the function block’s I/O terminal. It is necessary to specify the conditional expression to the input terminal in order to judge the data status, as well as data for manipulating the element status to the output terminal. The sequence connection is the I/O connection method used by sequence controls. In addition to the sequence control block, sequence connection can also be used in the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) of regulatory control blocks, the Logic Operation Blocks (*1) or the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) for arithmetic and logic operation functions. *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n Condition Testing and Status Manipulation In sequence connection, a process performed to read data from the connection destination is called “condition testing,” and a process performed to write data to the connection destination is called “status manipulation.” In sequence connection, data contained in the element is exchanged to test the condition, and data for status manipulation of the element is exchanged to manipulate the status, respectively, with the element (process I/O, software I/O, or other function blocks) specified as a connection destination.

l Condition Testing Condition testing is a sequence connection for reading data from the connection destination of the function block’s I/O terminal. In condition testing, the data at the connection destination is tested by the condition expression specified to the input terminal, and a logical value (true or false) which indicates established/unestablished of the condition expression is obtained. That is, the condition testing replaces the data read by the function block with a logical value that indicates the status of the connection destination.

l Status Manipulation Status manipulation is a sequence connection to output to the connection destination from the function block’s I/O terminal. In status manipulation, status manipulation of the connection destination specified to the output terminal is performed according to the result of logical operation (true or false) of the function block, then the connection destination status is modified.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-20

n I/O Connection Information for Sequence Connection In sequence connection, the I/O connection information is specified to the I/O terminal of the function block as follows. In the Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E), specify this information in the condition signal setting area and operation signal setting area. Element symbol name.data item name.condition specification Element symbol name.data item name.manipulation specification • Element symbol name: Tag name, label name, element number, or terminal number that identifies the connection destination • Data item name: Differs according to the type of connection destination

SEE

ALSO

For condition specification and manipulation specification, see the chapters from D3.2.10, “Condition Signal Description : Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data” through D3.2.15, “Action Signal Description : Status Manipulation for a Logic Chart from a Sequence Table.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-21

n Function Blocks that Allow Sequence Connections and Their Target Terminals The following table lists function blocks that allow sequence connections as well as their I/O terminals. Table

A List of Function Blocks and Their Target Terminals that Allow Sequence Connections Block type

Block model name

Regulatory control

Sequence control

Logical operation (*1)

General-purpose calculation

Target terminal name

PTC

OUT

ST16 ST16E

Q01 to Q56, J01 to J56 (*2)

LC64

Q01 to Q32, J01 to J32 (*2)

TM CTS CTP

OUT

VLVM

J01 to J17

AND OR

OUT, Q01, Q02

NOT

IN, OUT

SRS1-S SRS1-R

Q01, Q02, J01

SRS2-S SRS2-R

Q01, Q02, J01, J02

WOUT

OUT, Q01, Q02

OND OFFD TON TOFF

IN, OUT

GT GE EQ

OUT

CALCU

IN, OUT, Q01 to Q07, J01 to J03

CALCU-C

IN, OUT, Q01 to Q03, J01 C020301E.ai

*1: *2:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS. Input/output connection setting areas of sequence tables and logic chart block are equivalent to terminals.

Even if the function block has a terminal that allows sequence connections, it cannot be connected by the sequence connection via a switch block (SW-33, SW-91). A sequence connection (condition testing and status manipulation) cannot be set to the I/O terminals that perform input and output of character string data. I/O terminals which perform input and output of character string data are as follows: Table

I/O Terminal for Character String

Function block

Terminal

CALCU-C

Q04 to Q07, J02, J03

DSW-16C

OUT

BDSET-1C/2C

J01 to J16

BDA-C

J01 to J16 C020302E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-22

C2.4 Connection between Control Stations A data item or I/O terminal of the function block in another control station can be connected to the I/O terminal of the function block in the present control station.

n Connection between Control Stations The connection between control stations is an I/O connection method for establishing data connection or terminal connection between the function block of the present control station and that of another control station. The maximum I/O terminal connection points for each type of field control station (FCS) are as follows. • Field Control Station :

Maximum 160 points (*1)

• Field Control Station (Compact Type) :

Maximum 160 points (*2)

• Enhanced Field Control Unit (RIO) :

Maximum 512 points (*3)

• Field Control Unit (RIO) :

Maximum 512 points (*4) (*7)

• Enhanced Field Control Unit (FIO) :

Maximum 512 points (*5)

• Standard Field Control Station (FIO) :

Maximum 512 points (*6) (*7)

*1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6: *7:

The maximum number of points connectable to PFCS. If Batch Control database type is applied, this number becomes 64. The maximum number of points connectable to SFCS The maximum number of points connectable to LFCS2. The maximum number of points connectable to LFCS. The maximum number of points connectable to KFCS2 or FFCS. The maximum number of points connectable to KFCS. The maximum number of points connectable to KFCS or LFCS varies with the following database types. The maximum number of points for Unit control (without recipes) type is 128. The maximum number of points for Unit control (with recipes) type is 64. The maximum number of points for Unit control (with recipes and valve monitors) type is 64.

Even between the function blocks that belong to different control stations, the I/O connection can be achieved by a similar procedure to that for the connection between function blocks belong to the same control station. The following diagram shows an example of cascade control using the connection between control stations. Control bus FCS1

FCS2

Function block

ADL

Function block SET PID

PID IN

OUT

IN

OUT

Connection block between stations

C020401E.ai

Figure Connection between Control Stations (Example of the Cascade Control)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-23

n Cases when Connection between Control Stations is not Allowed The connection between control stations is not allowed under the following circumstances: • Sequence connection • Connection to a process I/O (except for the contact I/O) and word data of communication I/O. • Terminal connection to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) • Connection to an I/O terminal which corresponds to the faceplate block mode or status • Connection to an alarm input terminal of a Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) • Setting to character string data (The string data can be checked.) • FOUNDATION fieldbus Faceplate Block OUT terminal

n Data Connection with Other Control Stations The inter-station connection block (ADL) is automatically generated if the I/O connection information with respect to a function block of another control station is specified for the I/O terminal of the function block at the connection source by using the Function Block Detail Builder of Control Drawing Builder. Exchanging data with the function block of another control station is done via the ADL block. The setting items for the I/O connection information are the same as those within the same control station. The I/O operation and the function block processing remain synchronized because the function block within the same control station performs the processing continuously according to the defined execution order. On the other hand, I/O operations are performed asynchronous to the function block processing in the I/O connection between different control stations. Therefore, communications between control stations should be avoided in applications which require strict timings. FCS 1 Function block

Function block

FCS 2 Function block ADL

D1

IN

Function block

Function block Data setting

Data reference

OUT

ADL

D2

Inter-station connection block

D1: Data 1 D2: Data 2 C020402E.ai

Figure Connection between Control Stations (Data Connection)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-24

n Terminal Connection with Other Control Stations It is possible to establish a terminal connection with a function block belongs to another control station for the cascade control. The connection is possible even if the function block in the downstream of the cascade belongs to another control station. However, a select switch cannot be placed in the middle of the cascade connection. Inter-station connection block FCS 1

Function block

FCS 2

ADL

Function block

PID IN

SET

Terminal connection

PID OUT

IN

OUT

Terminal connection

C020403E.ai

Figure Connection Between Control Stations (Terminal Connection)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-25

C2.5 I/O Connection Information The I/O connection information is specified in order to identify the connection destination of the function block’s I/O terminal.

n I/O Connection Information This information is comprised of an element symbol name and data item name, indicating the connection destination of the I/O terminal such as a tag name, label name, element number, etc. The I/O connection information is added to the I/O terminal of the function block. In addition, in the case of sequence connection, condition testing or status manipulation is also added to the I/O connection information. The relationship between the connection methods and I/O connection information is as follows: Table

I/O Connection Information

Connection method

Data reference

I/O signal

I/O connection information (*1)

Process I/O

tag name/user defined label name/terminal number.data item name

Communication I/O (*2)

tag name/element number.data item name

Fieldbus I/O

tag name/user defined label name/terminal number.data item name

Software I/O

tag name/element number.data item name

Same control drawing Function block

tag name.data item name

Different control tag name.data item name drawing Different control tag name.data item name station

Data connection

Process I/O

tag name/user defined label name/terminal number.data item name

Communication I/O (*2)

tag name/element number.data item name

Fieldbus I/O

tag name/user defined label name/terminal number.data item name

Software I/O

tag name/element number.data item name

Same control drawing

Data setting Function block

tag name.data item name

Different control tag name.data item name drawing Different control tag name.data item name station Same control drawing

Terminal connection

Function block

tag name.I/O connection terminal name

Different control tag name.I/O connection terminal name drawing Different control tag name.I/O connection terminal name station

Sequence connection

Condition testing

Process I/O Communication I/O (*2) Software I/O Status manipulation Function block

tag name/user defined label name/terminal number/element number .data item name.condition specification tag name/user defined label name/terminal number/element number .data item name.operation specification C020501E.ai

*1: *2:

The description like A/B/... means the I/O information specification have multiple methods. However, some elements have exceptions that certain methods may not be applied. Access to the data acquired via communication with an external device using a communication module.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C2-26

On the function block detail builder, for the logical name of the I/O connection information with respect to the function blocks of different control stations, a (>) is added before tag name. However, when AREAOUT block is used on control drawing builder, (>) is not needed.

n Terminal Numbers, Element Numbers The following table shows terminal numbers and element numbers included in the I/O connection information. Table

List of Terminal Numbers and Element Numbers (1/2) Name

Symbol

%Znnusmm (*1)

%Znnusmm (*2)

nn: (fixed at 01) (*3) nn: Node number (01 to 08) (*4) u: unit (1 to 5) s: slot (1 to 4) mm: terminal (01 to 32)

%WWnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 4000) (*8)

%WBnnnnbb

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 4000) (*8) bb : bit number (01 to 16)

%Znnusmm (*1)

nn: Node number (01 to 10) (*6) (*7) u: slot (1 to 8) s: segment (1 to 4) mm: terminal (01 to 48)

%Znnusmm (*2)

nn: (fixed at 01) (*3) nn: Node number (01 to 08) (*4) u: unit (1 to 5) s: slot (1 to 2) mm: terminal (01 to 32)

Process I/O

Word data Communication I/O (*5) Bit data

Symbol syntax nn: Node number (01 to 10) (*6) (*7) u: slot (1 to 8) s: 1 is fixed in Process I/O In case of HART compatible modules, analog input/output: s=1; HART variable: s=2. mm: terminal (01 to 64)

Fieldbus I/O

C020503E.ai

*1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6: *7: *8:

A symbol for KFCS2, KFCS or FFCS A symbol for PFCS, LFCS2, LFCS or SFCS Can only be used for PFCS or SFCS. Can only be used for LFCS2 or LFCS. With communication I/O, the same I/O points can be accessed as word data (%WW) or bit data (%WB). If the database in KFCS2 is remote node expanded type, the range of node number becomes 01 to 15. The node for the I/O modules inserted in the slots of FCU is defined as a local node and the node number is 1. This is fixed and cannot be redefined. The extended node (either a local node or a remote node) should be numbered from 2. For PFCS standard type, it is 0001 - 1000.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Table

List of Terminal Numbers and Element Numbers (2/2) Name

Symbol

Symbol syntax

Common switch

%SWnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 4000) (except PFCS) (0001 to 1000) (for PFCS)

Global switch (*1)

%GSnnnmm

nnn: Serial no. (001 to 256) (*2) mm: station number (01 to 64)

%ANnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 0200) (for PFCS) (0001 to 0500) (for KFCS, LFCS or SFCS) (0001 to 1000) (for KFCS2, LFCS2 or FFCS)

Printout message (with data)

%PRnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 0100) (for PFCS) (0001 to 0200) (for SFCS) (0001 to 0400) (for KFCS or LFCS) (0001 to 1000) (for KFCS2, LFCS2 or FFCS)

Operation guide message

%OGnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 0100) (for PFCS) (0001 to 0200) (for KFCS, LFCS or SFCS) (0001 to 0500) (for KFCS2, LFCS2 or FFCS)

Multimedia start message

%VMnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 0100)

Sequence message request

%RQnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 0100) (for PFCS) (0001 to 0200) (except PFCS)

Supervisory computer event message

%CPnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 9999)

Supervisory computer message output for PICOT

%M3nnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 9999)

%EVnnnn

nnnn: Serial no. (0001 to 0100) (for PFCS) (0001 to 0200) (for KFCS, LFCS or SFCS) (0001 to 0500) (for KFCS2, LFCS2 or FFCS)

Annunciator message

Software I/O

C2-27

Signal event message

C020504E.ai

*1: *2:

TIP

The global switches are applicable in all FCSs except standard type PFCS. For ProSafe-RS SCS, the range of serial number “nnn” becomes 001 to 128.

Same as for KFCS2/KFCS, the data of function blocks can be interactively accessed between FFCS and APCS (Advanced Process Control Station), as well as FFCS and GSGW (General-Purpose Subsystem Communication Gateway). However, for CENTUM VP entry class, APCS is not available.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page



C3-1

C3. Input Processing The function blocks are provided with various types of input processing methods to convert the input signals for the control calculation and arithmetic calculation. In this chapter the input processing methods common to all function blocks are explained.

n Input Processing Input processing is a general term used for processing for the input signal read from the connection destination of an input terminal, executed by the function block before the calculation processing. There are various forms of input processing corresponding to the function block type and the input signal format. The Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks have the common types of input processing, and some function blocks have the particular types of input processing.

SEE

ALSO

• The input processing for the Sequence Tables is unique and differs from that of the Regulatory Control Blocks or Calculation Blocks. For the Sequence Tables input processing, see the following: D3.2.4, “Input Processing of Sequence Table” • For details on input processing of the function blocks with sequence connection, see the following: D3.3.4, “Input Processing of Logic Chart”

n Input Processing Common to All Regulatory Control Blocks The Regulatory Control Blocks have the input signals processed as shown in the figure below. After the processing, the signal becomes process variable (PV). Input Signal Conversion CAL Input Module

No Conversion Analog Input Square Root Extraction Pulse Input Conversion

PV Overshoot

BAD

CAL PV

Digital Filter

BAD

CAL Integration

Communication Input Conversion

SUM

C030001E.ai

Figure Block Chart of Input Processing Common to All Regulatory Control Blocks

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-2

n Input Processing Common to Calculation Blocks The Calculation Blocks have the input signals processed as shown in the figure below. The calculated input value (RV), calculated output value (CPV) or integrator value (SUM) are obtained after the input processing. Q01

Qn

IN

BAD1

BADn

No Conversion

RV1 CPV Overshoot RVn

RV

Analog Input Square Root Extraction

Calculation Processing CAL

BAD BAD Digital Filter

Pulse Input Conversion

CPV

CAL

Communication Input Conversion

Integration

Input Signal Conversion

SUM

C030002E.ai

Figure Block Chart of Input Processing Common to Calculation Blocks

n Input Processing Common to Logic Operation Blocks The Logic Operation Blocks (*1) have the input signals processed as shown in the figure below. The calculated input value (RV) and calculated output value (CPV) are obtained after the input processing. *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

RV1

Q01

Qn

No Conversion

RVn

RV

IN Input Signal Conversion

Calculation Processing CAL CPV

C030003E.ai

Figure Block Chart of Input Processing Common to Logic Operation Blocks

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-3

n Outline of Input Processing Common to Regulatory Control Block and Calculation Block The outline of each type of input processing common to Regulatory Control Blocks and to Calculation Blocks is explained below.

l Input Signal Conversion The input signal read from the input module or other function blocks is converted to process variable (PV) or calculated input value (RV) according to the signal type.

l Digital Filter This digital filter executes the first-order lag processing. Input signal noise can be reduced through digital filtering process in which input signal is filtered for the Regulatory Control Blocks while value after calculation processing is filtered for the Calculation Blocks.

l Integration The data item (SUM) is set to the integrator value. Input signal is used for the Regulatory Control Blocks while value after calculation processing is used for the Calculation Blocks are used.

l PV/FV/CPV Scale out If the data status of input signal is invalid (BAD), the process variable (PV), feedback input value (FV) or calculated output value (CPV) is coincided with the scale high limit (SH) or scale low limit (SL) depending on the cause of invalidity (BAD).

l Calibration For maintenance or test purposes, the process variable (PV) or calculated output value (CPV) can be set manually by using the operation and monitoring function.

n Input Processing During Abnormal Status The input processing during abnormal status is different from when it is normal. It is also different between Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks.

n Input Processing for Sequence Connection For Logic Operation Blocks (*1) and General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C), the terminal connection may be used to link the sequence. When the terminal connection is a sequence connection, the input is processed with “condition test.” *1:

SEE

ALSO

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

For more information about input processing for sequence connection, see the following: C3.7, “Input Processing for Sequence Connection”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-4

n Input Processing in Different Function Blocks The input processing supported in function blocks vary with types of function blocks.

SEE

ALSO

• For more information about the input processing in regulatory control blocks, see the following: “n Input Processing Possible in Each Regulatory Control Block” in chapter D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For more information about the input processing in calculation blocks, see the following: “n Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block” in chapter D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-5

C3.1 Input Signal Conversion The input signal conversion is the function that converts the input signal read from the input module or other function blocks into process variable (PV) or calculated input value (RV) according to the signal type.

n Type of Input Signal Conversion ▼ Input Signal Conversion

There are five kinds of common input signal conversion for the Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks. In addition, there are input signal conversion methods specific to particular function blocks. The input signal conversion type can be set on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Input Signal Conversion Type: Select from “No Conversion,” “Square Root,” “Pulse-train,” “Control Priority Type Pulse Train Input,” “Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input” and “Communications.” The default setting is “No Conversion.”

l Input Signal Conversion Common to Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks • No Conversion • Square Root • Pulse-train/ Control Priority Type Pulse Train Input/ Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input • Communications Input signal conversion is performed only when the signal input through the input terminal is the data connection type, one of the I/O connection types. And only the signal transmitted via IN terminal (main input signal) may be converted. Furthermore, the conversion behaves differently according to the signals connected to the IN terminal.

l Input Signal Conversion of Logic Operation Blocks • Bitwise Logic Operation Blocks, Logic Operation Blocks other than Relational Operation Blocks (*1) • Bitwise Logic Operation Blocks (*1) • Relational Operation Blocks (*1) *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-6

l Input Signal Conversion of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) • Feedback Input Signal Conversion • Answerback Input Signal Conversion • Feedback Input to Answerback Input Conversion

SEE

ALSO

For details on Input Signal Conversion of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E), see the following: D1.17.1, “Input Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)”

l Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) • Weight Measurement Conversion • SUM Conversion • ∆SUM Conversion

SEE

ALSO

For details on Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3), see the following: D1.22.1, “Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)”

l Input Signal Conversion of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) • Input Signal Conversion for PTC Block

SEE

ALSO

For details on Input Signal Conversion of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC), see the following: “n Input Signal Conversion of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)” in chapter D1.32, “Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-7

C3.1.1

Input Signal Conversions Common to Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks

Input signal conversions common to the Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks include “No Conversion,” “Square Root,” “Pulse-train,” “Control Priority Type Pulse Train Input,” “Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input,” “Communications,” and “PV limit.” The following section describes the conversion methods common to Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks.

n No Conversion “No Conversion” is selected if the input connection destination is neither the pulse-train input module nor communication module and the square root extraction of input signal is not needed. Also, specify “No Conversion” when the input signal is data referenced from another function block. When “No Conversion” is selected, the input signal conversion is not performed. However, the raw data (0 to 100 % data) read from analog input modules (except those from thermocouple or RTD modules) to the IN terminal are converted into the form of specified engineering unit and scale high/low limits (SH, SL) for the process variable (PV). The raw data read from the thermocouples and resistance temperature detectors to the IN terminal are not converted. The data read from analog input modules to the input terminals other than the IN terminal are not converted either. The table below lists the input range between each input module and the raw data. Table

Input Range of Input Module and Raw Data : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS

IOM Model

Input Type

Input Range

Raw Data

Electric Current Input

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 %

Voltage Input

1 to 5 V

0 to 100 %

Electric Current Input

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 %

Voltage Input

1 to 5 V

0 to 100 %

mV Input

Definable between -50 and 150 mV

0 to 100 %

Thermocouple Input Measuring Range of Corresponding

Measuring Range of the Thermocouple

Measured Temperature

Resistance Temperature Detector Input

Measuring Range of the RTD

Measured Temperature

Potentiometer Input

Definable between 0 and 30000 ohm 0 to 100 %

AMC80

Voltage Input

1 to 5 V

0 to 100 %

AMM12T

Voltage Input

1 to 5 V

0 to 100 %

AMM22M

mV Input

Definable between -100 and 100 mV

0 to 100 %

AMM22T

Thermocouple Input

Measuring Range of the Thermocouple

Measured Temperature

AMM32T

Resistance Temperature Detector Input

Measuring Range of the RTD

Measured Temperature

AMM42T

Electric Current Input

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 %

AAM10 AAM11

AAM21

C030101E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-8

Table

Input Range and Raw Data of Input Modules (1/3) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS

Type

IOM Model Terminal No.

I/O Type

Input Range

Raw Data

16-Channel Current Input; Non-Isolated

AAI141-S

1 to 16

Current Input

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 %

16-Channel Current Input; Isolated

AAI143-S

1 to 16

Current Input

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 %

8-Channel Current Input; Isolated

ASI133-S

1 to 8

Current Input

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 %

8-Channel Current Input; Isolated

AAI135-S

1 to 8

Current Input

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 %

16-Channel Voltage Input; Non-Isolated

AAV141-S 1 to 16

Voltage Input

1 to 5 V

0 to 100 %

16-Channel Voltage Input; Non-Isolated

AAV142-S 1 to 16

Voltage Input

Definable within -10 to 10 V

0 to 100 %

16-Channel Voltage Input; isolated

AAV144-S 1 to 16

Voltage Input

1 to 5 V

0 to 100 %

16-Channel Voltage Input (-10 to 10 V); isolated

AAV144-S 1 to 16

Voltage Input

Definable within -10 to 10 V

0 to 100 %

Thermocouple Input

Rated range

Measured Temperature

mV Input (%)

Definable within -100 to 150 mV

0 to 100 %

TC input (V)

-20 to 80 mV

Engineering Unit (V)

RTD Input

Rated range

Measured Temperature

16-Channel Thermocouple/ AAT141-S 1 to 16 mV Input; Isolated

12-Channel Thermocouple AAR181-S 12 Input; Isolated

16-Channel Thermocouple/ AAT145-S 1 to 16 mV Input; Isolated

15-Channel Thermocouple Input; Isolated AAT145-S 1 to 15 (*1) (MX Compatible)

16-Channel RTD/ Potentiometer Input; Isolated

AAR145-S 1 to 16

16-Channel Thermocouple/ AST143-S 1 to 16 mV Input; Isolated

Type

IOM Model Terminal No.

RTD Input (ohm) 0 to 400 ohm

Engineering Unit (ohm)

Thermocouple Input

Rated range

Measured Temperature

mV Input (%)

Definable within -100 to 150 mV

0 to 100 %

TC input (V)

-20 to 80 mV

Engineering Unit (V)

Thermocouple Input

Rated range

Measured Temperature

TC input (V)

-20 to 80 mV

Engineering Unit (V)

RTD Input

Rated range

Measured Temperature

Potentiometer Input

Definable within 0 to 10Kohms

0 to 100 %

RTD Input (ohm) 0 to 400 ohm

Engineering Unit (ohm)

Thermocouple Input

Rated range

Measured Temperature

mV Input (%)

Definable within -100 to 150 mV

0 to 100 %

TC input (V)

-50 to 75 mV

Engineering Unit (V)

I/O Type

Input Range

Raw Data C030111E.ai

*1:

The 16th channel of AAT 145 is used as cold junction compensation terminal, so that only 15 channels of the temperature signals from the field can be connected.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



Table

Input Range and Raw Data of Input Modules (2/3) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS

Type

8-Channel RTD/Potentiometer Input; Isolated

8-Channel Pulse Input

IOM Model Terminal No.

ASR133-S 1 to 8

I/O Type

Input Range Rated range

Measured Temperature

Potentiometer Input

Definable within 0 to 10 kohm

0 to 100 %

Number of Number of pulse 0 to 65535; pulse (with Time stamp (1ms) time stamp)

Pulse Input

Number of Number of pulse 0 to 65535; pulse Time stamp (1ms) (with time stamp)

1 to 8

Current Input

4 to 20 mA

9 to 16

(Current Output)

1 to 8

Voltage Input

9 to 16

(Current Output)

AAP149-S 1 to 16

8-Channel Current Input and 8-Channel Current Output; Non-isolated

AAI841-S

8-Channel Voltage Input and 8-Channel Current Output; Non-isolated

AAB841-S

AAB841-S

4-Channel Current Input and 4-Channel Current Output; Isolated

AAI835-S

8-Channel Pulse Input 8-Channel Current Output (PAC Compatible)

AAP849-S

16-Channel Current Input; HART (*2)

AAI141-H

8-Channel Current Input; AAI135-H Isolate channels; HART (*2) 16-Channel Current Input; Isolated; HART (*2)

AAI143-H

8-Channel Current Input; Isolated; HART (*2)

ASI133-H

Engineering Unit (V)

Pulse Input

AAP135-S 1to 8

8-Channel Voltage Input and 8-Channel Current Output; Non-isolated (MAC2 Terminal Arrangement)

Raw Data

RTD Input

Choose from 0 to 650, RTD Input (ohm) 0 to 1300, 0 to 2600, 0 to 5200

16-Channel Pulse Input (PM1 Compatible)

Type

C3-9

1,3,5.. 15 Voltage Input Odd numbers

– 1 to 5 V

Current Input

5 to 8

(Current Output)

1,3,5.. 15 Pulse Input Odd numbers

– 1 to 5 V

Current Input

1 to 32

HART Variable

1 to 8

Current Input

1 to 32

HART Variable

1 to 16

Current Input

1 to 32

HART Variable

1 to 8

Current Input

1 to 32

HART Variable

IOM Model Terminal No.

I/O Type

– 0 to 100 %

– 4 to 20 mA

– 0 to 100 %

–

–

Number of Number of pulse 0 to 65535; pulse (with Time stamp (1ms) time stamp)

2,4,6.. 16 (Current Output) Even numbers 1 to 16

– 0 to 100 %

2,4,6.. 16 (Current Output) Even numbers 1 to 4

0 to 100 %

– 4 to 20 mA

– 0 to 100 % Engineering Unit

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 % Engineering Unit

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 % Engineering Unit

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 % Engineering Unit

Input Range

Raw Data C030112E.ai

*2:

On IOM Builder for Analog Input and Output (HART Compatible) modules, terminal number is indicated as %Znnusmm. When “s” is 1, the terminal is used as an analog input or output (Current Input/Current Output) channel. When “s” is 2, the terminal is used as a HART variable channel.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-10

Table

Input Range and Raw Data of Input Modules (3/3) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS

Type

IOM Model Terminal No.

8-Channel Current Input; 8-Channel Current Output; AAI841-H HART (*2)

4-Channel Current Input; 4-Channel Current Output; AAI835-H HART (*2)

I/O Type

1 to 8

Current Input

9 to 16

(Current Output)

1 to 32

HART Variable

1 to 4

Current Input

5 to 8

(Current Output)

1 to 32

HART Variable

Input Range 4 to 20 mA

Raw Data 0 to 100 %

–

– Engineering Unit

4 to 20 mA

0 to 100 % – –

– Engineering Unit C030113E.ai

*2:

On IOM Builder for Analog Input and Output (HART Compatible) modules, terminal number is indicated as %Znnusmm. When “s” is 1, the terminal is used as an analog input or output (Current Input/Current Output) channel. When “s” is 2, the terminal is used as a HART variable channel.

If the input terminal connected to the process I/O is not IN terminal, the data is not converted into engineering unit format, and the range of input signal is fixed to the raw data range shown in the above table. The terminals of the function blocks that do not convert input data into engineering unit format are listed in the table below. Table

Terminals of Function Blocks that do not Convert Data into Engineering Unit Format

Terminal

Function Block

BIN/TIN

PID, PI-HLD, PID-BSW, ONOFF, ONOFF-E, ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE, PID-TP, PD-MR, PI-BLEND, MLD, MLD-PVI, MLD-SW, RATIO, FFSUM, XCPL

Q1 to Q8

ADD, MUL, DIV, AVE, TPCFL (Temperature, Pressure), ASTM1(Temperature), ASTM2 (Temperature), CALCU C030102E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-11

n Analog Input Square Root Extraction The square root extraction of analog input signal can be performed in the function block. For example, if a differential pressure type flow meter is used, the square root extraction is normally executed in order to convert the analog input signal that indicates differential pressure (differential pressure signal) into the signal that indicates flow (flow signal). Shown below is the image of analog input square root extraction. Calculated Output PV Scale High Limit

Lcut 0.0 Enlarged View

PV Scale Low Limit

0.0

100.0 (%)

Raw Input Data

Lcut: Square Root Low-Input Cutoff Value (%) C030103E.ai

Figure Analog Input Square Root Extraction

Set a square root calculation low-input cut value when performing an analog input square root calculation. This function changes the value after square root calculation to 0 when the input signal is below the low-input cut value. The setup for square root calculation low-input cut value can be executed on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Square root calculation low-input cut value: Set at 0.0 to 100.0 %. The default setting is 0.5 %. Note that the square root calculation low-input cut value can be set only when “Square Root” is selected as the input signal conversion type.

l Regarding to Square Root Extraction in I/O Module : PFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS Square root calculation can be performed in the AAM11 type current/voltage input module. Do not select “Square Root” conversion for the function blocks connected to the AAM11 current/ voltage input modules where the square root conversion is already defined on the IOM Builder. Since AMC80 multi-point control analog I/O module and AAM10 current/voltage input module are not provided with square root extraction function, “Square Root” conversion need to be specified in the function blocks connected to the modules if the square root extraction is required.

l Regarding to Square Root Extraction in I/O Module : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS The I/O modules for KFCS2, KFCS and FFCS do not have Square Root Extraction function. If square root extraction is required, the conversion can be performed in the function block connected to the I/O module by selecting “Square Root” as the input signal conversion on Function Block Builder.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-12

n Pulse-Train Input Conversion A process variable (PV) is calculated based on the integrated pulse count value (P) read from the pulse-train input module and its measurement time (t). The pulse-train input processing calculates PV engineering unit data using the integrated pulse count value (P) stored in sequence in the pulse input buffer and its measurement time (t). Pulse train input conversion is provided with the following three methods • Control priority type pulse train input conversion (PULSE) The accurate measured process variable (PV) and the calculated input value (RV) may be obtained. • Exact totalization pulse train input conversion (QTPUL) The accurate integrator value (SUM) may be obtained. • Pulse train input conversion (BTHPUL) Both conversion methods, i.e., control priority type pulse train input conversion and exact totalization pulse train input conversion are applied. The accurate measured process variables (PV) and the calculated input values (RV) are obtained by control priority type pulse train input conversion while the accurate integrator value (SUM) is obtained by exact totalization pulse train input conversion. When applying the pulse train input conversion (BTHPUL) to the following function blocks, it only functions to obtain the calculated input values (RV) same as obtained by control priority type pulse train input conversion. ADD, MUL, DIV, SQRT, EXP, LAG, INTEG, LD, RAMP, LDLAG, DLAY, DLAY-C, AVE-M, AVE-C, FUNC-VAR, TPCFL, ASTM1, ASTM2 It is required to specify the conversion method to exact totalization pulse train input conversion (QTPUL) when the converted process variable (PV) or calculated output value (CPV) are used by other function blocks for totalization. Otherwise, the totalized value may result deviation. However, the pulse rate and size of pulse-train input buffer are the same for all the tree methods of pulse conversion.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-13

l Control Priority Type Pulse-Train Input Conversion Shown below is the block chart of the pulse-train input conversion processing. +

/

•

Scale

PV

-

P[0]

P, t

t[0]

Pulse Input Buffer P[1]

P[2]

......

P[N]

t[1]

t[2]

......

t[N]

1/Prate

Pulse Input Module

+

C030104E.ai

Figure Block Chart of Pulse-Train Input Conversion Processing

The following is the computational expression for the pulse train input conversion: PV=

P[0]-P[N] 1 • • (SH-SL)+SL t[0]-t[N] Prate PV P[0] P[N] t[0] t[N] Prate SH SL N

: : : : : : : : :

C030105E.ai

process variable (engineering unit) current integrated pulse count value integrated pulse count value before N scan period current integrated pulse count value measurement time integrated pulse count value measurement time before N scan period pulse rate (Hz) PV scale high limit PV scale low limit (measurement value when input pulse frequency is 0 Hz) size of pulse input buffer

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-14

l Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input Conversion Shown below is the block chart of the exact totalization pulse train input conversion processing. +

/

•

Scale

PV

-

P[0]

P, t

t[0]

Pulse Input Buffer P[1]

P[2]

......

P[N]

t[1]

t[2]

......

t[N]

1/Prate

Pulse Input Module

+

C030106E.ai

Figure Block Chart of Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input Conversion Processing

The following is the computational expression for the exact totalization pulse train input conversion: PV=

P[0]-P[N] 1 • • (SH-SL)+SL N•Ts Prate PV P[0] P[N] Prate SH SL N Ts

: : : : : : : :

C030107E.ai

process variable (engineering unit) current integrated pulse count value integrated pulse count value before N scan period pulse rate (Hz) PV scale high limit PV scale low limit (measurement value when input pulse frequency is 0 Hz) size of pulse input buffer scan period

With exact totalization pulse train input conversion, the process value (PV) may not stabilize and oscillate during operation, particularly during high-speed scan periods. In this situation, the oscillation of the process value (PV) can be minimized by enlarge the size of input buffer.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-15

l Pulse Rate (Prate) Pulse rate refers to the input frequency measured when the process variable reaches the scale high limit. It is indicated in the unit of Hz. The setup for pulse rate can be executed on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Pulse Rate: Set a value within the range between 0.10 and 10000.00 Hz. The default value is 1 Hz. The following is the computational expression for pulse rate: Prate = (SH-SL) • (pulse conversion factor) An example of pulse rate calculation is as follows: If the range between process variable is 0 to 2 kℓ/min and the pulse conversion factor for the flow meter is 2.54 pulse/ℓ, the range between process variables is converted into the time unit (sec.) used for pulse rate as follows. SL=0 SH=2 (kℓ/min)= 2 (kℓ/sec) 60

C030108E.ai

The pulse conversion factor is converted into the flow unit (kℓ) used for process variables. Pulse conversion factor = 2.54 pulse/ℓ = 2.54 • 1000 pulse/kℓ The pulse rate is then calculated by assigning the range between process variable and the pulse conversion factor to the pulse rate computational expression. 2 •2.54•1000=84.67 (Hz) Prate= 60

C030109E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-16

l Pulse Train Input Buffer (N) ▼ Number of Input Buffers

If the pulse rate (input pulse frequency) is low, the instantaneous process variable obtained based on the integrated pulse count values in a short interval will have a large error. In the exact totalization pulse train input conversion, the size of pulse train input buffer (N) is automatically determined so that a suitable value can be obtained for the sample cycle (t[0] - t[N]) according to the pulse rate. The table below lists the relation between the pulse rate and the size of pulse train input buffer (N) when “Auto” is selected for the pulse train input buffer (N). Table

Pulse Rate and Size of Pulse Train Input Buffer

Pulse Rate (Prate)

Size of Pulse Input Buffer (N)

Prate≤10 Hz

10

10 Hz input high limit detection set value + hysteresis value The input high-limit detection set value and the input low-limit detection set value can also be changed on the Function Block Detail Builder. They may be set between -25.0 and 125.0 %. The default settings are 106.25 % for the input high-limit detection set value and -6.25 % for the input low-limit detection set value. The hysteresis value is the same value used for PV high/low-limit alarm (HI, LO).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-18

n PV Range Limit: KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 ▼ PV Range Limit

The measure value (PV), feedback value (FV) and calculation value (RV) are limited by the high limit of the scale (SH) and the low limit of the scale (SL). If a value is greater than SH, the SH value will be used; while if a value is smaller than SL, the SL value will be used.

TIP

In CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL, the PV/FV/RV are always be limited in the range of SH and SL. For keeping the system consistency, the PV Range Limit may be applied.

PV Range Limit can be applied to the signal of IN terminal (the main input terminal). For the motor controller blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, MC-3E), the PV Range Limit can only be applied to the signal from FB (feedback) terminal. For dual-redundant signal selector block, the PV Range Limit can be applied to the signals from either RV1 or RV2 terminal. If PV/FV/RV values are forced from other blocks or HIS, the PV/FV/RV will not be limited. PV Range Limit is executed periodically. When online changing SH/SL or PV Range Limit settings. The changed settings will not become valid right after changing but become valid at the scan timing of the function block. For the calculation blocks, PV Range Limit can only be applied to the general-purpose calculation blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) or the data set block with input indicator (DSET-PVI).

IMPORTANT • For the general-purpose calculation blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C), when PV Range Limit is applied, the calculation input will be limited by the SH and SL of the calculation output (CPV). • When the Input Signal Conversion is changed to Communication Input, the PV Range Limit will not function. • When PV Range Limit is applied, the digital filter and totalization calculation will be based on the limited input signals. However, for the pulse inputs of [Exact totalization pulse train input conversion (QTPUL)] and [pulse train input conversion (BTHPUL)], the signals before PV Range Limit will be used.

PV Range Limit can be set on function block detailed builder. • PV Range Limit: Yes/No Default: No

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3.1.2

C3-19

Input Signal Conversion for Logic Operation Blocks

Input Signal Conversion for Logic Operation Block (*1) includes 3 types, they are “Convert to Integer”, “No Conversion (in Hex.)” and “No Conversion.” *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n Input Signal Conversion for Logic Operation Blocks (except for Bitwise Logic Operation Blocks and Relational Operation Blocks) “Convert to Integer” is fixed for this type of blocks. The input data from the input connection terminal is converted to calculated input value (RV). If the connection of blocks are reference type, the referred data is converted to the integer and the first digit after decimal point is round off.

n Input Signal Conversion for Bitwise Logic Operation Blocks “No Conversion (in Hex.)” is fixed for this type of blocks. Only a certain types of data are allowed to be connected to the input terminals or to be connected via reference connection. The input processing and the integration functions are not provided. For the data in the connected destination function blocks, only data reference connection type may be applied. Input signal:

Binary string (Integer)

Calculated Input Value (RV) is displayed in hexadecimal in 8 digits.

n Input Signal Conversion for Relational Operation Blocks “No Conversion” is fixed for this type of blocks. Only a certain types of data are allowed to connected to the input terminals or for the reference connection. The input processing and the integration functions are not provided. For the data in the connected destination function blocks, only data reference connection type may be applied.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-20

C3.2 Digital Filter The digital filter is a function to remove the noises from process input signals.

n Digital Filter ▼ Input Signal Filtering

The digital filter is a function in which the input signal is processed by the first-order lag filter in order to reduce input signal noise.

l Digital Filter for Regulatory Control Block In the Regulatory Control Blocks, the filtering process is executed for input signal (main input signal) read from the IN terminal only, following input signal conversion.

l Digital Filter for Calculation Block In the Calculation Blocks, the digital filter processing is executed for the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) and the Data Set Block with Input Indicator Block (DSETPVI) only. Each block uses a different filtering method. • In the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks, the digital filter processing is executed following calculation processing. • In the Data Set Block with Input Indicator Block, the filtering process is executed for input signal (main input signal) read from the IN terminal only, following input signal conversion.

n Computational Expression for Digital Filter The following is the computational expression for the digital filter: Yn=(1-a) • X +a • Yn-1 a X Yn Yn-1

: : : :

Filter coefficient Input value Current filtering data Previous filtering data

Shown below is the step response of digital filtering process. 100 %

Output (Yn)

Input (X)

α=0.5

Timing lag between input and calculation Calculation interval 0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Time (sec) C030201E.ai

Figure Step Response of Digital Filtering Process

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-21

l Digital Filter Coefficient ▼ Digital Filter Coefficient 1 to 3

There are three kinds of digital filter coefficients. These digital filter coefficients are set by the FCS Constants Builder for each FCS. • Digital Filter Coefficient 1: 0 to 1.00 (0.01 unit) • Digital Filter Coefficient 2: 0 to 1.00 (0.01 unit) • Digital Filter Coefficient 3: 0 to 1.00 (0.001 unit) The defaults for these digital filter coefficients are set to the values indicated below. • Digital Filter Coefficient 1: 0.5 (When the digital filter coefficient is 0.5 and scan period is 1 second, the time constant is 1 second) • Digital Filter Coefficient 2: 0.75 (When the digital filter coefficient is 0.75 and scan period is 1 second, the time constant is 3 seconds) • Digital Filter Coefficient 3: 0.875 (When the digital filter coefficient is 0.875 and scan period is 1 second, the time constant is 7 seconds) When high-speed scan is used, the time constant changes in accordance with the scan period. Since the scan period is getting shorter at high-speed scan rate, the time constant is getting smaller accordingly. For input indicator blocks (PVI), input indicator blocks with deviation alarm (PVI-DV), generalpurpose calculation blocks (CALCU), general-purpose calculation blocks with string I/O (CALCUC), if scan coefficient is specified as 2 or greater on the Function Block Detail Builder, the digital filtering coefficient should be multiplied by the specified scan coefficient.

n Input Filter Specification ▼ Input Signal Filtering

The digital filter may be defined for each function block in “Input Signal Filtering” on the Function Block Detail Builder. Input Signal Filtering:

“None,” “Auto,” “1,” “2” and “3.” The default setting is “Auto.”

Given below are the actions performed for each type of the input signal filtering. • Auto If the IN terminal is connected to I/O module including communication module, “Digital Filter Coefficient 1” is used. If the IN terminal is connected to neither communication module nor I/O module, no filtering process is performed. • None No filtering process is performed. • 1 Digital Filter Coefficient 1 is used. • 2 Digital Filter Coefficient 2 is used. • 3 Digital Filter Coefficient 3 is used.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-22

C3.3 Integration Integration refers to the function in which the input signal or the value after calculation processing is integrated.

n Integration The integration processing for each of the function blocks is indicated below.

l Integration for Regulatory Control Block In the Regulatory Control Blocks, the integration process is executed for input signal (main input signal) read from the IN terminal only, following input signal conversion. The integration process in BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 is different from other regulatory control blocks.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about integration process in BSETU-2 and BSETU-3, see the following: D1.20.1, “Input Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2 and BSETU-3)”

l Integration for Calculation Block In the Calculation Blocks, the integration processing is executed for the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) and the Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI) only. Each block uses a different filtering method. • In the general-purpose calculation blocks, the calculation output signals are integrated before the processing of the digital filter. If the input signal conversion is specified as [Extract Totalization Pulse Train Input], the calculation input value can be integrated. • In the Data Set Block with Input Indicator, the integration process is executed for input signal (main input signal) read from the IN terminal only, following input signal conversion.

n Computational Expression for Integration ▼ Totalizer

The following is the computational expression for the integration: SUMn = X •

Ts Tk

X

:

SUMn SUMn-1 Ts Tk

: : : :

+ SUMn-1 C030301E.ai

Integrated input signal Input value after input signal conversion. However, PV value if the PV data status is CAL. Current integrator value Previous integrator value Scan period (sec) Time scale conversion coefficient

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-23

l Time Scale Conversion Coefficient ▼ Totalizer Time Unit

The time scale conversion coefficient (Tk) is set corresponding to the totalizer time unit. The table below lists the correlation between the time scale conversion coefficient and the totalizer time unit. Table

Time Scale Conversion Coefficient and Totalizer Time Unit Totalizer time unit

Time Scale Conversion Coefficient (Tk)

Second

1

Minute

60

Hour

3600

Day

86400 C030302E.ai

The time scale conversion coefficient (Tk) is automatically determined when the totalizer time unit is set on the Function Block Detail Builder. The totalizer time unit must be set in the same unit as the measurement value (PV). For example, if the unit of PV is “m³/min,” set the totalizer time unit to “minute” • Number of digits for integrator value Up to 8 digits can be used. If the integrator value exceeds 8 digits, the value returns to 0 and the integration processing continues. • A negative integration input signal value can be integrated as a negative value. However, integration of negative values can be executed only when the low-input cutoff value is negative. • Unit Engineering unit is used. The totalizer time unit can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Totalizer Time Unit Select “Second,” “Minute,” “Hour,” “Day” or “None.” The default setting is “None,” however for the BSETU-2 block the default setting is “Hour.” If “None” is specified as the totalizer time unit, integration will not be executed.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-24

l Low-Input Cut The integration operation differs by the integration low-input cut value setting as explained below. • If the low-input cut value is positive (including 0): Integration is not executed for the input signal (including negative value) less than the lowinput cut value. • If the low-input cutoff value is negative: Integration is not executed for the input signal if the absolute value of the input signal is less than that of the low-input cut value. When the integration of the reverse direction flow measurement (negative value input) is allowed, integration cannot be executed for small flow in either direct or reverse direction if a negative value is set to the low-input cut value. The low-input cut value can be specified on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Totalizer Low-Input Cut Value: Set the data in the same unit of integrator value (PV), or percentage value for the PV scale span. If a percentage value is used, add % after the value. The default setting is 0 %.

n SUM Value Entry ▼ SUM Value Entry

When SUM value entry is allowed, operator can enter a value from the instrument faceplate and tuning view on HIS to the data item SUM when the calculation block is not performing integration. This is irrelevant to whether calculation input signal or calculation output signal is used for integration. On the Function Block Detail builder, the [SUM Value Entry] can be set to [Allowed] or [Not Allowed] after the setting of [Totalizer Time Unit] is set to [No]. • SUM Value Entry: Choose [Allowed] or [Not Allowed]. The default is [Not Allowed]. This setting does not affect the FCS integration.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-25

C3.4 PV/FV/CPV Overshoot The PV/FV/CPV overshoot refers to the function in which the process variable (PV/FV) or the calculated output value (CPV) is coincided with the scale high-limit (SH) or the scale low-limit (SL) when the status of input signal is invalid (BAD). This section describes PV, FV and CPV overshoot.

n PV Overshoot ▼ PV Overshoot

When the data status of input signal becomes invalid (BAD), the PV overshoot function overshoots the process variable (PV), or upscales it to scale high-limit or downscales it to scale low-limit. The PV overshoot is supported only for the Regulatory Control Blocks. Since the PV overshoot is for process input signal, it is executed when the I/O connection type is process I/O. The following table shows the relationship between the cause for invalidity (BAD) and process variable (PV) when the PV overshoot is used. Table

Reason for Invalidity (BAD) and Overshoot Value

Cause of invalidity (BAD) High-limit input open (IOP+) Low-limit input open (IOP-) Process I/O failure or other error

Overshoot Upscale to high-limit (SH) Downscale to low-limit (SL) C030401E.ai

The PV overshoot can be specified on the Function Block Detail Builder. • PV Overshoot: Select “Overshoot PV” or “Holding PV.” The default setting is “Holding PV.” With “Holding PV,” when the data status of process variable (PV) becomes invalid, the last good process variable is held. Furthermore, when the input signal is not a process input signal, the operation becomes “Holding PV” even though “Overshoot PV” is specified.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-26

n FV Overshoot ▼ FV Overshoot

When the data status of input signal becomes invalid (BAD), the feedback input value (FV) may be overshot to be the same as the scale high-limit or the scale low-limit. The FV Overshoot is only available for motor control block. The FV overshoot can be specified on the Function Block Detail Builder. • FV Overshoot: Choose [Holding FV Value] or [Overshoot FV Value]. The default is [Holding FV Value].

n CPV Overshoot When the status of input signal is invalid (BAD). The CPV overshoot function overshoots the calculated output value (CPV), or upscales it to the scale high-limit (SH) or downscales it low-limit (SL). CPV overshoot is supported for the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCUC) and the Data Set Block with Input Indicator Block (DSET-PVI), the Analog Calculation Blocks and the Arithmetic Calculation Blocks except Averaging Block (AVE). Since the CPV overshoot is for process input signal, it is executed when the I/O connection type is process I/O. The following table shows the relationship between the cause for invalidity (BAD) and calculated output value (CPV) when the CPV overshoot is used. Table

Reason for Invalidity (BAD) and Overshoot Value

Cause of invalidity (BAD) High-limit input open (IOP+) Low-limit input open (IOP-) Process I/O failure or other error

Overshoot Upscale to high-limit (SH) Downscale to low-limit (SL) C030402E.ai

The CPV overshoot can be specified on the Function Block Detail Builder. • PV Overshoot: Choose [Overshoot PV] or [Holding PV]. The default is [Holding PV]. With “Holding PV,” when the data status of calculated output value (CPV) becomes invalid, the last good calculated output value is held. Furthermore, when the input signal is not a process input signal, the operation becomes “Holding PV” even though “Overshoot PV” is specified.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-27

C3.5 Calibration The calibration is a function in which the emulated signals for process variables (PV) or calculated output values (CPV) in the function block can be set manually with the operation and monitoring function for maintenance or test purpose. The state in which calibration is being executed is called calibration status. The calibration mode differs between Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks.

n Calibration for Regulatory Control Block In Regulatory Control Blocks, calibration is executed when the data status of process variable (PV) is set to calibration (CAL) by the operating and monitoring function. The following are the indications of Regulatory Control Blocks in calibration status: • The color of the operation and monitoring function PV bar display turns to cyan. • A process variable (PV) can be set manually. • The integration is continued with the process variable (PV) entered. • The alarm check for the process variable (PV) entered is bypassed. • In the function block with manual mode (MAN), the block mode switches to manual mode. • In the case of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, MC-3E), feedback input signal processing and answerback input signal processing are stopped. In this case, the answerback raw signal (RAW) follows the input signal. The following occurs when the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) changes to the calibration mode. • Absolute integrator value (SUM0) and integrator value (SUM) can be set manually. • Block mode changes to manual (MAN) mode.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-28

n Calibration for Calculation Block In Calculation Blocks, calibration is executed when the data status of calculated output value (CPV) is set to calibration (CAL) by operating the operation and monitoring function. The Calculation Blocks in calibration status behaves as follows: • The color of the operation and monitoring function CPV bar display turns to cyan. • The calculated output value (CPV) can be entered manually. • The integration is continued with the calculated output value (CPV) entered. • The alarm check for the calculated output value (CPV) entered can be bypassed. • The calculation stops while the block is still in automatic mode (AUT). • The output of the secondary calculated output values (CPV1 to CPVn) stops. • The output of the primary calculated output value (CPV) is processed as usual. There is no calibration in the Calculation Auxiliary Blocks except the Data set block with input indicator (DSET-PVI). The block with calculated output value (CPV1) instead of calculated output value (CPV) is in calibration state when the data status of calculated output value (CPV) is set to calibration (CAL). In this state, the calculated output value (CPV1) can be set manually and the output of the values greater than CPV2 stops.

IMPORTANT When the output destination is cascade open or output fail in the function block in which the output value tracking is set to “Yes,” the tracking function precedes even if the data status of calculated output value (CPV) is in calibration (CAL).

l Calibration for Inter-Terminal Connected Calculation Blocks Among various Calculation Blocks, the Analog Calculation Blocks listed below may perform calibration only as input processing in a case where data is entered as the calculated input value (RV) from other function blocks using terminal connection to the input terminal (IN). • Square Root Block (SQRT) • Exponential Block (EXP) • First-Order Lag Block (LAG) • Integration Block (INTEG) • Derivative Block (LD) • Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) • Dead-Time Block (DLAY) • Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) • Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-29

C3.6 Input Processing in the Unsteady State In the unsteady state, the function block may execute a different input processing from that in the normal state. This section explains input processing in the unsteady state. Input processing in the unsteady state differs between the Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks.

n Unsteady State of the Regulatory Control Blocks The following section describes the unsteady states in the Regulatory Control Blocks and the special input processing.

l Unsteady States The Regulatory Control Blocks suffer the following unsteady states: • Input signal error (PV BAD) The data status of process variable (PV) is invalid. • Calibration (PV CAL) The data status of process variable (PV) is calibration (CAL). • Input connection open The input connection destination is the selector switch which is in open state.

l Executing Special Input Processing The special input processing is also executed in the states below, although they are not unsteady states. • Terminal connection The input terminal (IN) is connected via terminal connection with an output terminal of the other function block. This type of connection is used for the cascade loops with blocks such as Ratio Set Block (RATIO). • Input connection undefined The input connection is not defined. The loop is in unconnected state.

SEE

ALSO

For the input processing of Regulatory Control Blocks in the unsteady state, see the following: C3.6.1, “Input Processing of the Regulatory Control Block in Unsteady State”

n Unsteady State of the Calculation Blocks The Calculation Blocks suffer the following unsteady states: • Input signal error The data status of input signal is invalid (BAD). • Calibration (CAL) The data status of calculated output value (CPV) is calibration (CAL). • The abnormal calculated input value is detected The data status of calculated input value (RV) is invalid (BAD).

SEE

ALSO

For the input processing of calculation block in the unsteady state, see the following: C3.6.2, “Input Processing of the Calculation Block in Unsteady State”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-30

C3.6.1

Input Processing of the Regulatory Control Block in Unsteady State

This section explains the input processing of Regulatory Control Blocks in unsteady and special state.

n Input Processing at Input Signal Error (PV BAD) The Regulatory Control Blocks executes the following operations when input signal error (PV BAD). • If the data reference is available, the input signal is read to update the data status without updating the data value. • Input signal conversion is halted. For pulse input conversion, the contents of pulse input buffer is initialized when the processing is restarted. • Integration is halted and the integrator value is held. The integration is continued from the held value when the processing is restarted. • The digital filtering is halted. The previous value is initialized when the processing is restarted. • The PV/FV overshoot operates when the PV/FV overshoot is specified.

n Input Processing at Calibration (PV CAL) The Regulatory Control Blocks executes the following operations at calibration (PV CAL). • If the data reference is available, the input signal is read to update the data status without updating the data value. However, the data status of the process variable (PV) is calibration (CAL). • The input signal conversion is halted. For the pulse input conversion, the contents of the pulse input buffer is initialized when the processing is restarted. • The integration is continued with process variables (PV). • The digital filtering is halted. The previous value is initialized when the process is restarted from the halt status.

n Input Processing at Open Input Connection The Regulatory Control Blocks executes the following operations at open input connection. • The input signal conversion is halted. For the pulse input conversion, the contents of the pulse input buffer is initialized when the processing is restarted. • The integration is halted and the integrator value is held. The integration is continued from the hold value when the processing is restarted. • The digital filter processing is halted. The previous value is initialized when the processing is restarted.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-31

n Input Processing at Terminal Connection The Regulatory Control Blocks executes the following operations at terminal connection. • The input signal conversion is halted. • Process variables (PV) are integrated. • The digital filtering is halted.

n Input Processing at Input Connection Undefined The Regulatory Control Blocks executes the following operations at input connection undefined. • The input signal conversion is halted. • The integration is halted and the integrator value is held. • The digital filtering is halted.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-32

C3.6.2

Input Processing of the Calculation Block in Unsteady State

This section explains the Input processing of the Calculation Blocks in the unsteady state.

n Input Processing at Input Signal Error The Calculation Blocks executes the following operations when input signal error. • When the data status of the primary input from the input terminal (IN) is invalid (BAD), the calculated input value (RV) update, digital filter and integration processings are halted. The previous calculated input value (RV) is held and the data status of calculated input value (RV) becomes invalid (BAD). The digital filter initializes the previous value when the processing is restarted from the halt status. While the integration is halted, the integrator value is held, and the integration is continued from the hold value when the processing is restarted. • When the data status of the secondary input from the input terminal (Qn) is invalid (BAD), the previous calculated input value (RVn) is held and the data status of the calculated input value (RVn) becomes invalid (BAD). • When the CPV overshoot is specified, the calculated output value (CPV) is overshoot if the data status of the primary input becomes invalid (BAD). • Input open data status signals (IOP, IOP-) are not detected for the terminals that are connected in sequence connection. If the input signal could not be obtained, the condition will be tested using the previous input value.

n Input Processing at Calibration The Calculation Blocks executes the following operations at calibration (CAL). • The input signal conversion is executed, and the calculated input value (RV, RVn) and the data status continue to be updated. • The digital filer is halted. The previous value is initialized when the processing is restarted from the halt status. • The integration is continued. However, the calculated output value (CPV) is integrated at calibration (CAL). • The CPV overshoot does not operate at calibration (CAL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-33

n Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection ▼ Calculated Input Value Error Detected

The Calculation Blocks executes the following operations if a calculated input value error were detected. • When the data status of calculated input value (RV) of the primary input from the input terminal (IN) is invalid (BAD), the calculation is not executed, the data status of the calculated output value (CPV) becomes invalid (BAD) and the previous calculated output value is held. • When the data status of the calculated input value (RVn) of the secondary input is invalid (BAD), the calculation processing is continued using the previous calculated input value (RVn) held, and the calculated output value (CPV) is updated. However, the data status of the calculated output value (CPV) becomes “questionable” (QST). • The Arithmetic Calculation Blocks, the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks and the Logic Operation Blocks used for auxiliary inputs perform the input error detection by themselves. The table below shows the correlation among the data statuses of the calculated input value (RV) of the primary input and the calculated input value (RVn) of the secondary input, and the calculated output value (CPV). Table

Correlation of the Data Statuses RV, RVn and CPV

Calculated input value (RV) of the primary input

Calculated input value (RVn) of the secondary input

Calculated output value (CPV)

BAD

-

BAD

NR

BAD

QST

NR

NR

NR C030601E.ai

BAD: NR: QST: -:

Data value BAD Neither BAD nor QST Questionable Ignore (don’t care)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-34

l Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Arithmetic Calculation For Arithmetic Calculation Blocks (*1) other than the AVE block, the conditions for detecting an error in calculated input values and the data status setting of the calculated output value when an error is detected are defined in the “Calculated input value error detected” of the Function Block Detail Builder. *1:

Arithmetic Calculation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

The method to transfer the data status (IOP, IOP-, OOP, NRDY) of the process I/O relations, which is generated with the calculated input value (RV, RV1) in connection with the above settings, to the calculated output value is specified. The table below describes the specified ranges 0 to 6. The default value is “1.” Table

Specification for Calculated Input Value Error Detected in the Arithmetic-Calculation Blocks Except AVE block

Calculated input value error detection specification

Error detection conditions (Data statuses of the calculated input values below are BAD.)

0

-

-

RV

BAD

RV1

QST

RV1

BAD

RV

QST

RV and RV1

BAD

RV priority

1 2 3 4 5 6

Data status CPV data status transmission origin input value No transmission RV RV1

RV

QST

No transmission

RV and RV1

BAD

RV priority

RV1

QST

No transmission

RV and RV1

BAD

RV priority

RV or RV1

QST

No transmission

RV or RV1

BAD

RV priority C030602E.ai

-:

Ignore (Don’t care)

When the calculated input value error which causes the invalid (BAD) data status of calculated output value (CPV) occurs, the calculation processing is halted, and the previous calculated output value (CPV) is held. When the calculated input value error which causes the questionable (QST) data status of calculated output value (CPV) occurs, the previous calculated input value is held due to the current calculated input value error. The calculation processing is continued using the previous value (RV) held and the calculated output value (CPV) is updated. If CPV overshoot is being used, when the data status of the calculated output value is an invalid data value (BAD) because the data status of the calculated input value (RV) of the primary input is an invalid value (BAD), the calculated output value (CPV) overshoot.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-35

l Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Averaging Block (AVE) AVE block behaves differently from other arithmetic calculation blocks when input error is detected.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about the behavior of AVE block when input error is detected, see the following: “n Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection” in chapter D2.7, “Averaging Block (AVE)”

l Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Auxiliary Inputs (RVn)-Used Logic Operation Blocks For Logic Operation Blocks using auxiliary inputs (RVn), the conditions for detecting an error in calculated input values and the data status setting of the calculated output value when an error is detected are defined in the “Calculated input value error detected” of the Function Block Detail Builder. The method to transfer the data status (IOP, IOP-, OOP, NRDY) of the process I/O relations, which is generated with the calculated input value (RV1, RV2) in connection with the above settings, to the calculated output value is specified. The table below describes the specified ranges 0 to 6. The default value is “1.” Table

Specification for Calculated Input Value Error Detected in the Arithmetic-Calculation

Calculated input value error detection specification 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Error detection conditions (Data statuses of the calculated input values below are BAD.)

Data status CPV data status transmission origin input value

-

-

RV1

BAD

No transmission

RV2

QST

RV2

BAD

RV1

QST

RV1 and RV2

BAD

RV1 priority

RV1

QST

No transmission

RV1 and RV2

BAD

RV1 priority

RV2

QST

No transmission

RV1 and RV2

BAD

RV1 priority

RV1 or RV2

QST

No transmission

RV1 or RV2

BAD

RV1 priority

RV1 RV2

C030604E.ai

-:

Ignore (Don’t care)

When the calculated input value error which causes the invalid (BAD) data status of calculated output value (CPV) occurs, the calculation processing is halted, and the previous calculated output value (CPV) is held. When the calculated input value error which causes the questionable (QST) data status of calculated output value (CPV) occurs, the previous calculated input value is held due to the current calculated input value error. The calculation processing is continued using the previous value (RV) held and the calculated output value (CPV) is updated.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-36

l Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the GeneralPurpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) CALCU and CALCU-C blocks behave differently from other arithmetic calculation blocks when input error is detected.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about the behavior of CALCU and CALCU-C blocks when input error is detected, see the following: “n Input Processing when a Calculation Input Value Error is Detected” in chapter D2.33, “General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-37

C3.7 Input Processing for Sequence Connection As a special input processing when using the sequence connection, there is “condition testing” for the input signals. When using the sequence connection, the “Calibration” function partially differs.

n Input Processing for Sequence Connection For the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks and Logic Operation Blocks (*1), the sequence connection can be used as the I/O connection method. When using the sequence connection for the Logic Operation Blocks (*1) and for CALCU and CALCU-C blocks, there are two types of special input processing as follows: • “Condition testing” for input signals • “Calibration” *1:

Logic Operation Blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n Input Processing Block Chart for the Sequence Connection The input processing block chart for the sequence connection is shown below. IN

Q01

Qn

CAL Condition testing

RV

Condition testing

RV1

Condition testing

RVn

CPV CAL Logic operation

CAL

CPV1

CPVn C030701E.ai

Figure Block Chart of Input Processing for Sequence Connection

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C3-38

n Condition Testing For sequence connection, the input terminals (IN, Qn) of the Logic Operation Blocks applicable for sequence and CALCU, CALCU-C blocks store the following I/O connection information: • Information to identify the connection destination, such as tag name, user defined label name, terminal number, and element number • Information to identify the data item • Information to indicate the condition specification *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n Condition Specification on the I/O Connection Information Using the I/O connection information and the input signal read from the input terminals, the condition testing may be performed. When the input signals satisfy the conditions, 1 is set to the calculated input value (RV). When the conditions are not satisfied, 0 is set to the calculated input value (RV).

SEE

ALSO

For the condition specification on the I/O connection information, see the chapters from D3.3.7, “Condition Signal Description : Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data” through D3.3.9, “Syntax for Condition Signal Description : Referencing Sequence Table in a Logic Chart.”

n Input Processing for Calibration Condition testing is performed to continue updating the calculated input values (RV, RVn).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-1

C4. Output Processing This chapter explains the output processing common to Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks.

n Output Processing Output processing is a general term, representing that all function blocks, execute certain process to the values obtained from the control computation before output it. There are various forms of output processing corresponding to the function block type and the output signal format. Some forms of output processing are common to Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks, while others are specific to certain particular blocks.

SEE

ALSO

The output processing for the sequence control block is unique and differs from that of the Regulatory Control Blocks or Calculation Blocks. For the sequence table block output processing details, see the following: D3.2.7, “Output Processing of Sequence Table” For details on the output processing of the blocks connected in sequence connection, see the following: D3.3.6, “Output Processing of Logic Chart”

n Output Processing Common to Regulatory Control Block In a Regulatory Control Block, the value obtained from control computation undergoes the output processing, then outputs as the manipulated output variable (MV), as depicted in the figure below. AUT/CAS/RCAS/PRD SV

PV

MAN/ TRK

MH

AUT/CAS/RCAS/ROUT/PRD

ML MAN

Output limiter

Control computation

TRK Output velocity limiter

+ -

ROUT

+

MV +

TRK

RMV

Preset manipulated output

MVrb Readback value from output destination

Output signal conversion

TIN

Auxiliary output

OUT

SUB

Output module

C040001E.ai

Figure Block Chart of Output Processing Common to Regulatory Control Block

TIP

In the Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL) and Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L), the value obtained by signal selection is output as a selected signal value (PV).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-2

l Output Operation ▼ Control Calculation Output Type

A Regulatory Control Block outputs its manipulated output value (MV) or the vicissitude of that value (∆MV). There are two types output action: positional and velocity: • In positional output action, the output value connects to its destinations unchanged. • In velocity output action, the amount of change for the current output (∆MV) is added to the value read back from the connection destination of the output terminal. The output operation can be specified on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Output action: Selectable from “positional” or “velocity.” Default is the “positional” action.

SEE

ALSO

For information on setting output actions in Regulatory Control Blocks, see the explanations for the respective function blocks in the following: D1, “Regulatory Control”

l Output Limiter It limits the manipulated output value (MV) to be within the high and low limit values.

l Output Velocity Limiter It limits the amount of change between the current and previous output values to avoid output bumps.

l Output Clamp It prevents the manipulated output value (MV) from being varied above or below the current output value. This state is called output clamp. In the output clamp state, the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) will be either the clamp high (CLP+) or clamp low (CLP-).

l Preset Manipulated Output Upon an external command, the block is forced to operate in the manual mode and output it’s manipulated output value (MV) at a predetermined value.

l Output Tracking It forces the output value to match the value of its output destination or the value of the tracking input signal.

l Output Range Tracking It forces the scale high/low limits (MSH and MSL) of the manipulated output value (MV) to match the scale high/low limits of its output destination. When a change occurs in the scale high/low limits (MSH and MSL) of the manipulated output value (MV), it recalculates the values of the data related to the manipulated output value (MV).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-3

l Manipulated Output Index This function displays two indexes in the manipulated output value (MV) scale in the HIS operation monitoring screen of operation and monitoring function. They are called manipulated output indexes. These indexes are set to indicate the feasible limits of the manipulated output values (MV). They can be used as manipulation reference when operation in the manual mode, and they can be used to verify the normal conditions when operation in the automatic mode. The manipulated output indexes are available only in the Regulatory Control Blocks.

l Output Signal Conversion The function converts the result of calculation process into a signal that is compatible with the output destination, such as the output module or other function blocks. Various types of output signal conversion are available for different types of function block and output signal. There are also types of output signal conversion that are common to the Regulatory Control Blocks, as well as those specific to individual function blocks.

l Auxiliary Output The manipulated output value (MV), change in manipulated output (∆MV), process variable (PV), or change in process variable (∆PV) is output to final control elements such as compensation control equipment or external indicator of control stations.

l Output Processing in Unusual Cases When in unusual cases, the Regulatory Control Blocks process the output different from in usual cases.

l Output Processing Specific to the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) The Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) execute a special output processing, which is different from other function blocks.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about output processing of MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E, see the following: D1.17.3, “Output Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3 and MC-3E)”

l Output Processing for the Blocks with Sequence Connection The Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) may be connected in sequence connection, one of the connection types. A special output processing for sequence connection with other blocks is supported and referred as “status manipulation.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-4

n Output Processing Common to All Calculation Blocks In a Calculation Block, the value obtained from calculation process undergoes the output processing, then outputs as the calculated output value (CPV), as depicted in the figure below. Calculation processing

CPV

Output signal conversion Auxiliary output

OUT

SUB C040002E.ai

Figure Block Diagram of Output Processing Common to the Numerical, Analog and General-Purpose Calculation Blocks

Output velocity limiter

CPV

Output signal conversion

OUT

C040003E.ai

Figure Block Diagram of Output Processing Common to Data Set Blocks

Calculation processing

CPV

Output signal conversion

OUT

C040004E.ai

Figure Block Diagram of Output Processing Common to the Logic Operation Blocks (*1) *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

l Output Operation ▼ Control Calculation Output Type

A Calculation Block outputs the calculated output value (CPV) or the vicissitude of that value (∆CPV). There are two types output action: positional and velocity: • In positional output action, the output value connects to its destinations unchanged. • In velocity output action, the amount of change for the current output (∆CPV) is added to the value read back from the connection destination of the output terminal. The output operation can be specified on the Function Block Detail Builder. The Calculation Blocks that can select positional output or velocity output action are Arithmetic Calculation Blocks and Analog Calculation Blocks. Other Calculation Blocks are fixed to the positional output action. • Output action: Selectable from “positional” or “velocity.” Default is the “positional” action.

l Output Velocity Limiter It limits the amount of change between the current and previous output values to avoid output bumps.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-5

l Output Clamp It prevents the manipulated output value (MV) from being varied above or below the current output value. This state is called output clamp. In the output clamp state, the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) will be either the clamp high (CLP+) or clamp low (CLP-).

l Output Tracking It forces the output value to match the value of its output destination or the value of the tracking input signal.

l Output Signal Conversion The function converts the result of calculation process into a signal that is compatible with the output destination, such as the output module or other function blocks. Various types of output signal conversion are available for different types of function block and output signal. There are also types of output signal conversion that are common to the Calculation Blocks, as well as those specific to individual function blocks.

l Auxiliary Output The calculated output value (CPV), or the change in calculated output (∆CPV) is output to final control elements such as compensation control equipment and external indicator of control stations.

l Output Processing in Unusual Cases When in unusual cases, the Calculation Blocks process the output different from in usual cases.

l CPV Pushback In terminal connection, a function block obtains output value (CPV) by tracking to the downstream function block at the IN terminal, and calculates the calculation input value (RV) backward from the CPV to allow the upstream function block tracking.

l Output Processing for General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU and CALCU-C) in Sequence Connection The General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALC, CALC-C) and Logic Operation Blocks (*1) may be connected in sequence connection, one of the connection types. A special output processing for sequence connection with other blocks is supported and referred as “status manipulation.” *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n Output Processing Applicable to Each Model of Blocks The different types of output processing may be applied to different models of function blocks.

SEE

ALSO

• For more information about output processing applicable to each model of regularly blocks, see the following: “n Output Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” in chapter D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regularly Control Block” • For more information about output processing applicable to each model of calculation blocks, see the following: “n Output Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block” in chapter D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-6

C4.1 Output Limiter The output limiter limits the manipulated output value (MV) within the MV High/Low limits (MH and ML) when running in Auto mode. An enhanced output limiter function is provided as the extra function to the output limiter. This function may prevent the output from abrupt action when the manipulated output value (MV) is operated in the manual mode beyond the range of high or low limit, and then the operation mode is switched from manual to auto. The output limiter is only available for Regulatory Control Blocks.

n Output Limiter The output limiter limits the manipulated output value (MV) within the high (MH) and low (ML) limit setpoints. The limiter is functioning for the Regulatory Control Blocks operating in the automatic mode (CAS, AUT, RCAS). But, it has no effect on 2-position ON/OFF type output, or 3-position ON/OFF type output and Pulse width type output with no feedback. When the manipulated output value (MV) reaches the limit set by the output limiter, the high or low limit alarm is activated, and the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) will be in the clamp high (CLP+) or clamp low (CLP-) respectively. The high (MH) and low (ML) limit setpoints are set in the following setting parameters. • High limit for manipulated output value (MH): Data in an engineering unit and within the MV range. The default is the ceiling of the MV scale. • Low limit for manipulated output value (MH): Data in an engineering unit and within the MV range. The default is the bottom of the MV scale.

TIP

• In the Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT), the MVn scale high limit is set in the manipulated output high limit setpoint (MH) and the MVn scale low limit is set in the manipulated output low limit setpoint (ML), for each output. • In the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13), the output value always falls within the range between the MV scale high (MSH) and low (MSL) limits.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-7

n High/Low Limit Bumpfree Capability The high/low limit bumpfree Capability temporarily expands the manipulated output high and low limit setpoints (MH, ML) in order to avoid such abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV) caused by the output limiter. When a Regulatory Control Block is in manual operation mode and a value exceeding the manipulated output high and low limit setpoints is set from the operating and monitoring function, a confirmation request message is displayed to caution the user. If the user performs an acknowledgment operation at this time, a value exceeding the manipulated output high and low limit setpoints can be set. The function block outputs the value set by the user regardless of the manipulated output high and low limit setpoints (MH, ML). If the manipulated output value (MV) that is set by manual operation exceeds the range as determined by the manipulated output high and low limit setpoints, and if operation is changed to an automatic mode (CAS, AUT, RCAS), the output limiter will force the manipulated output value (MV) to change to the manipulated output upper limit setpoint (MH) or the lower limit setpoint (ML) so that the manipulated output value (MV) undergoes an abrupt change.

l When MV is Set in the Manual Mode The High/Low-limit Expansion function is activated when the manipulated output value (MV) is manually set over the high-limit (MH) or under the low-limit (ML) in manual mode. • If the MV exceeds the MH setpoint, the value equal to that MV will be the temporarily extended high limit setpoint (MHe) for the manipulated output. • If the MV falls below the ML setpoint, the value equal to that MV will be the temporarily extended low limit setpoint (MLe) for the manipulated output.

l When the Mode is Switched from Manual to Automatic When the mode is changed from manual operation to automatic operation, the output limiter operates using the manipulated output high limit setpoint (MHe) or the manipulated output low limit setpoint (MLe) that has been temporarily expanded. Therefore, there will be no abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV). • If the calculation process yields a value exceeding the current MHe value, then the current MHe value will be output as the MV. Otherwise, the calculated result will be output, and the MHe value will be replaced by the new MV value. • If the calculation yields a value that falls below the current MLe value, then the current MLe value will be output as the MV. Otherwise, the calculated result will be output, and the MLe value will be replaced by the new MV value. The following figure shows the operation of the High/Low-limit Expansion function: MV

MV

Unlimited MV

MH The ramp up output is limited. ML

Mode Alarm

Time AUT

MAN NR

AUT MHI

NR C040101E.ai

Figure Operation of High/Low-Limit Expansion Function

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-8

l Return to Normal Operation When the manipulated output value (MV) finally returns within the high limit (MH) and low limit (ML) setpoints, the output limiter returns to normal operation.

n Disable High/Low Limit Bumpfree Capability ▼ High/Low Limit bumpfree capability

If High/Low Limit Bumpfree Capability is disabled, when a block is running in automatic mode (CAS, AUT or RCAS) and the output high/low limit (MH/ML) is changed from the operation and monitoring function, the manipulated output value (MV) will be forced to the range within the new limit (MH/ML) at the next scan. And when the block is running manual mode (MAN), if the manipulated output (MV) is changed to a value beyond the limit range, a confirmation request message is displayed to caution the user. The manipulated output (MV) can go beyond the limit only after the confirmation is performed. If the block is changed to automatic mode (CAS, AUT or RCAS) at this moment, the manipulated output value (MV) will be forced to the range within the limit (MH/ML) at the next scan. High/Low Limit Bumpfree Capability can be enabled or disabled on the Function Block Detail builder. • High/Low Limit Bumpfree Capability: Choose [Valid] or [Invalid] The default is [Valid]. The High/Low Limit Bumpfree Capability can be enabled or disabled on the following function blocks: PID, PI-HLD, PID-BSW, PID-TP, PD-MR, PI-BLEND, PID-STC, MLD-SW, RATIO, VELLIM, ASH/M/L, FFSUM, XCPL

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-9

C4.2 Output Velocity Limiter It is a function to limit the amount of change between the previous and current output values, so as to prevent abrupt changes in the output value.

n Output Velocity Limiter ▼ Output Change, Output Velocity Limiter, MAN Mode Output Velocity Limiter Bypass

The output velocity limiter limits the amount of change in the output value according to the output velocity limit setting. The output velocity limit is a permissible amount of output change over one scan period. In the manual operation mode, the operation and monitoring window will display the manipulated output value (MV) as set manually, even if the output velocity limiter has acted to limit the manipulated output value (MV). The output velocity limiter can be disabled by setting the bypass for the MAN-mode output velocity limiter. Also, the limiter will not function when the output signal is 2-position ON/OFF or 3-position ON/ OFF output, or when the block is in the tracking (TRK) mode. In the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW), the output velocity limiter does not operate during the time the manipulated output value (MV) is at the manipulated output high limit value or low limit value because the control deviation value has exceeded the deviation alarm setpoint and lockup setpoint. The output velocity limiter does not function in Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block regardless the setting for MAN Mode Output Velocity Limiter Bypass. The output velocity limiter and the bypass for MAN-mode output velocity limiter may be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Output Velocity Limiter: Engineering unit data or percentage within the range from 0 to the MV scale span setting in positive values only (six significant figures). The default setting is 100.0 %. • MAN Mode Output Velocity Limiter Bypass: Selectable between “Yes” and “No.” Default is “No.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-10

C4.3 Output Clamp Output clamp is a function applied to cascade-connected output terminals. It prevents the manipulated output value (MV) from exceeding, or falling below the current value, when the data status of manipulated output value (MV) is in the high-limit (CLP+), or low-limit (CLP-) clamped state.

n Output Clamp The output clamp function indicates the status that the manipulated output value (MV) is restrained at the limits of a specified range. The output clamp function operates only when the output terminal is connected in cascade. The data status CLP+ or CLP- is initiated by one of the following conditions: • When the output value is limited by the output limiter. • When the data status of cascade-connected destination is CLP+ or CLP-. Each of these conditions is explained further in the following paragraph.

l When the Output Value is Limited by the Output Limiter If the output is limited within the range of high-limit (MH) and low-limit (ML) setpoints of the manipulated output value, then the data status of the function block will be CLP+ or CLP-. The CLP+ and CLP- have a 2 % (initial value) hysteresis. For example, if the low-limit setpoint is 0 %, and the manipulated output falls to 0 % and activates the output limiter. Then the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) become CLP-. Later, when the manipulated output increases from 0 % and the output limiter is no longer activated, the data status CLP- will continue until the manipulated output value (MV) exceeds 2 %.

l When the Data Status of Cascade-connected Destination Become CLP+ or CLPIf the output terminal is cascade-connected to a function block whose cascade set value (CSV) is in the status of CLP+ or CLP-, or if the data status of data item connected to the IN terminal of the connection destination at the terminal connection is CLP+ or CLP-, then the data status of manipulated output value at the connection source will also be CLP+ or CLP-.

n Operation of Output Clamp ▼ Limit Output in Direction when Clamped

When the data status of the cascade connection destination is CLP+ or CLP-, the output direction of the manipulated output value (MV) is restricted, i.e., the value cannot be changed to exceed or falls below the present output value, so that only the manipulated output value (MV) in the direction that cancels CLP+ or CLP- is output. The restriction of the direction of changes in clamped output can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder. • Limit output in direction when clamped: Selectable from “Yes” and “No.” Default is “Yes.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-11

n Release the Output Clamp The output clamp will be released under the following conditions: • When the block mode is switched to the manual (MAN), remote output (ROUT), tracking (TRK) or primary direct mode (PRD). • When the output connection destination is changed through a switch, etc.

n Output Clamp and MAN Mode of Primary Loop In a cascade control loop, if the setting of [Limit Output in Direction when Clamped] of the primary loop is specified to [Yes], the output (MV) of the primary loop in manual (MAN) mode and the set point value of the secondary loop will behave as follows if the output of the secondary loop is clamped. • The manipulated output value (MV) of the primary loop can be freely manipulated irrelevant to clamping or declamping direction. • The set point value (SV) of the secondary loop will follow the motion of the primary loop’s output (MV) if the motion is in the declamping direction, and will not follow the MV of the primary loop but maintain the current value if the motion is in the clamping direction.

n Tracking of the Output Clamp Status The data status CLP+ or CLP- of the manipulated output value (MV) will be copied to the data status of the setpoint (SV, CSV and RSV) and of the remote manipulated output value (RMV). This action is called the tracking of the output clamp status. The tracking function transmits the output clamp status of a downstream function block to an upstream function block. If, however, the “limit output in direction when clamped” is disabled in the upstream block, the downstream output status will not be transmitted to the upstream. Output value may be set as desired. MAN Output clamp state CAS CSV CAS

Output high/low limiting Legends MAN

Function block Block mode

If a high-end limiting occurs in the downstream block due to a reverse action, the CSV will only be allowed to ramp down. C040301E.ai

Figure An Example of Typical Clamping

n Output Clamp when the High/Low Limit Bumpfree Capability is in Effect Note When the output High/Low-limit Bumpfree Capability is in effect, the manipulated output value (MV) is not limited by the high-limit (MH) or the low-limit (ML) setpoints. Whenever MV≥MH or MV≤ML, the manipulated output value (MV) data status is set as CLP+ or CLP- even if the manipulated output value (MV) is not limited by the high/low limit bumpfree capability .

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-12

n An Example of Output Clamp The following figures illustrate examples of output clamp:

l An Example of Function Blocks Connected in Parallel in Downstream Even in a case in which multiple function blocks are connected downstream via the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT), the output clamp status of the downstream function block output is transmitted to the upstream function block via the FOUT block. PID

Output clamp state

AUT

Output high/low limit

FOUT

Output high/low limit

CAS

CAS

CAS

CAS

Output clamp state C040302E.ai

Figure When Downstream Function Blocks are Connected in Parallel

l When Connecting to IN Terminal of a Ratio Set Block (RATIO) When RATIO block is connected downstream in a loop, the output clamp status of the RATIO block is transmitted to the upstream function block connected to its SET terminal. The clamp status is not transmitted via IN terminal even though the connection to the IN terminal is the terminal connection type. Output clamp state IN

AUT

OUT

Not output clamp state IN

AUT

RATIO IN

OUT

CAS

Output high/low limit

Output clamp state

C040303E.ai

Figure An Example of Connecting to the Input Terminal of a Ratio Set Block (RATIO)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-13

l When Connecting to an Auto Selector Block (AS-H/M/L) When an AS-H/M/L block is connected downstream and the AS-H/M/L block signal selector switch position is 4 (auto selection), the output clamp status of the AS-H/M/L block is transmitted to all upstream function blocks. When the signal selector switch position is 1, 2, or 3, the output clamp status is transmitted only to the upstream function block that is selected by the signal selector switch. Output clamp state Output clamp state

Output clamp state

PID

PID

AUT

AUT AS

IN1

AUT

IN2

Automatic selection

AUT

AS

IN1 Output high/low limit

AUT

IN2

PID

Output high/low limit

IN1 is selected

AUT

Output clamp state

C040304E.ai

Figure An Example of Connecting with Auto Selector Block (AS)

l When Connecting to a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) When connected to a downstream function block via the SW-33 or SW-91 block, the output clamp status of the downstream function block is not transmitted upstream when the switch is OFF. It is transmitted when the switch is ON. PID AUT

Output clamp state

PID SW-33

MLD-SW

AUT

Output clamp state

AUT

Output high/low limit

SW-33

MLD-SW AUT

Output high/low limit C040305E.ai

Figure An Example of Connecting with a Switch Block (SW-33)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-14

n Precautions When Connecting a Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) in the Downstream of Cascade Loop If a Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) is placed downstream in a cascadeconnected control loop, the control block connected upstream must have the “limit output in direction when clamped” function turned off. The following paragraph explains how to connect a MLD-SW block in the downstream of a cascade loop.

l An Example of Connecting a Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLDSW) in the Downstream of a Cascade loop Assume the MLD-SW gain (GAIN) is 1, bias (BIAS) is 0, the low-limit alarm setpoint is 0 %, and hysteresis for manipulated output alarm is 2 %, in the loop shown below. PID AUT

Output clamp state

MLD-SW AUT

Output high/low limit C040306E.ai

Figure An Example of Turning Off the Limit Output in Direction when Clamped

l Action of the “Limit Output in Direction when Clamped” When the block status of the PID and MLD-SW blocks are AUT, set the manipulated output value (MV) of a PID block to 0 % then the MLD-SW manipulated output (MV) become 0 %, clamped at the low limit, thus turns the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) to CLP-. This will also cause the PID block data status of the manipulated output value (MV) to CLP-, and restricts the PID manipulated output value (MV) changes on the clamped output direction. The restriction on the PID block will continue until a change in the PID output causes the manipulated output value (MV) of the MLD-SW to exceed 2 %, thus releasing the CLP-data status of the manipulated output value (MV).

l Precautions on “Limit Output in Direction when Clamped” When changes on the direction of clamped output is restricted, the PID block output can not decrease to 0 % once it increased to 1.9 % under CPL- status. The MLD-SW is restricted on moving to the clamped direction kept it at 1.9 %. In other words, though a valve requires full close when the manipulated output value (MV) becomes 0 %, the valve is not fully closed in this case. Turn off the “limit output in direction when clamped” at the upstream control block can avoid this state.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-15

C4.4 Preset Manipulated Output The preset manipulated output is a function that, through an external command, forces a block to the manual mode (MAN) and output a preset value as the manipulated output value (MV). The preset manipulated output function is available only for Regulatory Control Blocks.

n Preset Manipulated Output The preset manipulated output is a function that, through an external command, forces a block to the manual mode (MAN) and output a preset value as the manipulated output value (MV). The command for the preset manipulated output is generated only upon switching the preset MV switch (PSW) from 0 to 1, 2 or 3. The value of the preset MV switch (PSW) will determine the manipulated output value (MV) as follows: • PSW = 1: MV = MSL (the low limit of MV scale) • PSW = 2: MV = MSH (the high limit of MV scale) • PSW = 3: MV = PMV (the preset manipulated-output value) The preset manipulated output value (PMV) is a value set as a tuning parameter from the operation and monitoring function, or from the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks.

n Reset the Preset MV Switch • The preset MV switch (PSW) value will be automatically reset to 0 when the preset manipulated output function is activated to set the manipulated output (MV) at a preset value. The block mode will remain manual (MAN), can not trace back the mode and value prior to the activation of preset manipulated output function. • If the value of the preset MV switch (PSW) is set at 1 or 2, the output velocity limiter will not take effect on the preset manipulated output. • If the value of the preset MV switch (PSW) is set at 3, and if MAN mode output velocity limiter bypass is set to off, the output velocity limiter will restrict the velocity when the MV tries to jump to the preset value.

IMPORTANT • Since the preset MV switch (PSW) is automatically reset to 0, the PSW ≠ 0 state can not be referred by other function blocks. For example, the Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) can not refer it as a condition for sequence control. • If the preset MV output option is [Preset MV Valid by Preset Switch], PSW ≠ 0 cannot be grabbed by the sequence table.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-16

n Set Parameters for the Preset Manipulated Output Function The set parameters for the preset manipulated output function is shown below: • Preset manipulated output value (PMV): Data in an engineering unit and within the MV range. Default is the low limit of the MV scale. • Preset MV switch (PSW): Selectable among “0,” “1,” “2,” “3.” Default is “0.”

n Preset MV Valid Immediately : KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 ▼ Preset MV valid immediately

Preset MV Valid immediately setting for a regulatory control blocks has two options, [Preset MV valid by Preset Switch] and [Preset MV valid at next scan]. When a preset MV switch (PSW) is activated by an external commands such as from a sequence control block, the preset MV can be output immediately.

IMPORTANT For pulse width output, [Preset MV valid immediately] Option cannot be set to [Preset MV valid immediately] .

TIP

In CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL, when a preset MV switch (PSW) is activated by an external commands such as from a sequence control block, the preset MV will be output immediately. For the system to compliant the CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL, [Preset MV valid by Preset Switch] option should be used.

Preset MV valid timing can be specified on FCS properties sheet. When checking the option of [Preset MV valid by Preset Switch] , the preset MV will be immediately forced to the MV output instead of waiting for the next scan; while when checking the option of [Preset MV valid at next scan], the preset MV will be forced to the MV output at the next scan.The Default is [Preset MV valid at next scan].

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-17

C4.5 Output Tracking The output tracking is a function that forces the output value to match the value of the output destination or the value of the tracking-input signal.

n Output Tracking ▼ Output Value Tracking

The output tracking behaves different between the Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks. • For the Regulatory Control Blocks, the manipulated output value (MV) is forced to match the value of the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) or output destination. • In the Calculation Blocks, the calculated output value (CPV) is forced to match the value of the output destination when the data status of the destination block is conditional (CND).

n Output Tracking in the Regulatory Control Block The output tracking in the Regulatory Control Blocks is a function that forces the manipulated output value (MV) to match the value of the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) or output destination. However, when the value of the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) or the output terminal connection destination falls outside the range of the manipulated output value (MV) scale, the manipulated output value (MV) is restricted to the MV scale low limit value (MSL) or MV scale high limit value (MSH). In the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT), when each output point becomes cascade open, the manipulated output value (MV) is made to conform to the output destination data. The output tracking in the Regulatory Control Block functions under the following conditions: • In the tracking mode (TRK). • In the initialization manual mode (IMAN) • In a condition other than initialization manual mode where the initialization process is required (IMAN state). When a Regulatory Control Block is defined to give pulse width output, the Remote/Local input signal is connected to the tracking switch input terminal (TSI), and the Valve opening feedback signal is connected to the tracking signal input terminal (TIN). If the data status of the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) becomes “PIO Not Ready” (NRDY), whether the block mode is tracking mode (TRK) or not, the block mode remains unchanged, the value immediately before the “PIO Not ready” (NRDY) is retained as the manipulated output value (MV), and an output open alarm (OOP) is activated.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-18

The output tracking for Manual Loader Blocks (MLD, MLD-PVI and MLD-SW) can be set on Function Block Detail Builder. • Output Tracking: Selectable between “Yes” and “No.” Default is “No.” The output tracking for Enhanced Two-Position ONOFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E) and Enhanced Three-Position ONOFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE) can be set on Function Block Detail Builder. • Output Tracking: Selectable between “Yes” and “No.” Default is “Yes.”

TIP

For Regulatory Control Blocks with a remote manipulated output value (RMV), the remote manipulated value (RMV) data is made to conform to the manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode is other than remote output (ROUT) or service off (O/S).

n Output Tracking of Calculation Blocks The output tracking of the Calculation Blocks is a function that forces the calculated output value to match the value of the connected destination. Even if calibration (CAL) is set as the data status of the calculated output value (CPV), the output tracking have a priority over it. The output tracking of the Calculation Blocks will operate when the data status of the output destination block status becomes conditional (CND). The conditional (CND) status are as follows: • When the cascade connection is disconnected. • When the downstream function block begins the operation in non-cascade mode. The output tracking can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Output Value Tracking: Selectable from “Yes” or “No.” Default is “No.” Additionally, if the output tracking is set to “No,” and when the status of the output destination becomes CND, the previously calculated output value (CPV) will be held.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-19

n Output Tracking in the Tracking Mode The Regulatory Control Blocks where the tracking (TRK) mode is valid are provided with the tracking switch (TSW). When the tracking switch (TSW) is turned to “ON,” the Regulatory Control Blocks operate in the tracking (TRK) mode. If a function block operates in the tracking (TRK) mode, the output tracking is activated and the value of the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) from the external becomes its manipulated output value (MV). In this case, no output limiter and output velocity limiter functions on the value of the tracking signal input terminal (TIN). Tracking switch (TSW) may be set either directly by an external data set action or by data reference through the tracking-switch input terminal (TSI).

l Occurrence of Data Errors in the Tracking Mode When a data error (BAD) occurs, from either the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) or trackingswitch input terminal (TSI), an output open (OOP) alarm will be issued. Since the initialization manual condition is established at this time, the active mode switches from the tracking (TRK) mode to initialization manual (IMAN) mode. When the function block operates in the initialization manual mode (IMAN), the output tracking is activated to match the manipulated output value (MV) to the value of the output destination. For the Regulatory Control Blocks whose MV is pulse width output signal, the tracking (TRK) mode will prevail, and the previous manipulated output value (MV) will be held when above error occurs. If the block is not in tracking (TRK) mode, the occurrence of a data error (BAD) in the signal at the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) or tracking-switch input terminal (TSI) does not invoke an alarm nor change the active mode. Control will continue regardless the occurrence of data error.

l PIO Not Ready Alarm and Output Tracking When the block is in tracking (TRK) mode, if the tracking input signal on TIN terminal becomes PIO Not Ready (NRDY) status, the manipulated output (MV) will keep the previous good value and initiates an OOP alarm. However, the block mode is unchanged. PIO Not Ready is caused by the connected I/O module power failure, or by the initialization of Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL). When the causes of PIO Not Ready is resolved, the OOP alarm will vanish and the block will recover to its control activity. When a Regulatory Control Block is defined to give pulse width output, if data status of the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) becomes “PIO Not Ready” (NRDY), whether the block mode is tracking mode (TRK) or not, the block mode remains unchanged, the value immediately before the “PIO Not ready” (NRDY) is retained as the manipulated output value (MV), and an output open alarm (OOP) is activated.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-20

n Output Tracking in the Initialization Manual Mode When multiple Regulatory Control Blocks are in cascade connection, the manipulated output value (MV) of the upstream control loop is used as the setpoint value (SV) for downstream loop. If the cascade connection opens, the upstream loop enters to the initialization manual (IMAN) mode. When a function block is in the initialization manual mode (IMAN), the output tracking function force its manipulated output value (MV) to match the value of the output destination. In the case that the cascade connection is established via a selector switch, when the selector switch opens the cascade connection, the upstream loop changes to the initializing manual (IMAN) mode, when the connection restores, it tracks its MV to the destination only once. When the switch closes the cascade connection again, the downstream loop SV will change to bumpless cascade set value. When the initialization manual mode is invoked from the tracking (TRK) mode, the initialization manual mode prevails.

n Output Tracking in the IMAN Mode In the mode other than the initialization manual mode, a situation calling for the initializing process is referred as IMAN status. A function block under the following circumstances is referred as in the IMAN status: • When initialization manual condition established in a function block that has no initialization manual (IMAN) mode. • When the mode of a block returns from off-service (O/S) mode to manual (MAN), automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode. • On the first scan after returning from the initialization manual mode to the non-initialization manual mode. As the function block operates in the IMAN state, the output tracking is activated to match the manipulated output value (MV) to the value of the connection destination.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-21

C4.6 Output Range Tracking Output range tracking is a function that forces the scale High/Low limits of the manipulated output value (MV) to match those of the output destination, and the values of data items related to the manipulated output value (MV) are recalculated whenever there is a change in the scale High/Low limits.

n Output Range Tracking In a Regulatory Control Block, data are processed as engineering unit data. For this reason, whenever the manipulated output value (MV) of an upstream function block is used as the setpoint value (SV) of the downstream function block in a cascade connection, the scale High/ Low limits of the both blocks must be identical. The output range tracking function matches these ranges automatically. Output range tracking function will force the scale High/Low-limit setpoints of the manipulated output value (MV) to match those of the output destination, and recalculates the values of the data items related to the manipulated output value (MV) whenever there is a change in the scale High/Low limits. Output range tracking operates only when the OUT terminal of an upstream Regulatory Control Block is connected to the SET terminal of a downstream Regulatory Control Block. The following figure shows an example of connection in cascade where output range tracking works. PID MSH MSL

OUT SET

Output range tracking

PID CSV Data value SH SL C040601E.ai

Figure Output Range Tracking

For instance, if the output terminal’s connected destination is a PID controller block (PID) with the PV range of 0 to 1500 m³/h, the range of manipulated output values (MV) will also be 0 to 1500 m³/h. If the output destination is a process output, the range will be 0.0 to 100.0 % regardless of the output signal format. For instance, if the output destination is the analog output module, the manipulated output value (MV) will be 0.0 to 100.0 %.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-22

n Recalculation The manipulated output value (MV)’s scale High/Low limits are applied to the following data items related to the manipulated output value (MV). • Remote manipulated output value (RMV) • Preset manipulated output value (PMV) • Output High/Low limit indexes (OPHI and OPLO) • Reset signal value (RLV1 and RLV2) • Manipulated output High/Low limit setpoint values (MH and ML) These data will be recalculated with the manipulated output value (MV) whenever there is a change in the MV scale High/Low limits. The formula for recalculation is: DATA.n =

MSH.n-MSL.n MSH.o-MSL.o

DATA.o MSH.o MSL.o DATA.n MSH.n MSL.n

: : : : : :

• (DATA.o-MSL.o)+MSL.n

C040602E.ai

Target data before change High limit of MV scale before change Low limit of MV scale before change Target data after change High limit of MV scale after change Low limit of MV scale after change

IMPORTANT • In changing the output destination of the manipulated output value by means of switch blocks, etc., make sure that the downstream block does not have a conflict output. The engineering unit must be identical. If the range discrepancy exist, using Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) or Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) is required. • The output velocity limiter value is not automatically recalculated, even if there is a change in the MV scale High/Low limits. Use a Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) for switching, if the destination of the manipulated output applied with velocity limiter in effect. Thus, the recalculation for output velocity limit is unnecessary. • If a function block without output range tracking function, such as a Calculation Block, is placed in the middle of a cascade connection, it is necessary to set the MV scale High and Low limits for the upper stream regulatory control blocks. The MV scale High/Low limits can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. PID

LAG MSH MSL

OUT

IN

OUT SET PID CSV Data value SH SL

Output range tracking C040603E.ai

Figure A Cascade Connection via a Calculation Block

• If multiple controllers are connected in parallel in the downstream of a cascade control loop, use a Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT). Without using FOUT block multiple downstream control blocks cannot be chained by terminal connection.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-23

C4.7 Manipulated Output Index This function displays indexes that show the permissible range of the manually manipulated values at the normal operation. The manipulated output index is only available for Regulatory Control Blocks.

n Manipulated Output Index ▼ Index

This function displays two indexes in the manipulated output value (MV) scale on the operation monitoring window of the operation and monitoring function. These are called the manipulated output indexes. By setting these indexes at the operable limits of the manipulated output values (MV), they can be used as manipulation guides in the manual mode, or as guides for verifying normal status in the automatic mode. For a Regulatory Control Block with manipulated output value (MV), both the high output limit (OPHI) and low output limit (OPLO) indexes can be set on the tuning view. These limits are displayed in the operation and monitoring window of the operation and monitoring function. The indexes may be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Set Indexes: Selectable from “Yes” and “No.” Default is “Yes.”

n Setting Parameters of Manipulated Output Index The following items are the parameters of the manipulated output index: • High output limit index: In an engineering unit within MV scale range. Default is the high limit of the MV scale. • Low output limit index: In an engineering unit within MV scale range. Default is the low limit of the MV scale. FIC100

MAN NR

High output limit index

OPN

100.0

CLS

0.0

Low output limit index

Prohibit C040701E.ai

Figure Example of Manipulated Output Index Display

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-24

C4.8 Output Signal Conversion This process converts the result of calculation process into an output format for the output modules or other function blocks.

n Output Signal Conversion ▼ Output Signal Conversion

The output signal conversion may be used for the processes that are common to the Regulatory Control Blocks and the Calculation Blocks, and for the specific function blocks which have specific output process function.

SEE

ALSO

For details on each type of the output signal conversion processes, see the chapters from C4.8.1, “No-Conversion” through C4.8.4, “Output Signal Conversion of Logic Operation Blocks.”

n Output Signal Conversion Process Common to Regulatory Control Blocks Here is the outline of the output signal conversion processes that are common to the Regulatory Control Blocks:

l No-Conversion Output The manipulated output value (MV) resulted from the control-calculation process is NoConversion output.

l Pulse Width Output Conversion The changes of manipulated output value (∆MV) is output after converted into a pulse width signal.

l Communication Output Conversion The manipulated output value (MV) resulted from the control-calculation process is converted into the format compatible with the destination subsystem.

n Output Signal Conversion Process Common to Calculation Blocks Here is the outline of the output conversion processes that are common to the Calculation Blocks:

l No-Conversion Outputs The calculated output value (CPV) resulted from the control-calculation process is no-conversion output.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-25

l Communication Output Conversion The calculated output value (CPV) resulted from the control-calculation process is converted into the format compatible with the destination subsystem.

l Output Signal Conversion of the Logic Operation Blocks In Logic Operation Blocks (*1), the output is unconverted. *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n Output Signal Conversion Processes for Specific Function Blocks Here are the outlines of the conversion processes for different types of specific function blocks:

l Output Signal Conversion of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) One of the following types of output may be specified: 2-position status output; 2-position pulsive output; 3-position status output or 3-position pulsive output. • 2-position status output The process switches one contact point ON or OFF according to the manipulated output value (MV). • 3-position status output The process switches two contact points ON or OFF according to the manipulated output value (MV). • 2-position pulsive output The process switches one of the two contacts ON for one second according to the manipulated output value (MV). • 3-position pulsive output The process switches one of the three contacts ON for one second according to the manipulated output value (MV).

SEE

ALSO

For more information about output processing specific to MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E blocks, see the following: D1.17.3, “Output Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)”

l Output Signal Conversion of the Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF) and the Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E) The Two-position status output is used.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about output processing specific to ONOFF, ONOFF-E block, see the following: “n Two-Position Status Output” in chapter D1.8, “Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-26

l Output Signal Conversion of the Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G) and the Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE) The Three-position status output is used.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about output processing specific to ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE block, see the following: “n Three-Position Status Output” in chapter D1.9, “Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)”

l Output Signal Conversion, of the Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) This is applied for a time-proportioning ON/OFF output. Time-proportioning ON/OFF is a type of status output which set the contact output to ON via digital output module in proportional to the manipulated output value (MV) ON/OFF cycle.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about output processing specific to PID-TP block, see the following: “n Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Output” in chapter D1.10, “Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP)”

l Output Signal Conversion of Flow/Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BESTU2 and BESTU-3) The 2-position or 3-position status output is used.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about output processing specific to BSETU-2, BSETU-3 blocks, see the following: D1.20.3, “Output Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)”

l Output Signal Conversion of the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) A specific output process is used in the PTC block when it is connected to sequence blocks.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about output processing specific to PTC block, see the following: “n Output Signal Conversion of the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)” in chapter D1.32, “Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-27

C4.8.1

No-Conversion

The No-Conversion output is the data resulted from control computation process and given as output without signal conversion process. This can be used in the Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks. Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks behave differently when they are defined to use the No-Conversion output. Here describes the behaviors of the function blocks that are defined to use NoConversion output:

n No-Conversion in the Regulatory Control Block The No-Conversion output is to be connected to another function block or an analog output module. Here explains the both cases.

l Output to Another Function Block The data output is carried out by data set to the other function blocks or by terminal connection to the other function blocks. • Output by data set The manipulated output value (MV) is given from the OUT terminal can be used for data set, as well as the process variable (PV) from the OUT terminal of the input indicator block (PVI) or the input indicator block with deviation alarm (PVI-DV). The manipulated output value (MV) and process variable (PV) are no-conversion outputs, and in forms of engineering unit. • Output by terminal connection The manipulated output value (MV) is set in the cascade setpoint value (CSV) of the connection destination function block via the SET terminal of the connection destination function block and the OUT terminal. When an inter-terminal connection is possible at the IN terminal of the connection destination function block, the manipulated output value (MV) can be passed to the process variable (PV) or calculated input value (RV) of the connection destination function block via the IN terminal of the connection destination function block and the OUT terminal.

l Output to the Analog Output Module When connect the output to the analog output module, the tight-shut and full-open functions are automatically added to the manipulated output value (MV). The direction of analog output can also be defined. Output to a analog output module is in term of data set output. Manipulated output value (MV) of 0 to 100 % is given from the OUT terminal. The analog output module converts the 0 to 100 % the manipulated output value (MV) data into a 4 to 20 mA (or 1 to 5 V) output to drive a final control element, such as a control valve.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-28

l Analog Output Direction The analog output module outputs 4 to 20 mA (or 1 to 5 V) against the 0 to 100 % range of manipulated output values (MV). However, it can also output in the reverse direction, e.g.20 to 4 mA (or 5 to 1 V). The following figure shows the relationship between the manipulated output value (MV) and output current. The reverse settings are shown in a dotted line. The output direction can be defined on the Detailed setting items in the IOM Builder. (mA DC)

: Positive direction (Direct output)

20

: Negative direction (Reverse output)

Output current

4 0 50

100 (%) MV C040802E.ai

Figure Relationship between the Manipulated Output Value and Output Current

l Tight-shut and Full-Open In order to tightly shut a valve the manipulated output (MV) can be decreased to a value smaller than 0 % and fully open the valve, while to fully open the valve, the manipulated output (MV) can be increased to a value greater than 100 %. All the regulatory function blocks with manipulated output (MV) and manual mode (MAN) support the Tight-Shut and Full-Open output except the 13-Zone Program Set block. Tight-shut and Full-Open option can be defined on the detailed builder of the function block. On the function block detailed builder, the Output Value for Tight-shut (Ms) should be set with a value smaller than 0 % and the Output Value for Full-Open (Mf) should be set with a value greater than 100 %.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-29

The following figure illustrates the relationship between the manipulated output value and the actual output value: Actual Output Mf 100

Ms

0

100 %

MV C040801E.ai

Figure Tight-shut and Full-Open

On the Function Block Detail builder, the settings regarding tight-shut and full-open need to be defined. • Tightly-shut/fully-open: Choose “Yes” or “No.” The default setting is “Yes.” • Output Value for tight-shut (Ms): The actual output value for tight-shut when the manipulated output (MV) indicates 0 %. Setting range is -17.19 to 117.19 % (5 significant figures). By default, the tight-shut value is -17.19 %. • Output Value for full-open (Mf): The actual output value for full-open when the manipulated output (MV) indicates 100 %. Setting range is -17.19 to 117.19 % (5 significant figures). By default, the full-open value is 106.25 %. The current and voltage (mA and V) correspond to the actual output of full-open and the actual current output of tight-shut, varies according to the output direction of the analog output module (direct or reversed output).

SEE

ALSO

For more information about analog out direction see the following: “l Analog Output Direction”

Now we use a current output module as an example to explain how the actual output current (mA) corresponds to the actual tight-shut output (Ms) and actual full-open output (Mf). When the output direction of an analog output module is not reversed, the actual output current (mA) corresponds to the manipulated values (MV) 0 % and 100 % with 4 mA and 20 mA. Output Current = (0.16MV + 4) mA In this case, we can find out that when the default tight-shut MV is -17.19, the current output for tight-shut (Ms) will become 1.25 mA, while when the default full-open MV is 106.25, the current output for full-open (Mf) will become 21 mA. If the output direction of the analog output module is reversed, the actual output current (mA) corresponds to the manipulated values (MV) 0 % and 100 % with 20 mA and 4 mA. Output Current = (-0.16MV + 20) mA In this case, we can find out that when the default tight-shut MV is -17.19 %, the current output for tight-shut (Ms) will become 22.75 mA (corresponds to 117.19 %), while when the default full-open MV is 106.25, the current the current output for full-open (Mf) will become 3 mA (corresponds to -6.25 %).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-30

Direct

Output (mA) Current 21

1.25

22.75 20

20

4

-17.19 (Ms)

Reverse

Output (mA) Current

3 0

100 106.25 (Mf)

MV(%)

4

-17.19 (Ms)

0

100 106.25 (Mf)

MV(%) C040811E.ai

Figure Actual Output Current for Tight-Shut and Full-Open

IMPORTANT Even when the function block faceplate displays 0.0 % output, the actual output may not go to tight-shut. This phenomenon is caused due to the HIS trunks out the second digit after the decimal point of the displayed MV. Thus even the displayed MV is 0.0 % but the actual MV of FCS is still grater than 0.0 % since FCS does not truncate the MV. When manipulate a function block to ensure the block gives a tight-shut output, i.e., to make sure the MV actually becomes zero, and the following operations can be performed: • On the data entry dialog box, enter MV=0 directly • Keep pushing the [DEC] key on the operation keyboard for one more second or even longer time after the MV of the function block becomes 0.0 %

n No-Conversion in the Calculation Block When the No-Conversion output is specified, the connection destination will be another function block or an analog output module. Its use in different cases is explained below:

l Output to Another Function Block The output is given unconverted to another function block either by data set or terminal connection. The calculated output value (CPV) or the change in calculated output value (∆CPV) is noconversion output from the SUB terminal by data set.

l Output to an Analog Output Module Calculation output value (CPV) is converted to 0 to 100 % on the CPV scale and output through the OUT or SUB terminal. The range of the output, converted in terms of 0 to 100 % will be limited to 0 to 100 %. Output terminals other than OUT and SUB give the output value (CPVn) unconverted, regardless of the destination type.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-31

C4.8.2

Pulse Width Output Conversion

This conversion method converts the changes in manipulated output value (∆MV) into a pulse width signal. It is used for the contact output module to open and close the motoroperated valve through the contacts. The conversion to pulse width output is available only in the Regulatory Control Blocks.

n Pulse Width Output Conversion In this conversion method, the changes in manipulated variable (∆MV) are converted into a pulse width signal. The degree of opening for the motor-operated valve can be manipulated by outputting this pulse width signal from the contact output module as two contact outputs (UP, DOWN) corresponding to the sign of the manipulated variable (∆MV). Furthermore, the displayed manipulated output value (MV) for the pulse width output conversion and the output action for increasing or decreasing the manipulated output value are different depending on the feedback input signal availability. Table

Regulatory Control Blocks where Pulse width Output Conversion is Available With feedback input

Without feedback input

PID Controller Block (PID)

x

x

Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)

x

x

PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)

x

PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR)

x

Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)

x

x

Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)

x

x

Ratio Set Block (RATIO)

x

Manual Loader Block (MLD, MLD-PVI and MLD-SW)

x

Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)

x

Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)

x

Type of regulatory control block

C040803E.ai

x: available Blank: not available

IMPORTANT If a function block is applied with pulse-width output but no feedback of valve position, the control output action of the function should be specified as Velocity Type. If the function block control output action is specified as Positional Type, the output may not be correct. On the Function block detail builder, in the [Output] tab, the output type can be selected for the [Control Calculation Output Type] item. For the pulse-width output, when the output is Velocity Type, the manipulated output change (∆MV) will be output. For the pulse-width output, when the output is Positional Type, the difference between the calculated manipulated output value (MV) and the feedback value will be output.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-32

l Computational Expression for Pulse Width The pulse width of pulse signal is given by the following computational expression: Tout=Pf •

∆MV 100

Tout Pf ∆MV

C040804E.ai

: : :

Output pulse width (sec.) Pulse width stroke value (sec.) Change in manipulated output (%)

The stroke of the pulse width is the pulse width in time that is required to operate the final control element from full-closed to full-opened state. In the automatic operation, the output pulse width can not be defined greater than the control period time. The full stroke value is defined using the Function Block Detail Builder. • Full stroke value: The setting range is 0.00 to 7200.00 (sec.). Default is 0.00 sec.

l Minimum Output Width The final control element may not move if the pulse width signal is below a specific value because of the mechanical characteristics of the object. To prevent this happens, the minimum output width is utilized that, when a pulse width smaller than the minimum output width, this pulse is withheld to add to the next pulse, until the pulse width becomes wider than the minimum output value. A pulse width of fractional value below the output resolution (10 ms) will also be added to the next output. The minimum pulse width is only valid in automatic operation. The minimum pulse width is defined through the Function Block Detail Builder. • The minimum pulse width: Setting range is 0.00 to 7200.00 (sec.). Default is 0.00 sec.

l Backlash Compensation When the output reverses from the previous direction, a compensation value is added to the calculated output to compensate the backlash of the final control element. The backlash compensation is set through the Function Block Detail Builder. • Backlash compensation value: Setting range is 0.00 to 7200.00 (sec.). Default is 0.00 sec.

l Resetting Pulse Width If the pulse width reset switch (RSW) is turned ON from the sequence control block or others, the pulse width signal being output is reset immediately. The pulse width reset switch returns to OFF after resetting the pulse width signal. In the case of automatic operation (AUT, CAS and RCAS), no pulse width signal will be output until the next control period after reset the pulse width.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-33

n Output Contacts The output contacts are the contacts that drive final control elements, such as an motor-operated valve. There are two types of contacts: the first contact and the second contact. The terminal number for the first contact is defined through the Function Block Detail Builder. An odd terminal number in the digital output module should be assigned for the first contact. The second contact is automatically assigned with the succeeding terminal number of the first contact number.

l The First Contact The first contact is called “UP contact” and activated when the change in manipulated output (∆MV) is a positive value. If the feedback input signal is defined to indicate the valve opening, it increases when the UP contact is ON.

l The Second Contact The second contact is called “DOWN contact” and is activated when the change in manipulated output (∆MV) is a negative value. If the feedback input signal is defined to indicate the valve opening, it decreases when the DOWN contact is ON.

n Remote/Local Switch The on-site operation panel compatible with the pulse-width output may have an operation button for local control. If you wish to perform on-site operation, change the remote/local switch on the on-site operation panel to local to stop output from the FCS, then output the on-site operation button signal. When changing the switch between remote and local, the Regulatory Control Block receives the remote/local switching contact signal in the tracking switch input connection terminal (TSI). When this input turns ON, the tracking switch (TSW) turns ON and the Regulatory Control Block is set to the tracking (TRK) mode. The operation upon switching between the remote and local modes is explained below.

l Operation Upon Switching from Remote Mode to Local Mode • The on-site operation is enabled. • If the feedback input is provided, the feedback input value will be displayed as the manipulated output value (MV). If no feedback defined, a 50 % (fixed) value is displayed as the manipulated output value (MV). • Only the pulse width being output at the time the mode is switched continuous till the pulse output completed. • The block mode is switched to the tracking (TRK) mode.

l Operation Upon Switching from Local Mode to Remote Mode (Other Than TRK Mode) • The calculated output value of the Regulatory Control Block becomes valid. • If the feedback input is provided, the calculated output value will be displayed as the manipulated output value (MV) immediately after switching, and thereafter, the feedback input value will be displayed as the manipulated output value (MV). • The pulse width signal being output at the time the mode is switched will be reset.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-34

n Feedback Input The feedback input communicates to the Regulatory Control Block to notify the absolute value of the manipulated output (MV), e.g. the opening of the valve connected as the final control element. The pulse width output outputs the change in manipulated output (∆MV). The absolute value of the manipulated output (MV) is not known. The feedback signal from the final control element is connected to the tracking signal input terminal (TIN) of the Regulatory Control Block. The feedback signal is provided or not provided decide how the manipulated output value (MV) display and how the manipulated output behaves to increase or decrease the output. The pulse width output behavior is described in the following table: Table

Pulse width Output Operation Item

Remote MV mode display

With feedback input

Without feedback input

AUT Feedback input value mode

During UP pulse output: Changes in +direction During DOWN pulse output: Changes in -direction While pulse is stopped: MV is held. (*1)

During pulse output: MAN Manual set point value mode While pulse is stopped: Feedback input value

During UP pulse output: Changes in +direction During DOWN pulse output: Changes in -direction While pulse is stopped: 50 %

Local mode Pulse output status on depressing INC/DEC key

Feedback input value

50 %

Pulse equivalent to ∆MV is output. Pulse equivalent to ∆MV However, when MV reaches 0 or 100 %, pulse continues is output to output until the INC/DEC operation is ended.(*2) C040805E.ai

*1: *2:

If the pulse width output of PID is specified to be CENTUM V compatible, the MV displays at the position of 50 % when no pulse is output. When MV reaches 0 or 100 %, the pulse output will stop right after the INC/DEC operation is ended. The actual pulse output is irrelevant to the ∆MV manipulated by the INC/DEC operation.

l No Feedback, Pulse Width Output MV at AUT Mode ▼ PID Pulse Width Output

If no feedback is set, the MV displays in the following two styles at the AUT mode. • Hold Previous MV When no pulse is output (or the output pulse width smaller than threshold), the displayed MV keeps the previous MV. When pulse output restarts, if the restarted output is in the same direction of the previous output, the displayed MV equals to the previous MV plus the ∆MV for increment or previous MV minus the ∆MV for decrement. However, if the restarted output is in reversed direction, the displayed MV equals to 50 % plus or minus the ∆MV for increment or decrement. • Display 50 % MV (CENTUM-V Compatible) When no pulse is output (or the output pulse width smaller than threshold), the displayed MV returns to 50 %. When pulse output restarts, the displayed MV equals to the 50 % plus the ∆MV for increment or 50 % minus the ∆MV for decrement. Whenever the ∆MV reverses from positive to negative or vice versa, the displayed MV returns to 50 % then plus or minus the ∆MV for increment or decrement respectively. The MV display style when no feedback for pulse width output and the block is at AUT mode can be set on FCS properties sheet. Check the check box of [CENTUM-V compatible MV Display] in the column of [PID Pulse Width Output]. When this option is checked, the displayed MV returns to 50 % when no pulse is output. Otherwise, the displayed MV keeps the previous MV. This check box is unchecked by default. IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-35

l An Example of Pulse Width Output Conversion Operation with Feedback Signal Output limiter

AUT MV MAN

Regulatory Control Block

Process input/output section

Output velocity limiter

Pulse width output conversion

TIN

LOCAL OUT REM TSI

Analog input module

Digital input module

Digital output module Terminal n

Terminal n +1

Motor-operated valve - remote/local UP

Feedback slide resistor

DOWN

Control output

C040806E.ai

Figure Schematic Diagram for Pulse Width Output Signal with Feedback Input

During automatic operation, the feedback input value which indicates how far the valve is open is displayed as the manipulated output value (MV). When the manipulated output value (MV) from the operation and monitoring function is changed during manual operation, the pulse width corresponding to the change is output. The manipulated output value (MV) displays the manipulated output value (MV) set manually during pulse width output, and when output is complete it displays the feedback input value. The timing chart for manual operation is shown below: Indication of manipulated output value (MV)

Manually set value for manipulated output value 100 %

50 %

The value may be slightly off since the feedback input value is displayed after the pulse width output is complete.

∆MV Feedback value

Manual operation using the keys

0%

Feedback value

Feedback value

Time

ON Time

ON Pulse width output (UP)

Time

∆MV TF • 100 TF: Full stroke value

C040807E.ai

Figure Timing Chart for Manual Operation

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-36

l An Example of Pulse Width Output Conversion Operation without Feedback AUT

LOCAL Output velocity limiter

MV MAN

Pulse width output conversion

OUT REM TSI

Regulatory Control Block

Contact input module

Contact output module Terminal n Terminal n+1

Motor-operated valve - remote/local UP

DOWN

Control output C040808E.ai

Figure Schematic Diagram of Pulse Width Output Signal Conversion without Feedback Input

The valve opening will not be displayed since there is no feedback signal. The manipulated output value (MV) in the automatic operation is displayed by UP/DOWN of the pulse width output.

*1:

When Up:

manipulated output value (MV) increases.

When DOWN:

manipulated output value (MV) decreases.

No output:

manipulated output value (MV) stays unchanged. (*1)



When the PID pulse width output is specified as CENTUM V compatible, the displayed MV returns to 50 % when no pulse is output.

The timing chart for manual operation is shown below: 100 % Indication of manipulated output value (MV) 50 %

100 %

∆MV

Indication of manipulated output value (MV) 50 % Time

0%

Time 0% ON

Time

Manual operation using the keys

Time

Pulse width output (UP)

∆MV TF • 100 TF: Full stroke value (a) When moving 50 % or less of the full span

ON Manual operation using the keys

Time

Time

Pulse width output (DOWN) TF • 0.5 TF: Full stroke value

Output is stopped beyond this point on the instant the manual operation is terminated.

(b) When moving 50 % or above of the full span C040809E.ai

Figure Timing Chart for Manual Operation

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-37

C4.8.3

Communication Output Conversion

The communication output conversion converts the data resulted from control computation into a format that can be output to the destination subsystem. This conversion method is available for the Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks. It behaves differently for Regulatory Control Block and Calculation Block.

n Communication Output Conversion The data value to be converted to the communication output will be the calculated output value (MV) and calculated output value (CPV) on the regulatory control and Calculation Blocks, respectively. The computational expression for the communication output conversion is shown below: OUT=

1 GAIN OUT GAIN BIAS

• (MV-BIAS) : : :

C040810E.ai

Subsystem output value Data conversion gain Data conversion bias

The data conversion gain and bias are set through the function block detail definition builder. • Data Conversion Gain: Specify a floating-decimal constant, a 9-digit number including the sign and decimal point. Default is 1.000. • Data Conversion Bias: Specify a floating-decimal constant, a 9-digit number including the sign and decimal point. Default is 0.000.

TIP

If a function block is defined with communication output conversion, the following restrictions will be applied: • Output reversal (i.e., to reverse the analog output signal) will not be supported. • Though the output velocity limiter and the velocity type output can be applied to controller blocks, however the output velocity limiter and the velocity type output may not function properly in the subsystem since the subsystem communication takes longer time. For an example, when the output of a controller block is limited to 1 % per second, if the communication period is 3-seconds, the output limiter to the subsystem will become 3 % per three seconds.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4.8.4

C4-38

Output Signal Conversion of Logic Operation Blocks

The following paragraph explains the output signal conversion of Logic Operation Blocks (*1) . *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n Output Signal Conversion of Logic Operation Blocks The logic calculated value (CPV) for the output to the connection destination connected to the OUT terminal is passed to the destination block without any output processing. The data type of calculated value is integer type.

TIP

In bitwise logic operation blocks, CPV is displayed in 8 digits hexadecimal.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-39

C4.9 Auxiliary Output The auxiliary output is used when output a signal to a destination other than the final control element. The signal is often used as compensation data to other function blocks, or to the indicator outside of the FCS, etc. The operation of auxiliary output is different between the Regulatory Control Block and the Calculation Block. This section explains the operation in the auxiliary output.

n Auxiliary Output from the Regulatory Control Block ▼ Auxiliary Output

The auxiliary output is used when output a signal through the SUB terminal to a destination other than the final control element. The signal is often used as compensation data to other function blocks, or to the indicator outside of the FCS, etc. In the Regulatory Control Blocks, the process variable (PV), change in process variable (∆PV), manipulated output value (MV), or the change in manipulated output value (∆MV) is output via the SUB terminal. The connection method is the data setting. The connection destinations of the SUB terminal are indicated below. • Process output • Data item of other function block

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-40

In function blocks with the output compensation function, the change of MV before the output compensation is considered to be the change in manipulated output value (∆MV). Even if the output of the auxiliary output becomes open, the alarm status does not change to an output open alarm (OOP). The operation of the auxiliary output is determined by the settings for the auxiliary output builder definition items “Output Data” and “Output Type.” The auxiliary output builder definition items “Output Data” and “Output Type” are set with the Function Block Detail Builder. Table

Selection List and Default Values for Output Data of Auxiliary Output Name of the subject function block

Selection list

Default value

Manual Loader Block (MLD) Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)

[MV] [∆MV]

[MV]

Input Indicator Block (PVI) Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF) Enhansed Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E) 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G) Enhansed Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE) Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)

[PV] [∆PV]

[PV]

Regulatory control blocks other than those listed above

[MV] [∆MV] [PV] [∆PV]

[PV] C040901E.ai

• Output Type: Selectable from “Positional Output Action” and “Velocity Output Action.” Default is “Positional Output Action.” When the output action for auxiliary output is set to “Positional Output Action,” the output values (MV, ∆MV, PV, or ∆PV) can be set in the connection destination as it is. Also, when set to the “Velocity Output Action” type, the value read back from the connection destination is added to the output value and set in the connection destination.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-41

l When the Connection Destination is a Process I/O The output value is converted to a percentage by the following arithmetic expression to output. • When the auxiliary output is process variable (PV): Output value=

PV-SL SH-SL

•100.0 C040902E.ai

• When the auxiliary output is change in process variable (∆PV): Output value=

∆PV SH-SL

•100.0 C040903E.ai

• When the auxiliary output is manipulated output value (MV): Output value=

MV-MSL MSH-MSL

•100.0

C040904E.ai

• When the auxiliary output is change in manipulated output value (∆MV): Output value=

∆MV MSH-MSL

•100.0

C040905E.ai

l When the Connection Destination is a Data Item of the Function Block The output value is output from the SUB terminal without any conversion. When the output action is set to positional type, the output value (PV, ∆PV, MV or ∆MV) is set to the connection destination as it is, whereas for the velocity type, the output value is added to the readback value from the connection destination and set to the connection destination. Table

Relationship between the I/O Connection Methods and Output Action

Output connection method Process output Data setting to the function block

Output value PV, ∆PV MV, ∆MV

Output action Positional type

Velocity type

x x

x C040906E.ai

x: Allowed Blank: Not allowed

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-42

n Auxiliary Output from the Calculation Block ▼ Auxiliary Output

A Calculation Block outputs the calculated output variable (CPV) or change in the calculated output value (∆CPV) through its SUB terminal. A batch set block with input indicator (DSET-PVI) can output the data setpoint (SV) and the change in data setpoint (∆SV) as well as the calculated output variable (CPV) and the change in calculated output variable (∆CPV). The output value and output action of auxiliary output can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder. The action of the auxiliary output is determined by the settings of the auxiliary output builder definition item “Output Data” and “Output Type.” The auxiliary output builder definition items “Output Data” and “Output Type” are set with the Function Block Detail Builder. • Output Data: Selectable from “CPV” and “∆CPV.” However, in the case of the DSET-PVI block, it is selectable from “CPV,” “∆CPV,” “SV” and “∆SV.” Default is “CPV.” • Output Type: Selectable from “Positional Output Action” and “Velocity Output Action” Default is “Positional Output Action.” When the “Positional Output Action” is defined for output action, the output value (CPV, ∆CPV, SV or ∆SV) is set to the connection destination without change, whereas the output value is added to the readback value from the connection destination and set to the connection destination when set to the “Velocity Output Action.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-43

C4.10 Output Processing in Unsteady State In the unsteady state, the Calculation Block and the Regulatoly Control Block execute different output processing from that in the usual status. The unsteady state includes the calibration (CAL) status and the bad data status (BAD) .

n Operation during Calibration (CAL) When the data status of the calculated output value (CPV) of the calculation block is in calibration (CAL), output from the secondary terminals (CPV1 to CPVn) is stopped. Manual setting of the calculated output value (CPV) will be enabled and the calculated output value (CPV) output will be available as usual.

n Auxiliary Output (∆PV) When PV Data Status is BAD : KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 ▼ dPV/dCPV Output from SUB Becomes Zero Right After IOP

According to the [PV Overshoot] setting of the Regulatory Controller Block set on the Function Block Detail Builder, the PV will overshoot when the data status becomes bad (BAD). Under such circumstance, the ∆PV output from the SUB terminal can be set to output either 0 or the actual delta PV i.e. the increment or decrement between the current-scan PV and the previous-scan PV. For the DPV output, an option [dPV/dCPV Output from SUB Becomes Zero Right After IOP] can be checked on FCS Properties sheet. When the option is checked, the DPV output becomes 0 immediately after IOP. Otherwise, the actual DPV will be output from the SUB terminal. By default, this option is not checked.

n Calculation Output and Auxiliary Output (CPV, ∆CPV) When CPV Data Status is BAD When the calculation input value is abnormal or when an error occurs during the calculation processing, the data status of the calculated output value (CPV) becomes BAD (bad data value) and the previous value is retained, and the connected destination of OUT terminal will hold this retained previous value. However, the ∆CPV output from the SUB terminal will become 0 immediately. Regardless the [PV Overshoot] setting on the Function Block Detail Builder, the output from the OUT terminal will not be affected when the calculation input (RV) becomes abnormal. If the output from the SUB terminal is CPV, the output will be the value in accordance with the [PV Overshoot] setting. If the output from the SUB terminal is ∆CPV, the output will be either the actual ∆CPV.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-44

n Auxiliary Output (∆CPV) When CPV Data Status is Bad : KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 ▼ dPV/dCPV Output from SUB Becomes Zero Right After IOP

According to the [PV Overshoot] setting of the Regulatory Controller Block set on the Function Block Detail Builder, when the data status becomes bad (BAD), the ∆CPV output from the SUB terminal can be set to output either 0 or the actual delta CPV i.e. the increment or decrement between the current-scan CPV and the previous-scan CPV. For the DCPV output from SUB terminal, an option [dPV/dCPV Output from SUB Becomes Zero Right After IOP] can be checked on FCS Properties sheet. When the option is checked, the DCPV output from SUB becomes 0 immediately after IOP. Otherwise, the actual DCPV will be output from the SUB terminal. By default, this option is not checked. However, for the calculation block that the setting item [Calculated Input Value Error Detected] is specified for no reaction on the error, the DCPV output terminal will be the actual delta CPV value in accordance with the [PV Overshoot] setting even if the option [dPV/dCPV Output from SUB Becomes Zero Right After IOP] is checked.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about input signal conversion on erroneous calculation inputs, see the following: “n Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection” in chapter C3.6.2, “Input Processing of the Calculation Block in Unsteady State”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-45

C4.11 CPV Pushback The CPV pushback is a function to prevent from the abrupt change of the output when a cascade loop connection switched from open to close.

n CPV Pushback The CPV pushback is a function that use the calculated output value (CPV) obtained from tracking the downstream function block in cascade to calculate back the calculated input value (RV) for the upstream function block to track. The CPV pushback is used to prevent the process output from abrupt changes when the Analog Calculation Block receives output signal from a Controller Block (such as a PID block) via its IN terminal by terminal connection, and the calculated output value (CPV) outputs to a Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) or etc. The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is defined to “YES.”

SEE

ALSO

For the setting of the output value tracking, see the following: C4.5, “Output Tracking”

n CPV Pushback Calculation The calculations shown below are performed during a CPV pushback. Table

CPV Pushback Calculations

Type

Calculation formula CPV

SQRT

RV=

EXP

RV=In

LAG INTEG LD LDLAG DLAY

RV=

FUNC-VAR

GAIN CPV GAIN

CPV GAIN

2

(*1)

(*2)

(*1)

RV is the value of X axis coordinate calculated by inputting for the Y axis the value resulting from dividing CPV by GAIN (*1). C041101E.ai

*1: *2:

When GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the previous calculated input value (RV) is retained. When (CPV/GAIN) ≤ 0, the previous calculated input value (RV) is retained.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-46

n Example of CPV Pushback CPV pushback f-1 OUT

MV

IN

Regulatory control block

RV

OUT

CPV

f

Analog calculation block

(PID) Data status [CND]

Terminal connection

Data connection (setting)

CSV

AUT

SV MAN

Regulatory control block (MLD-SW) C041102E.ai

Figure Example of CPV Pushback

In the above control loop, if the Calculation Block in the middle of the loop has not the CPV pushback, the upstream PID block can not track the downstream block MLD-SW when the MLD-SW is switched to MAN mode. Thus when the MLD-SW block is switched to AUT mode the bumps occurs to the cascade setting value (CSV) of the MLD-SW block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-47

The CPV pushback function monitors the down stream block status. When tracking is required, it uses calculated output value (CPV) tracked from the downstream block to calculate back the calculated input value (RV) for upstream block to track. Examples of the CPV pushback operations are as follows: • When the data status of the setting destination is CND, this function equalize the calculated output value (CPV) to the data value of the setting destination (Output tracking function). • When tracking, a reverse calculation is carried out to calculate the calculated input value (RV) from the calculated output value (CPV) obtained via tracking. • As the figure shows, the CPV pushback function is activated only when a loop is established via terminal connection between the IN terminal (such as a switch function block placed before the destination block) and the OUT terminal of a controller block. Table

Calculation Blocks with CPV Pushback Function

Block type

Model name

Name

SQRT

Square Root Block

EXP

Exponential Block

LAG

First-Order Lag Block

INTEG

Integration Block

Analog calculation block LD

Derivative Block

LDLAG

Lead/Lag Block

DLAY

Dead-Time Block

FUNC-VAR

Variable Line-Segment Function Block C041103E.ai

• The CPV pushback function is not available in Calculation Blocks with multiple calculation input values such as the ADD (Addition) block and TPCFL (Temperature and pressure correction) block, as well as those which cannot uniquely define a calculated output value from a calculation input value such as the RAMP block, since reverse calculation is impossible.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C4-48

C4.12 Output Processing in Sequence Connection The pulse count block (PTC) as well as the blocks that can be connected in sequence connection may perform the status manipulation to the output destination function block specified in the connected OUT terminal when the logic value required becomes true.

n Output Processing in Sequence Connection The PTC block, logic operation block (*1) and CALCU, CALCU-C blocks can use sequence connection for the I/O connection method. The “status manipulation” function based on output signals can be used as special output processing when the logic operation block and CALCU, CALCU-C blocks use sequence connection. *1:

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

n Status Manipulation In the case of sequence connection, the I/O connection information indicated below is held in the output terminal (OUT, Jn): • Information that identifies the connection destination, such as tag name, user definition label name, terminal number, and element number • Information that identifies data item • Information that shows action specifications The information based on this I/O connection information and the logical value obtained by the PTC block, logic operation block (*1) or a CALCU, CALCU-C block, the status manipulations indicated by the output connection information that is written to the OUT terminal are performed, for the output destination function block that is also indicated by the output connection information when the required logic value in the block becomes true. *1:

SEE

ALSO

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

For the action specification on the output connection information, see the chapters from D3.3.10, “Action Signal Description : Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and I/O Data” through D3.3.12, “Syntax for Action Signal Description : Status Manipulation of Sequence Table from Logic Chart.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-1

C5. Alarm Processing – FCS The FCS alarm processing includes an alarm detection function for detecting any abnormality in the process and an alarm notification function for giving notification of the detection results.

n Functional Structure of the Alarm Processing Alarm processing is a function that detects any abnormalities in the process from values such as the process variable (PV) and manipulated output value (MV), then reflects this in the function block alarm status while at the same time consolidating the detection results and giving notification of these to the operation and monitoring function as a message. Alarm processing is found in each function block. Alarm processing consists mainly of the following two functions. • “Alarm detection function,” which detects any abnormality in the process • “Alarm notification function,” which notifies the operation and monitoring function of the detection result Function block Repeated warning alarm Alarm setpoint values

Process data

Alarm detection function

Alarm status

Alarm notification function

Alarm detection settings

Alarm acknowledgment state

Alarm inhibition

Alarm message

Acknowledgment operation Alarm setpoint values: Individual data items relating to the alarm settings (PH, PL, etc.) Alarm status: Data item that indicates the status of the function blocks (ALRM) Alarm acknowledgment state: Data items that indicate the alarm flashing status (ALFS) C050001E.ai

Figure Function Structure of the Alarm Processing

The following functions act as auxiliary functions to the alarm function and alarm notification function. • Alarm detection stop function • Alarm inhibition function • Alarm operation

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-2

n Alarm Detection Functions This is a function that detects any abnormality in the process from values such as process variables (PV) and manipulated output values (MV). In order to detect anomalies in the process, the alarm detection function performs the following alarm checks. • Input open alarm check • Input error alarm check • Input high-high and low-low limit alarm check • Input high and low limit alarm check • Input velocity alarm check • Deviation alarm check • Output open alarm check • Output failure alarm check • Output high and low limit alarm check • Connection failure alarm check The alarm check can be executed among the detection functions varies by the function block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-3

n Alarm Detection Functions of Certain Function Blocks Certain function blocks perform a special alarm check that differs from other function blocks. These particular alarm checks are indicated below.

l Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) • Cumulative deviation alarm check • Control error alarm check

SEE

ALSO

For more information about alarm check specific to PI-Blend block, see the followings in D1.12, “Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)”: “n Cumulative Deviation Alarm Check” “n Control Error Alarm Check”

l Flow/weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2,BSETU-3) • Pre-batch alarm check • Batch end alarm check • Cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm check • Leak alarm check • Missing pulse alarm check (BSETU-2 only) • Flowrate alarm check (BSETU-2) • Flowrate alarm check (BSETU-3) • Priority order for alarm displays specific to the batch set block for flowrate measurement • Priority order for alarm displays specific to the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block

SEE

ALSO

• For more information about alarm check of BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks, see the following: D1.20.4, “Alarm Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)” • For more information about alarm check of BSETU-2 block, see the followings in D1.21, “Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)”: “n Missing Pulse Alarm Check” “n Flowrate Alarm Check” “n Alarm Display Priority of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)” • For more information about alarm check of BSETU-3 block, see the following: D1.22.2, “ Alarm Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-4

l Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) • Feedback input high and low limit check • Thermal trip alarm check • Interlock alarm check • Answerback inconsistency alarm • Answerback error alarm

SEE

ALSO

For more information about alarm check of MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E blocks, see the following: D1.17.4, “ Alarm Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)”

l Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) • Deviation alarm check

SEE

ALSO

For more information about alarm check of VELLIM block, see the following: “n Deviation Alarm Check” in D1.23, “Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)”

l Switch Instrument Block (SI-2, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-22P), Enhanced Switch Instrument Block (SI-2E, SIO-21E,SIO-22E,SIO-22PE) • Answerback inconsistency alarm (Same function as the motor control operation block) • Answerback error alarm (Same function as the motor control operation block)

SEE

ALSO

For more information about alarm check of Switch Instrument blocks, and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block, see the followings in D3.4,“Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block”: “n Answerback Check” “n Actions of Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm Check”

l General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU, CALCU-C) • Computation error alarm

SEE

ALSO

For more information about alarm check of CALCU and CALCU-C blocks, see the following: “n Computation Error Alarm Check” in D2.33, “General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-5

n Alarm Notification Functions This is a function that summarizes the detection made by the alarm detection function and reports the summary to the operation and monitoring function as a message. The types of messages reported to the operation and monitoring function are listed below. • Process alarm messages • System alarm messages

n Alarm Detection Stop Function This is a function that sets whether the alarm detection function for each process alarm is “Detect enabled” or “Detect disabled.”

n Alarm Inhibition Function This is a function that temporarily inhibits the process alarm message operation with the alarm detection function still operative.

n Alarm Operation This is a function that enables the alarm settings to be specified by engineers or operators. The following categories can be set. • Classification of the alarm operation based on alarm priority level • Specification of the alarm processing level

n Alarm Checks that are Possible for Each Function Block The alarm checks that are possible differ for each function block.

SEE

ALSO

• For more information about alarm check items of regulatory control blocks, see the following: “n Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control” in D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For more information about alarm check items of calculation blocks, see the following: “n Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block” in D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output Processing and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For more information about alarm check items of sequence control blocks, see the following: D3.1.1, “Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-6

C5.1 Input Open Alarm Check The input open alarm check may generate an alarm to indicate that the input signal is in high limit or low limit input open alarming status (IOP, IOP-).

n Operation of the Input Open Alarm Check ▼ Input Open Alarm

The input open alarm check is a function that determines whether the input values read from the field by the I/O module is out of the range of the high and low limit input open detection setpoint values. The high-limit input open alarm (IOP) is initiated when it is determined that the input value exceeds the input open high detection setpoint value. Similarly, the low-limit input open alarm (IOP-) is initiated when the input value is below the low-limit input open detection setpoint value. The high and low limit input open alarm (IOP, IOP-) indicates that a failure such as severed wires in the detection terminal or transmitter has occurred. The Input open alarm check is performed by the I/O module. The function blocks that are connected directly to the I/O module receives the check results from the I/O module as a data status, and the high and low limit input open alarm is activated or recovered. Even in the function blocks not directly connected to the I/O module, when the data for the cause of the high and low limit input open alarm is accessed, the high and low limit input open alarm is activated. For a pair of redundant modules, the high and low limit input open alarm is initiated when a high and low limit input open alarm is detected from both modules. When the conditions for the alarm activation are not satisfied, the system recovers from the high and low limit input open alarm. For the function blocks connected to an input/output module that is undergoing online maintenance, it is possible to specify whether to set the function blocks to input open (IOP) or not. This can be specified for each FCS. To set the function blocks to IOP, check the item “IOP Occurs in Connected Blocks” in the filed of “IOM Online Updating” on the Constant tab of the FCS property sheet. (*2)

TIP

• In the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3 and MC-3E), an input open alarm check is conducted for the feedback input. • When the input terminal connection for a Logic Operation Block (*1) and General-Purpose Calculation Block is a sequence connection, no input open check is conducted.

*1: *2:

SEE

ALSO

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS. Can only be specified in LFCS2, LFCS, KFCS2, KFCS and FFCS. In KFCS2, KFCS and FFCS, the setting item “IOM Online Updating” specifies the action of the IOM when the initial load setting item, among many other IOM setting items, is changed online.

For more information about KFCS2, KFCS or FFCS I/O Modules’ initial loading items, see the following: “n Operation of the I/O Module when Online Download to the I/O Module is Executed : KFCS2/KFCS/ FFCS” in B3.5, “Operation of I/O Module when Downloading is Performed”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-7

n The Operation of the Function Block during Alarm State Initiated by the Input Open Alarm Check The behavior of the function block when the high and low limit input open alarm (IOP, IOP-) initiated by the Input open alarm check is described below. • Analog input process such as square root extraction, pulse input conversion, digital filters, and totalizer functions are disabled. • The value before alarms occurrence is latched as a process variable (PV). However, if the PV overshoot is defined, the process variables (PV) are overshot to the high or low limit of the PV range. • For regulatory control blocks that have the MAN fallback function, the MAN fallback function is activated and the block mode is switched to manual (MAN) mode.

n Settings for the Input Open Alarm Check Input open alarm check types and the high and low limit input open detection level can be set.

l Input Open Alarm Check Types The setting of the input open alarm check type can be defined in the “input open alarm” on the Function Block Detail Builder. The types of input open alarm checks are listed below. The default setting is “both input open alarms enabled.” • Both input open alarms enabled • High limit open alarms enabled • Low limit input open alarms enabled • Input open alarms disabled

l High and Low Limit Input Open Detection Level The high and low limit input open detection level can be defined in the IOM Builder Detail Setting. • High-limit input open detection level: The value shall be within the range between -1000.0 to 1000.0 % The default setting is 106.3 % • Low-limit input open detection level: The value shall be within the range between -1000.0 to 1000.0 % The default setting is -6.3 %

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-8

n Inhibit IOP Reactions : KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 ▼ Inhibit IOP Reactions

When the Regulatory Controller Block encounters an input open alarm (IOP, IOP-), the block reactions upon IOP can be inhibited so as the block can ignore the IOP alarm and continues the current control actions without changing the data status into BAD or performing MAN Fallback. If the IOP alarm reactions are inhibited, the block will behave as follows upon IOP: • The data status of measurement value (PV) will be kept as normal (NR) not indicated as a bad value (BAD). However, this inhibition only valid for IOP and IOP- alarms, the data status will become bad by other abnormalities. • The block will continue its control actions without performing MAN Fallback. • The measurement value (PV) will become the value in accordance with the setting of [PV Overshoot]. • If the measurement value (PV) is in calibration status (CAL), the PV will keep the value set from HIS. • Input processing and digital filter will not function. • Control calculation and totalization will continue. • Input velocity check will continue • According to the Input Open Alarm setting, input open alarm as well as other process alarms will be initiated. The inhibition of the IOP reactions can be set on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Inhibit IOP Reactions: Choose [Valid] or [Invalid]. The default is [Invalid]. The following function blocks can be set to inhibit the IOP alarm reactions: PVI, PVI-DV, PID, PI-HLD, ONOFF-E, ONOFF-GE, PID-STC, RATIO Moreover, this inhibition is valid only for the input open alarm (IOP, IOP-) of the measurement value (PV), not other signals. For example, if the compensation input (VN) of a PID controller becomes open (IOP), the PID controller will perform MAN fallback since this inhibition is not valid to the IOP of VN.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-9

C5.2 Input Error Alarm Check The input error alarm check determines whether the data status of the input value is invalid (BAD). When the data is invalid (BAD), the high-limit input open alarm (IOP) is activated.

n The Actions of Input Error Alarm Check The input error alarm check is a function that determines whether the data status of the input value is invalid (BAD). When it is determined that the data status of the input value is invalid (BAD), the high-limit input open alarm (IOP) is activated. The system recovers from the alarming state when the data status value is no longer invalid (BAD). The possible causes of the invalid (BAD) data status of the input value are listed below. • Input open detected • I/O module failure • Block mode of the block for data reference is disabled (O/S) • Data status of the data for data reference is invalid (BAD) • Data status of the input value fails to communicate (NCOM) However, when the cause of the invalidity (BAD) data status is low-limit input open, the low-limit input open alarm (IOP-) is activated and the high-limit input open alarm (IOP) is not activated.

TIP

In the motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E), an input error alarm check is conducted for the feedback input and answer-back input.

n The Operation of the Function Block During Alarm State Initiated by the Input Error Alarm Check The actions of the function block during input open high alarm (IOP) state initiated by the Input error alarm check are described below. • Analog input process such as square root extraction, pulse input conversion, digital filters, and totalizer functions are disabled. • Process variables (PV) are latched at the value before the alarm occurred. However, when the PV overshoot is defined, the process variables (PV) are overshot to the high or low limit of the PV range. • For regulatory control blocks that have the MAN fallback function, the MAN fallback function is activated and the block mode is switched to manual (MAN) mode.

n Settings for the Input Error Alarm Check The Input error alarm check operates when both the input open alarms enabled or the input open high alarm enabled on the input open alarm check is defined. If neither are defined, input error alarm check will not function. In this case, even if the data status is invalid (BAD), the alarm will not be activated.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C5-10

C5.3 Input High-High and Low-Low Limit Alarm Check The input high-high limit and low-low limit alarm check may generate an alarm to indicate that the input signal is in high-high and low-low alarming status (HH, LL).

n The Operation of the Input High-High and Low-low Limit Alarm Check ▼ PV High-High/Low-Low Limit Alarm

The input high-high and low-low limit alarm check is a function that determines whether the input process variable (PV) is out of the range of the high-high and low-low limit alarm setpoint value (HH, LL). When it is determined that the input process variable (PV) exceeds the high-high limit alarm setpoint value, the high-high limit alarm (HH) is activated. Similarly, when the process variable is below the low-low limit alarm setpoint value (LL), the low-low limit alarm (LL) is activated. When in alarming state, if the process variable (PV) becomes smaller than the value obtained by subtracting the alarm hysteresis value (HYS) from the high-high limit alarm setpoint value (HH), the system recovers from the high-high limit alarm. Similarly, if the process variable (PV) becomes greater than the value obtained by adding the alarm hysteresis value (HYS) to the lowlow limit alarm setpoint value (LL), the system recovers from the low-low limit alarm. PV HH

HYS

Alarm activation conditions PV>HH PVPH PVVL +DLe DVIOP>IOP->HH>LL>HI>LO>DV+>DV->VEL+>VEL->MHI>MLO>CNF Table Symbol

Alarm Status Common to Regulatory Control Blocks Name

Description

NR

Normal

Indicates a state in which no alarm has occurred.

OOP

Output OPen Alarm

Indicates a state in which the output data status has become output failure (PTPF) as a result of the failure or disconnection of an operation terminal or process I/O device or the abnormality of output destination data. Normally, the output function is stopped.

IOP

High Input Open Alarm

Indicates a state in which the input data status has become bad value (BAD) as a result of the failure or disconnection of a detection terminal or process I/O device or the abnormality of input destination data. Normally, any processing that uses input signals is stopped. If the input signal has been overshot due to disconnection, etc., this alarm indicates a state in which input is overshot to the high-limit direction.

IOP-

Low Input Open Alarm

Indicates a state in which the input signal has been overshot to the low-limit direction due to disconnection, etc. The input data status becomes bad value (BAD). Normally, any processing that uses input signals is stopped.

HH

High High Alarm

Indicates a state in which the process variable exceeds the high high-limit alarm setpoint.

LL

Low Low Alarm

Indicates a state in which the process variable falls below the low low-limit alarm setpoint.

HI

High Alarm

Indicates a state in which the process variable exceeds the high-limit alarm setpoint.

LO

Low Alarm

Indicates a state in which the process variable falls below the low-limit alarm setpoint.

DV+

Deviation Alarm +

Indicates a state in which the deviation between the process variable and the setpoint value exceeds the deviation alarm setpoint in the positive direction.

DV-

Deviation Alarm -

Indicates a state in which the deviation between the process variable and the setpoint value exceeds the deviation alarm setpoint in the negative direction.

VEL+

Velocity Alarm +

Indicates a state in which the change amount of the input signal within a specified time exceeds the velocity limit alarm setpoint in the positive direction.

VEL-

Velocity Alarm -

Indicates a state in which the change amount of the input signal within a specified time exceeds the velocity limit alarm setpoint in the negative direction.

MHI

Output High Alarm

Indicate a state in which the output signal almost exceeded the output high-limit value. The actual output is limited to the output high-limit value.

MLO

Output Low Alarm

It indicates a state in which the output signal almost fell below the output low-limit value. The actual output is limited to the output low-limit value.

CNF

Connection Failure Alarm

Indicates a state in which a block mode of the function block in the I/O connection destination is in the out of service (O/S) mode. This alarm controls a temporary out of service state due to maintenance, and indicates a function block which is still in operation. Normally, IOP or OOP occurs simultaneously.

Symbol

Name

Description C060301E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C6-26

n Alarm Status Common to Calculation Blocks The alarm status for the operation and monitoring function is displayed in the data item ALRM. When multiple alarms are occurring, the alarm status with the highest alarm display priority will be displayed. The priority for alarm display is as follows: IOP>IOP->HH>LL>HI>LO>VEL+>VEL->CNF The alarm status is NR if no alarm occurs. Table Symbol NR

Alarm Status Common to Calculation Blocks Name

Description

Normal

Indicates a state in which no alarm has occurred.

IOP

High Input Open Alarm

Indicates a state in which the input data status has become bad value (BAD) as a result of the failure or disconnection of a detection terminal or process I/O device or the abnormality of input destination data. Normally, any processing that uses input signals is stopped. If the input signal has been overshot due to disconnection, etc., this alarm indicates a state in which input is overshot to the high-limit direction.

IOP-

Low Input Open Alarm

Indicates a state in which the input signal has been overshot to the low-limit direction due to disconnection, etc. The input data status becomes bad value (BAD). Normally, any processing that uses input signals is stopped.

HH

High High Alarm

Indicates a state in which the calculated input value exceeds the high high-limit alarm setpoint.

LL

Low Low Alarm

Indicates a state in which the calculated input value falls below the low low-limit alarm setpoint.

HI

High Alarm

Indicates a state in which the calculated input value exceeds the high-limit alarm setpoint.

LO

Low Alarm

Indicates a state in which the calculated input value falls below the low-limit alarm setpoint.

VEL+

Velocity Alarm +

Indicates a state in which the change amount of the calculated input value within a specified time exceeds the velocity limit alarm setpoint in the positive direction.

VEL-

Velocity Alarm -

Indicates a state in which the change amount of the calculated input value within a specified time exceeds the velocity limit alarm setpoint in the negative direction.

CNF

Connection Failure Alarm

Indicates a state in which the block mode of a function block in the I/O connection destination is in the out of service (O/S) mode. This alarm controls a temporary out of service state due to maintenance, and indicates a function block which is still in operation.

CERR

Computation Error Alarm

Indicates a state in which a computation error has occurred during a user-defined calculation processing. Calculation processing is stopped. C060302E.ai

TIP

The one-shot processing initiated by one-shot start does not update the alarm status of the function block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C6-27

n Alarm Status Common to Sequence Control Blocks Table Symbol

Alarm Status Common to Sequence Control Blocks Name

Description

NR

Normal

Indicates a state in which no alarm has occurred.

OOP

Output Open

Indicates that the block is in an output open state due to the disconnection of a process I/O device of the output destination or other failure.

IOP

Input Open

Indicates a state in which the input data status has become bad value (BAD) as a result of the failure or disconnection of a detection terminal or process I/O device or the abnormality of input destination data.

CNF

Connection Failure

Indicates a state in which the block mode of a function block in the I/O connection destination is in the out of service (O/S) mode. This alarm controls a temporary out of service state due to maintenance, and indicates a function block which is still in operation.

PERR

Computation Error Answerback Inconsistency Alarm

Indicates a state in which an illegal input pattern has occurred, such as when the full-open and full-close signals are inputted simultaneously.

ANS+

Answerback Error +

Indicates a state in which answerback check is being performed and the manipulated output value (MV) of ON operation and the answerbacked process variable (PV) do not agree.

ANS-

Answerback Error -

Indicates a state in which answerback check is being performed and the manipulated output value (MV) of OFF operation and the answerbacked process variable (PV) do not agree. C060303E.ai

n Alarm Status of Each Function Block Different model of function block supports different alarm status.

SEE

ALSO

• For more information about alarm status of regulatory control blocks, see the following: “n Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control” in D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For more information about alarm status of calculation blocks, see the following: “n Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block” in D2.3.1, “Input Processing, Output processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block” • For more information about alarm status of sequence control blocks, see the following: D3.1.1, “Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C6-28

C6.4 Data Status ▼ Data Status

Data status is the information that represents the quality of data. It is used for judging the proper operations according to the reliability of the data.

n Data Status Data status is the information that represents the reliability of data. The data obtained from I/O module is passed from one function block to another with its data status information. Data status is observed when various exceptional events occurred due to abnormality in the process and it is helpful for making a proper decision for control operation. Table Symbol

Data Status (1/2) Name

Description

BAD value

Indicates a state in which a normal data value cannot be obtained. The data value stored when this status occurs may be a meaningless value or the last normal value which has been stored.

QST

QueSTionable value

Indicates that the data value is questionable and cannot be determined whether it is normal or bad. The data value stored when this status occurs may be a value inputted from outside while it is in the QST status, a manually set value using the CAL function, or the last normal value which has been stored.

NCOM

No COMmunication

Indicates that when data is inputted or outputted through communication, the communication has been disconnected and the data has not been updated. Used only for I/O data that is exchanged with other control stations.

NFP

Not From Process

Indicates that the data value is not derived from a process I/O. The data value stored when this status occurs may be a value inputted from outside while it is in the NFP status, a calculated value, or a manually set value using the CAL function.

PTPF

Path To Process Failed

Indicates a state in which output is being disabled due to the abnormality of the block itself or the output destination. If the output destination is a PI/O, this status occurs when output open (OOP), not ready (NRDY) or power failure has occurred. If the output destination is a function block, this status occurs when the output destination block is in the out of service (O/S) mode.

CLP+

CLamP high

Indicates that output is clamped at the high-limit value. This status occurs when the block itself is limited by the output high limit or when the data status of the output destination is clamp high (CLP+).

CLP-

CLamP low

Represents that output is clamped at the low-limit value. This status occurs when the block itself is limited by the output low limit or when the data status of the output destination is clamp low (CLP-).

CND

CoNDitional

Indicates that cascade connection is open. This status occurs when a downstream function block changes to the non-cascade mode or the cascade connection path has been disconnected due to switching, etc. Used only for data that is the object of cascade connection (MV, CSV, etc.)

CAL

CALibration

Indicates a state in which the data value can be replaced manually as an emergency This status occurs when a downstream function block changes to the non-cascade mode or value will not be updated until it is replaced manually.

NEFV

Not EFfecTive

Indicates a state in which the data value is invalid. This is a state in which no setpoint value has been set manually after the CAL status was obtained or the value is yet to be updated after the CAL status was turned off.

BAD

Symbol

Name

Description C060401E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



Table Symbol

C6-29

Data Status (2/2) Name

Description

O/S

Out of Service

Indicates that the function block of the I/O destination is in O/S mode. If the operation is input, the data value is not updated.

MNT

MaiNTenance

Indicates that the function block of the I/O destination is undergoing online maintenance. If the operation is input, the data value is not updated. Normally, data reference is not performed while this data status in on, since online maintenance is performed as a group between function block executions and data access processing.

IOP+

Input Open high

Indicates that the process I/O of the input destination is in a high limit input open state due to disconnection or other failure. The data value is not updated. The PV value is forcibly set to a special value only when the PV overshoot function is activated.

IOP-

Input OPen low

Indicates that the process I/O of the input destination is in a low limit input open state due to disconnection or other failure. The data value is not updated. The PV value is forcibly set to a special value only when the PV overshoot function is activated.

OOP

Output OPen

Indicates that the process I/O of the output destination is in an output open state due to disconnection or other failure.

NRDY

PI/O Not ReaDY

Indicates that the process I/O of the I/O destination is in an operation disabled state due to power failure, maintenance or a failure. If the operation is input, the data value is not updated.

PFAL

PI/O Power FAiLure

Indicates that the process I/O of the I/O destination is not responding due to power failure or other reason and is in an operation disabled state. If the operation is input, the data value is not updated.

LPFL

PI/O Long Power FaiLure

Indicates that the process I/O of the I/O destination has been non-responsive for a long time due to power failure or other reason and is in an operation disabled state. If the operation is input, the data value is not updated.

MINT

Master INiTialize

Indicates that the upstream side of the cascade connection is in a state where a balance operation should be performed.

SINT

Slave INiTialize

Indicates that the downstream side of the cascade connection is in a state where a balance due to power failure or other reason and is in an operation disabled state. If the operation

SVPB

SV PushBack

Indicates that the downstream side of the cascade connection is in a state where the CSV should be made to match SV by the SV pushback operation.

Symbol

Name

Description C060402E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page



C7-1

C7. Process Timing The function block executes a process in accordance with the process timing. This chapter describes the process timing for the regulatory control block, the sequence control block and the calculation block.

n Process Timing The process timing is a timing at which a function block executes a process. An individual function block executes an input, a calculation or an output processing in accordance with the process timing defined in. There are four types of the process timing. • Periodic Execution This is repeatedly executed per preset period. The periodic execution can be used in the regulatory control block, sequence control block, and calculation block. • One-Shot Execution This is executed only once when it is invoked from other function blocks. The one-shot Execution can be used in the sequence control block and the calculation block. • Initial Execution/Restart Execution This is executed when the FCS executes the cold start or restart process. The initial execution can be used in the sequence control block. • Restricted Initial Execution This is executed when the FCS executes the initial cold start process. The restricted initial execution can be used in the sequence control block.

n Process Timing for Regulatory Control Block The process timing for the regulatory control block is the periodic execution.

n Process Timing for Calculation Block There are following two types of the process timings for the calculation block. • Periodic Execution • One-Shot Execution

n Process Timing for Sequence Control Block The process timing for the sequence control block has following four different types of execution timing. • Periodic Execution • One-Shot Execution • Initial Execution/Restart Execution • Restricted Initial Execution

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-2

C7.1 Process Timing for Regulatory Control Block The process timing for the regulatory control block is the periodic execution.

n Periodic Execution for Regulatory Control Block The regulatory control block executes process repeatedly in a predetermined period. Normally, these periodic execution function blocks execute per scan period. The timing that individual function blocks activate as well as control drawings are determined by following factors in the periodic execution of the regulatory control block.

l Scan Period The scan period is the period at which the function block is executed periodically. The periodic execution function block executes a process based on the scan period. There are three types of scan periods: the basic scan, the medium-speed scan (*1) and the high-speed scan. One of these scan periods can be selected for each individual function block. However, the medium-speed scan (*1) and high-speed scan cannot be selected for some function blocks. *1:

The medium-speed scan setting is available only for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS.

l Order of Process Execution The order of process execution refers to a sequence in which the control drawing and individual function block are executed in the periodic execution. The order of process execution determines the execution timing of the control drawing and individual function block within a scan period.

l Timing for Process I/O The timing for the process I/O is a timing in which data input/output is executed between the function block and the process I/O. The timing for the process input/output differs from the type of input/output is analog or contact.

l Control Period of Controller Block Among the regulatory control blocks, the controller block has a control period that is dependent on process timing. The control period of the controller block is a period in which control calculation and output processing are executed when the controller block is performing automatic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS). The control period of the controller block is always an integer multiple of the scan period. The only processing that the controller block always performs for every scan period is input processing and alarm processing. Control calculation and output processing during automatic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS) are performed during every control period.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-3

C7.1.1

Scan Period

The periodic execution function block performs processing based on this scan period.

n Scan Period ▼ Scan Period, Fast-Scan Period, Medium-Speed Scan Period

Scan period determines a period for the periodic execution of the function block. There are three types of scan periods: basic scan, medium-speed scan (*1) and high-speed scan. *1:

The medium-speed scan setting is available only for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS.

l Basic Scan The basic scan is a standard scan period which is common to function blocks. The basic scan period is fixed to 1 second. This cannot be changed.

l Medium-Speed Scan : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS/LFCS2/LFCS The medium-speed scan is a scan period suited for the process control that requires quicker response than what can be achieved with the basic scan setting. Setting value of the mediumspeed scan can be selected by each FCS according to its use. Setting value of the medium-speed scan can be changed on FCS property sheet: • Medium-speed scan period: Select “200 ms” or “500 ms.” “50 ms”, “100 ms” or “250 ms” can also be used by direct entry from keyboard. The default is “500 ms.”

l High-Speed Scan The high-speed scan is a scan period suited for the process control that requires high-speed response. Setting value of the high-speed scan can be selected by each FCS according to its use. Setting value of the high-speed scan can be changed on FCS property sheet: • High-speed scan period: Select “200 ms” or “500 ms.” “50 ms ”, “100 ms” or “250 ms” can also be used by direct entry from keyboard. The default is “200 ms.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-4

l Set Scan Speed of Function Blocks Scan speed of function blocks can be set on the Function Block Detail Builder. Basic scan, medium-speed scan or high-speed scan can be selected on the builder in accordance with requirement of response time. • Scan period: Select [Basic Scan], [Medium-speed Scan] (*1) or [High-speed Scan.] The default setting is [Basic Scan.] *1:

The medium-speed scan setting is available only for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS.

Note that [Basic Scan], not [Medium-speed Scan] (*1) or [High-speed Scan], should be set for the following function blocks: PID-TP, MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, MC-3E, PG-L13, SLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT, SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD With certain function blocks, processing can be executed in a scan longer than the basic scan by specifying the [Scan Coefficient] and [Scan Phase] parameters.

l Scan Coefficient, Scan Phase ▼ Scan Coefficient, Scan Phase

When a scan coefficient (*1) is specified in addition to the scan period in the Function Block Detail Builder, input indicator blocks (PVI), input indicator blocks with deviation alarm (PVI-DV) and general-purpose calculation blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) can be executed based on their actual scan period being calculated as follows: Actual scan period = Scan period • Scan coefficient Scan coefficient: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 or 64 If the scan coefficient is represented by N, the function block is executed every N x scan period. In addition, when a scan phase is specified in the Function Block Detail Builder, in which of the N times of scans the function block is executed can be defined. Specify the scan phase using a numeric value in the following range: Scan phase: *1:

0 to ((Scan coefficient) - 1)

Scan Coefficient, and Scan phase can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-5

C7.1.2

Order of Process Execution

The order of process execution refers to a sequence in which the control drawing and individual function block are executed in the periodic execution. The process timing of a periodic execution regulatory function block is determined by the orders of execution of the control drawings and the function blocks. The following section describes the orders in which the control drawings and individual function blocks are executed in the periodic execution.

n Order of Process Execution for Control Drawings/Function Blocks The diagram below shows an example of executing control drawings each consisting of function blocks being executed in the high-speed scan, medium-speed scan (*1) and basic scan. In this example, three control drawings are processed. The groups of high-speed scan function blocks in the respective drawings are indicated as A, B and C. Similarly, the groups of medium-speed scan (*1) function blocks in the respective control drawings are indicated as A’, B’ and C’; and the groups of basic scan function blocks, a, b and c. In the diagram below and the explanation that follows, the processing of the function blocks belonging to A, B and C is referred to as “high-speed processing”; processing of the function blocks belonging to A’, B’ and C’, “mediumspeed processing” (*2); and processing of the function blocks belonging to a, b and c, “basic processing.” “Other processing” indicates processing of SFC blocks. *1: *2:

The medium-speed scan setting is available only for KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS. The medium-speed processing function is available only for KFCS2, FFCS, KFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS. Basic scan (1 sec.)

Medium-speed scan High-speed scan

Time High-speed A B C processing Medium-speed processing Basic processing

A B C

A B C

A B C

A' B' C'

A' B' C'

a

a b

b

b

b

Control drawing

123

4 5

Function block

Other processing

A B C

A B C

A' B' C'

C'

b c

Enlarged

C070102E.ai

Figure Example of Control Drawings/Function Blocks Process Execution

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-6

• The high-speed processing has priority over the medium-speed processing (*2) or basic processing. The medium-speed processing (*2) has priority over the basic processing. • Once processing of all high-speed function blocks have been completed, the mediumspeed processing (*2) is executed. When execution of all high-speed and medium-speed (*2) processes of function blocks have been completed, the basic processing is executed. • In case that the high-speed processing gets its timing for execution during the basic processing or medium-speed processing (*2) is being executed, the high-speed processing interrupts the basic processing or medium-speed processing (*2) by making the basic processing or medium-speed processing (*2) pause at the gap among function blocks’ basic processing or medium-speed processing (*2). Once all function blocks of high-speed processing are completed to execute, the basic processing or medium-speed processing (*2) is resumed from where it was interrupted. • In case that the medium-speed processing (*2) its timing for execution during the basic processing is being executed, the medium-speed processing (*2) interrupts the basic processing by making the basic processing pause at the gap among function blocks’ basic processing. Once all function blocks of medium-speed (*2) processing are completed to execute, the basic processing is resumed from where it was interrupted. • The high-speed processing of function blocks are executed for each of the control drawings containing the function blocks and in the order of control drawing numbers. Function blocks having the same scan period within the same control drawing are executed in the set execution order (order of the function block numbers defined). The medium-speed processing (*2) and basic processing of function blocks are executed in the same order as applied to the high-speed processing. • Processing of each function block is executed only once per single scan period. • Other processes are executed in the idle time after the high-speed processing, mediumspeed processing (*2) and basic processing are completed. *2:

The medium-speed processing function is available only for KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS.

l Idle Time in Processing at FCS ▼ SEBOL/User C Ratio

The setting of the processing executed in the idle time in FCS’s CPU is defined in “SEBOL/User C time ratio” on the FCS Constants Builder. This time ratio is set as “100 %” as default, means the total idle time of FCS’s CPU is used by SEBOL.

TIP

Each function block is executed asynchronously among the plural FCSes.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7.1.3

C7-7

Timing of Process I/O

The timing of process I/O refers to the timing at which the data input/output is executed between the function block and the process I/O modules. The timing of process I/O depends upon the type of the input/output data whether it is analog or digital. The following section explains the timing of process I/O.

n Data Flow in Process I/O The flow of data in process input/output is different for analog data and for digital data. The following section explains the data flow of each type.

l Analog Data : PFCS For analog input/output signals, the I/O module and the function block exchange data via the process I/O image in the main memory of processor unit. The diagram below shows an image of analog data input/output processing. Processor Unit Function block

Read when the function block starts the processing

Write to Process I/O image when complete the processing

Process I/O image

Read all at once at the beginning of the high-speedand basic scans

Main Memory

Write only the changes when processing of each function block is completed

Analog I/O module C070103E.ai

Figure Image of Analog Data Input/Output : PFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-8

l Analog Data : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS For analog input/output signals, the I/O module and the function block perform input/output of data via the process I/O image in the main memory of processor unit. The diagram below shows an image of analog data input/output processing. Processor Unit Function block

Read when the function block starts the processing

Write to Process I/O image when complete the processing

Process I/O image

Main Memory

• KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS: Read at the beginning of the basic scan the analog input from the I/O unit which specified to be read by the basic scan: or read at the beginning of the highest scan the analog input from the I/O unit which specified to read by the highest scan of FCS(*1)

• KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS: Write the changes to I/O modules when processing of all highest scan(*1) function blocks is completed, as well as when processing of all basic scan function blocks is completed.

Local Node (*3) Analog I/O modules

Remote Node Interface Card (EB401)

Refresh Periodically(*2) Remote Node

Analog I/O modules

C070104E.ai

*1: *2: *3:

The Highest Scan of FCS means that if the FCS is applied with high-speed scan, the High-Speed Scan is the highest scan, and otherwise the Medium-Speed Scan is. If the FCS is applied with basic scan only, the Basic Scan is the highest scan of FCS. The period of analog I/O data refresh between EB401 and remote node varies with the number of remote nodes connected. The input processing of the analog I/O modules and EB401 module inserted in the slots of FFCS FCU are the same as the processing of the modules in the local node.

Figure Image of Analog Data Input/Output : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-9

The period of data refresh between EB401 and remote nodes varies with the number of remote nodes connected. The data refresh period corresponds to the number of nodes are shown as follows. Table

Data Refresh Period between EB401 and IOM Number of Remote Nodes 2

4

6

Analog I/O (None HART)

50 ms

100 ms

200 ms

Analog I/O (HART)

100 ms

200 ms

400 ms

HART Variables

1 to 2 seconds C070105E.ai

l Analog Data : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS For analog input/output signals, the I/O module and the function block perform input/output of data via the process I/O image in the main memory of processor unit. The diagram below shows an image of analog data input/output processing. Processor Unit Function blocks

Read when the function block starts the processing

Write to Process I/O image when complete the processing

Process I/O image

• SFCS: Read all data at once at the beginning of the high-speed scans. • LFCS2/LFCS: Read at the beginning of the basic scan the analog input from the I/O unit which specified to be read by the basic scan: or read at the beginning of the high-speed scan (or medium-speed scan if the high-speed scan is not used) the analog input from the I/O unit which specified to ready by the high-speed scan.

Main Memory

• SFCS: Write the changes when processing of each function block is completed. • LFCS2/LFCS: Write the changes when processing of all high-speed scan function blocks is completed (or when processing of all mediumcompleted if the high-speed scan is not used) , as well as when processing of all basic scan function blocks is completed.

Analog I/O module C070119E.ai

Figure Image of Analog Data Input/Output : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-10

l Contact I/O Data : PFCS For contact input, the contact input module and the function block perform data input processing via the process I/O image in the main memory of the processor unit and the contact input image of the corresponding scan period stored in the data buffer areas. Since the contact input data are stored in the image area, the function blocks which are operated in the same period use the contact input’s image read at the beginning of that scan period. The diagram below shows an image of contact input data processing: Processor Unit Each function block of the high-speed scan

Each function block of the basic scan

Contact input image for high-speed scan

Contact input image for basic scan

Read when the high-speed scan starts the processing

Read when the basic scan starts the processing

Contact input image common to stations (data image for HIS) Read the data of previous scan at the beginning of the basic scan processing(*1)

Process I/O Image

Main memory

Read all at once at the beginning of the high-speed scans

Contact input module C070106E.ai

*1:

The contact input image common to stations (data image for HIS) will be updated at the beginning of the next basic scan so as to match the data recognized by the function blocks in the FCS at the previous scan (before updating the process I/O image). Therefore, the contact input image for basic scan will be delayed by one scan.

Figure Image of Contact Input Data Processing : PFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-11

For contact output, the function blocks output data via the process I/O image, which is in the processor unit main memory, to contact output modules. The diagram below illustrates the digital data output processing. Processor unit High-speed scan function blocks

Basic scan function blocks

Write when function block processing is completed

Write when function block processing is completed

Process I/O image

Main memory

Write the changes when processing of all high-speed scan function blocks or all basic scan function blocks is completed Contact output module C070107E.ai

Figure Image of Contact Output Data Processing : PFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-12

l Contact I/O Data : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS For contact input, the contact input module and the function block perform data input processing via the process I/O image in the main memory of the processor unit and the contact input image of the corresponding scan period stored in the data buffer areas. Since the contact input data are stored in the image area, the function blocks which are operated in the same period use the contact input’s image read at the beginning of that scan period. The diagram below shows an image of contact input data processing: Processor Unit

Function blocks with high-speed scan

Function blocks with the medium-speed scan

Function blocks with basic scan Contact input image common to stations (data image for HIS)

Contact input image for high-speed scan Read when the high-speed scan starts the processing

Contact input image for medium-speed scan

Read when the basic scan starts the processing

Contact input image for basic scan

Read the data of previous scan at the beginning of the basic scan processing(*1)

Read when the basic scan starts the processing

Process I/O Image

Main memory

• KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS: Read at the beginning of the basic scan the contact input from the I/O module which specified to be read by the basic scan; or read at the beginning of the highest scan the contact input from the I/O module which specified to be read by the highest scan of FCS(*2)

Local Node (*3) Contact Input Modules

Remote Node Interface Card (EB401)

Refresh Periodically(*4) Remote Node

Contact Input Modules

C070108E.ai

*1: *2: *3: *4:

The contact input image common to stations (data image for HIS) will be updated at the beginning of the next basic scan so as to match the data recognized by the function blocks in the FCS at the previous scan (before updating the process I/O image). Therefore, the contact input image for basic scan will be delayed by one scan. The Highest Scan of FCS means that if the FCS is applied with high-speed scan, the High-Speed Scan is the highest scan of FCS, and otherwise the Medium-Speed Scan is. If the FCS is applied with basic scan only, the Basic Scan is the highest scan of FCS. The input processing of the analog I/O modules and EB401 module inserted in the slots of FFCS FCU are the same as the processing of the modules in the local node. The period of contact I/O data refresh between EB401 and remote node varies with the number of remote nodes connected.

Figure Image of Contact Input Data Processing : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-13

The period of data refresh between EB401 and remote nodes varies with the number of remote nodes connected. The data refresh period corresponds to the number of nodes are shown as follows. Table

Data Refresh Period between EB401 and IOM Number of Remote Nodes 2(*1)

4

6(*2)

Status Input

50 ms

100 ms

200 ms

ST Compatible (16-Point Input)

50 ms

100 ms

200 ms

Pushbutton Input

100 ms

200 ms

400 ms

ST Compatible (32-Point Input)

100 ms

200 ms

400 ms

ST Compatible (64-Point Input)

200 ms

400 ms

800 ms C070109E.ai

*1: *2:

For KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS. For KFCS2/KFCS.

For contact output, the function blocks output data via the process I/O image, which is in the processor unit main memory to the I/O modules. The diagram below illustrates the contact output data processing. Processor unit High-speed scan function blocks Write when function block processing is completed

Medium-speed scan function blocks

Basic scan function blocks

Write when function block processing is completed

Write when function block processing is completed

Process I/O image

Main memory

• KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS: Write the changes when processing of all highest-speed scan function blocks is completed (*1)

Local Node (*3) Contact Output Modules

Remote Node Interface Card (EB401)

Refresh Periodically(*2) Remote Node

Contact Output Modules

C070110E.ai

*1: *2: *3:

The Highest Scan of FCS means that if the FCS is applied with high-speed scan, the High-Speed Scan is the highest scan of FCS, and otherwise the Medium-Speed Scan is. If the FCS is applied with basic scan only, the Basic Scan is the highest scan of FCS. The period of contact I/O data refresh between EB401 and remote node varies with the number of remote nodes connected. The output processing of the digital output modules and EB401 module inserted in the slots of FFCS FCU are the same as the processing of the modules in the local node.

Figure Image of Contact Output Data Processing : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-14

The period of data refresh between EB401 and remote nodes varies with the number of remote nodes connected. The data refresh period corresponds to the number of nodes are shown as follows. Table

Data Refresh Period between EB401 and IOM Number of Remote Nodes 2(*2)

4

6(*3)

Status Output

50 ms

100 ms

200 ms

Pulse-Width Output (*1)

100 ms

200 ms

400 ms

ST Compatible (64-Point Output)

200 ms

400 ms

800 ms C070111E.ai

*1: *2: *3:

The pulse-width output between IOM and field devices behaves differently, the output timing is controlled in the output module. For KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS. For KFCS2/KFCS.

l Contact I/O Data : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS For contact input, the contact input module and the function block perform data input processing via the process I/O image in the main memory of the processor unit and the contact input image of the corresponding scan period stored in the data buffer areas. Since the contact input data are stored in the image area, the function blocks which are operated in the same period use the contact input’s image read at the beginning of that scan period. The diagram below shows an image of digital data input processing: Processor Unit

Function blocks with high-speed scan

Contact input image for high-speed scan Read when the high-speed scan starts the processing

Function blocks with the medium-speed scan (applicable only with the LFCS)

Function blocks with basic scan

Contact input image for medium-speed scan

Contact input image for basic scan

Read when the medium-speed scan starts the processing

Contact input image common to stations (data image for HIS) Read the data of previous scan at the beginning of the basic scan processing(*1)

Read when the basic scan starts the processing

Process I/O Image

Main memory

• SFCS: Read all data at once at the beginning of the high-speed scans. • LFCS2/LFCS: Read at the beginning of the basic scan the contact input from the I/O unit which specified to be read by the basic scan; or read at the beginning of the high-speed scan (or medium-speed scan if the highspeed scan is not used) the contact input from the I/O unit which specified to be read by the high-speed scan. Contact Input Module C070120E.ai

*1:

The contact input image common to stations (data image for HIS) will be updated at the beginning of the next basic scan so as to match the data recognized by the function blocks in the FCS at the previous scan (before updating the process I/O image). Therefore, the contact input image for basic scan will be delayed by one scan.

Figure Image of Contact Input Data Processing : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-15

For contact output, the function blocks output data via the process I/O image, which is in the processor unit main memory, to contact output modules. The diagram below illustrates the contact output data processing. Processor unit High-speed scan function blocks Write when function block processing is completed

Medium-speed scan function blocks (applicable only with the LFCS)

Write when function block processing is completed

Basic scan function blocks Write when function block processing is completed

Process I/O image

Main memory

• SFCS: Write the changes when processing of all high-speed scan function blocks or all basic scan function blocks is completed • LFCS2/LFCS: Write only the changes when processing of all high-speed scan function blocks is completed (or when processing of all medium-speed scan function blocks is completed if the high-speed scan is not used), as well as when processing of all basic scan function blocks is completed

Contact Output Module C070121E.ai

Figure Image of Contact Output Data Processing : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-16

n Timing of Process I/O : PFCS The following section describes the timing of process I/O.

l Input Timing : PFCS The input signals are read from the input module to the process I/O image in the processor unit, then to the contact input image in which they are grouped according to their scan period in the data buffer area. All the input data are accessed all together at the beginning of each “high-speed processing” scan. The accessed data may be applied to either high scanned function blocks or basic scanned function blocks. The function blocks perform their input and calculation process to the data they read from the process I/O image. Basic scan (1 sec.) High-speed scan Time High-speed A B C processing Basic processing

ABC

a

b

ABC

b c

......

......

d

AB

e

Enlarged b 1 2 3

b

Control drawing

4 5 Function block

: High-speed scan processing start : Basic scan processing start C070112E.ai

Figure Input Timing : PFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-17

l Output Timing : PFCS The function blocks write output data to the specified area in the process I/O image when the function blocks are executed. Of the data written to the process I/O image, only the changes are written to the output module at the following timing: • The contact output data is written when processing of all high-speed scan function blocks or all basic scan function blocks is completed. • The analog output data are written at the end of each function block’s processing. Basic scan (1 sec.) High-speed scan Time High-speed A B C processing Basic processing

ABC

a

b

ABC

b c

......

......

d

AB

e

Enlarged b 1 2 3

b

Control drawing

4 5 Function block

: High-speed scan processing end : Basic scan processing end C070113E.ai

Figure Output Timing : PFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-18

n Timing of Process I/O Timing of Process I/O is explained in the following section.

l Input Timing : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS The processor unit reads the control I/Os from the input modules in the local nodes, and the input modules and remote node communication interface modules inserted in the slots of FCU and puts them to the memory image at the following timing: The input data of remote nodes are acquired periodically by EB401 card. The input data from EB401 to memory image table are the data that EB401 periodically acquired from the remote nodes. • For the I/O modules not defined with high-speed scan, data are accessed at the beginning of basic processing scan period. • For the I/O modules defined with high-speed scan or medium-speed scan, data are accessed at the beginning of highest processing scan period. The highest scan period means that if the FCS is applied with High-Speed scan, the High-Speed scan is the highest scan of FCS, and otherwise the Medium-Speed scan is. If the FCS is applied with basic scan only, the basic scan is the highest scan period. Moreover, for contact input data, the data are sent from the process control I/O image tables to the contact input image tables categorized in accordance with the scan periods of the contact inputs. The timing to access the I/O data is at the beginning of the function block processing that corresponds to the scan periods. Function blocks perform input processing, calculation processing to the analog data acquired from process I/O image. While the function blocks perform input processing, calculation processing to the contact input data acquired from the I/O images of various scan periods.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-19

l Input Timing : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS The input signals are read from input module to the process I/O image in the processor unit, then to the contact input image in which they are grouped according to their scan period in the data buffer area, at the following timing: LFCS2 or LFCS: • The input from the I/O module which specified to be read by the high-speed scan is read when the high-speed scan processing of the function block is started (or when the mediumspeed scan processing is started if the high-speed scan is not used). • The input from the I/O module which specified to be read by the basic scan is read when the basic scan processing of the function block is started. SFCS: • Access data at the beginning of each “high-speed processing” scan. The accessed data may be applied to either high scanned function blocks or basic scanned function blocks. The function blocks perform their input and calculation process to the data they read from the process I/O image. Basic scan (1 sec.) High-speed scan Time High-speed A B C processing Basic processing

ABC

a

b

ABC

b c

......

......

d

AB

e

Enlarged b 1 2 3

b

Control drawing

4 5 Function block

: High-speed scan processing start : Basic scan processing start C070114E.ai

Figure Input Timing

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-20

l Output Timing : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS ▼ Output Type – Output in a Lump, Output Type – Output Immediately

Function blocks send their output data to process I/O image at the time of the function blocks performing output processing. By comparing the outputs with the I/O memory image, the processor unit puts the difference to the output modules in the local nodes, and the output modules and remote node communication interface modules (EB401) inserted in the slots of FCU at the following timing: The output data in the EB401 sent from process I/O image are periodically written to remote nodes. For analog output in KFCS2, KFCS or FFCS: • The timings for writing the output data in process I/O image to I/O modules vary with the designated options [Output in a Lump] and [Output immediately]. When option [Output in a Lump] is designated, the output data are written from process I/O image to I/O modules at the completion of the highest scan of function blocks. When option [Output Immediately] is designated, the output data are written from process I/O image to I/O modules right after the data are outputted from the function blocks. For contact output in KFCS2, KFCS or FFCS: • The contact output data are written from process I/O image to I/O modules at the completion of the highest scan of function blocks. The highest scan period means that if the FCS is applied with High-Speed scan, the High-Speed scan is the highest scan of FCS, and otherwise the Medium-Speed scan is. If the FCS is applied with basic scan only, the basic scan is the highest scan period. The output type may be specified on IOM property sheet. • Output Type: Selectable between “Output in a Lump” and “Output immediately.” Default is “Output in a Lump”

IMPORTANT When option [Output immediately] is designated, it takes 1 or 2 milliseconds of processor unit to perform the task of writing from process I/O image to I/O modules, thus the CPU load is added. It is recommended to choose [Output in a Lump] option instead of choosing [Output immediately] option unless it is necessary. With [Output in a Lump] option, the output data can also be sent from process I/O image to I/O modules at high-speed scan period if the high-speed scan is specified.

TIP

For Flow-totalizing batch set block (BSETU-2) and Weight-totalizing batch set block, if the output automatic prediction is applied, the output data are written from the function block to I/O modules or EB401 at the predicted time. Furthermore, it may take up to 30 milliseconds more time for outputting to the I/O modules in the remote nodes.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-21

l Output Timing : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS The function blocks write output data to the specified area in the process I/O image when being executed. Of the data written to the process I/O image, only the changes are written to the output module at the following timing: LFCS2 or LFCS analog output/contact output: • When processing of all high-speed scan function blocks (or all medium-speed scan function blocks if the high-speed scan is not used) is completed. • When processing of all basic scan function blocks is completed. SFCS analog output: • When processing of each function block is completed. SFCS contact output: • When processing of all high-speed scan function blocks (or all medium-speed scan function blocks if the high-speed scan is not used) is completed. • When processing of all basic scan function blocks is completed. Basic scan (1 sec.) High-speed scan Time High-speed A B C processing Basic processing

ABC

a

b

ABC

b c

......

......

d

AB

e

Enlarged b 1 2 3

b

Control drawing

4 5 Function block

: High-speed scan processing end : Basic scan processing end C070115E.ai

Figure Output Timing : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-22

C7.1.4

Control Period for Controller Block

Among the regulatory control blocks, the controller block has control period that is dependent on process timing. The control period of the controller block is a time period that the controller block executes control calculation and output processing during automatic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS). The control period of the controller block is always an integer multiple of the scan period. The only processing that the controller block always performs for each scan period is input processing and alarm processing. Control calculation and output processing are performed once per each control period.

n Control Period of Controller Block ▼ Control Period

The controller block executes the input processing per scan period. However, the control calculation and output processing are executed per each control period. The control period of controller block is always an integer-multiple of the scan period. There are 2 types of the control periods of controller block as shown below: • The control period of the regulatory control action. • The control period of the intermittent control action.

l Control Period of Regulatory Control Action Control calculation is executed at every control period in regulatory control action. The figure below shows the controller block’s control period in the regulatory control action. MV Control period

Scan period Time C070116E.ai

Figure The Control Period in the Regulatory Control Action

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-23

l Control Period in Intermittent Control Action In intermittent control action, control calculation and output processing are executed only once in the scan period in which the control switch (CSW) is turned ON during the automatic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS). After the execution, the control switch (CSW) is turned OFF. The control switch (CSW) can be set to ON by other function blocks such as the sequence control blocks. The figure below shows the control period of the controller block in the intermittent control action. MV

Control period

: Scan period in which CSW is turned ON Scan period

: Time in which CSW is turned ON Time C070117E.ai

Figure The Control Period of the Intermittent Control Action

The intermittent control action is used for the sampling control with a sampling value to be measured at the timing determined by outside of the controller block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-24

n Setting for Control Period of Controller Block The following section describes the method of setting the control period of a controller block, and how the function block behaves for the different settings.

l Setting for Control Period of Controller Block Setting for control period of controller block can be defined in the Function Block Detail Builder. • Control period: Select from “fixed control period,” “automatic determination” or “intermittent control action.” In the case of the Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) or the sampling PI controller block (PI-HLD), select from “fixed control period” or “automatic determination.” The default is “automatic determination.”

TIP

The control period for the two-position ON/OFF controller block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ONOFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E), three-position ON/OFF controller block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ONOFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE) and the PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) is the same as the scan period.

The fixed control periods is selected from the following: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 or 64 seconds. When the automatic determination is selected, the control period is decided by the following rules: Table

Control Period at the Automatic Determination

Integral Time (Sec.)

Control Period (Sec.) Basic Scan

1 to 31

1

32 to 63

2

64 to 255

4

256 to 1023

8

1024 to 2047

16

2048 to 10000

32

High-Speed Scan

Same as the scan period

C070118E.ai

When the fixed control period or the automatic determination is selected, it is operated with the control period of the regulatory control action. When the intermittent control action is selected, it is operated with the control period of the intermittent control action.

l Action of Controller Block Based on Control Period Based on the control period defined, the controller blocks are executed as follows: • When a fixed control period is selected The control calculation processing and output action during the automatic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS) are executed with the preset fixed control period. • When the automatic determination is selected If the scan period is the basic scan, the control period is determined automatically according to the parameter of the integral time (I). If the scan period is the high-speed scan, the control period is the same as the scan period. • When an intermittent control action is selected The control calculation and output processings are executed only once with the scan period in which the control switch (CSW) is turned ON during the automatic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-25

C7.2 Process Timing of Calculation Block The process timing for the calculation block has the following two execution types according to execution timing. • Periodic Execution • One-Shot Execution

n Periodic Execution ▼ Start Timing

The periodic execution means that the calculation block is repeatedly executed in a preset cycle. The function blocks for which a periodic execution is defined is referred as the periodic-execution type function block. Normally, the periodic-execution type function block is executed per scan period. The timing that the control drawings and the individual function blocks are executed by the periodic execution of calculation block is determined by following factors.

l Scan Period The scan period is a period of periodic execution for a function block. The periodic execution function block executes a process based on the scan period. There are three types of scan periods: basic scan, medium-speed scan (*1) and high-speed scan. Select one of these scan periods for each function block. However, the medium-speed scan (*1) and high-speed scan cannot be selected for some function blocks.

SEE

ALSO

For the scan period, see the following: C7.1.1, “Scan Period”

*1:

The medium-speed scan setting is available only for KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

l Order of Process Execution The order of process execution refers to a sequence in which the control drawing and individual function block are executed in the periodic execution. This order of process execution determines the execution timing within a scan period of the control drawing and individual function block.

SEE

ALSO

For the order of process execution, see the following: C7.1.2, “Order of Process Execution”

l Timing of Process I/O The timing of the process input/output refers to a timing at which data I/O is executed between the function block and the process I/O. The timing of the process I/O differs by whether the input/output data is analog or contact type.

SEE

ALSO

For the process input/output timing, see the following: C7.1.3, “Timing of Process I/O”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-26

n One-Shot Execution In one-shot execution, the calculation block is executed only once when it is invoked by other function blocks. The function block defined with one-shot execution is referred as the one-shotexecution (O) type function block. When an one-shot function block is invoked by other function blocks in the same FCS, it starts its own process with interrupting the process from which it was invoked. When the one-shot block’s process is completed, it hands back the process to the block from which it was invoked. The sequence control block cannot be invoked from other control stations. The following diagram shows the one-shot processing: Time The calling source function block

Process execution

Process execution Call Execution

One-shot-execution-type function block

Process completion

Process resumption

Process execution C070301E.ai

Figure One-Shot Execution Conceptual Diagram

The one-shot execution is used when a calculation block is invoked from a sequence table block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-27

The following table lists the calculation blocks where one-shot start is possible. Table

Calculation Blocks in Which One-Shot Execution is Possible Block type

Arithmetic calculations

Logic operation (*1)

General-purpose calculations

Auxiliary calculations

Type

Name

ADD

Addition Block

MUL

Multiplication Block

DIV

Division Block

AVE

Averaging Block

AND

Logical AND Block

OR

Logical OR Block

NOT

Logical NOT Block

SRSI-S

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

SRSI-R

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

SRS2-S

Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

SRS2-R

Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

WOUT

Wipeout Block

GT

Comparator Block (Greater Than)

GE

Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)

EQ

Equal Operator Block

BAND

Bitwise AND Block

BOR

Bitwise OR Block

BNOT

Bitwise NOT Block

CALCU

General-Purpose Calculation Block

CALCU-C

General-Purpose Calculation Block (with character string data I/O terminal)

BDSET-1L

One-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-1C

One-Batch String Data Set Block

BDSET-2L

Two-Batch Data Set Block

BDSET-2C

Two-Batch String Data Set Block (strings only)

BDA-L

Batch Data Acquisition Block

BDA-C

Batch String Data Acquisition Block C070302E.ai

*1:

TIP

Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

When a calculation block is executed based on one-shot specification, the alarm status is not updated during the one-shot processing.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-28

n Setting for Processing Timing Setting for processing timing can be defined in the Function Block Detail Builder. • Execution timing: Select from “0 (periodic execution)” or “1 (one-shot execution).” The default is 0. When the periodic execution is selected for execution timing, set a scan period in the function block detail definition builder. There are three types of scan periods: basic scan, medium-speed scan (*1) and high-speed scan. *1:

The medium-speed scan setting is available only for KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-29

C7.3 Process Timing for Sequence Control Block This section explains the process timing of a sequence control block. Process timing for a Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) and logic chart block (LC64) includes the execution timing, output timing subordinated to execution timing, control period, and control phase.

n Start Timing of Sequence Control Block ▼ Processing Timing

A sequence control block and a logic chart block have the following four types of execution timing: • Periodic Execution (T) • One-Shot Execution (O) • Initial Execution/Restart Execution (I) • Restricted Initial Execution (B)

n Output Timing of Sequence Control Block The output timing of sequence control block and logic chart block indicates the conditions to execute the output processing when the sequence table is started periodically or as a one shot. There are two types of output timing as below: • Output only when conditions change (C) • Output each time conditions are satisfied (E) The output timing of function blocks excluding sequence control blocks is “Output each time conditions are satisfied (E).”

n Combining Execution Timing and Output Timing The execution timing and the output timing can be used in combination.

n Control Period and Control Phase of a Sequence Control Block The control period is a period at which Periodic Execution Type (T) sequence tables and logic charts are executed. The control phase is the timing for performing sequence table processing during a control period. The control period and control phase of a sequence table and a logic chart are used when the sequence table and a logic chart are executed using a period longer than the basic scan for periodic execution.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-30

C7.3.1

Execution Timing for Sequence Control Blocks

The sequence control block is executed at the timing defined, then it performs data input processing. After the input processing, it executes processes such as the control calculation processing and output processing. There are four types of execution timing to start the sequence control block • Periodic Execution • One-Shot Execution • Initial Execution/Restart Execution • Restricted Initial Execution

n Periodic Execution (T) ▼ Scan Period

The periodic execution means that the sequence control block is repeatedly executed in a preset cycle. The function block for which a periodic execution is defined is referred as the periodicexecution (T) type function block. The timing that the control drawings and individual function blocks are executed by the periodic execution is determined by following factors.

l Scan Period The scan period is a time period of periodic execution for a function block. The periodic execution function block executes a process based on the scan period. There are three types of scan periods: basic scan, medium-speed scan (*1) and high-speed scan. In the periodic-execution-type sequence table block and logic chart block, the basic scan, medium-speed scan (*1) or high-speed scan can be selected as the scan period. Note that basic scan, not medium-speed scan or high-speed scan, should be set for the switch instrument block, enhanced switch instrument block, and VLVM block.

SEE

ALSO

For the scan period, see the following: C7.1.1, “Scan Period”

*1:

The medium-speed scan setting is available only for KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

l Order of Process Execution The order of process execution refers to a sequence in which the control drawing and individual function block are executed in the periodic execution. The execution timing within a scan period of the control drawing and the individual function block is determined by the order of the execution.

SEE

ALSO

For the order of process execution, see the following: C7.1.2, “Order of Process Execution”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-31

l Timing of Process I/O The timing of process input/output refers to a timing at which data input/output is executed between the function block and the process I/O. The timing of process I/O differs by whether the input/output data is analog or contact type.

SEE

ALSO

For the process input/output timing, see the following: C7.1.3, “Timing of Process I/O”

n One-Shot Execution (O) In one-shot execution, sequence block is executed only once when it is invoked by other function blocks. The function block defined with one-shot execution is referred as the one-shot-execution (O) type function block. When an one-shot function block is invoked by other function blocks in the same FCS, it starts its own process with interrupting the process from which it was invoked. When the one-shot block’s process is completed, it hands back the process to the block from which it was invoked. The sequence control block cannot be invoked from other control stations. The following diagram shows the one-shot processing: Time The calling source function block

Process execution

Process execution Call Execution

One-shot-execution-type function block

Process completion

Process resumption

Process execution C070201E.ai

Figure One-Shot Processing Conceptual Diagram

A one-shot function block can invoke another one-shot function block. However, such succession is limited to seven blocks. The one-shot processing is used when a function block is executed from a sequence control block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-32

n Initial Execution/Restart Execution (I) In initial execution/restart execution, the sequence block executes its process when the FCS performs a cold start or a restart. The function blocks only work in such timing are referred as the initial-cold start/restart execution (I) style function block.

n Restricted Initial Execution (B) In restricted initial execution (B), the sequence control block executes only when the FCS performs a cold start, not include restart. The function blocks only work in such timing are referred as the initial-cold start (B) style function block.

n Setting for Execution Timing Setting for execution timing can be defined in the Function Block Detail Builder. • Execution Timing: Select from the “Periodic Execution (T),” “One-Shot Execution (O),” “Initial Execution/ Restart Execution (I),” or “Restricted Initial Execution (B).” When the periodic execution (T) is selected for execution timing, set a scan period in the Function Block Detail Builder.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7.3.2

C7-33

Output Timing of Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E)

The output timing of a sequence table block indicates the conditions under which output processing is performed when the sequence table is executed periodically or as a one shot. The two types of output timing are given below. • Output only when conditions are changed (C) • Output each time conditions are satisfied (E)

n Output Only when Conditions are Changed (C) The ST16, ST16E blocks output an operation signal only at the timing when the judged conditions are changed from unsatisfied to satisfied. The “output only when conditions are changed” can only be specified for ST16, ST16E blocks with periodic execution (T) or one-shot start (O).

n Output Each Time Conditions are Satisfied (E) The ST16, ST16E blocks output an operation signal every scan period as long as the judged conditions are satisfied.

n Setting for Execution Timing The output timing can be defined in the Function Block Detail Builder. • Output timing: Select from “Output only when conditions are change” or “Output each time conditions are satisfied.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-34

C7.3.3

Output Timing of a LC64 Logic Chart Block

Output timing of logic chart block shows output conditions when the logic chart block starts by Periodic/One-shot Execution. “Each Time Conditions are Satisfied (E)” can only be selected as output timing.

n Output Each Time Conditions are Satisfied (E) The LC64 Logic Chart Block outputs operation signals by scan period if the specified conditions are satisfied.

IMPORTANT • Manipulated output is sent from the logic chart block every cycle. If the output data (ex. Printout messages) is not necessary every cycle, change output timing to output only when logical operators are changed. • When the logic chart block starts by one-shot processing, do not use time data in internal logical operation. For example, if on-delay timer were used, output is in the initial state. • Internal logic operators are reset upon recovery from O/S upon online maintenance.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7.3.4

C7-35

Combination of Execution Timing and Output Timing

The following section describes combinations of the execution and output timings.

n Combination of Execution Timing and Output Timing of Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) The table below shows all possible combinations of the execution timing and the output timing of the sequence tables. Combinations not listed here are not allowed. The default combination is TC. Table

Combination of Execution Timing and Output Timing of Sequence Tables Execution Timing

Periodic Execution (T) One-Shot Execution (O)

Output Timing

Symbol

Conditional Output (C)

TC

Each time Output (E)

TE

Conditional Output (C)

OC

Each time Output (E)

OE

Startup at Initial Cold Start/Restart (I)

-

I

Restricted Initial Execution (B)

-

B C070202E.ai

n Combination of Execution Timing and Output Timing of Logic Chart Block (LC64) The execution timing and the output timing of the logic chart block can be used with the following. No other combination is allowed. The default is T. Table

Combination of Execution Timing and Output Timing of Logic Chart Block Execution Timing

Output Timing

Symbol

Periodic Execution (T)

Each time (E)

TE

One-Shot Execution (O)

Each time (E)

OE

Startup at Initial Cold Start/Restart ( I )

-

I

Restricted Initial Execution (B)

-

B C070204E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-36

C7.3.5

Control Period and Control Phase for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E)

For the periodic execution (T) type ST16 and ST16E blocks, the control period and control phase can be set by the Function Block Detail Builder. However, the control period and control phase can only be set when the scan period is set to the basic scan.

n Control Period for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) The control period for the ST16, ST16E blocks refers to the interval at which the periodicexecution-type ST16 or ST16E block executes the sequence table. The control period can be set in the Function Block Detail Builder. • Control period: Set a value between 1 and 16 seconds. Default is 1 second.

n Control Phase for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) The control phase for the ST16, ST16E blocks refers to the timing at which the sequence table is executed in the control period. It sets the execution timing relative to the execution timing of the phase-zero sequence table. The control phase can be set in the Function Block Detail Builder. • Control phase: Set a value between 0 and 15 seconds. Default is 0 second.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7-37

n Example of Control Period and Control Phase for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) For example, in case of that a ST16 or ST16E block’s control period is 5 sec. and control phase is 3 sec., the ST16 or ST16E block is executed at every 5 seconds interval, 3 seconds after the phase zero’s ST16 or ST16E block. The following execution timing diagram shows the execution timing in case of the control period and control phase are set. Execution Time elapsed

Control period

Phase

1

0

2

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11 sec

0 1 0

3

1 2 0

4

1 2 3 0 1

5

2 3 4

C070203E.ai

Figure Control Period and Phase for Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



C7.3.6

C7-38

Control Period and Control Phase for Logic Chart Block (LC64)

The control period and control phase of periodic execution type (T) LC64 block can be set on the Function Block Detail Builder when the scan period is set to “Basic Scan.”

n Control Period for Logic Chart Block (LC64) A control period is defined as a period at which the LC64 periodic execution type logic chart block executes logic charts. Define the control period on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Control Period: Set a value between 1 to 16 seconds. The default is 1.

n Control Phase for Logic Chart Block (LC64) A control phase is defined as a timing when logic charts start within control periods. Define start timing relative to phase 0 logic chart start timing on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Control Phase: Set a value between 1 to 15 seconds. The default is 0.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocD-1

CENTUM VP Reference Function Block Details Vol.1 IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition

CONTENTS PART-D D1.

Function Block Details

Regulatory Control..................................................................................D1-1 D1.1

Regulatory Control Blocks............................................................................ D1-2 D1.1.1

Types of the Regulatory Control Blocks.......................................... D1-4

D1.1.2

I/O Data Handled by the Regulatory Control Blocks....................... D1-7

D1.1.3

Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block.................................. D1-12

D1.1.4

Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block.................. D1-19

D1.2

Input Indicator Block (PVI)........................................................................... D1-21

D1.3

Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)................................ D1-24

D1.4

Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks.......... D1-28

D1.5

PID Controller Block (PID)............................................................................ D1-57

D1.6

Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)....................................................... D1-68

D1.7

PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)................................. D1-78

D1.8

Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)............... D1-86

D1.9

Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)......... D1-94

D1.10

Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP)......................... D1-104

D1.11

PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR).................................... D1-113

D1.12

Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)................................................ D1-120

D1.13

Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)............................................ D1-132 D1.13.1 Control Algorithm of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).................................................................................... D1-138 D1.13.2 Self-Tuning Function (STC Function).......................................... D1-139 D1.13.3 Self-Tuning Operating Modes and Block Status......................... D1-141 D1.13.4 Initializer Start.............................................................................. D1-148 D1.13.5 Auto-Startup................................................................................. D1-149 D1.13.6 On-Demand Tuning..................................................................... D1-154 D1.13.7 Tuning Parameters of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).................................................................................... D1-156 D1.13.8 Points of Using Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)...... D1-167

D1.14

Manual Loader Block (MLD)...................................................................... D1-177

D1.15

Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)............................. D1-179

D1.16

Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW).............................. D1-182 IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocD-2 D1.17

Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)........................ D1-194 D1.17.1 Input Processing of Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E).................................................D1-202 D1.17.2 Control Computation Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)............................................. D1-206 D1.17.3 Output Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)............................................. D1-219 D1.17.4 Alarm Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)............................................. D1-238

D1.18

Ratio Set Block (RATIO)............................................................................. D1-241

D1.19

13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)....................................................... D1-260

D1.20

Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3).................................. D1-270 D1.20.1 Input Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3).................................................................. D1-271 D1.20.2 Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3).................................................................. D1-272 D1.20.3 Output Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3).................................................................. D1-293 D1.20.4 Alarm Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3).................................................................. D1-298 D1.20.5 Compatibility between Totalizing Batch Set Block and CENTUM V, CENTUM-XL Totalizing Batch Set Unit........................................ D1-302

D1.21

Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)............................................ D1-307

D1.22

Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)........................................ D1-318 D1.22.1 Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)................................................................................... D1-324 D1.22.2 Alarm Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)................................................................................... D1-328

D1.23

Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)................................................................ D1-332

D1.24

Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)............................................................ D1-349

D1.25

Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L).............................................................. D1-356

D1.26

Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)................................ D1-367

D1.27

Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)............................................... D1-372

D1.28

Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM).............................................. D1-379

D1.29

Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)...................................... D1-394

D1.30

Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)....................................................... D1-403

D1.31

Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)....................................................... D1-415

D1.32

Pulse Count Input Block (PTC).................................................................. D1-422

D1.33

Control Operations of YS Blocks.............................................................. D1-428 D1.33.1 Applying YS Blocks...................................................................... D1-429 D1.33.2 Common Specification of YS Blocks........................................... D1-430

D1.34

YS Controller Block (SLCD)....................................................................... D1-442

D1.35

YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)............................................ D1-446

D1.36

YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC).......................................................................................................... D1-451

D1.37

YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)............................ D1-456

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

TocD-3 D1.38

YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever (SMST-121)................ D1-459

D1.39

YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)........................................................... D1-462

D1.40

YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD).......................................................... D1-467

D1.41

YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)............................................................ D1-470

D1.42

YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)...................................................... D1-473

D1.43

YS Totalizer Block (STLD).......................................................................... D1-477

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Blank Page



D1-1

D1. Regulatory Control The regulatory control performs control computation processing using analog process values for process monitor and process control. The function blocks that provide the regulatory control function are referred as “regulatory control blocks.” This chapter presents a detailed description of the function of each of the regulatory control blocks, excluding the FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate block.

SEE

ALSO

For details on the FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks, see the following: A2, “Overview of FF Faceplate Blocks” in the FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33M20T10-40E)

n Regulatory Control Positioning The regulatory control is one of the basic controls in the FCS and performs control computation processing to monitor and control processes. The function blocks that perform the this regulatory control are referred as “regulatory control blocks.” The regulatory control blocks include Input indication blocks, controller blocks, manual loader blocks, signal set blocks, signal limiter blocks, Signal selector blocks, signal distribution blocks, pulse-count blocks, alarm blocks and YS blocks. The figure below shows the position of the regulatory control function in the basic control architecture: FCS Basic control

Software I/O

Regulatory control blocks

Internal switch

Calculation blocks

Annunciator message

Sequence control blocks

Sequence message

Faceplate blocks SFC blocks Unit instrument blocks

Options Valve pattern monitoring (1*) Off-site blocks (1*)

FCS I/O Interfaces Process I/O

Communication I/O

Fieldbus I/O D010001E.ai

*1:

The option can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Figure Regulatory Control Block in the Basic Control Function Architecture

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-2

D1.1 Regulatory Control Blocks The regulatory control blocks are the function blocks that perform control computation processing mainly on the analog input as input signals. The calculated results are used for process monitor and process control. The regulatory control blocks support the following types of processing: input processing, control computation processing, output processing and alarm processing.

n Structure of Regulatory Control Blocks The function blocks that provide the regulatory control function are called “regulatory control blocks.” The regulatory control blocks perform control computation processing mainly on analog signals (analog values) as input values. The results of control computation processing performed by the regulatory control blocks are output as manipulated output values (MV). The figure below shows a function block diagram of a general regulatory control block: SET

BIN

RL1

RL2

TIN

(VN) (RLV1) (RLV2)

CSV RSV

IN

RAW

Input processing

(TSW)

SV

RCAS PV

INT

Alarm processing

CAS AUT MAN

TSI

CAS AUT

Control computation processing

MAN Output processing

MV

OUT

ROUT (PV, ∆PV, MV, ∆MV)

RMV

SUB D010101E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of the Regulatory Control Block IN: SET: BIN: RLn: TIN: TSI: INT: SUB: OUT:

Input terminal Setpoint value input terminal Compensation input terminal Reset signal input terminal Tracking signal input terminal Tracking switch input terminal Interlock switch input terminal Auxiliary output terminal Output terminal

RAW: Raw data input signal PV: Process variable SV: Setpoint value CSV: Cascade setpoint value RSV: Remote setpoint value VN: Compensated value Input RMV: Remote manipulated output value RLVn: Reset signal MV: Manipulated output value TSW: Tracking switch

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-3

n Functions of the Regulatory Control Blocks The regulatory control blocks have the following four processing functions:

l Input Processing Receives a signal from the input terminal and outputs a process variable (PV).

l Control Computation Processing Performs control computation processing by reading the process variable (PV) and outputs a manipulated output value (MV).

l Output Processing Reads the manipulated output value (MV) and outputs the result of control computation processing to the output terminal as an output signal.

l Alarm Processing Detects an abnormality in the process variable (PV) or manipulated output value (MV) and notifies the operation and monitoring functions. Control computation processing can be performed independently via data setting or data reference between the function blocks, without involving input processing or output processing.

SEE

ALSO

Refer to the following sections for the input processing, output processing, and alarm processing that are common to a multiple number of regulatory control blocks. • For input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing - FCS”

The characteristics and control computation processing functions of the regulatory control blocks are explained as control action in the sections for individual function blocks in the chapters from D1.3. The characteristics and control computation processing of each regulatory control block, as well as any input processing, output processing, and alarm processing that are inherent to particular regulatory control blocks are explained in the sections beginning with D1.2 for each function block.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1.1.1

D1-4

Types of the Regulatory Control Blocks

The regulatory control blocks vary by the types of data handled and control computation processing functions provided. The blocks are classified into these blocks below. • Input Indicator Blocks • Controller Blocks • Manual Loader Blocks • Signal Setter Blocks • Signal Limiter Blocks • Signal Selector Blocks • Signal Distributor Blocks • Pulse Count Input Block • Alarm Block • YS Blocks

n Input Indicator Blocks The table below shows a list of input indicator blocks: Table

Input Indicator Blocks Block type

Input indicators

Code

Name

PVI

Input Indicator Block

PVI-DV

Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm D010102E.ai

n Controller Blocks The table below shows a list of controller blocks: Table

Controller Blocks Block type

Controllers

Code

Name

PID

PID Controller Block

PI-HLD

Sampling PI Controller Block

PID-BSW

PID Controller Block with Batch Switch

ONOFF

2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

ONOFF-E

Enhanced 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (*1)

ONOFF-G

3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

ONOFF-GE Enhanced 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (*1) PID-TP

Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block

PD-MR

PD Controller Block with Manual Reset

PI-BLEND

Blending PI Controller Block

PID-STC

Self-Tuning PID Controller Block D010103E.ai

*1:

This type of function blocks can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-5

n Manual Loader Blocks The table below shows a list of manual loader blocks: Table

Manual Loader Blocks Block type

Manual Loader

Code

Name

MLD

Manual Loader Block

MLD-PVI

Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator

MLD-SW

Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man Switch

MC-2

2-Position Motor Control Block

MC-2E

Enhanced 2-Position Motor Control Block (*1)

MC-3

3-Position Motor Control Block

MC-3E

Enhanced 3-Position Motor Control Block (*1) D010104E.ai

*1:

This type of function blocks can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS.

n Signal Setter Blocks The table below shows a list of signal setter blocks: Table

Signal Setter Blocks Block type

Signal Setters

Code

Name

RATIO

Ratio Set Block

PG-L13

13-Zone Program Set Block

BSETU-2

Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block

BSETU-3

Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block D010105E.ai

n Signal Limiter Block The table below shows the signal limiter block: Table

Signal Limiter Block Block type

Signal Limiters

Code VELLIM

Name Velocity Limiter Block D010106E.ai

n Signal Selector Blocks The table below shows a list of Signal selector blocks: Table

Signal Selector Blocks Block type

Signal selectors

Code

Name

AS-H/M/L

Autoselector Block

SS-H/M/L

Signal Selector Block

SS-DUAL

Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block D010107E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-6

n Signal Distributor Blocks The table below shows a list of signal distributor blocks: Table

Signal Distributor Blocks Block type

Signal Distributors

Code

Name

FOUT

Cascade Signal Distributor Block

FFSUM

Feedforward Signal Summing Block

XCPL

Non-Interference Control Output Block

SPLIT

Control Signal Splitter Block D010108E.ai

n Alarm Block The table below shows the alarm block: Table

Alarm Block Block type

Alarm

Code ALM-R

Name Representative Alarm Block D010109E.ai

n Pulse Count Input Block The table below shows the pulse count input connection block: Table

Pulse Count Input Connection Block Block type

Pulse Count Input Connection Block

Code PTC

Name Pulse Count Input Block D010110E.ai

n YS Blocks The table below shows the YS blocks: Table

YS Blocks Block type

YS instrument

Code

Name

SLCD

YS Controller Block

SLPC

YS Programmable Controller Block

SLMC

YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse-Width Output

SMST-111

YS Manual Station Block with SV Output

SMST-121

YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever

SMRT

YS Ratio Set Station Block

SBSD

YS Batch Set Station Block

SLCC

YS Blending Controller Block

SLBC

YS Batch Controller Block

STLD

YS Totalizer Block D010111E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1.1.2

D1-7

I/O Data Handled by the Regulatory Control Blocks

As a rule, the data transmitted via I/O terminals handled by the regulatory control blocks must be the engineering unit data. Each data item consists of data value and data status.

n Data Value The data value is a numeric data that is transmitted in or out of a function block. The data values handled by the blocks include process variable (PV), cascade setpoint value (CSV) and manipulated output value (MV). The data values handled by the regulatory control blocks are numeric data in engineering unit. However, the data received from the input modules (excluding the input modules for temperature measurement as well as for pulse trains) and the setpoint data sent to analogue output modules are given as percentage values in the range from 0 % to 100 %. The data value read into a function block via an input terminal is called “input data,” while the value written out of a function block via an output terminal is called “output data.”

n Data Status The data status is a piece of status information that indicates the value and quality of I/O data. The data status is conveyed as I/O data from one function block to another via I/O connection along with a data value. The data status is used to test the existence of exceptional events, such as process failures and computation errors occurred in the control computation processing performed by the function blocks.

SEE

ALSO

For the details of data status, see the following: C6.4, “Data Status”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-8

n Input Data The input data is numeric data that the function blocks read from input terminals. The types of input data are shown below: • Process variable (PV) • Setpoint value (SV), cascade setpoint value (CSV), remote setpoint value (RSV) • Input signal values (RV1, RV2, RV3) • Reset limit values (RLV1, RLV2) • Input or Output Compensated value (VN) • Tracking switch (TSW)

l Process Variable (PV) ▼ Process Variable Range

The engineering unit and scale range of raw input signals (RAW) input to an IN terminal agree with the engineering unit and scale range of data at the connected destination of the IN terminal. A raw input signal turns into a process variable (PV) after input processing. Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the engineering unit and scale range. However, the process variable (PV) of Motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3) must be an integer value between 0 and 2. • Engineering unit: Consists of six or less standard-width characters or three double-width characters. The default is “%.” • Process variable range: High and low limits. Numerical values of seven digits or less, where the sign or decimal point takes one digit each. The default is “100.0” for the upper limit and “0.0” for the lower limit.

l Setpoint Value (SV), Cascade Setpoint Value (CSV), Remote Setpoint Value (RSV) The engineering unit and scale range of the setpoint value (SV), cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) agree with the engineering unit and scale range of the process variable (PV) except in the function blocks shown below: Ratio Set Block (RATIO) Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM) YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)

Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)

Use the Function Block Detail Definition Builder to set the engineering unit and scale range of SV for the function blocks shown to the left. The engineering unit and scale range of CSV and RSV are same as those of SV. The FOUT and FFSUM blocks have no RSV. The engineering unit and scale range of the function blocks shown to the left are fixed for each block. D010112E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-9

l Input Signal Values (RV1, RV2, RV3) The input signal values (RV1, RV2, RV3) are input data handled by the Signal selector blocks. Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the engineering unit and scale range of input signal values. The input signal values (RV1, RV2, RV3) are regarded as having the same engineering unit and scale range as those of the selected signal value (PV).

l Reset Limit Values (RLV1, RLV2) The reset limit values (RLV1, RLV2) are input data that are handled by a controller block when the reset limit function is used. The reset limit values (RLV1, RLV2) are regarded as having the same engineering unit and scale range as those of the manipulated output value (MV).

l Input or Output Compensated Value (VN) The engineering unit and scale range are not defined for input compensated values (VN) received from the BIN terminal, as the numeric data of input compensated values (VN) taken in from outside are used directly for input or output compensation computation.

l Tracking Switch (TSW) The data handled by the tracking switch (TSW) for the TSI terminal must be an integer value of “0” or “1.” “1” and “0” indicate ON and OFF, respectively.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-10

n Output Data The output data is a numeric data value that is written out of a function block via an output terminal. The types of output data are shown below: • Manipulated output value (MV) • Auxiliary output values (PV, ∆PV, MV, ∆MV) • Process variable (PV)

l Manipulated Output Value (MV) ▼ MV Display Style

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the display form for the manipulated output value (MV). • MV Display Style: Select “Automatic Determination” or “User Define.” The default is “Automatic Determination.” When “Automatic Determination” is selected, the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV) change according to the connected destination of the OUT terminal. • If the connection destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the manipulated output value (MV) is fixed to “0 to 100” and “%,” respectively. However, this rule does not apply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block. • When outputting to a cascade setpoint value (CSV) in a case where the connection destines to a SET terminal of another function block (cascade connection), the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV) agree with those of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) of the output destination. When the connection destination is an input terminal of another function block than SET terminal, “self determination” must be selected. When “User Define” is selected, set the engineering unit and scale range for the manipulated output value (MV). The engineering unit and the range should be the same as the output destination. • MV Engineering Unit Symbol: Consists of six or less standard-width characters or three double-width characters. The default is “%.” • MV Range: High and low limits. Numerical values of seven digits or less, where the sign and decimal point occupy one digit each. The default is “100.0” for the upper limit and “0.0” for the lower limit. For MV displayed on an instrument faceplate, set whether to display the engineering unit data as is or to convert the data into a percentage-unit value first. Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the instrument faceplate display. • MV Display on Faceplate: Select “Indicate Actual Quantity” or “Indicate %.” The default is “Indicate real amount.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-11

IMPORTANT Event when the user wants to display the MV in percentage on HIS faceplate, there is no need to change the setting for [MV Display Style] - [User-Define] to 0 % - 100 %. The setting in this field should be kept the same as the output destination; but to change the setting [MV Display on Faceplate] from [Indicate Actual Quantity] to [Indicate %].

l Auxiliary Output Values (PV, ∆PV, MV, ∆MV) The auxiliary output values include PV, ∆PV, MV and ∆MV, the types vary with the function block. The engineering unit and scale range of the auxiliary output values change in accordance with the connected destination of the SUB terminal. • If the connected destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the auxiliary output values are fixed to “0 to 100” and “%,” respectively. However, this rule does not apply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block. • When the connected destination is a function block and auxiliary output is the process variable (PV) or process variable change (∆PV), the engineering unit and scale range of the output value agree with those of the process variable (PV). • When the connected destination is a function block and auxiliary output is the manipulated output value (MV) or manipulated output change (∆MV), the output value is regarded as having the same engineering unit and scale range as those of the manipulated output value (MV).

l Process Variable (PV) The process variable (PV) can be output directly from the input indicator blocks. The engineering unit and scale information of the process variable (PV) vary with the connected destination of the OUT terminal. • If the connected destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the output value are fixed to “0 to 100” and “%,” respectively. However, this rule does not apply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block. • If the connected destination is another function block, the scale range and engineering unit of the output value agree with those of the process variable.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-12

D1.1.3

Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block

A list of the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing that can be performed in each regulatory control block is shown below.

n Input Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block Table

Input Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block (1/2) Model

Input signal conversion

Digital filter

Totalizer

PV overshoot

CAL

BARPbSbL

x

x

x

x

BARPbSbL

x

x

x

x

PVI PVI-DV PID PI-HLD PID-BSW ONOFF ONOFF-E ONOFF-G ONOFF-GE PID-TP PD-MR PI-BLEND PID-STC MLD MLD-PVI MLD-SW MC-2 MC-2E MC-3

x

S 2 S3 L

MC-3E D010113E.ai

B: No conversion (function block) A: No conversion (analog input) R: Square root conversion (analog input) Pb: Pulse-train input conversion S2: Two-position status input (for MC-2/3 and MC-2E/3E only) S3: Three-position status input (for MC-2/3 and MC-2E/3E only) Sb: Subsystem input L: PV limit x: Exists Blank: Not exist

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-13

Table

Input Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block (2/2) Input signal conversion

Digital filter

Totalizer

PV overshoot

CAL

BARPbSbL

x

x

x

x

BSETU-2

BARPbSbL

x

x

x

x

BSETU-3

BACSb

x

BASbL

x

Model RATIO (*1) PG-L13

x

VELLIM SS-H/M/L AS-H/M/L SS-DUAL (*2)

x

x

x

FOUT FFSUM XCPL SPLIT PTC

(*3)

(*3)

BR

x

x

SLPC

x

x

SLMC

x

x

SMST-111

x

x

SMST-121

x

x

SMRT

x

x

SBSD

(*4)

x

SLBC

(*4)

x

SLCC

(*4)

x

STLD

(*4)

x

x

ALM-R SLCD

D010114E.ai

B: No conversion (function block) A: No conversion (analog input) R: Square root conversion (analog input) Pb: Pulse-train input conversion C: Code input (for BSETU-3 only) Sb: Subsystem input L: PV limit x: Exists Blank: Not exist *1: The input processing will not function when the data setting is performed to the PV by cascade connection. *2: The input processing is performed against the input signal on the selected side. *3: Performs a PTC block independent processing *4: Display the sum of YS Instrument.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-14

n Output Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block Table

Output Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block (1/2)

Model

Output limit

Velocity limit

Clamped output

PMV

Output track

Range track

PVI PVI-DV PID PI-HLD PID-BSW

Auxiliary output

Output signal conversion

PPd

BASb

x

x

x

x

x

x

PPdMMd

BAPwPwfSb

x

x

x

x

x

x

PPdMMd

BAPwfSb

PPd

S2

PPd

S2

PPd

S3

PPd

S3

PPdMMd

D

x

PPdMMd

BAPwfSb

x

PPdMMd

BAPwPwfSb

ONOFF

x

ONOFF-E

x

ONOFF-G

x

ONOFF-GE

x

(*1) (*1)

PID-TP

x

x (*2)

PD-MR

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

MLD

x

x

(*1)

x

MMd

BAPwfSb

MLD-PVI

x

x

(*1)

x

PPdMMd

BAPwfSb

MLD-SW

x

x

(*1)

x

MMd

BAPwfSb

PI-BLEND PID-STC

x

x

x

x

S2P2

MC-2 MC-2E

x

S2P2 S3P3

MC-3 MC-3E

x

S3P3 D010116E.ai

P: Pd: M: Md: B: A: D: Pw: Pwf: S2: S3: P2: P3: Sb: *1: *2:

PV ∆PV MV ∆MV Unconverted output (function block) Analog output Time-proportioning ON/OFF output Pulse width output (without FB) Pulse width output (with FB) 2-position status output 3-position status output 2-position pulsive output 3-position pulsive output Subsystem output Selectable by builder setting. The velocity limiter functions when the block is in AUT mode, but not when the block is in MAN mode regardless the setting for [MAN Mode Velocity Limiter Bypass].

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-15

Table

Output Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block (2/2) Output limit

Velocity limit

Clamped output

PMV

Output track

Range track

Auxiliary output

Output signal conversion

RATIO

x

x

x

x

x

x

PPdMMd

BAPwfSb

PG-L13

(*1)

x

x

Model

x

BASb

BSETU-2

x

x

BSETU-3

x

x

BAS2bS3b S2sS3sb

VELLIM

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

MMd

BASb

SS-H/M/L AS-H/M/L

BASb BASb

SS-DUAL

BASb

FOUT

(*2)

x

x

B

FFSUM

x

x

x

x

x

x

PPdMMd

BAPwfSb

XCPL

x

x

x

x

x

x

MMd

BAPwfSb

SPLIT

x

x

x

x

BA (*3)

PTC ALM-R YS Blocks (*4)

D010117E.ai

P: Pd: M: Md: B: A: Pwf: S2b: S3b: S2s: S3s: Sb: *1: *2: *3: *4:

PV ∆PV MV ∆MV Unconverted output (function block) Analog output Pulse width output (with FB) 2-position status output (BSETU-2/3 only) 3-position status output (BSETU-2/3 only) 2-position status output through switch instrument (BSETU-2/3 only) 3-position status output through switch instrument (BSETU-2/3 only) Subsystem output Always restricted by MSH/MSL Only tracking of the CLP ± status of the output destination is performed. Performs processing unique to PTC block. YS Blocks contain the following models: SLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT, SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-16

n Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Table

Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block (1/3) Process alarms

Model

N R

O O P

I O P

I O P -

H H

L L

H I

L O

D V +

D V -

V E L +

V E L -

x

x

x x

PVI

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

PVI-DV

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

PID

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

PI-BLEND

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

PID-STC

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

MLD

x

x

MLD-PVI

x

x

x

x

MLD-SW

x

x

x

x

PI-HLD

M H I

x

M L O

x

C N F

Other alarms

x

PID-BSW ONOFF ONOFF-E

x

ONOFF-G ONOFF-GE PID-TP PD-MR

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x

x

x

MC-2 MC-2E MC-3 MC-3E

x

x

HDV LDV

x

x

x

x

x

TRIP PERR ANS+ ANSINT D010118E.ai

x: Available Blank: Not available

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-17

Table

Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block (2/3) Process alarms N R

O O P

I O P

I O P -

H H

L L

H I

L O

RATIO

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

PG-L13

x

x

x

x

Model

D V +

D V -

V E L +

V E L -

M H I

M L O

C N F

Other alarms

x

x

x

x

x

Not available

x

Not available

x

NPLS (*1) BDV+ BDVLEAK BEND BPRE

x

Not available

BSETU-2

x

x

x

x

VELLIM

x

x

x

x

SS-H/M/L

x

x

x

AS-H/M/L

x

x

x

SS-DUAL

x

x

x

x

x

x

BSETU-3

x

x

x

x

x

x x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x

FOUT (*2) FFSUM

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

XCPL

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

SPLIT

x

x

PTC

x

ALM-R

x

x x

x

x x

HALM MALM LALM RALM D010119E.ai

x: Available Blank: Not available *1: The NPLS alarm is only supported in the BSETU-2 but not in the BSETU-3. *2: FOUT does not have an alarm status. Nevertheless, the output fail check and the bad connection status alarm check are performed and the results are transmitted to the upstream function block. An output fail of FOUT is generated when output fail is detected at all FOUT output destinations.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-18

Table

Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block (3/3) Process alarms N R

O O P

I O P

I O P -

H I

L O

D V +

D V -

SLCD

x

x

x

SLPC

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

SLMC

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

SMST-111

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

SMST-121 SMRT

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

SBSD

x

x

x

x

x

END PRE LERK

SLBC

x

x

x

x

x

END PRE LERK

SLCC

x

x

x

x

x

HDV

STLD

x

x

x

x

Model

H H

L L

x

V E L +

V E L -

M H I

M L O

C N F

Other alarms

x D010120E.ai

x: Available Blank: Not available

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-19

D1.1.4

Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block

A list of valid block modes for each regulatory control block is shown below.

n Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block Table

Valid Basic Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Blocks (1/2) Valid basic block modes

Model

Name of function block

PVI

Input indicator block

PVI- DV

Input indicator block with deviation alarm

PID

PID controller block

PI-HLD

Sampling PI controller block

PID-BSW

PID controller block with batch switch

ONOFF

Two-position ON/OFF controller block

ONOFF-E

Enhanced two-position ON/OFF controller block

ONOFF-G

Three-position ON/OFF controller block

ONOFF-GE

Enhanced three-position ON/OFF controller block

PID-TP

Time-proportioning ON/OFF controller block

PD-MR

O I T M A C / M R A U A S A K N T S N

P R R R C O D A U S T

x

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

-

x

x

x

-

x

x

PD controller block with manual reset

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

PI-BLEND

Blending PI controller block

x

x

x

x

x

x

-

x

x

PID-STC

Self-tuning PID controller block

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

MLD

Manual loader block

MLD-PVI

Manual loader block with input indicator

x

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

MLD-SW

Manual loader block with Auto/Man SW

x

x

x

x

x

Δ

-

-

-

MC-2

Two-position motor control block

MC-2E

Enhanced two-position motor control block

MC-3

Three-position motor control block

x

x

x

x

x

x

-

-

x

MC-3E

Enhanced three-position motor control block

RATIO

Ratio set block

x

x

x

x

x

x

-

x

x

PG-L13

13-zone program set block

x

x

-

x

x

x

-

-

-

D010121E.ai

x: -: Δ:

Valid Invalid For MLD-SW, CAS mode can be specified instead of AUT mode.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-20

Table

Valid Basic Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Blocks (2/2) Valid basic block modes

Model

Name of function block

BSETU -2

Flow-totalizing batch set block

BSETU -3

Weight-totalizing batch set block

VELLIM SS-H/M/L

O I T M A C P R R / M R A U A R C O S A K N T S D A U N S T x

x

-

x

x

-

-

-

-

Velocity limiter block

x

x

-

x

x

x

-

x

x

Signal selector block

x

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

AS-H/M/L

Autoselector block

x

x

-

x

x

-

-

-

-

SS-DUAL

Dual-redundant signal selector block

x

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

FOUT

Cascade signal distributor block

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

FFSUM

Feedforward signal summing block

x

x

x

x

x

x

-

-

-

XCPL

Non-inteference control output block

x

x

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

SPLIT

Control signal splitter block

x

x

-

-

x

x

-

x

-

PTC

Pulse count input block

x

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

ALM-R

Representative alarm block

x

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

SLCD

YS controller block

x

x

-

x

x

x

-

x

x

SLPC

YS programmable controller block

x

x

-

x

x

x

-

x

x

SLMC

YS programmable controller block with pulse-width output

x

x

-

x

x

x

-

x

x

SMST-111

YS manual station block with SV output

x

x

-

x

-

x

-

x

-

SMST-121

YS manual station block with MV output lever

x

x

-

x

-

x

-

-

x

SMRT

YS ratio set station block

x

x

-

x

x

x

-

x

x

SBCD

YS batch set station block

x

x

-

-

x

-

-

x

-

SLCC

YS blending controller block

x

x

-

x

x

-

-

x

x

SLBC

YS batch controller block

x

x

-

x

x

-

-

x

x

STLD

YS totalizer block

x

x

-

-

x

-

-

x

-

D010122E.ai

x : -:

Valid Invalid

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-21

D1.2 Input Indicator Block (PVI) This function block displays an input signal from the I/O modules or from the other blocks as process variable (PV). It can also output the process variable (PV) from the OUT terminal. This block may be used only for indicating the process variable.

n Input Indicator Block (PVI) ▼ Connection

The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Input Indicator Block (PVI): IN

Input processing

PV

OUT

(PV, ∆PV) SUB D010201E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Input Indicator Block (PVI)

The table below shows the connection method and connected destination of the I/O terminals of the Input Indicator Block (PVI): Table

Connection Method and Connected Destination of I/O Terminals of Input Indicator Block (PVI) I/O terminal

IN

Measurement input

Connection method Data reference

Data setting

x

Connection destination

Terminal Process connection I/O

Software I/O

Function block

Δ

x

x

OUT

Process variable output

x

Δ

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x D010202E.ai

x: Connection allowed Blank: Connection not allowed Δ: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-22

n Function of Input Indicator Block (PVI) The PVI block performs input processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the PVI block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the mediumspeed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. Moreover, it is possible to specify the scan coefficient and the scan phase. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the PVI block, see the following: D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-23

n Data Items - PVI Table Data Item

Data Items of Input Indicator Block (PVI) Data Name

Entry Permitted or Not x

MODE Block mode

Range

Default

-----

O/S (AUT)

ALRM Alarm status

-----

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing status

-----

0

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

0

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

0

PV

Process variable

PV engineering unit value

SL

RAW

Raw input data

SUM

Totalizer value

x

Engineering unit value

0

HH

High - high limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

LL

Low - low limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

PH

High - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

PL

Low - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

VL

Velocity alarm setpoint

x

±(SH - SL)

SH - SL

PVP

Velocity-Reference Sample

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

Δ(*1)

Value in the unit at the connection destination -----

OPMK Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

PV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

SL

PV scale low limit

x

D010203E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes of the PVI block, see the following: D1.1.4, “Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-24

D1.3 Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) The Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) displays an input signal as a process variable (PV), provides the deviation alarm function, and outputs a PV from the OUT terminal. This block is used for PV display, and deviation alarm indicating the difference between a PV and a setpoint value (SV).

n Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) ▼ Connection

The Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) displays an input signal received from an I/O module or other function block as a process variable (PV). In addition to the function to display an input signal as a process variable (PV), Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) provides two other functions: “deviation alarm check” and “setpoint value limiter.” By presetting a deviation alarm setpoint (DL), the deviation (DV) of the setpoint value (SV) from process variable (PV) can be confirmed. The figure below shows a function block diagram of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV): -

SV

DV +

IN

Input processing

PV

OUT (PV, ∆PV) SUB D010301E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)

The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV): Table

Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI) Connection method I/O terminal

IN

Measurement input

Data reference

Data setting

x

Connection destination

Terminal Process connection I/O

Software I/O

Function block

Δ

x

x

OUT

Process variable output

x

Δ

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x D010302E.ai

x: Connection allowed Blank: Connection not allowed Δ: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-25

n Function of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) The PVI-DV block performs input processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the PVI-DV block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. Moreover, it is possible to specify the scan coefficient and the scan phase. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the PVI-DV block, see the following: D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

This section describes the deviation alarm check function and the setpoint value limiter function, which constitute some of the processing performed by the PVI-DV block.

n Deviation Alarm Check The deviation alarm check function generates a deviation alarm when the absolute value of deviation (DV) between the setpoint value (SV) and process variable (PV) exceeds the absolute value of the preset deviation alarm setpoint (DL). • When the deviation (DV) exceeds the high limit of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL): A positive deviation alarm (DV+) is generated. • When the deviation (DV) falls below the low limit of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL): A negative deviation alarm (DV-) is generated. The deviation (DV) of the process variable (PV) from the setpoint value (SV) is represented by the following expression: DV=PV-SV

SEE

ALSO

For the details of the deviation alarm check, see the following: C5.6, “Deviation Alarm Check”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-26

n Setpoint Value Limiter The setpoint value limiter function limits the setpoint value (SV) within a range between the setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL). The actions of the setpoint value limiter are described below: • When a value exceeding the setpoint high limit (SVH) or high alarm setpoint (PH) is set as a setpoint value (SV): An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator’s confirmation. To check alarm operation, the operator can set a value exceed the setpoint high limit (SVH) or high alarm setpoint (PH). • When a value below the setpoint low limit (SVL) or low alarm setpoint (PL) is set as a setpoint value (SV): An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator’s confirmation. To check alarm operation, the operator can set a value exceed the setpoint low limit (SVL) or low alarm setpoint (PL). The parameters of the setpoint value limiter: • Setpoint high limit (SVH): Engineering unit data within the PV scale range. The default is the scale’s high limit. • Setpoint low limit (SVL): Engineering unit data within the PV scale range. The default is the scale’s low limit.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-27

n Data Items – PVI-DV Table

Data Items of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)

Data Item

Data Name

MODE Block mode

Entry Permitted or Not x -----

Range

Default O/S (AUT)

ALRM

Alarm status

-----

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing status

-----

0

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

0

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

0

PV

Process variable

PV engineering unit value

SL

RAW

Raw input data

SUM

Totalizer value

x

Engineering unit value

0

SV

Setpoint value

x

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

SL

DV

Deviation

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

0

HH

High - high limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

LL

Low - low limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

PH

High - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

PL

Low - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

VL

Velocity alarm setpoint

x

±(SH - SL)

SH - SL

PVP

Velocity-Reference Sample

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

DL

Deviation alarm setpoint

x

±(SH - SL)

SH - SL

SVH

Setpoint high limit

x

SL to SH

SH

SVL

Setpoint low limit

x

SL to SH

SL

OPMK Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

PV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

SL

PV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

Δ (*1)

Value in the unit at the connection destination -----

D010303E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes of the PVI-DV block, see the following: D1.1.4, “Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-28

D1.4 Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks The various types of controller blocks, represented by PID controller, have some common computation processing functions. This chapter explains the control computation processing functions that are common to multiple controller blocks. The control computation processing functions specific to each controller block are explained in the section of the corresponding controller block.

n Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks The table below shows the control computation processing functions that are common to multiple controller blocks: Table

Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks (1/2)

Control computation processing Non-linear gain

Description Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of deviation so that the relationship between the deviation and control output change (∆MV) becomes non-linear.

Gap action

Lowers the proportional gain to moderate control effects when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.

Squared deviation action

Changes the proportional gain according to the degree of deviation when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.

Control output action

Converts the manipulated output change (∆MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output actions include “positional type” and “velocity type.”

Control action direction

Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct action) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.

Reset limit function

Performs correction computation using values read from the connection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID control computation. This function prevents reset windup.

Deadband action

Adjusts the manipulated output change (∆MV) to “0” when the deviation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated output value (MV) from changing.

I/O compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the controller block is operating automatically.

Input compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the input signal of the PID control computation.

Output compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the output signal of the PID control computation.

Process variable tracking

Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).

Setpoint value limiter

Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL).

Setpoint value pushback

Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with the remaining one. D010401E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



Table

D1-29

Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks (2/2)

Control computation processing

Description

Bumpless switching

Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when the manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in a downstream block in cascade.

Initialization manual

Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.

Control hold

Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed normally.

MAN fallback

Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.

AUT fallback

Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.

Computer failure

Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.

Block mode change interlock

Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.

PRD mode action

Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode has been changed to PRD. D010402E.ai

SEE

ALSO

For the control computation processing functions specific to each controller block, see a the chapter or section of the corresponding controller block in the following sections: from D1.5, “PID Controller Block (PID)” through D1.13, “Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-30

n Non-Linear Gain ▼ Non-Linear Gain

The non-linear gain function changes the proportional gain in accordance with the deviation of the process variable (PV) from the setpoint value (SV) in the control computation. As a result, a non-linear relationship is formed between the manipulated output change (∆MV) and the deviation of the process variable (PV) from setpoint value (SV). The non-linear gain function is used for pH control, in which the process gain often becomes too high near the target value, or for buffer tank level control, whose purpose is to stabilize the discharge volume while maintaining the tank level within the limits. The actions that realize the non-linear gain function include “gap actions” and “squared deviation actions.”

l Processing Flow of Non-Linear Gain The non-linear gain function calculates the control output change (∆MV), using the effective proportional gain (Kpe) obtained through non-linear correction of proportional gain (Kp). The figure below shows a flow of the non-linear gain. PID computation

∆MV

Kpe En

Non-linear gain computation

GW

Kp

∆MV: Kpe: En: GW: Kp:

Manipulated output change Effective proportional gain Deviation Gap width Proportional gain D010403E.ai

Figure Processing Flow of the Non-Linear Gain

l Setting Non-Linear Gain Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the non-linear gain. • Non-linear gain: Select “No,” “Gap Action” or “Squared Deviation Action.” The default is “No.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-31

n Gap Action The gap action moderates control effects by lowering the proportional gain when the deviation is within the preset gap width (GW).

l Non-Linear Gain Characteristics of Gap Action If a non-linear gain coefficient (Knl) has been set, the effective proportional gain (Kpe) is obtained by the following expression when the deviation is within the gap width (GW): Kpe=Kp • Knl Once the deviation exceeds the limits of the gap width (GW), the effective proportional gain (Kpe) is obtained by the following expression: Kpe= 1-(1-Knl) •

GW | En |

• Kp D010404E.ai

The figure below shows the non-linear gain characteristics of the gap action: Equivalent deviation (En')

Effective proportional gain (Kpe) Kp

Knl=1.0 Knl=0.5

Knl=1.0

Knl=0.25 Knl=0.0

0

Deviation (En)

Knl=0.5 0.5 Knl=0.25 0.25 Knl=0.0 0

Gap width (GW)

Deviation (En)

Gap width (GW)

Gap width (GW)

Equivalent deviation: The deviation equivalent to a state in which no non-linear gain is specified. D010405E.ai

Figure Non-Linear Gain Characteristics of Gap Action

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-32

l Setting Gap Action Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the non-linear gain coefficient. • Gap Gain: Select “1.0,” “0.5,” “0.25” or “0.” The default is “1.0.” Table

Relationship between the Non-linear Gain Coefficient and Effective Proportional Gain

Gain coefficient (Knl)

| En |≤ GW

| En |>GW

1.0 (linear)

-

-

0.5

1 Kp 4

(1 -

GW ) Kp 2 | En |

0.25

1 Kp 2

(1 -

3GW ) Kp 4 | En |

0

0

(1 -

GW ) Kp | En | D010406E.ai

l Set Parameter of Gap Action The parameter of the gap action: • Gap width (GW): Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit. The default is 0.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-33

n Squared Deviation Action The squared deviation action changes the proportional gain in proportion to the degree of deviation when the deviation is within the preset gap width (GW).

l Non-Linear Gain Characteristics of Squared Deviation Action If a gap width (GW) has been set, the effective proportional gain (Kpe) is obtained by the following expression when the deviation is within the gap width (GW): Kpe=

| En | GW

• Kp

D010407E.ai

Once the deviation exceeds the limits of the gap width (GW), the effective proportional gain (Kpe) is represented by the following expression: Kpe=Kp The figure below shows the non-linear characteristics of the squared deviation action: Effective proportional gain (Kpe)

Equivalent deviation (En')

0

Kp

Deviation (En)

0

Gap width Deviation (En) (GW)

Gap width (GW)

Gap width (GW)

Equivalent deviation: The deviation equivalent to a state in which no non-linear gain is specified. D010408E.ai

Figure Non-Linear Characteristics of the Squared Deviation Action

l Set Parameter of Squared Deviation Action The parameter of the squared deviation action: • Gap width (GW): Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit. The default is 0.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-34

n Control Output Action The control output action converts the manipulated output change (∆MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). There are two types of control output actions: velocity type and positional type.

l Velocity Type Adds the current manipulated output change (∆MV) to the value readback from the output destination (MVrb) and determines the manipulated output value (MVn). The computational expression of the velocity-type control output action is shown below: MVn=MVrb+∆MVn

l Positional Type Adds the current manipulated output change (∆MV) to the previous output value (MVn-1) and determines the manipulated output value (MVn). The computational expression of the positional-type control output action is shown below: MVn=MVn-1+∆MVn

l Setting Control Calculation Output Action Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the control calculation output action. • Control Calculation Output Type: Select “Velocity Output Action” or “Positional Output Action.” The default is “Positional Output Action.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-35

n Control Action Direction ▼ Control Action

The control action direction function switches between direct action and reverse action that reflect the increase or decrease of manipulated output value.

l Direct Action and Reverse Action The direct action and reverse action indicate the increase and decrease directions of the manipulated output value (MV) corresponding to deviation changes. When the setpoint value (SV) is fixed, the relationship between the process value (PV) and the manipulated output value (MV) in direct action and the reversed action is shown as follows. • Direct action The control action in which the manipulated output value (MV) increases as the process variable (PV) increases, or decreases as the process variable decreases. • Reverse action The control action in which the manipulated output value (MV) decreases as the process variable (PV) increases, or increases as the process variable decreases.

l Setting Control Action Direction Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the control action direction: • Control Action: Select “Direct” or “Reverse.” The default is “Reverse.”

n Reset Limit Function The reset limit function prevents the occurrence of reset windup (integral saturation) by setting limits to the integral term in PID control computation. The reset limit function is applied only to the positional-type control output actions.

l Reset Windup In PID control computation, the value obtained via the integral action represents an integrated value of deviation by time. Therefore, when a batch control stops, if the deviation prolongs, the integral term in PID control computation becomes saturated due to the integral action. This condition is called “reset windup (integral saturation).” For example, reset windup often occurs in the following situation: • The control computation value exceed the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML) and the output is limited by the H/L limiter. • The output to the manipulation terminal is switched off by an Auto-selector blocks, etc. • Manipulated output is used as the additional signal from a PID controller block (PID) for the purpose of fine-adjust of the base load feedforward control. When reset windup occurs, the control result tends to overshoot, and as a result the process becomes unstable. In a control loop that reset windup may happen, you should select positionaltype control output action and use the reset limit function.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-36

l Reset Limit Function The reset limit function carries out the correction to the PID control computation with the values read from the connected destinations via the RL1 and RL2 terminals. The values read from the connected destinations via RL1 and RL2 terminals are used as reset signals RLV1 and RLV2. The reset signals RLV1, RLV2 are used to perform the following correction computation to the output value of PID computation (∆MVn0). Thus, when the output MV is limited by the manipulated variable high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML), the reset limit exerts directly on the integral term of the output value (MV'), the value before MV in computation. If the RL1 terminal is not connected, the value readback from the output destination is used as the reset signal value RLV1. If the RL2 terminal is not connected, “0” is used in computation as reset signal RLV2. ∆MVn=∆MVn0+ ∆MV ∆MVn0 MV'n-1 RLV1 RLV2 ∆T TI

∆T TI : : : : : : :

(RLV1-RLV2-MV'n-1)

D010409E.ai

Manipulated output change (after correction) PID computed value (manipulated output change before correction) Previously computed MV value (value before output limiting) Reset signal from the RL1 terminal Reset signal from the RL2 terminal Control period Integral time

The following phenomena occur during velocity-type Control Action: • Reset windup Normally reset windup do not happen to the velocity-type control output actions, since the cumulative value of manipulated output changes (∆MV) of each scan period is limited. However, if the values readback from the output destination are not limited by the MV H/L scale setpoints nor by the MV H/L limiter, the manipulated output change (∆MV) of each scan period is accumulated, similar to the positional-type actions. Consequently, the reset windup happens. • Output excess pullback phenomenon When the manipulated output value (MV) is limited by the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML) as a result of changes caused by pulse-type disturbances, an output excess pullback phenomenon happens if the control output action is velocity type. When the manipulated output value was limited by the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML), a significant change in the process variable (PV) caused by disturbances can pullback the manipulated output value (MV) excessively from the original value. When the disturbance disappears, the process variable returns to the original level. This is called the “output excess pullback phenomenon.” This phenomenon happens because the manipulated output value (MV) are limited by the manipulated variable highlimit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML). The current MV limited by the limiter is added with a delta MV caused by the disturbance negative to the current MV direction. The output excess pullback phenomenon does not happen if the control output action is positional type since the proportional term of the manipulated output value (MV) is not limited by the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-37

l Example for Positional-Type Control Output Action The following section explains the example that how the reset limit acts when the control computation value of the function block with positional-type output action exceed the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML). With a positional-type control output action, the control computation value in the current control period (MV'n) is the sum of the manipulated output change (∆MVn) obtained from the current PID computation, and the control computation value in the previous control period (MV'n-1). MV'n=∆MVn+MV'n-1 The control computation value (MV'n) in the current control period limited by the manipulated variable high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML) is output as the manipulated output value (MVn). The figure below shows an example of the reset limit function for the positional-type control output action: Control computation

Output destination data

DMVn PID computation

RLV1

RLV2

RL1

RL2

+

MV'n

Output limiter

MVn

OUT

+

D010410E.ai

Figure Reset Limit Function for a Positional-Type Control Output Action

When the reset limit function is not used, positive or negative values is continuously added to the integral term of the manipulated output change (∆MV) so long the positive or negative deviation exists. If the situation sustains, the manipulated output change (∆MV) is added to the control computation value (MV') continuously and make it reach the MV scale high limit (MSH) or the MV scale low limit (MSL) or the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML) and continue to windup. As a result, saturation (reset windup) happens to the integral term of the control computation value (MV'). Because the integral term is saturated, the manipulated output value (MV) limited by the limiter does not move back even when the sign of deviation changes to the pullback direction. The MV starts to pullback only when the control computation value (MV') returns to the range between the manipulated output high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML). In the same situation, if the reset limit function is used, the integral term of the manipulated output value (MV') will be limited to the value “RLV1 - RLV2” as a result of correction computation. Even if the deviation sustains, the reset windup does not happens.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-38

Example on the “Figure Reset Limit Function for a Positional-Type Control Output Action,” neither the RL1 or RL2 terminal is connected. Therefore, the reset signal RLV1 is the readback value from the output destination, while the value of reset signal RLV2 is “0.” For example, suppose a loop is in cascade (CAS) mode, if the manipulated output (MV) is limited by the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH), the reset signal RLV1 becomes the manipulated variable highlimit setpoint (MH). In this situation, the integral term of the control computation value (MV') is adjusted gradually to the value obtained by subtracting RLV2 from RLV1 (i.e., MH), even when the deviation sustains, it does not exceed the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH). The manipulated output value (MV) will quickly move away from the limit when the sign of the manipulated output change (∆MV) reverses and agrees to the pullback direction of the value from output limiting. This is because the control computation value (MV') is limited within the manipulated variable high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML).

l Example for a Simple Cascade Control loop The figure below shows an application example of using the reset limit function to a simple cascade control loop. The RL1 and RL2 terminals are not connected. Since the RL1 or RL2 terminals are not connected the reset signal RLV1 becomes the readback value from the output destination and the value of the reset signal RLV2 becomes “0.” If use the readback value of the manipulated output value (MV) output destination to compute the difference of the two reset signals (RLV1 - RLV2), there is no need to have terminal RL1 or RL2 connected. RLV1 IN

PID

OUT

SET

PID

OUT D010411E.ai

Figure Reset Limit Function for a Simple Cascade Control loop

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-39

l Application Example to Auto-Selection via Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H) The figure below shows an example of the reset limit function when automatically selecting the signals from two function blocks using an Auto-selector blocks (AS-H). Suppose the two PID Controller Blocks (PID) on the left side of the figure are velocity-type, even when the deviation is within the switching point, the disturbance of the process variable may trigger the output excess pullback to the manipulated output value (MV). Thus make the Autoselector blocks (AS-H) switch temporarily to the other controller. To define the positional-type output action using the reset limit function can avoid this happening. RL1 IN

PID

OUT IN1 AS-H

IN

PID

OUT

OUT

SET

PID

OUT

IN

IN2

RL1 D010412E.ai

Figure Reset Limit Function Used for Auto-Selection via Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H)

l Application Example in Feedforward Control The figure below shows an example of the reset limit function used in feedforward control. This example assumes base load control that uses the feedforward signals from the OUT terminal of the General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU) as the base load values. To prevent reset windup of the upstream PID Controller Block (PID), the RL2 terminal references the feedforward signals, while the RL1 terminal references the process variable of the downstream PID Controller Block (PID). IN

CALCU OUT

RL2 IN

PID RL1

SET OUT

IN

FFSUM

OUT

SET

PID

OUT

IN

D010413E.ai

Figure Reset Limit Function Used in Feedforward Control (Base Load Control)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-40

n Deadband Action ▼ Deadband Action

The deadband action stops the manipulated output value (MV) from changing while the deviation (DV) is within the preset deadband (DB) range, by causing the manipulated output change (∆MV) to be “0.”

l Characteristics of Deadband Action The deadband action causes the manipulated output change (∆MVn) to be “0” when the absolute value of the deviation (DV) minus the hysteresis value becomes smaller than the deadband width (DB). When the absolute value of deviation (DV) increases greater than the deadband width (DB), the manipulated output change after the deadband action (∆MVn) will be brought back to the manipulated output change before the deadband action (∆MVn0). The figure below shows the characteristics of the deadband action: Output (∆MVn) HYS

HYS

∆MVn0

DB ∆MVn: ∆MVn0: DB: En: HYS:

DB

En

Manipulated output change after the deadband action Manipulated output change before the deadband action Deadband width Deviation (data of the same unit as PV) Hysteresis (data of the same unit as PV) D010414E.ai

Figure Characteristics of Deadband Action

l Setting Deadband Action Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the deadband action. • Deadband action: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default is “No.” When the deadband action is set as “Yes,” the hysteresis (HYS) must be set. Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the hysteresis (HYS). • Hysteresis: Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit. The default is the value equivalent to 1.0 % of the PV scale span.

l Set Parameter of Deadband Action The parameter of the deadband action: • Deadband width (DB): Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit. The default is 0.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-41

n Input or Output Compensation ▼ I/O Compensation

The Input or Output Compensation function adds the compensation value (VN) received from outside to the input signal or output signal of PID control computation, while the controller block is operating automatically in the automatic (AUT), cascade (CAS), or remote cascade (RCAS) mode. The Control Action of Input or Output Compensation include the following two types: • Input compensation • Output compensation The compensation value (VN) is reset to “0” automatically at the beginning of each control period. This prevents the previous external compensation value is added to (VN) when the external compensation data not exist. Normally, the external data is set directly to the compensation value (VN) from other function block. However, the external data from other function block can be connected to the compensation input terminal (BIN), then set to the compensation value (VN). For manual operation, the manually set manipulated output value (MV) is not affected by the Input or Output Compensation.

l Define Input or Output Compensation Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the Input or Output compensation. • I/O Compensation: Select “No,” “Input Compensation” or “Output Compensation.” The default is “No.” For the 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) and Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM), only the input compensation can be defined. • Input Compensation: Select “No” or “Input Compensation.” The default is “No.”

l Set Parameters of I/O Compensation The parameters of the I/O compensation: • I/O compensation gain (CK): -10.000 to +10.000. The default is 1.000. • I/O compensation bias (CB): Arbitrary engineering unit data. The default is 0.0.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-42

n Input Compensation ▼ Input Compensation

The input compensation is a control action that adds the compensation value (VN) received from outside to the input signal of PID control computation.

l Characteristics of Input Compensation The computational expression of the input compensation: CVn=PVn+CK(VN+CB) CVn PVn CK CB VN

: : : : :

Control variable (PV after input compensation) Process variable I/O compensation gain I/O compensation bias (internal bias) I/O compensated value (bias signal)

The figure below shows a processing flow of the input compensation: VN +

+

CB

CK

PV

+

PVn

CVn

+

∆MV

PID control computation

D010415E.ai

Figure Processing Flow of the Input Compensation

l Example Using Input Compensation The input compensation is used to improve the controllability of a process with a long dead time, by subtracting from the input signal the signal from the Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAYC) to perform PID control computation (Smith Dead Time Compensation). The figure below shows an example of dead time compensation: IN

PID VN

OUT

DLAY-C

D010416E.ai

Figure Example of Dead Time Compensation

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-43

n Output Compensation The output compensation is a control action that adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the output signal of PID control computation.

l Characteristics of the Output Compensation The computational expression of the output compensation: MVn=MVn0+CK(VN+CB) MVn MVn0 CK CB VN

: : : : :

Manipulated output after output compensation manipulated output before output compensation I/O compensation gain I/O compensation bias (internal bias) I/O compensated value (bias signal)

The figure below shows a processing flow of the output compensation: VN +

+

CB

CK

PV

PVn

PID control computation

+

MVn0

MVn

+ D010417E.ai

Figure Processing Flow of the Output Compensation

l Example of Using the Output Compensation The output compensation is used for feedforward control that adds the feedforward signal to the control output signal, or for non-interacting control that adds the output signal from the interacting loop to the control output signal. The figure below shows an example of feedforward control:

IN

IN

CALCU

PID VN

OUT

OUT

D010418E.ai

Figure Example of Feedforward Control

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-44

n Process Variable Tracking (Measurement Tracking) ▼ Measurement Tracking

The process variable tracking function prevent the abrupt changes in the manipulated output value (MV) when change from the manual (MAN) mode to automatic (AUT) mode, by forcing the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).

l Characteristics of Process Variable Tracking When switching from the manual (MAN) mode to automatic (AUT) mode, the existence of a large deviation is harmful, since it makes the manipulated output change (∆MV) very large. If force the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV) in manual mode operation via process variable tracking, abrupt Control Action can be avoided when the mode switches to automatic (AUT). Suppose a primary loop is in cascade connection and controls in the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode. If the mode of the secondary loop in the cascade connection switches from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT), the cascade connection becomes open and the control action of the primary side loop can stop. In this situation, the setpoint value (SV) of the primary loop can be forced to agree with the process variable (PV) by the process variable tracking function.

l Define Process Variable Tracking Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the process variable tracking. • Measurement tracking MAN mode: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default is “No.” AUT and CND mode: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default is “No.” CAS and CND mode: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default is “Yes.” The statuses referred to as MAN, AUT and CAS include remote backup modes such as AUT (ROUT) and AUT (RCAS). For a 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G) or Time - Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP), the definition is allowed for MAN mode only.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-45

n Setpoint Value Limiter The setpoint value limiter function limits the setpoint value (SV) within a range between the setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL). The action of the setpoint value limiter varies with the block mode of the function block.

l Actions in the Automatic or Manual Mode When the function block is in automatic (AUT) or manual (MAN) mode, the user is able to set the setpoint value (SV). The setpoint value limiter performs the following actions: • When try to set a setpoint value (SV) exceed the setpoint high limit (SVH) or high limit alarm setpoint (PH): An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator’s confirmation. When confirms, the operator can set a value exceed the setpoint high limit (SVH) or high limit alarm setpoint (PH). • When try to set a setpoint value (SV) below the setpoint low limit (SVL) or low limit alarm setpoint (PL): An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator’s confirmation. When confirms, the operator can set a value below the setpoint low limit (SVL) or low limit alarm setpoint (PL).

l Actions in the Remote Cascade Mode When the function block is in remote cascade (RCAS) mode and the setpoint value (SV) is defined to automatically follow the remote setpoint value (RSV) received from the supervisory system computer, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions: • The value exceeds the setpoint high limit (SVH) is forced to be equal to the setpoint high limit (SVH). • The value smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL) is forced to be equal to the setpoint low limit (SVL).

l Set Parameters of the Setpoint Value Limiter The parameters of the setpoint value limiter: • Setpoint high limit (SVH): Engineering unit data within the PV scale range. The default is the scale high limit. • Setpoint low limit (SVL): Engineering unit data within the PV scale range. The default is the scale low limit.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-46

n Setpoint Value Pushback The setpoint value pushback function sets the same value for the three types of setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV). The figure below explains the relationship among the setpoint value (SV), cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV): Set from the supervisory computer

Input from the SET terminal

RSV

CSV

AUT/MAN RCAS

CAS

SV Setpoint value Control computation D010419E.ai

Figure Relationship among Setpoint Values (SV, CSV and RSV)

The action of the setpoint value pushback varies in accordance with the block mode of the function block.

l Action in the Automatic (AUT) or Manual (MAN) Mode Causes the cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to agree with the setpoint value (SV). Even when a data value is set to the setpoint value (SV) from outside the function block, the same value is automatically set to the cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV).

l Action in the Cascade (CAS) Mode Force the setpoint value (SV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to be equal to the cascade setpoint value (CSV).

l Action in the Remote Cascade (RCAS) Mode Force the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value (CSV) to be equal to the remote setpoint value (RSV).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-47

n Bumpless Switching The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value downstream in cascade without causing the manipulated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change). The action during bumpless switching varies with the control output action and block mode status.

l Action for Velocity-Type Control Output Action For a velocity-type control output action, the manipulated output change (∆MVn) obtained by control computation is added to the present value readback from the connected destination. Therefore, the block mode or cascade switch can be changed without causing an abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV).

l Action for Positional-Type Control Output Action For a positional-type control action, when the function block mode changes to tracking (TRK) mode, or when the cascade connection to the downstream is open then close again, or for the similar reason the cascade control loop regain the control, the manipulated output value (MV) may change abruptly. To prevent this, the output value is forced to be equal (or to track) to the value of the output destination while the control action stops. This enables the block mode switch causes no abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV).

l Action when a Cascade Connected Downstream Loop Changes from Automatic (AUT) to Cascade When a cascade connected downstream loop changes its mode from automatic (AUT) to cascade (CAS), the tracking process described above is performed in the upstream loop if the downstream is only connected to one loop. Therefore, the block mode switches without causing an abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-48

l Action when Manipulated Output of an Upstream Loop is Connected to Multiple Downstream Loops as Setpoint Value When multiple downstream loops are receiving the manipulated output signals of an upstream loop as setpoint value signals via a Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT), Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) or switch block (SW-33, SW-91), the setpoint value downstream may change abruptly. In this case, control computation is not performed in downstream loops in the first control period following the switching of modes from automatic (AUT) to cascade (CAS). In other words, the block mode can be changed without causing an abrupt change in the output as a result of a proportional or derivative action, by resuming the control computation from the next control period in which the change in the setpoint value caused by the block mode change will not be reflected by the change in the deviation (∆En). The figure below shows an example of a multiple downstream loop configuration: J01 PID

OUT

SET

FOUT

SET

PID

J08 SET

PID D010420E.ai

Figure Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Cascade Signal Distributor Block is Used) SET PID

OUT

SET

OUT1 SPLIT

OUT2

SET

PID

PID D010421E.ai

Figure Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Control Signal Splitter Block is Used) SET

PID

S11 DSET

OUT

S10

SW-33

S12

SET

S13 SET

PID

PID D010422E.ai

Figure Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Switch Block is Used)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-49

n Initialization Manual The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place when the initialization manual condition is established.

l Characteristics of the Initialization Manual The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the initialization manual condition is established, and changes the function block to initialization manual (IMAN) mode. Since the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track the value of the connected destination, even when the mode changes from initialization manual (IMAN) mode to manual (MAN) mode, the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will precede the manual (MAN) mode. Therefore, the manual (MAN) mode does not take effect. The block returns to the original mode as soon as the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if the mode change operation is performed in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block will switch to the mode of this operation after the initialization manual condition vanishes.

l Initialization Manual Condition The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition. It suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN) mode. The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the initialization manual condition is established. The initialization manual condition is depicted as follows: AUT ↓

Initialization manual condition is established

IMAN (AUT) ↓

Initialization manual condition vanishes

AUT The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation: • When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination’s data status is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade loop open). • When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination’s data status is communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF). • When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade loop open). • When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a process output, and a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the process output. • When the data status of the input signal at the TIN or TSI terminals become invalid (BAD) in the tracking (TRK) mode while the output signal is not a pulse-width type.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-50

n Control Hold The control hold is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily while maintaining the current block mode. Unlike initialization manual, the control output action is performed normally during control hold. The control hold action takes place when the following conditions are established during automatic operation (AUT, CAS, PRD, RCAS, ROUT): • The connected destination of the IN terminal is open (i.e., not selected via a selector switch, etc.) and, • The connected destination of the IN terminal or the connected destination of the data at the first connected destination is a process input, and the process input is temporarily in a nonresponse state (momentary power failure). The control is resumed when the conditions vanish.

n MAN Fallback The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control forcibly by changing the block mode to manual (MAN). This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.

l Characteristics of the Man Fallback The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to manual operation state. Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remain manual (MAN) even after the condition vanishes.

l MAN Fallback Condition The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption. An example of the MAN fallback condition is shown as follows:

AUT→MAN



IMAN (CAS)→IMAN (MAN)

The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation: • When the data status of the process variable (PV) is invalid (BAD) or calibration (CAL). However, the MAN fallback condition will not be established when the block mode is primary direct (PRD), or remote output (ROUT) excluding any compound mode during computer backup. • When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF). • When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD). • When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is having an initial cold start. • When the block mode change interlock condition is established. • When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the I/O points connected to the module has been changed via maintenance. IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-51

n AUT Fallback ▼ AUT Fallback

The AUT fallback is an error processing function that switches the block mode from cascade (CAS) or primary direct (PRD) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is established. Thus the set value of the control loop can be set by the operator.

l Characteristics of the AUT Fallback Changes the block mode from cascade (CAS) or primary direct (PRD) to automatic (AUT) to continue control using values set by the operator. Once the AUT fallback condition is established, the block mode remain automatic (AUT) even after the condition vanishes.

l AUT Fallback Condition The AUT fallback condition is used to change the block mode of the function block from cascade (CAS) or primary direct (PRD) to automatic (AUT) so that control can be continued using the values set by the operator. When this condition is established, it indicates that abnormality has been detected in the cascade setpoint value (CSV) for some reason. An example of when the AUT fallback condition establishment is as follows:

CAS→AUT



IMAN (CAS)→IMAN (AUT)

l Setting AUT Fallback Condition Use the Function Block Detail Builder to enable/disable the AUT fallback function. • AUT Fallback: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default is “No.” If the AUT fallback is defined as “Yes” via the Function Block Detail Builder, the AUT fallback condition is established when the data status of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) become invalid (BAD) or communication error (NCOM).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-52

n Computer Fail ▼ Computer Backup Mode

When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote cascade (RCAS) mode or remote output (ROUT) mode temporarily and switches to the computer backup mode.

l Characteristics of Computer Fail When the function block mode is remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT), the function block receives the setpoint value (SV) or manipulated output value (MV) from a supervisory system computer via Control bus communication. When the computer fails, the block changes mode to the preset computer backup mode (MAN, AUT or CAS) which indicates that an abnormality has been detected in the supervisory computer. When the computer recovers, the block returns to the mode before the change. The following actions will take place when a block mode change command from MAN, AUT, CAS or PRD to RCAS or ROUT is sent while the computer fails: 1.

When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT, CAS or PRD to RCAS or PRD is sent while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer backup mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first. The transient state mode is a compound block mode consisting of the block mode before the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS, PRD) and a remote mode (RCAS, ROUT).

2.

Then the function block tests the computer condition in the first scan after the block mode change command and switches to the computer backup mode. The computer backup mode is a compound block mode consisting of the backup mode set via the Function Block Detail Builder (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS, ROUT).

3.

If the computer recovers while the function block is in the computer backup mode, the block mode changes to remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-53

l Computer Fail Condition The computer fail condition is a block-mode transition condition used to suspend actions in the remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT) mode and switches the mode to the computer backup mode. A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function block to define the remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT) mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has failed or recovered. The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table or other function blocks. Switching to a computer backup mode does not take effect if the backup switch (BSW) is on a block mode other than remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT). • When BSW=ON, computer has failed • When BSW=OFF, computer has recovered An example when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the computer backup mode is shown as follows: RCAS ↓

Computer fails

AUT (RCAS) ↓

Computer recovers

RCAS An example when the manual (MAN) mode has been specified for the computer backup mode is shown as follows: AUT ↓

ROUT command

AUT (ROUT) Transient state mode ↓

After one scan period

MAN (ROUT)Computer backup mode (When BSW=ON)

l Define Computer Backup Mode Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the computer backup mode for each function block. • Computer Backup Mode: Select “MAN,” “AUT” or “CAS” as the mode to be switched to when the computer becomes down. The default is “MAN.” For a Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT), select “AUT” or “CAS.” The default is “AUT.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-54

n Block Mode Change Interlock When the block mode change interlock condition is established, the block mode change interlock function stops the control computation processing of the function block running in auto mode, and prohibit the function block changing to automatic operation mode.

l Characteristics of the Block Mode Change Interlock Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place: • The block mode changes to manual (MAN). • Any block mode change command to make the function block into automatic operation state (AUT, CAS, PRD, RCAS or ROUT mode) becomes invalid.

l Block Mode Change Interlock Condition The Block mode change interlock condition is established when the switch at the connected destination of the interlock switch input terminal (INT) is turned ON. This switch is manipulated in the process control sequence and the switch is turned on when the sequence judge that the loop can not run in Auto mode, or etc.,.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-55

n Primary Direct (PRD) Mode Action The primary direct (PRD) mode action enables the downstream block to output the setpoint value received from the cascade connected upstream block (CSV) after converting it into manipulated output value (MV). The conversion action from the cascade setpoint value (CSV) to the manipulated output value (MV) varies with the control action direction, i.e., direct or reverse. When an error such as process input signal error is detected in the cascade connected downstream block, the block changes to primary direct (PRD) mode, to allow the upstream block temporarily takes over control. The output tracking function for the cascade connected upstream block is used so that an abrupt change in the manipulated output does not occur when the block mode for the cascade connected downstream block is changing to the primary direct (PRD) mode. The cascade connected downstream block returns the manipulated output value (MV) to the setpoint value (SV, CSV, RSV) in order to make the downstream block manipulated output value (MV) track the upstream block manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode for the downstream block changes to the primary direct (PRD) mode.

IMPORTANT • Normally, when changing the block mode to primary direct (PRD), the set parameter (P, I, D) of the upstream block in cascade need to be adjusted. • When change a block to primary direct (PRD) mode, it is necessary to change the upper stream block in the same cascade loop to manual (MAN) mode. • When change a block from primary direct (PRD) mode to automatic (AUT) mode, it is better to change the block into manual (MAN) mode first. However, it is possible to change the block from primary direct (PRD) mode to automatic (AUT) mode directly. In this case, the block runs measurement tracking to force the set point value (SV) to track the process variable value (PV) so as to avoid the radical change to the control output.

SEE

ALSO

For the details of primary direct (PRD) mode, see the following: C6.1.1, “Basic Block Mode”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-56

l When the Control is Direct Action The computational expression of the primary direct (PRD) mode action when the control action is direct: MSH-MSL

MV=MSH-

SH-SL

• (CSV-SL)

D010423E.ai

RMV=MV SH SL MSH MSL

: : : :

PV scale high limit PV scale low limit MV scale high limit MV scale low limit

When the block mode changes to primary direct (PRD), the downstream block sets its the manipulated output value (MV) to the setpoint value (SV, CSV, RSV), using the computational expression shown below: SV=SH-

SH-SL MSH-MSL

• (MV-MSL)

D010424E.ai

CSV=RSV=SV

l When the Control is Reverse Action The following computational expression is used as a basis of the primary direct (PRD) mode action when the control action is reverse: MV=

MSH-MSL SH-SL

• (CSV-SL)+MSL D010425E.ai

RMV=MV When the block mode changes to primary direct (PRD), the downstream block sets its the manipulated output value (MV) to the setpoint value (SV, CSV, RSV), using the computational expression shown below: SV=SH

SH-SL MSH-MSL

• (MV-MSL)+SL D010426E.ai

CSV=RSV=SV

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-57

D1.5 PID Controller Block (PID) The PID Controller Block (PID) provides the most general control function to perform proportional-integral-derivative control based on the deviation of the process variable (PV) from the setpoint value (SV).

n PID Controller Block (PID) ▼ Connection

The figure below shows a function block diagram of PID Controller Block (PID): SET

CSV RSV

IN

Input processing

BIN

RL2

TIN

(VN) (RLV1) (RLV2)

CAS AUT MAN

TSI

INT

(TSW)

SV

RCAS

MAN

Control computation processing

PV

RL1

CAS/AUT

Output processing

MV

OUT

ROUT

(PV, ∆PV, MV, ∆MV)

RMV

SUB D010501E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of PID Controller Block (PID)

The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals x of PID Controller Block (PID): Table

Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of PID Controller Block (PID) Connection method I/O terminal

IN

Measurement input

SET

Setting input

Data reference

Data setting

x

Connection destination

Terminal connection

Process I/O

Δ

x

Software I/O

Function block x

x

x

OUT

Manipulated output

x

x

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x

RL1

Reset signal 1 input

x

Δ

x

x

RL2

Reset signal 2 input

x

Δ

x

x

BIN

Compensation input

x

Δ

x

x

TIN

Tracking signal input

x

Δ

x

x

TSI

Tracking SW input

x

Δ

x

x

x

INT

Interlock SW input

x

Δ

x

x

x D010502E.ai

x: Connection allowed Blank: Connection not allowed Δ: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-58

n Function of PID Controller Block (PID) The PID block performs input processing, control computation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the PID block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the mediumspeed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the PID block, see the following: D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-59

l Control Computation Processing of the PID Controller Block (PID) The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the PID Controller Block (PID): Table

Control Computation Processing Functions of the PID Controller Block (PID) (1/2)

Control computation processing

Description

PID control

Calculates the manipulated output value (MV) and manipulated output change (∆MV)using the PID control algorithms.

Control action bypass

Performs the PID control actions by bypassing derivative control actions (D), proportional control actions (P) or both proportional and derivative control actions (P+D).

Non-linear gain

Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of deviation so that the relationship between the deviation and manipulated output change (∆MV) becomes nonlinear.

Gap action

Lowers the proportional gain to moderate control effects when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.

Squared deviation action

Changes the proportional gain according to the degree of deviation when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.

Control output action

Converts the manipulated output change (∆MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output actions include “positional type” and “velocity type.”

Control action direction

Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct action) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.

Reset limit function

Performs correction computation using values read from the connection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID control computation. This function prevents reset windup.

Deadband action

Adjusts the manipulated output change (∆MV) to “0” when the deviation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated output value (MV) from changing.

I/O compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the controller block is operating automatically.

Input compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the input signal of the PID control computation.

Output compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the output signal of the PID control computation.

Process variable tracking

Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).

Setpoint value limiter

Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL).

Setpoint value pushback

Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with the remaining one. D010503E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-60

Table

Control Computation Processing Functions of the PID Controller Block (PID) (2/2)

Control computation processing

Description

Bumpless switching

Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when the manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in a downstream block in cascade.

Initialization manual

Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.

Control hold

Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed normally.

MAN fallback

Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.

AUT fallback

Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.

Computer failure

Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.

Block mode change interlock

Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.

PRD mode action

Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode has been changed to PRD. D010504E.ai

SEE

ALSO

For the details on control computation processing functions applied in the PID Controller Block, see the following: D1.4, “Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks”

n PID Control Computation ▼ PID Control Algorithm

The PID control computation is the core of the PID control computation processing, calculating a manipulated output change (∆MV) by using the PID control algorithms. The PID control is the most widely used, it combines three types of actions: proportional, integral and derivative. The figure below shows a block diagram of PID control computation: P≠0 I-PD

SV PV (Note)

+

Proportional term computation (P) PI-D/PID

PID

I-PD/PI-D

+

Integral term computation (I) D≠0

+ +

Range conversion

∆MV

Derivative term computation (D)

Note: Compensated PV, if input compensation is performed. D010505E.ai

Figure Block Diagram of PID Control Computation

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-61

l PID Control Computation Expression The PID control computation expression used in a regulatory control system (analog control system): MV(t)=

100 PB MV(t) E(t) PV(t) SV(t) PB TI TD

E(t)+ : : : : : : :

1 TI

E(t)dt+TD

dE(t) dt

D010506E.ai

Manipulated output Deviation E(t) = PV(t) - SV(t) Process variable Setpoint value Proportional band (%) Integral time Derivative time

If we use the sampling value derived at each interval of the control period for the above expression, the differential expression of the PID control computation is transformed as follows: ∆MVn=

100 PB ∆MVn En PVn SVn ∆E ∆T n

∆En+ : : : : : :

TD ∆T En+ ∆(∆En) ∆T TI

D010507E.ai

Manipulated output change Deviation En=PVn-SVn Process variable Setpoint value’ Change in deviation ∆En=En-En-1 Control period

The subscripts “n” and “n-1” represent the sample against the control period, it stands for the nth sample or n-1th sample. The above differential expression calculates a change in manipulated output (difference). A new output value is obtained by adding the current change in manipulated output (∆MVn) to the previous manipulated output value (MVn-1).

l Types of PID Control Computation The PID Controller Block uses the following five PID control algorithms to perform PID control computation. The actions vary with the characteristics of a controlled system and the purpose of control. • Basic type PID control (PID) • PV proportional and derivative type PID control (I-PD) • PV derivative type PID control (PI-D) • Automatic determination type • Automatic determination type 2

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-62

l Define PID Control Computation For PID control computation, the input variables of the proportional, integral and derivative terms are different for each PID control algorithm. The table below shows the PID control algorithms and the input variable of each term: Table

PID Control Algorithms and the Input Variables

PID control algorithm

Trinomial input variables Proportional term

Derivative term

Integral term

PID

En

En

En

I-PD

PV

PV

En

PI-D

En

PV

En

Automatic determination

Same as I-PD in the AUT mode. Same as PI-D in the CAS or RCAS mode.

Automatic Same as I-PD in the AUT or RCAS mode. determination 2 Same as PI-D in the CAS mode. D010508E.ai

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the PID control algorithm. • PID Control Algorithm: Select one of the following algorithms: “Basic Type” “Proportional PV Derivative Type PID Control (I-PID)” “PV Derivative Type PID Control (PI-D)” “Automatic Determination” “Automatic Determination 2” The default is “Automatic Determination 2.” When the block mode of the PID Controller Block is remote cascade (RCAS), the PID control algorithm “Automatic Determination” and “Automatic Determination 2” act as follows: • Automatic determination type: Same actions as in the cascade (CAS) mode. • Automatic determination type 2: Same actions as in the automatic (AUT) mode.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-63

l Basic Type PID Control Algorithm (PID) The basic type PID control algorithm performs proportional, integral and derivative Control Action following the changes in the setpoint value. This algorithm is used when the process time constant is long and the control is oriented on the prompt response to the change in the setpoint value. For example, when use a 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) to change the setpoint value of a controller block, this algorithm is used for the PID block. The computational expression of the basic type PID control algorithm (PID): ∆MVn=Kp • Ks

∆En+

∆T TI

En+

TD ∆T

∆(∆En) D010509E.ai

En=PVn-SVn Kp= Ks=

100 PB

D010510E.ai

MSH-MSL SH-SL ∆T ∆En Kp PB TI TD Ks PVn SVn SH SL MSH MSL

D010511E.ai

: : : : : : : : : : : : :

Control period Change in deviation ∆En=En-En-1 Proportional gain Proportional band (%) Integral time Derivative time Scale conversion coefficient Process variable (engineering unit) Setpoint value (engineering unit) PV scale high limit PV scale low limit MV scale high limit MV scale low limit

The process variable (PV) and setpoint value (SV) used in the computation are both engineering unit data. The manipulated output change (∆MV) obtained in an engineering unit by the range conversion performed via the scale conversion coefficient (Ks).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-64

l PV Proportional and Derivative Type PID Control Algorithm (I-PD) The PV proportional and derivative type PID control algorithm (I-PI) differs from the basic type that it performs only integral actions when the setpoint value changes. This algorithm ensures stable control characteristics even when the setpoint value changes abruptly when the SV is set via numerical value entry. At the same time, the algorithm ensures proper control in response to the characteristic changes occurring in controlled processes, load variations and disturbances by performing proportional, derivative and integral Control Action accordingly. The computational expression of the PV proportional and derivative type PID control algorithm (I-PD): ∆MVn=Kp • Ks ∆PVn

∆PVn+ :

∆T

TI

En+

TD ∆(∆PVn) ∆T

D010512E.ai

Process variable change ∆PVn=PVn-PVn-1

l PV Derivative Type PID Control Algorithm (PI-D) Compared to the basic type, the PV derivative type PID control algorithm (PI-D) only performs proportional and integral Control Action when setpoint value changes, but not derivative Control Action. This algorithm is used in the situations where the better follow up to the setpoint value change is required, such a downstream control block in a cascade control loop. The computational expression of the PV derivative type PID control algorithm: ∆MVn=Kp • Ks

∆En+

∆T TI

En+

TD ∆T

∆(∆PVn) D010513E.ai

l Automatic Determination Type When a PID Controller Block is in cascade (CAS) or remote cascade (RCAS) mode, it uses the PV derivative type PID control algorithm (PI-D) to perform computation so that the follow-up the setpoint value change can be improved. When the block is in automatic (AUT) mode, it uses the PV proportional and derivative type PID control algorithm (I-PD) to perform computation so that stable control characteristics can be ensured in the event that an abrupt change occurs in the setpoint value due to a numeric value setting.

l Automatic Determination Type 2 When a PID Controller Block is in cascade (CAS) mode, it uses the PV derivative type PID control algorithm (PI-D) to perform computation. When the block is in remote cascade (RCAS) mode or automatic (AUT) mode, it uses the PV proportional and derivative type PID control algorithm (I-PD) to perform computation. In the cascade (CAS) mode, the automatic determination type 2 orients to the follow-up capability to setpoint value (CSV) change. In the remote cascade (RCAS) mode, it orients to prevent the abrupt change in the output due to an abrupt change in the remote setpoint value (RSV).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-65

l Set Parameters of the PID Control Algorithms The set parameters of the PID control algorithms: • Proportional band (P): 0 to 1000 %. (Note) • Integral time (I): 0.1 to 10000 seconds. • Derivative time (D): 0 to 10000 seconds (Note) Note: The control action bypass function is enabled when “0” is set.

IMPORTANT If the integral time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for this trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block to set the value of integral time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper range and to avoid it to be set to zero.

n Control Action Bypass The PID Controller Block can perform the following two types of control action by bypassing proportional and/or derivative actions among the proportional, integral and derivative actions: Table

Control Action Bypass Control actions after bypassing

Set parameter setpoint

Derivative (D)

Proportional (P)+integral (I)

P≠0, D=0

Proportional (P), derivative (D)

Integral (I)

Control actions bypassed

P=0 D010514E.ai

To set the control action bypass, specify “0” to the set parameter P or D, as shown in the table above. The proportional gain (Kp) is fixed to “1” when only integral action is required.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-66

n Data Items - PID Table

Data Items of PID Controller Block (PID) (1/2)

Data Item

Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (MAN)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

0

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

0

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

0

PV

Process variable

PV engineering unit value

SL

RAW

Raw input data

SUM

Totalizer value

x

SV

Setpoint value

Δ (*1)

Value in the unit at the connection destination ----Engineering unit value

0

Δ (*2)

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

SL

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

SL

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

SL

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

0

-----

0

CSV

Cascade setpoint value

x

RSV

Remote setpoint value

Δ (*4)

DV

Control deviation value

VN

I/O compensation value

MV

Manipulated output value

Δ (*3)

MV engineering unit value

MSL

RMV

Remote manipulated output value

Δ (*5)

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

MSL

RLV1

Reset limit value 1

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

MSL

RLV2

Reset limit value 2

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

MSL

HH

High - high limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

LL

Low - low limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

PH

High - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

PL

Low - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

VL

Velocity alarm setpoint

x

± (SH - SL)

SH - SL

PVP

Velocity-Reference Sample

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

DL

Deviation alarm setpoint

± (SH - SL)

SH - SL

x

x

D010515E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL *2: Entry is permitted when the data mode is CAS or RCAS *3: Entry is permitted when the block mode is MAN *4: Entry is permitted when the block mode is RCAS *5: Entry is permitted when the block mode is ROUT SH: PV scale high limit SL: PV scale low limit MSL: MV scale low limit

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes of the PID block, see the following: D1.1.4, “Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Table

D1-67

Data Items of PID Controller Block (PID) (2/2)

Data Item

Data Name

Entry Permitted or Not

MH

Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSH

ML

Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

SVH

Setpoint high limit

x

SL to SH

SH

SVL

Setpoint low limit

x

SL to SH

SL

P

Proportional band

x

0 to 1000 %

100 %

I

Integral time

x

0.1 to 10,000 seconds

20 seconds

D

Derivative time

x

0 to 10,000 seconds

0 second

GW

Gap width

x

0 to (SH - SL)

0.0

DB

Deadband

x

0 to (SH - SL)

0.0

CK

Compensation gain

x

-10.000 to 10.000

1.000

CB

Compensation bias

x

-----

0.000

PMV

Preset manipulated output value

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

TSW

Tracking switch

x

0, 1

0

CSW

Control switch

x

0, 1

0

PSW

Preset MV switch

x

0, 1, 2, 3

0

RSW

Pulse width reset switch

x

0, 1

0

BSW

Backup switch

x

0, 1

0

OPHI

Output high-limit index

x

MSL to MSH

MSH

Output low-limit index

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

OPMK Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

PV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

SL

PV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

MSH

MV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

-----

MSL

MV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

-----

OPLO

Range

Default

D010516E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-68

D1.6 Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) stops after performing each control action and waits for the result to come out. This block may be used to control processes with a long dead time or for the control that relies on the data from sampling unit of analyzers.

n Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) ▼ Connection

The figure below shows a function block diagram of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD): SET

CSV RSV

IN

Input processing

BIN

RL2

TIN

(VN) (RLV1) (RLV2)

CAS AUT MAN

TSI

INT

(TSW)

SV

RCAS

MAN

Control computation processing

PV

RL1

CAS/AUT

Output processing

MV

OUT

ROUT

(PV, ∆PV, MV, ∆MV)

RMV

SUB D010601E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)

The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD): Table

Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) Connection method I/O terminal

IN

Measurement input

SET

Setting input

Data reference

Data setting

x

Connection destination

Terminal connection

Process I/O

Δ

x

Software I/O

Function block x

x

x

OUT

Manipulated output

x

x

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x

RL1

Reset signal 1 input

x

Δ

x

x

RL2

Reset signal 2 input

x

Δ

x

x

BIN

Compensation input

x

Δ

x

x

TIN

Tracking signal input

x

Δ

x

x

TSI

Tracking SW input

x

Δ

x

x

x

INT

Interlock SW input

x

Δ

x

x

x D010602E.ai

x: Connection allowed Blank: Connectio not allowed Δ: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-69

n Function of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) The PI-HLD block performs input processing, control computation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the PI-HLD block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the PI-HLD block, see the following: D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-70

l Control Computation Processing of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD): Table

Control Computation Processing Functions of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) (1/2)

Control computation processing

Description

PI control computation with hold

Performs PI control computation for each sampling period only during the specified control time, and holds the manipulated output value (MV) for the remainder of the period.

Non-linear gain

Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of deviation so that the relationship between the deviation and manipulated output change (∆MV) becomes nonlinear.

Gap action

Lowers the proportional gain to moderate control effects when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.

Squared deviation action

Changes the proportional gain according to the degree of deviation when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.

Control output action

Converts the manipulated output change (∆MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output actions include “positional type” and “velocity type.”

Control action direction

Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct action) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.

Reset limit function

Performs correction computation using values read from the connection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID control computation. This function prevents reset windup.

Deadband action

Adjusts the manipulated output change (∆MV) to “0” when the deviation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated output value (MV) from changing.

I/O compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the controller block is operating automatically.

Input compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the input signal of the PID control computation.

Output compensation

Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the output signal of the PID control computation.

Process variable tracking

Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).

Setpoint value limiter

Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL) .

Setpoint value pushback

Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with the remaining one. D010603E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Table

D1-71

Control Computation Processing Functions of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) (2/2)

Control computation processing

Description

Bumpless switching

Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when the manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in a downstream block in cascade.

Initialization manual

Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.

Control hold

Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed normally.

MAN fallback

Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.

AUT fallback

Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.

Computer failure

Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.

Block mode change interlock

Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.

PRD mode action

Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode has been changed to PRD. D010604E.ai

SEE

ALSO

For the details on control computation processing functions of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD), see the following: D1.4, “Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-72

n PI Control Computation with Hold The PI control computation with hold is a control algorithm of the Sampling PI Controller Block. It is a control computation function that performs PI control computation to obtain a manipulated output value (MV) and manipulated output change (∆MV).

l Characteristics of the PI Control Computation with Hold The PI control computation with hold action performs PI control for each sampling period (TC) only during the control time (TC) in an automatic operating mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS), and holds manipulated output for the remainder of the period (TS - TC). The figure below shows the sampling PI control action: ∆T (control period)

MV

Output hold

PI computation output Time TC (control time)

TC

TS (sampling period)

TS D010605E.ai

Figure Sampling PI Control Action

Set the sampling period and control time in advance, in accordance with the following principle: Sampling period: TS=L+T • (2 to 3) L T

Control time:

: :

Dead time of the process (second) Lag constant of the process (second)

TC=

TS 10

D010606E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-73

The value of sampling period represents the time required for the process variable (PV) to be stabilized after the manipulated output is actually output to the process and its effects are transmitted throughout the process. When the shortest period of a major disturbance affecting the process is Tn, if Tn is shorter than the sampling period, the control may become impossible. Therefore, refer the following expression to adjust the sampling period shorter than Tn: TS≤

Tn 5

D010607E.ai

The sampling period and control time are considered as set parameters, and their setting can be changed during operation.

l Computational Expressions of the PI Control Algorithm with Hold The computational expressions of the PI control algorithm: ∆MVn=Kp • Ks

∆PVn+

∆T TI

• En D010608E.ai

En=PVn-SVn Kp= Ks=

100 PB

D010609E.ai

MSH-MSL SH-SL ∆MVn Kp Ks ∆PVn PVn SVn En ∆T PB TI SH SL MSH MSL

D010610E.ai

: : : : : : : : : : : : : :

Manipulated output change Proportional gain Scale conversion coefficient Process variable change ∆PVn=PVn-PVn-1 (engineering unit) Process variable (engineering unit) Setpoint value (engineering unit) Deviation Control period Proportional band (% unit) Integral time PV scale high limit PV scale low limit MV scale high limit MV scale low limit

The above PI control algorithm is the same as the PV proportional and derivative type PID control algorithm (I-PD) of the PID Controller Block (PID) except that the former does not have a derivative term.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-74

l Set Parameters of the PI Control Algorithm with Hold The following are set parameters for control computation processing of the PI control algorithm with hold: • Sampling period (TS): 0 to 10000 seconds. The default is 1 second. • Control time (TC): 0 to 10000 seconds. The default is 1 second. • Proportional band (P): 0 to 1000 %. When P=0, the proportional action does not function but only the integral action is performed. The proportional gain Kp is “1” when only the integral action is performed. • Integral time (I): 0.1 to 10000 seconds.

IMPORTANT If the integral time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for this trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block to set the value of integral time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper range and to avoid it to be set to zero.

l PI-HLD Action after Hold ▼ PI-HLD Action after Hold

When PI-HLD starts the control calculation after its Hold period elapsed, the previous process variable is used as the PVn-1 in proportional term computation, the following two methods can be selected: • Use the PV right before the Hold status as the PVn-1 • Use the current PV as the PVn-1 (Same as the PI-HLD in CENTUM-XL) The two calculation methods can be selected on FCS properties sheet. Check the check box of [CENTUM-XL compatible] in the column of [PI-HLD Control Action after Hold]. When this option is checked, the PVn-1 in the control algorithm uses the current process variable PVn. Otherwise, the PVn-1 in the control algorithm uses the process variable right before the Hold started. By default, [CENTUM-XL compatible] is not checked.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-75

l Externally Started Sampling PI Control Action When “0” is set for the sampling period (TS), the externally started sampling PI control action will take place, as shown in the figure below. The externally started sampling PI control action starts control when a switch signal is received from outside the Sampling PI Controller Block. The externally started sampling PI control action starts PI control when the control switch (CSW) is turned ON from outside the block during automatic operation. Once started, PI control will continue throughout the control time (TC). When the TC time has elapsed, output is held and the control switch (CSW) is turned OFF until the next action is started. CSW ON OFF

set

set

set

∆T (control period)

MV Output hold

PI computation output Time TC (control time)

TC

TC D010611E.ai

Figure Externally Started Sampling PI Control Action

The control switch (CSW) is turned ON by other function block, such as a sequence control block. When the control switch (CSW) is turned OFF forcibly from outside the block during the control time, output is held immediately.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-76

n Data Items - PI-HLD Table

Data Items of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) (1/2)

Data Item

Data Name

MODE

Block mode

ALRM AFLS

Entry Permitted or Not x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (MAN)

Alarm status

-----

NR

Alarm flashing status

-----

0

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

0

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

0

PV

Process variable

PV engineering unit value

SL

RAW

Raw input data

SUM

Totalizer value

x

SV

Setpoint value

Δ (*1)

Value in the unit at the connection destination ----Engineering unit value

0

Δ (*2)

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

SL

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

SL

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

SL

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

0

-----

0

CSV

Cascade setpoint value

x

RSV

Remote setpoint value

Δ (*4)

DV

Control deviation value

VN

I/O compensation value

MV

Manipulated output value

Δ (*3)

MV engineering unit value

MSL

RMV

Remote manipulated output value

Δ (*5)

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

MSL

RLV1

Reset limit value 1

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

MSL

RLV2

Reset limit value 2

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

MSL

HH

High - high limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

LL

Low - low limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

PH

High - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

PL

Low - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

VL

Velocity alarm setpoint

x

± (SH - SL)

SH - SL

PVP

Velocity-Reference Sample

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

DL

Deviation alarm setpoint

± (SH - SL)

SH - SL

x

x

D010612E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted ∆: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL *2: Entry is permitted when the data mode is CAS or RCAS *3: Entry is permitted when the block mode is MAN *4: Entry is permitted when the block mode is RCAS *5: Entry is permitted when the block mode is ROUT SH: PV scale high limit SL: PV scale low limit MSL: MV scale low limit

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes of the PI-HLD block, see the following: D1.1.4, “Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Table

D1-77

Data Items of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) (2/2)

Data Item

Data Name

Entry Permitted or Not

MH

Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSH

ML

Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

SVH

Setpoint high limit

x

SL to SH

SH

SVL

Setpoint low limit

x

SL to SH

SL

P

Proportional band

x

0 to 1000 %

100 %

I

Integral time

x

0.1 to 10,000 seconds

20 seconds

TS

Sampling period

x

0 to 10,000 seconds

1 second

TC

Control time

x

1 to 10,000 seconds

1 second

GW

Gap width

x

0 to (SH - SL)

0.0

DB

Deadband

x

0 to (SH - SL)

0.0

CK

Compesation gain

x

-10.000 to 10.000

1.000

CB

Compesation bias

x

-----

0.000

PMV

Preset manipulated output value

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

TSW

Tracking switch

x

0, 1

0

CSW

Control switch

x

0, 1

0

PSW

Preset MV switch

x

0, 1, 2, 3

0

RSW

Pulse width reset switch

x

0, 1

0

BSW

Backup switch

x

0, 1

0

OPHI

Output high-limit index

x

MSL to MSH

MSH

OPLO

Output low-limit index

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

OPMK Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

PV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

SL

PV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

MSH

MV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

-----

MSL

MV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as MV

-----

Range

Default

D01061xE.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-78

D1.7 PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) outputs a high limit or low limit manipulated output signal unconditionally when control deviation becomes large. This block may be applied to batch reactor temperature control process.

n PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) ▼ Connection

The PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) prevent overshooting so that the process variable (PV) may be brought closer to the target value sooner. The figure below shows a function block diagram of the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW): SET

CSV RSV

IN

Input processing

PV

RL1

RL2

TIN

(RLV1) (RLV2)

CAS AUT MAN

TSI

INT

(TSW)

SV

RCAS

MAN

Control computation processing

CAS/AUT

Output processing

MV

OUT

ROUT

(PV, ∆PV, MV, ∆MV)

RMV

SUB D010701E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-79

The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW): Table

Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) Connection method I/O terminal

Data reference

Data setting

Connection destination

Terminal connection

Process I/O

Δ

x

x

Software I/O

Function block x

IN

Measurement input

SET

Setting input

OUT

Manipulated output

x

x

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x

RL1

Reset signal 1 input

x

Δ

x

x

RL2

Reset signal 2 input

x

Δ

x

x

TIN

Tracking signal input

x

Δ

x

x

TSI

Tracking SW input

x

Δ

x

x

x

INT

Interlock SW input

x

Δ

x

x

x

x

x

D010702E.ai

x: Connection allowed Blank: Connection not allowed Δ: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

n Function of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) The PID-BSW block performs input processing, control computation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the PID-BSW block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. 1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the PID-BSW block, see the following: D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-80

l Control Computation Processing of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) The table below shows the control computation processing functions of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW). Table

Control Computation Processing Functions of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)

Control computation processing

Description

PID with two-level output switching

Changes the manipulated output computational expression in accordance with the value of control deviation. PID control computation is performed in a steady state.

Control output action

Converts the manipulated output change (∆MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output actions include “positional type” and “velocity type.”

Control action direction

Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct action) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.

Reset limit function

Performs correction computation using values read from the connection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID control computation. This function prevents reset windup.

Process variable tracking

Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).

Setpoint value limiter

Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL).

Setpoint value pushback

Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with the remaining one.

Bumpless switching

Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when the manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in a downstream block in cascade.

Initialization manual

Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.

Control hold

Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed normally.

MAN fallback

Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.

AUT fallback

Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.

Computer failure

Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.

Block mode change interlock

Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.

PRD mode action

Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode has been changed to PRD. D010703E.ai

SEE

ALSO

For the details on control computation processing functions applied in PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW), see the following: D1.4, “Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-81

n PID Control Computation with Two-Level Output Switching In PID control computation with two-level output switching, the computational expression for a manipulated output value (MV) is switched in accordance with the state of control deviation, as shown below: • When the control deviation is negative and excessive. • When the control deviation is positive, or negative and extremely small. The figure below shows an example of control action performed by the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) when the control action direction is reverse: DL (deviation alarm setpoint) LK (lockup setpoint) SV PV

BIAS (bias setpoint) MH MV Time (1) (1) (2)

(2)

(1)

(2)

When the control deviation is negative and excessive When the control deviation is positive, or negative and extremely small D010704E.ai

Figure Example of Control Action (Reverse Action) Performed by PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)

l Control Algorithms when the Deviation is Negative and Excessive The following expressions represent the algorithms of calculating the manipulated output value when the process variable (PV) is smaller than the setpoint value minus deviation alarm setpoint (SV-| DL |) value: • When the control action direction is “reverse” Manipulated output value (MV)=Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) • When the control action direction is “direct” Manipulated output value (MV)=Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML) When the deviation immediately after the start of batch operation exceeds the deviation alarm setpoint, the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) outputs a manipulated output value (MV) that is the same as the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML). As a result, the process variable quickly approaches the setpoint value.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-82

l Control Algorithms when the Control Deviation is Positive, or Negative but Small The following expressions represent the algorithms of calculating the control output value when the process variable (PV) is larger than the setpoint value minus deviation alarm setpoint (SV-| DL |) value: • When the control action direction is “Reverse” Manipulated output value (MV)=Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)−Bias setpoint (BIAS). PID control computation is performed by using the result obtained from the above calculation as an initial value. • When the control action direction is “Direct” Manipulated output value (MV)=Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)+Bias setpoint (BIAS) PID control computation is performed by using the result obtained from the above calculation as an initial value. When the deviation becomes smaller than the deviation limit range, the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) assumes that the process is stabilized and switches the control algorithm to PID control. At this time, output resumes to the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML) by vanishing the bias setpoint (BIAS) value to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from overshooting. Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the PID control algorithm. • PID Control Algorithm: Select one of the following algorithms: “Basic Type” “Proportional PV Derivation Type PID Control (I-PID)” “PV Derivative Type PID Control (PI-D)” “Automatic Determination” “Automatic Determination 2” The default is “Automatic Determination 2.”

SEE

ALSO

For the details of PID control algorithm, see the following: “n PID Control Computation” in chapter D1.5, “PID Controller Block (PID)”

l Lockup Function Once the PID control action resumes, even when the deviation exceeds the deviation alarm setpoint (DL), the manipulated output value (MV) does not immediately ramp to the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipulated output low-limit setpoint (ML). This is because of the lockup function. When the following condition exists, the manipulated output value (MV) does not change to the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) if the control action direction is Reverse, nor to the manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML) if the control action direction is Direct: • Condition PVHI>LO>LEAK>BDV+>BDV->BEND>BPRE>CNF When there are absolutely no alarms generated, the alarm status is NR. Table

Alarm Check for the Control Steps (ZONE) of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block

Alarm

ZONE 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

IOP

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

IOP-

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

OOP

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

CNF

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

LL

-

x

x

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

HI

-

x

x

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

LO

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

BDV +

Δ

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

BDV-

Δ

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

LEAK

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

NPLS

-

x

x

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

BPRE



x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

BEND



x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

D012109E.ai

x: Δ: -:

Alarm check is executed for the ZONE. Alarm check is executed only once when ZONE=7 changes to ZONE=0. Alarm check is not executed for the ZONE. The alarm is set to normal state (NR). : Alarm check is not executed and the status prior to ZONE=0 is retained.

SEE

ALSO

For information on operation of the control steps for the BSETU-2 block, see the following: “n Batch Operation (Analog Output)” in chapter D1.20.2, “Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-316

n Data Items - BSETU-2 Table

Data Items of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) (1/2)

Data Item

Data Name

MODE

Block mode

BSTS ALRM

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

-----

O/S (MAN)

Block status

-----

NCNT

Alarm status

-----

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing status

-----

0

AF

Alarm detection specification

-----

0

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

0

PV

Flowrate process variable

PV engineering unit value

SL

RAW

Raw input data

SUM

Totalizer value

x

SUM engineering unit value

0

SUM1

Cumulative totalized value

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM

0

SW

Command switch

x

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

0

MV

Manipulated output value

MV engineering unit value

MSL

LL

Low - low limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

PH

High - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

PL

Low - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

DL

Cumulative deviation alarm setpoint

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM

1000

Δ (*1)

Value in the unit at the connection destination -----

Δ (*2)

D012110E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL *2: Entry is permitted when the block mode is MAN SH: PV scale high limit SL: PV scale low limit MSL: MV scale low limit

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes of the BSETU-2 block, see the following: D1.1.4, “Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-317

Table

Data Items of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) (2/2)

Data Item

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name

Range

Default

MH

High flowrate setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSH

ML

Low flowrate setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

PRE

Pre-batch flowrate setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

LPV

Leakage predictive value

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 0

ILST

Initial forecast value

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 0

PLST

Pre-batch setpoint

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 0

BSET

Batch setpoint

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 0

LK

Leak setpoint

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 100

TU

Up time

x

0 to 10,000 seconds

0 second

TD

Down time

x

0 to 10,000 seconds

0 second

TW

Batch end wait time

x

0 to 10,000 seconds

0 second

ZONE

Control step

0 to 11

0

EMSW Emergency stop switch

x

0, 1

0

OPHI

Output high-limit index

x

MSL to MSH

MSH

OPLO

Output low-limit index

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

OPMK Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

PV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

SL

PV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

----D012111E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted SUM: Totalizer value MSH: MV scale high limit MSL: MV scale low limit

n Block Status of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) Table Level

1

Block Status of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) Block Status Symbol

Name

STRT

Batch Start

IBCH

Batch Initialization

STUP

Batch Setup

STDY

Ready

ERLY

Early

PBCH

Pre-Batch

END

Batch End

NCNT

Batch Stopped

RSET

Reset

EMST

Emergency Shutdown

EEMS

Emergency Shutdown Completed

RSTR

Restart D012112E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-318

D1.22 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) calculates a totalized value of changes in weight signals sent from a scale, and outputs the manipulated output value in accordance with the totalized value. This block is used for batch control, such as batch shipment control of products and batch charge control of raw materials.

n Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) ▼ Connection

The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) calculates a totalized value of changes in weight signals sent from the scale, and outputs the specified manipulated output value in accordance with the totalized value. The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) changes the output to 0 % when the totalized value reaches the batch setpoint. The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) enables batch control, such as batch shipment control of products and batch charge control of raw materials. The figure below shows a function block diagram of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3): ZONE

SW

EMSW

IN IN2 IN3

Input processing

PV

Batch set pattern

AUT

Output processing

MV

OUT2

MAN

IN4 SUM0

OUT

SUM INT D012201E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-319

The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3): Table

Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) Connection method I/O terminal

Data reference

Data setting

Connection destination

Terminal connection

Process I/O

Software I/O

IN

Analog input

x

Δ

x

IN2

Digital input

x

Δ

x

x

IN3

Sign bit input

x

Δ

x

x

IN4

Ready bit input

x

Δ

x

x

OUT

Manipulated output

x

x

x

x

OUT2

Manipulated output (*1)

x

Δ

INT

Interlock SW input

Δ

x

Function block

x

x x

x

x D012202E.ai

x: Connection allowed Blank: Connection not allowed Δ: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL). *1: The OUT2 terminal is used when connecting a 3-position ON/OFF output to switch instruments 1 and 2, for connection to switch instrument 2.

l IN Terminal Analog Input If the weight signal from a scale is a analog signal, connect the weight signal to the IN terminal via an analog process I/O module of process I/O. When reading weight data from other function blocks, also connect the weight signal to the IN terminal.

l IN2 Terminal Digital Input If the weight signal from the scale is a digital datum that satisfy the following conditions, connect it to the IN2 terminal via a contact module of process I/O. Also use the IN2 terminal when inputting digital data of weight signals that satisfy the above condition, from a software I/O. Number of bits:

32 bits or less

Code:

Binary or BCD

l IN3 Terminal Sign Bit Input Connect the sign bit of weight signal digital data to the IN3 terminal. The sign bit indicates the sign of data. The length of this bit is 1 bit. “0” and “1” indicate positive and negative, respectively.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-320

l IN4 Terminal Ready Bit Input The ready bit transmits the timing of when the weight signals sent as digital data can be read. The length of this bit is 1 bit. Connect the ready bit to the IN4 terminal. Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the control action direction of the ready bit. • Ready-bit Action Direction: Select “Direct” or “Reverse.” The default is “Direct.” The table below shows actions of the IN4 terminal ready bit input: Action specification Direct action Reverse action

Ready bit

Status

0

Preparing data

1

Read ready

0

Read ready

1

Preparing data D012203E.ai

l OUT Terminal Manipulated Output The OUT terminal outputs the following manipulated output signals: • Analog output • Output to other function blocks • Contact output of a 2-position or 3-position ON/OFF output • Data setting of a 2-position ON/OFF output to the switch instrument • Data setting to switch instrument 1, when a 3-position ON/OFF output is connected to switch instruments 1 and 2.

l OUT2 Terminal Manipulated Output The OUT2 terminal transmits data setting output to switch instrument 2, when a 3-position ON/ OFF output is connected to switch instruments 1 and 2.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-321

n Function of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) The BSETU-3 block performs input processing, control computation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the BSETU-3 block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the functions common to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks, see the following: D1.20, “Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)” • For the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible for the BSETU-3 block, see the following: D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For details on the input processing, see the following: C3, “Input Processing” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Input Processing Specific to Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) The BSETU-3 block performs special input signal conversions.

l Control Computation Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3). Table

Control Computation Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)

Control computation processing

Description

Batch operation

Performs batch operation in accordance with the type of output (analog output, twoposition ON/OFF output or three-position ON/OFF output).

Initialization manual

Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.

MAN fallback

Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied. However, the emergency stop action precedes when an input open alarm has occurred.

Block mode change interlock

Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode. D012204E.ai

SEE

ALSO

For details on the control computation processing of the weight-totalizing batch set block (BSETU-3), see the following: D1.20.2, “Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-322

l Alarm Processing Specific to Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) The “flowrate alarm check,” which is one of the alarm checks performed by the BSETU-3 block, is specific to this function block. In addition, the BSETU-3 block uses a unique alarm display priority order, which is different from that of other function blocks.

n Data Items - BSETU-3 Table

Data Items of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) (1/2)

Data Item

Data Name

Entry Permitted or Not

x

Range

Default

MODE

Block mode

-----

O/S (MAN)

BSTS

Block status

-----

NCNT

ALRM

Alarm status

-----

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing status

-----

0

AF

Alarm detection specificaton

-----

0

AOFS

Alarm masking specification

-----

0

PV

Flowrate process variable

PV engineering unit value

SL

RAW

Raw input data

Value in the unit at the connection destination -----

SUM

Totalizer value

x

SUM engineering unit value

0

SUM0

Absolute totalized value

Δ

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM

0

SUM1

Cumulative totalized value

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM

0

SW

Command switch

x

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

0

MV

Manipulated output value

MV engineering unit value

MSL

LL

Low - low limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

PH

High - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SH

PL

Low - limit alarm setpoint

x

SL to SH

SL

DL

Cumulative deviation alarm setpoint

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM

1000

Δ (*1)

D012205E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally *1: Entry is permitted when the block mode is MAN SH: PV scale high limit SL: PV scale low limit MSL: MV scale low limit

SEE

ALSO

For a list of valid block modes of the BSETU-3 block, see the following: D1.1.4, “Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-323

Table

Data Items of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) (2/2)

Data Item

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name

Range

Default

MH

High flowrate setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSH

ML

Low flowrate setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

PRE

Pre-batch flowrate setpoint

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

LPV

Leakage predictive value

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 0

ILST

Initial forecast value

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 0

PLST

Pre-batch setpoint

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 0

BSET

Batch setpoint

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 0

LK

Leak setpoint

x

Value in the same engineering unit as SUM 100

TU

Up time

x

0 to 10,000 seconds

0 second

TD

Down time

x

0 to 10,000 seconds

0 second

TW

Batch end wait time

x

0 to 10,000 seconds

0 second

ZONE

Control step

0 to 11

0

EMSW Emergency stop switch

x

0, 1

0

OPHI

Output high-limit index

x

MSL to MSH

MSH

OPLO

Output low-limit index

x

MSL to MSH

MSL

OPMK Operation mark

x

0 to 255

0

UAID

User application ID

x

-----

0

SH

PV scale high limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

-----

SL

PV scale low limit

Value in the same engineering unit as PV

----D012206E.ai

x: Entry is permitted unconditionally Blank: Entry is not permitted SUM: Totalizer value MSH: MV scale high limit MSL: MV scale low limit

n Block Status of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) Table Level

1

Block Status of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) Block Status Symbol

Name

STRT

Batch Start

IBCH

Batch Initialization

STUP

Batch Setup

STDY

Ready

ERLY

Early

PBCH

Pre-Batch

END

Batch End

NCNT

Batch Stopped

RSET

Reset

EMST

Emergency Shutdown

EEMS

Emergency Shutdown Completed

RSTR

Restart D012207E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-324

D1.22.1 Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) ▼ Input Signal Conversion

The input signal conversion specific to the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) includes three types of methods: “Weight Measurement Conversion,” “SUM Conversion” and “∆SUM Conversion.”

n Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) Shown below is the block chart for the input signal conversion of the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3). IN CAL IN2 IN3 IN4

Weight measurement conversion SUM0=

CAL SUM0

volume unit conversion factor x input data SUM0: absolute integrator value

SUM conversion Measurement in the incremental direction SUM = SUM0 - (zero point) Measurement in the decremental direction SUM = (zero point) - SUM0 SUM: integrator value

∆SUM conversion SUM

∆SUM calculation

Digital filter

PV

SUM1 SUM1: cumulative integrator value D012208E.ai

Figure Block Chart for Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)

As shown in above figure, the combination of input signal conversion includes the following three types: • Weight Measurement Conversion • SUM Conversion • ∆SUM Conversion

n Weight-Totalizing Conversion Weight-Totalizing Conversion refers to the processing in which the weight input data read from a weighing machine are converted into the data in the same unit as the integrator value (SUM) to obtain the absolute integrator value (SUM0). The following is the computational expression for the absolute integrator value (SUM0): SUM0 = quantity unit scale factor • input data

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-325

l Quantity Unit Scale Factor The quantity unit scale factor is the factor used to convert the input data into the data in the same unit as integrator value (SUM). For example, if the unit of input data is “g” and that of integrator value (SUM) is “kg,” the quantity unit scale factor is 0.001. The setup for quantity unit scale factor can be executed with the Function Block Detail Builder. • Quantity unit scale factor: Within the range between 0.001 to 100000 The default setting is 1. In the weight measurement conversion, the input data differs by the type of weight signal. • If the weight signal is an analog signal, the input data is the 0 to 100 % data read from the connection destination. • If the weight signal is data read from the communication input, the input data is the data after communication input conversion. • If the weight signal is a digital signal, the input data can be obtained as follows: When the ready bit is “Ready to Read,” the digital data and its sign bit are read for each scan period and converted into the same format (double-precision floating-point) as the absolute integrator value (SUM0) to obtain the input data. If the ready bit is “Not Ready to Read,” the data setting for absolute integrator value (SUM0) is bypassed while the previous value is latched.

SEE

ALSO

For more information about communication input conversion of the weight-totalizing signals, see the following: “n Communication Input Conversion” in C3.1.1, “Input Signal Conversions Common to Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks”

l Code Conversion Code conversion is a function that converts the weight signal digital data read from IN terminal 2 to binary code data. The weight signal digital data that can be read by the BSETU-3 block includes binary codes and binary coded decimal (BCD) codes. Specify “No” when the weight signal is a binary code and “BCD” in the case of BCD code using the Function Block Detail Builder, together with the number of code contacts. • Number of Code Contacts: Set by the unit of one bit within the range between 1 to 32 bits. The default setting is 16 bits. • Code Conversion: Set “BCD” if the input signal is a binary-coded decimal code (BCD) or “No” if it is a binary. The default setting is “No conversion.”

l Weight-Totalizing Conversion Bypass Under the following circumstances, the weight-totalizing conversion is bypassed. • The input signal is digital type and the ready bit is in the status of “Not Ready to Read.” • The data status of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is not good (BAD or IOP). When the weight-totalizing conversion is bypassed, the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is not to be updated, the previous good value is kept.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-326

n SUM Conversion ▼ Input Change Protrusion Bypass

SUM conversion refers to the processing in which the integrator value (SUM) is obtained by totalizing the increment or decrement of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) from the batch start. The following is the totalization formula for measurement in the incremental or decremental direction: • Measurement in the incremental direction: SUM=SUM0-zero point • Measurement in the decremental direction: SUM=zero point-SUM0 The zero point refers to the absolute integrator value (SUM0) when the control step is 10 (initialization processing at batch start). If the input change exceeds the input velocity limit setting value, it is considered as an abnormal input signal so that the integrator value data setting is not executed and the previous value is held. The data status, however, is not invalid in this case. The input velocity alarm bypass setting is a value indicated by the process variable change in one scan period. The basic scan period is 1 scan per 1 second. The weight measurement direction specification, input velocity alarm bypass specification, and the setting value for input velocity limit can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Weighing Direction: Select “Increase” or “Decrease.” The default setting is “Increase.” • Input Velocity Alarm Bypass: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default setting is “No.” • Setting value: Set the value between 0 and 1000 in the same unit as SUM. The default setting is 1000. The cumulative integrator value (SUM1) is the accumulation of integrator values at the end of batch. The cumulative integrator value (SUM1) is obtained at the end of each batch as follows: SUM1=SUM1 (cumulative integrator value kept at the end of the previous batch) +SUM Under the following circumstances, the SUM conversion is bypassed. • The input signal is digital type and the ready bit is in the status of “Not Ready to Read.” • The data status of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is not good (BAD or IOP). When the SUM conversion is bypassed, the integrator value (SUM) is not to be updated, the previous good value is kept.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-327

n ∆SUM Conversion ▼ Flow Time Unit

∆SUM conversion refers to the function in which the integrator value variation in the specified time unit is passed to the digital filter. The value variation after digital filter processing is the flow rate (PV). The following is the computational expression for the ∆SUM. ∆ SUM = (process variable change of SUM in one scan period) •

(PV time unit) (scan period) D012209E.ai

The PV time unit and scan period in the above formula are in the unit of second. The flow measurement time unit can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. • Flow Time Unit: Select “Second,” “Minute,” “Hour” or “Day.” The default setting is “Second.” e.g. Select “Hour” for ton/h and “Minute” for kg/min. Under the following circumstances, the input signal processing is bypassed. • The input signal is digital type and the ready bit is in the status of “Not Ready to Read.” • The data status of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is not good (BAD or IOP). In these cases, the flow rate value (PV) is not to be updated, the previous good value is kept.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-328

D1.22.2 Alarm Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) This section describes the “flowrate alarm check,” which is one of the alarm checks performed by the BSETU-3 block and is specific to this function block. In addition, the BSETU-3 block uses a unique alarm display priority order, which is different from that of other function blocks.

n Flowrate Alarm Check ▼ Flow Check Mask Interval, Flow Check Time Interval, Input Low-Low Limit Alarm, PV High/Low Limit Alarm

Low-low limit and high and low-limit checks are made upon expiration of a specified period of time, as shown in Figure below. The specified period of time is called the flowrate check masking interval. The checks are made by comparing the SUM change (∆SUM) for the flowrate check time interval with an alarm setpoint. Specify the flowrate check masking interval and the flowrate check time interval with the Function Block Detail Builder. • Flowrate check masking interval: 0 to 10000 (in the scan period unit) 10 is assumed by default. • Flowrate check time interval: 0 to 10000 (in the scan period unit) 1 is assumed by default.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-329

The flowrate alarm check processing timing of BSETU-3 block is shown below. MV MH

PRE ML 0 Block status

NCNT

IBCH

STUP

STDY

EMST

EEMS

STUP

STDY

ZONE

0

1

2

3

8

9

2

3

LO HI/LL

t1 t1

ERLY PBCH 4

5

END 7

t1 t1 t2

t1 t2

: Alarm check period : Flowrate check masking interval : Flowrate check time interval : Check timing

LO HI LL

: Low-limit alarm : High-limit alarm : Low-low limit alarm D012210E.ai

Figure Flowrate Check Processing Timing

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-330

The flowrate alarm check in the BSETU-3 block consists of the low-low limit check and the highlow limit check.

l Low-Low Limit Check A low-low limit check (LL) is generated if the value of ΔSUM in the flow check masking interval converted to a flow measurement falls below the low-low limit alarm setpoint (LL). This check is operable in control steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. ∆SUM x (PV time unit) (Flowrate check time interval) x (Scan period)

< LL → LL alarm D012211E.ai

l Low-Limit Check A low-limit alarm (LO) is generated if the value of ΔSUM in the flow check masking interval converted to a flow measurement falls below the low-limit alarm setpoint (PL). This check is operable only in control step 3. ∆SUM x (PV time unit) (Flowrate check time interval) x (Scan period)

< PL → LO alarm D012212E.ai

l High-Limit Check A high-limit alarm (HI) is generated if the value of ΔSUM in the flow check masking interval converted to a flow measurement exceeds the high-limit alarm setpoint (PH). This check is operable in control steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. ∆SUM x (PV time unit) (Flowrate check time interval) x (Scan period)

> PH → HI alarm D012213E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-331

n Alarm Display Priority Specific to Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) The following is the order for the alarm display priority specific to the BSETU-3 block: OOP>IOP>IOP-> LL>HI>LO>LEAK>BDV+>BDV->BEND>BPRE>CNF When there are absolutely no alarms generated, the alarm status is NR. Table

Alarm Check for the Control Steps (ZONE) of the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block

Alarm

ZONE 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

IOP

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

IOP-

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

OOP

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

CNF

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

LL

-

x

x

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

HI

-

x

x

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

LO

-

-

-

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

BDV +

Δ

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

BDV-

Δ

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

LEAK

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

BPRE



x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

BEND



x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

D012214E.ai

x: Δ: -:

Alarm check is executed for the ZONE. Alarm check is executed only once when ZONE=7 changes to ZONE=0. Alarm check is not executed for the ZONE. The alarm is set to normal state (NR). : Alarm check is not executed and the status prior to ZONE=0 is retained.

SEE

ALSO

For the operation of each control step in the BSETU-3 block, see the following: “n Batch Operation (Analog Output)” in D1.20.2, “Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU2, BSETU-3)”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-332

D1.23 Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) outputs a change per unit time by limiting it within the velocity limits. The Velocity Limiter Block may be applied to the control process that the abrupt change need to be avoided.

n Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) ▼ Connection

The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) performs control computation processing to the setpoint signals from other function blocks or setpoint values set by the operator, and outputs a change per unit time by limiting it within the velocity limits. The velocity limiting processing is executed in the cascade (CAS) or automatic (AUT) mode. The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) reads the abruptly changing manipulated output value (MV) of other function blocks as a cascade setpoint signal, and outputs its change per scan period as a manipulated output value (MV) by limiting it within the velocity limits. In the automatic (AUT) mode, the block outputs a change per scan period in the setpoint value (SV) received from outside, such as operation and monitoring functions, as a manipulated output value (MV) by limiting it within the velocity limits. Separate velocity limits may be set for upward and downward directions. The figure below shows the function block diagram of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM): SET

INT CAS

CSV

AUT MAN

RSV

SV

RCAS

BPSW

MAN

Velocity limiting computation

AUT/CAS

Output processing

MV

OUT

ROUT RMV

(MV, ∆MV) SUB

D012301E.ai

Figure Function Block Diagram of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)

The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM): Table

Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM): Connection method I/O terminal

Data reference

Data setting

Connection destination

Terminal connection

Process I/O

Software I/O

x

Function block

x

SET

Setting input

OUT

Manipulated output

x

x

x

x

SUB

Auxiliary output

x

Δ

x

x

INT

Interlock SW input

Δ

x

x

x

x D012302E.ai

x: Connection allowed Blank: Connection not allowed Δ: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-333

n Function of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) The VELLIM block performs control computation processing, output processing, and alarm processing. The only processing timing available for the VELLIM block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. *1:

SEE

ALSO

The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS.

• For the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the VELLIM block, see the following: D1.1.3, “Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block” • For details on the output processing, see the following: C4, “Output Processing” • For details on the alarm processing, see the following: C5, “Alarm Processing-FCS”

l Control Computation Processing of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM): Table

Control Computation Processing Functions of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)

Control computation processing

Description

Velocity limiting computation

Performs velocity limiting to the setpoint value (SV) and obtains a manipulated output value (MV).

Control output action

Converts the manipulated output change (∆MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output actions available with this function block are of “positional type” only.

Setpoint value limiter

Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL).

Setpoint value pushback

Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with the remaining one.

Bumpless switching

Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when the manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in a downstream block in cascade.

Output pushback

Performs range conversion to the manipulated output value (MV) based on the setpoint value range, and obtains a new setpoint value. This prevents the manipulated output value from changing abruptly.

Initialization manual

Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.

MAN fallback

Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.

AUT fallback

Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.

Computer failure

Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.

Block mode change interlock

Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode. D012303E.ai

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-334

l Alarm Processing Specific to Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) The “deviation alarm check,” which is one of the alarm checks performed by the VELLIM block, is specific to this function block.

n Velocity Limiting Computation This function executes velocity limiting computation to the setpoint value when the block mode is automatic (AUT), cascade (CAS) or remote cascade (RCAS), and uses the computed result as a manipulated output value (MV). The velocity limiting computation action varies depending upon whether the rate of SV change is below or on/over the velocity limits. The figure below shows an action example of velocity limiting computation: SV

Converted upward velocity limit value (Dmp)

SV

MV

Converted downward velocity limit value (Dmm)

MV

Scan period

Scan period

Time D012304E.ai

Figure Action Example of Velocity Limiting Computation

l Setpoint Value (SV) Range ▼ SV Range

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the setpoint value (SV) range: • SV Range High Limit Value: Specify a numeric value of 7 digits or less, where the sign and decimal point occupy one digit each The default is 100.0 • SV Range Low Limit Value: Specify a numeric value of 7 digits or less, where the sign and decimal point occupy one digit each The default is 0.0.

l When the Rate of Setpoint Value Change Is BELOW the Velocity Limits If the rate of SV change is below the velocity limits, the SV value receives velocity limiting processing and is converted to an MV-range value to be used as an MV. The computational expression of this velocity limiting computation is shown below: MVc=

MSH-MSL SSH-SSL

• (SV-SSL)+MSL

D012305E.ai

MVn = MVc MVc MVn SSH SSL MSH MSL

: : : : : :

Manipulated output computed value Manipulated output current value SV scale high limit SV scale low limit MV scale high limit MV scale low limit

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-335

l When the Rate of Setpoint Value Change Is ON or OVER the Velocity Limits If the rate of SV change is on or over the velocity limits, the SV value receives velocity limiting processing and is converted to an MV-range value to be used as a manipulated output value. The computational expressions of this velocity limiting computation are shown below: MVn=MVn-1+Dmp (When ∆MV≥Dmp) MVn=MVn-1-Dmm (When ∆MV≤-Dmm) ΔMV=MVc-MVn-1 Dmp: A per-scan rate-of-change value in the MV range, converted from the upward velocity limit value (DMVP). Dmm: A per-scan rate-of-change value in the MV range, converted from the downward velocity limit value (DMVM).

l Set Parameters of Velocity Limiting Computation The parameters of velocity limiting computation: When 1 is set for the velocity limiting bypass switch (BPSW), the velocity limiting bypass function is enabled. If 0 is set for the BPSW, the velocity limiting bypass function is disabled. • Upward velocity limit value (DMVP): Set engineering unit data between 0 and the SV scale span range limit. The default is the SV scale span. • Downward velocity limit value (DMVM): Set engineering unit data between 0 and the SV scale span range limit. The default is the SV scale span. • Velocity limiting time unit (TU): Select “0 (1 second)” or “1 (1 minute).” • Bypass switch (BPSW): Select “0 (limited)” or “1 (not limited).” The default is “0.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-336

n Control Output Action The control output action converts the manipulated output change (∆MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output action of Velocity limiter block is “positional type.” The result of velocity limiting computation is output as the current manipulated output value (MV).

n Setpoint Value Limiter The setpoint value limiter function limits the setpoint value (SV) within the range between the setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL), and recognizes setpoint values (SV) within this range as a valid one. The action of the setpoint value limiter varies in accordance with the block mode of the function block.

l Setpoint Value Limiter in the Automatic (AUT) or Manual (MAN) Mode When the block mode of the function block is automatic (AUT) or manual (MAN), in which the user is able to set the setpoint value, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions in accordance with the situation: • When a value exceeding the setpoint high limit (SVH) is set as the setpoint value (SV): An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator’s confirmation. When confirms, the operator can set a value exceeding the setpoint high limit (SVH). • When a value below the setpoint low limit (SVL) is set as the setpoint value (SV): An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator’s confirmation. When confirms, the operator can set a value below the setpoint low limit (SVL).

l Setpoint Value Limiter in the Remote Cascade (RCAS) Mode When the block mode of the function block is remote cascade (RCAS) and the setpoint value (SV) is set to automatically agree with the remote setpoint value (RSV) received from the supervisory system computer, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions: • Limits a value exceeding the setpoint high limit (SVH) to the setpoint high limit (SVH). • Limits a value below the setpoint low limit (SVL) to the setpoint low limit (SVL).

l Set Parameters of the Setpoint Value Limiter The parameters of the setpoint value limiter: • Setpoint high limit (SVH): Engineering unit data within the SV scale range. The default is the scale high limit. • Setpoint low limit (SVL): Engineering unit data within the SV scale range. The default is the scale low limit.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-337

n Setpoint Value Pushback The setpoint value pushback function sets the same value for the three types of setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV). The figure below explains the relationship among the setpoint value (SV), cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV): Set from the supervisory computer

Input from the SET terminal

RSV

CSV

AUT/MAN RCAS

CAS

SV Setpoint value Control computation D012306E.ai

Figure Relationship Among Setpoint Values (SV, CSV and RSV)

The action of the setpoint value pushback varies in accordance with the block mode of the function block.

l Action in the Automatic (AUT) or Manual (MAN) Mode Causes the cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to agree with the setpoint value (SV). Even when a data value is set to the setpoint value (SV) from outside the function block, the same value is automatically set to the cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV).

l Action in the Cascade (CAS) Mode Causes the setpoint value (SV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to agree with the cascade setpoint value (CSV).

l Action in the Remote Cascade (RCAS) Mode Causes the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value (CSV) to agree with the remote setpoint value (RSV).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-338

n Bumpless Switching ▼ Output Pushback

The bumpless switching function switches the function block mode or switches the cascade connected downstream block’s manipulated output value (MV) without causing its own manipulated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless switch). The action during bumpless switching varies with the control output action and block mode status. The type of bumpless switching performed by the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) is “output pushback.” In the manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the output pushback function sets as a setpoint value (SV), a SV-range value converted from the manipulated output value (MV). Also, when the block mode is not remote output (ROUT) or off-service (O/S), the remote manipulated output value (RMV) is caused to track the manipulated output value (MV). The figure below shows the action of output pushback: Output pushback

CSV RSV

BPSW

CAS AUT MAN

SV

RCAS

MAN Velocity limiting

AUT/CAS

Output processing

MV

OUT

ROUT RMV

D012307E.ai

Figure Output Pushback

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the output pushback. • Output pushback: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default is “Yes.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-339

Using the output pushback function enables a balanceless bumpless switching of block modes from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT). The following figure shows an example of bumpless cascade closing in a control loop:

PV

MV PID

MAN

Output pushback

Output tracking SV MV VELLIM

CAS

AUT/MAN

Output tracking SV PV

MV PID D012308E.ai

Figure Output Pushback and Output Tracking When Cascade Is Open

1.

When cascade connection is open, the output tracking function causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track data of the output destination.

2.

When cascade connection is closed, the output pushback function performs range conversion to the manipulated output value (MV) and sets the result as the setpoint value (SV).

3.

The output value tracking function of the upstream block causes the output value of the upstream function block to track the setpoint value (SV).

In this control loop, when cascade is closed the input value from the upstream function block will agree with the data value at the output destination of the Velocity limiter block. Therefore, output will not bump when cascade connection is closed.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-340

n Initialization Manual The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place when the initialization manual condition is established.

l Characteristics of the Initialization Manual The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function block to initialization manual (IMAN). Because the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track the value at the connected destination, even when the initialization manual (IMAN) mode is changed to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will override the manual (MAN) mode. In other words, any operation to change to the manual (MAN) mode becomes invalid. The block returns to the original mode as soon as the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block only change to that mode when the initialization condition vanishes.

l Initialization Manual Condition The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the initialization manual condition is established. The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes: AUT ↓

Initialization manual condition establishes

IMAN (AUT) ↓

Initialization manual condition vanishes

AUT The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation: • When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open). • When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF). • When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) and cascade connection is switched is off (i.e., the cascade connection is open). • When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a process output and a failure or output open alarm is detected in the process output.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-341

n MAN Fallback The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.

l Characteristics of the MAN Fallback The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state. Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even when the condition later vanishes.

l MAN Fallback Condition The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption. The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established and vanished: AUT→MAN IMAN (CAS)→IMAN (MAN) The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation: • When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF). • When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD). • When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is having an initial cold start. • When the block mode change interlock condition is established. • When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the I/O points connected to the I/O module has been changed via maintenance.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-342

n AUT Fallback The AUT fallback is an error processing function that switches the block mode from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is established, and switches the control action to the one that uses values set by the operator.

l Characteristics of the AUT Fallback Changes the block mode from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT) to continue control using values set by the operator. Once the AUT fallback condition establishes, the block mode remains automatic (AUT) even when the condition vanishes.

l AUT Fallback Condition The AUT fallback condition is used to change the block mode of the function block from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT) so that control can be continued using values set by the operator. When this condition is established, it indicates that abnormality has been detected in the cascade setpoint value for some reason. The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes: CAS→AUT IMAN (CAS)→IMAN (AUT) Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set whether or not to use the AUT fallback. • AUT Fallback: Select “Yes” or “No.” The default is “No.” The AUT fallback condition is established when the AUT fallback is set as “Yes” via the Function Block Detail Builder and the data status of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) has become invalid (BAD) or communication error (NCOM).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-343

n Computer Fail When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote cascade (RCAS) mode or remote output (ROUT) mode temporarily and switches to the computer backup mode.

l Characteristics of Computer Fail When the function block mode is remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT), the function block receives the setpoint value (SV) or manipulated output value (MV) from a supervisory system computer via control bus communication. When the computer fails, the block changes mode to the preset computer backup mode (MAN, AUT or CAS) which indicates that an abnormality has been detected in the supervisory computer. When the computer recovers, the block returns to the mode before the change. The following actions take place while the computer fail condition exists, the block mode change command from MAN, AUT or CAS to RCAS or ROUT is sent: 1.

When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT or PRD to RCAS or ROUT is sent while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer backup mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first. The transient state mode is a compound block mode consisting of the block mode before the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS, ROUT).

2.

Then the function block tests the computer condition in the first scan after the block mode change command and switches to the computer backup mode. The computer backup mode is a compound block mode consisting of the backup mode set via the Function Block Detail Builder (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS, ROUT).

3.

If the computer recovers while the function block is in the computer backup mode, the block mode changes to remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-344

l Computer Fail Condition The computer fail condition is a block-mode transition condition used to suspend actions in the remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT) mode and switches the mode to the computer backup mode. A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function blocks to define the remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT) mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has failed or recovered. The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table or other function blocks. Switching to a computer backup mode does not take effect if the backup switch (BSW) is on a block mode other than remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT). • When the backup switch BSW=ON, computer has failed • When the backup switch BSW=OFF, computer has recovered The following example shows when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the computer backup mode: RCAS ↓

Computer fails

AUT (RCAS) ↓

Computer recovers

RCAS An example when the manual (MAN) mode has been specified for the computer backup mode is shown as follows: AUT ↓

ROUT command

AUT (ROUT) Transient state mode ↓

After one scan period

MAN (ROUT)Computer backup mode (When BSW=ON)

l Setting Computer Backup Mode Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the computer backup mode for each function block. • Computer Backup Mode: Select “MAN,” “AUT” or “CAS” as the mode to be switched to when the computer becomes down. The default is “MAN.”

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-345

n Block Mode Change Interlock The block mode change interlock function stops the control computation processing of function blocks that are operating automatically, while disabling the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. This action takes place when the block mode change interlock condition is established.

l Characteristics of the Block Mode Change Interlock Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place: • The block mode changes to manual (MAN). • Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT, CAS, RCAS or ROUT mode) becomes invalid.

l Block Mode Change Interlock Condition The Block mode change interlock condition is established when the switch at the connected destination of the interlock switch input terminal (INT) is turned ON. This switch is manipulated in the process control sequence and the switch is turned on when the sequence judge that the loop can not run in Auto mode, or etc.,.

IM 33M01A30-40E

1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00



D1-346

n Deviation Alarm Check ▼ Deviation Alarm

The deviation alarm check in the VELLIM block is applicable to the deviation (DV) between the manipulated output value (MV) converted to a value in the setpoint (SV) range and the setpoint value (SV). When the absolute value of the deviation (DV) exceeds the absolute value of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL), either a positive direction deviation alarm (DV+) or a negative direction deviation alarm (DV-) is generated. When an alarm has occurred, if the deviation (DV) absolute value drops lower than the absolute value of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) minus the hysteresis value (HYS), the alarm is returned to normal state. There is no deviation check filter function in the VELLIM block deviation alarm check. The deviation (DV) that is subject to the deviation alarm check of the VELLIM block is expressed in the following format. DV=MVs-SV

MVS =

SSH–SSL MSH–MSL MVs SSH SSL MSH MSL

: : : : :

• (MV–MSL)+SSL

D012309E.ai

Manipulated output value (MV) after conversion to the SV range SV scale high limit SV scale low limit MV scale high limit MV scale low limit

When the deviation (DV) absolute value exceeds the absolute value of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) and the deviation is for the positive direction, a positive direction deviation alarm (DV+) occurs. If the deviation is for the minus direction, a negative direction deviation alarm (DV-) occurs. When an alarm has occurred, if the deviation (DV) absolute value drops lower than the absolute value of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) minus the hysteresis value (HYS), there is a recovery from the alarm. Further, when the same value as for the SV scale span (positive value) is set in the deviation alarm setpoint (DL), neither a positive direction nor negative direction deviation alarm occurs regardless of the deviation alarm check. DV +DL

HYS

Conditions causing an alarm DV>+DL DV